Design Series 12 5

1985-2006 Nemetschek N.A., Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. Nemetschek N.A., Inc.
, hereafter referred to as NNA, and its licensors retain all ownership rights to the MiniCAD VectorWorks computer program and all other computer programs as well as documentation offered by NNA. Use of NNA software is governed by the license agreement accompanying your original media. The source code for such software is a confidential trade secret of NNA. You may not attempt to decipher, decompile, develop or otherwise reverse engineer NNA software. Information necessary to achieve interoperability with this software may be furnished upon request.
PDFNet SDK is copyright PDFTron Systems, 2001-2006, and distributed by Nemetschek North America under license. All Rights Reserved. Times and Helvetica are trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries. ITC Zapf Dingbats is a registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation. Google Earth and SketchUp are registered trademarks of Google, Inc. The www.caddetails.com library contains architecture and landscape architecture symbols provided by CADdetails Ltd. The Objects-xFrog library contains plant images by Xfrog. The Knoll furniture library supplied with certain VectorWorks Design Series products is based on geometry supplied by the Knoll Furniture company. For more information on their products, see www.knoll.com The plant database was created using public domain data. NNA assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies, omissions, or errors in this data. Lightwright is a trademark of John McKernon. High End Systems' lighting symbols provided by, and used with the permission of, High End Systems, Inc. High End Systems is a registered servicemark of High End Systems, Inc. Rosco gobo textures and color information provided by and used with the permission of Rosco Laboratories, Inc. Rosco is a registered trademark of Rosco Laboratories, Inc. Apollo gobo textures provided by and used with the permission of Apollo Design Technology, Inc. Apollo is a registered trademark of Apollo Design Technology, Inc. GAM gobo textures and color information provided by and used with the permission of GAM the Great American Market, Inc. GAM is a registered trademark of GAM, Inc. LEE color information and gobo textures provided by and used with the permission of LEE Filters USA. Rosco, LEE, Apollo and GAM images are copyrighted. All rights reserved. Their resale, redistribution, or use in derivative works is prohibited. Special thanks to: Joshua Alemany (Rosco Laboratories, Inc.); Tim Grivas (High End Systems, Inc.); Joe Tawil
VectorWorks Design Series Users Guide

This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by NNA. NNA assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the express prior written permission of NNA. Existing artwork or images that you may desire to scan or copy may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of such artwork into your work may be a violation of the rights of the author or illustrator. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from such authors. MiniCAD, VectorWorks, and RenderWorks are registered trademarks of NNA. VectorScript, SmartCursor, and the Design and Drafting Toolkit are trademarks of NNA. The following are copyrights or trademarks of their respective companies or organizations: QuickDraw 3D, QuickTime, Quartz 2D, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. LightWorks and LightWorks Rendering are copyright LightWorks Design Ltd., 1990-2006. Adobe, Adobe PDF Library, and the Adobe logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
(Great American Market, Inc).; Melissa Irk (Apollo Design Technology, Inc.); Kirstin Vitali (LEE Filters USA). Thomas Register is a trademark of, and PartSpec is a registered trademark of Thomas Publishing Corp. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. The VectorWorks Design Series Users Guide was written and illustrated by Alexandra Duffy, Teresa Heaps, and Susan Collins. Cover design by Kathleen Ryland. Cover images courtesy of Romina Cannella of Della Chiara Arredamenti, Italy (office chairs); Jos Alberto Rodrguez, Costa Rica (commercial architecture); Matthew McFall, Australia (landscape design), and Bisset Adams for Vauxhall Motors, United Kingdom (interactive display). For Defense Agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights of Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 252.227-7013. For civilian agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. The contractor/manufacturer is Nemetschek N.A., Incorporated, 7150 Riverwood Drive, Columbia, MD, 21046, USA.
VectorWorks License Agreement

1. License Grant and Restrictions
1.1 Nemetschek North America (NNA) grants the buyer a non-exclusive license to use the software in the package according to the terms set forth below. The software is licensed, not sold. The software is owned by NNA and its suppliers. United States Copyright law and International Treaty provisions also protect the software. You may not copy the software except as provided in this agreement.Any copies that you are permitted to make pursuant to this agreement must contain the same copyright and other proprietary notices that appear on or in the software. By using all or any portion of the software, you accept all the terms and conditions of this agreement, except where it violates local law. Clauses deemed to violate law are void under this agreement, but all other clauses remain in effect. 1.2 The serial number issued with VectorWorks indicates the type of license that has been granted by NNA. If the serial number begins with a B, the Series B license is in effect. If the serial number begins with a C, the Series C license is in effect. If the serial number begins with any other character, the Series A license is in effect.
1.3 License Agreement (Series A)

This license is in effect for VectorWorks serial numbers that do not begin with the character B or C. This program has been purchased for a single, specific operating system per serial number. It is licensed for installation on one machine for each serial number. The Buyer May: (a) Install and operate this software on one computer at a time. (b) Make one backup copy of the software, provided that the backup copy is not installed or used, which is automatically subject to this agreement. (c) Modify unprotected VectorScript routines provided with this software. The Buyer May Not: (a) Make this software available to any person or entity other than employees who must use this software as specified above. (b) Modify or merge the software with another program, except for personal use as described above. (c) Reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the software except to the extent you may be expressly permitted to decompile under applicable law, it is
Registration and Updates

The VectorWorks Design Series disks are warranted subject to the conditions of the License Agreement for a period of six (6) months from the date of purchase by the end user. A completed Registration Card must be returned to NNA to officially register your copy of VectorWorks. Only registered users are entitled to technical support, the NNA newsletter, maintenance releases, and reduced cost upgrades. Defective master disks are replaced free of charge to the end user for six (6) months after purchase. Thereafter, master disks will be replaced for a nominal service fee set by NNA. NNA will make available from time to time upgrades to the purchased program for nominal charges. Such upgrades, along with the original master copy of the program, shall be considered one program, subject in its entirety to the License Agreement.
essential to do so in order to achieve operability of the software with another software program, and you have first requested NNA to provide the information necessary to achieve such operability and NNA has not made such information available. NNA has the right to impose reasonable conditions and to request a reasonable fee before providing such information. (d) Sub-license, sell, lend, rent, or lease any portion of the software without permission. The buyer may, after approval by NNA (or authorized VectorWorks distributor if not in the USA), permanently transfer all (but no portion thereof) of the software to another person or entity, who in turn is subject to this agreement. (e) Operate the software on more than one computer at a time.
(d) Sub-license, sell, lend, rent, or lease any portion of the software without permission. The buyer may, after approval by NNA (or authorized VectorWorks distributor if not in the USA), permanently transfer all (but no portion thereof) of the software to another person or entity, who in turn is subject to this agreement. (e) Operate the software on more than one computer at a time.
1.5 Educational Site License Agreement (Series C)

This license is in effect for VectorWorks serial numbers that begin with the character C and include one network-enabled hardware key (dongle) for all licenses. This program has been purchased for a specific educational site. A site is defined as a group of computers sharing a network, physically located within a five-mile (eight km) radius of each other, and owned by a single educational institution. The Buyer May: (a) Operate the software on as many machines as licenses owned at any given time. (b) Modify unprotected VectorScript routines provided with this software. The Buyer May Not: (a) Make this software available to any person or entity other than students and faculty of the licensed institution who must use this software as specified above. (b) Modify or merge the software with another program, except as described above. (c) Reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the software except to the extent you may be expressly permitted to decompile under applicable law, it is essential to do so in order to achieve operability of the software with another software program, and you have first requested NNA to provide the information necessary to achieve such operability and NNA has not made such information available. NNA has the right to impose reasonable conditions and to request a reasonable fee before providing such information. (d) Sub-license, sell, lend, rent, or lease any portion of the software without permission. The buyer may, after approval by NNA (or authorized VectorWorks distributor if not in the USA), permanently transfer all (but no portion thereof) of the software to another person or entity, who in turn is subject to this agreement.
1.4 License Agreement (Series B)

This license is in effect for VectorWorks serial numbers that begin with the character B and include a hardware key (dongle). The software may be installed on multiple machines, but only one copy may be in use at a time and that computer must have the NNA hardware key connected. The Buyer May: (a) Operate this software on one computer at a time. (b) Make one back-up copy of the software, provided that the backup copy is not installed or used, which is automatically subject to this agreement. (c) Modify unprotected VectorScript routines provided with this software. The Buyer May Not: (a) Make this software available to any person or entity other than employees who must use this software as specified above. (b) Modify or merge the software with another program, except for personal use as described above. (c) Reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the software except to the extent you may be expressly permitted to decompile under applicable law, it is essential to do so in order to achieve operability of the software with another software program, and you have first requested NNA to provide the information necessary to achieve such operability and NNA has not made such information available. NNA has the right to impose reasonable conditions and to request a reasonable fee before providing such information.
2. Upgrades
All upgrades or sequential versions of the program obtained under upgrade agreements or offered at a later date in consideration of this purchase will be considered one program under this license agreement. Under no circumstances will the providing of upgrades be considered as permission for this program to reside on more than one computer at any time, nor may the buyer sub-license, sell, lend, rent, or lease any portion of former versions of the software. Again, the license and the buyers right to use the software terminate automatically if the buyer violates any part of this agreement. In the event of termination of buyers right to use the software, all copies of the software must be destroyed or immediately returned to NNA.
5. Student and Educational Sales

Student and Education copies are sold under certain restrictions set at the time of sale. The user agrees to abide by the restrictions set forth for these versions.
6. Warranties and Disclaimer of Warranty

6.1 No Warranty: The software is provided as is without warranty or condition of any kind, either express or implied, including, without limitation, the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or durability and the warranty against infringement. NNA does not warrant that use of the software will be error-free or that use of the software will meet the Buyers needs. The Buyer represents that (a) it has the requisite expertise to evaluate the suitability of the software and that you have in fact undertaken your own investigation of the suitability of the software for your purposes; and (b) you have relied upon your own skill and judgment in selecting the Software for the your purposes in accordance with, and subject to, the provisions of this agreement. 6.2 Disclaimer: NNA DOES NOT MAKE ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABLITY, DURABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED. 6.3 Limitation of Liability: INDEPENDENT OF, SEVERABLE FROM AND TO BE ENFORCED INDEPENDENTLY OF ANY OTHER ENFORCEABLE OR UNENFORCEABLE PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, IN NO EVENT WILL THE NNAS AGGREGATE LIABILITY TO THE BUYER (INCLUDING LIABILITY TO PERSON OR PERSONS WHOSE CLAIM OR CLAIMS ARE BASED ON OR DERIVED FROM A RIGHT OR RIGHTS CLAIMED BY THE BUYER), WITH RESPECT TO ANY AND ALL CLAIMS AT ANY AND ALL TIMES ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR BREACH OF ANY DUTY) OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE CONSIDERATION PAID BY THE BUYER TO NNA UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL NNA BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF GOODWILL OR BUSINESS PROFITS, EVEN IF NNA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING
3. Notes
This software involves valuable proprietary rights of NNA and others. There is no transfer to the buyer of any title to, or ownership of, this software; nor is there transfer of any patent, copyright, trade secret, trade name, trademark, or other proprietary rights related to the software. The buyer may not violate these rights and must take appropriate steps to protect NNAs rights. NNA may at any time replace, modify, alter, improve, enhance, or change the software. The license and the buyers right to use the software terminate automatically if the buyer violates any part of this agreement. In the event of termination of buyers right to use the software, all copies of the software must be destroyed or immediately returned to NNA. This software includes technology from Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe and Adobe PDF Library are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
4. General
This license agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Maryland. This agreement constitutes the entire agreement and supersedes any prior agreement between NNA and the buyer. In case of differences between the license agreement in the manual and the license agreement in the software, the license agreement in the software applies. Any translation of this license agreement is done for local requirements and in the event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this license agreement shall govern.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN DAMAGES WILL APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW REGARDLESS OF THE SUCCESS OR EFFECTIVENESS OF OTHER REMEDIES.
7. Export Rules
You agree that the Software will not be shipped, transferred or exported into any country or used in any manner prohibited by the United States Export Administration Act or any other export laws, restrictions or regulations. In particular, but without limitation, the Software may not be exported or re-exported (a) into (or to a national or resident of) any U.S. embargoed countries (currently Cuba, Iran, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Sudan and Syria) or (b) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity List. By using the Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located in, under control of, or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list.
Version 12.5_082006
Table of Contents
Preface .......................................................................................................................................................vii
New Features......................................................................................................................................................... vii Learning VectorWorks .............................................................................................................................................x Technical Support .................................................................................................................................................. xii
1 Using Standards........................................................................................................................................1
Structuring the CAD File ..........................................................................................................................................1 The Setup Commands .............................................................................................................................................2 VectorWorks Architect and Landmark Classes......................................................................................................14 Mapping Classes and Layers.................................................................................................................................16 The Task Manager.................................................................................................................................................17 Machine Design Drawing Setup.............................................................................................................................20
2 Space Planning and Programming........................................................................................................23

Space Planning......................................................................................................................................................23 Programming Studies ............................................................................................................................................34
3 Creating Architectural Drawings............................................................................................................41

Creating Walls in Architect.....................................................................................................................................41 Adding Roof Accessories.......................................................................................................................................52 Framing..................................................................................................................................................................56 Inserting Ceiling Grid Objects ................................................................................................................................69
4 Creating Architectural Elements............................................................................................................71

Inserting Windows..................................................................................................................................................71 Inserting Doors.......................................................................................................................................................81 Creating a Window or Door Symbol.......................................................................................................................92 Inserting Stairs .......................................................................................................................................................92 Inserting Cabinets ................................................................................................................................................101 Using Style Classes .............................................................................................................................................107
ii
| Table of Contents
5 Adding MEP Information to the Design...............................................................................................111

Plumbing and Piping Objects...............................................................................................................................111 HVAC ...................................................................................................................................................................111 Electrical and Communication Circuiting .............................................................................................................112 Sizing Calculators ................................................................................................................................................117 Panel Scheduling and Diagramming....................................................................................................................121
6 Site Modeling.........................................................................................................................................125
Sitework Overview ...............................................................................................................................................125 Site Model Source Data .......................................................................................................................................125 Creating the Site Model .......................................................................................................................................131 Setting Site Model Properties ..............................................................................................................................137
7 Modifying the Site Model ......................................................................................................................141

Modifying the Site Model......................................................................................................................................141 Drawing Property Lines........................................................................................................................................167 Analyzing the Site Model .....................................................................................................................................171 Obtaining Site Model Data ...................................................................................................................................175
8 Planting and Irrigation Design .............................................................................................................181

Defining Plants.....................................................................................................................................................181 Adding Plants to the Design.................................................................................................................................193 Plant Graphics .....................................................................................................................................................200 Irrigation ...............................................................................................................................................................204
9 Lighting Positions and Labels .............................................................................................................209

Light Plot Structure ..............................................................................................................................................209 Adding Lighting Positions.....................................................................................................................................210 Lighting Position Properties .................................................................................................................................212 Setting Up Instrument Label Legends..................................................................................................................214
Table of Contents |
iii
10 Creating and Editing Instruments......................................................................................................221

Adding Lighting Instruments ................................................................................................................................221 Lighting Instrument Properties .............................................................................................................................224 Aligning Instruments ............................................................................................................................................226 Editing Instruments and Objects ..........................................................................................................................228 Using Circuit Tools...............................................................................................................................................236 Focusing Instruments...........................................................................................................................................238 Obtaining Photometric Data.................................................................................................................................240
11 Adding Accessories and Objects ......................................................................................................245

Adding Accessories .............................................................................................................................................245 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot...............................................................................................................247
12 Paperwork and Schedules..................................................................................................................255

Creating a Key to Instrumentation .......................................................................................................................255 Generating Paperwork .........................................................................................................................................256 Reviewing Generated Paperwork ........................................................................................................................263 Creating an Editable Worksheet ..........................................................................................................................264 Creating Hanging Cards ......................................................................................................................................266
13 Visualizing the Lighting Design .........................................................................................................269

Inserting Gobo Projections...................................................................................................................................269 Showing Gobo Projections...................................................................................................................................272 Managing Scenes ................................................................................................................................................274 Animating Scenes ................................................................................................................................................275
14 Drafting and Design Aids ...................................................................................................................277

Creating 3D Objects from 2D Objects..................................................................................................................277 Creating Multiple Views Using Viewports ............................................................................................................278 Spring Calculator .................................................................................................................................................280 Belt Length Calculator..........................................................................................................................................281 Chain Length Calculator ......................................................................................................................................282
iv
| Table of Contents Control Values for Keys .......................................................................................................................................284 Shaft Analysis ......................................................................................................................................................286 Centroid ...............................................................................................................................................................287 Conversion Factors..............................................................................................................................................288 Solution of Triangles ............................................................................................................................................288 3D Properties .......................................................................................................................................................289 Simple Beam........................................................................................................................................................291 Simple Beam Analysis .........................................................................................................................................295 Simple Beam Calculator ......................................................................................................................................296 Cam Design .........................................................................................................................................................298 Geneva Mechanism .............................................................................................................................................304
15 Drawing Notation.................................................................................................................................307
Error/Revision Management Using Redlines .......................................................................................................307 Creating Drawing Borders....................................................................................................................................313 Construction Documents......................................................................................................................................318 Using Notation Objects ........................................................................................................................................326 Using Notation Bubbles .......................................................................................................................................332 Creating a Bill of Materials ...................................................................................................................................337 Creating a Parts List ............................................................................................................................................338 Dimensioning and Tolerancing ............................................................................................................................338
16 Managing Project Information............................................................................................................345

Records and Schedules.......................................................................................................................................345 ID Label Tool........................................................................................................................................................355 Working with Project Preference Sets .................................................................................................................360 Notes Management..............................................................................................................................................362 The Issue Manager ..............................................................................................................................................385 Batch Printing.......................................................................................................................................................389
Table of Contents |
17 Managing Drawing Graphics..............................................................................................................393

Navigating Within Drawings .................................................................................................................................393 Creating Drawing Views.......................................................................................................................................397 Displaying 3D Objects..........................................................................................................................................414 Adding Fills to Drawings ......................................................................................................................................414 Drawing Enhancements.......................................................................................................................................419
18 Importing and Exporting Files ...........................................................................................................443

PDF Import and Export ........................................................................................................................................443 Importing a SketchUp File....................................................................................................................................449 Importing and Exporting 3ds Format....................................................................................................................452 Exporting in KML Format .....................................................................................................................................457 Importing a Shapefile ...........................................................................................................................................458 Exporting in Shapefile Format..............................................................................................................................459 Exporting for DOE-2 Requirements .....................................................................................................................461 Spotlight Export and Import .................................................................................................................................463 Importing PartSpec Files......................................................................................................................................471
A Advanced Topics ..................................................................................................................................475

Creating Custom ID Label Symbols.....................................................................................................................475 Notes Manager Database Format........................................................................................................................481 Migrating from Previous Versions ........................................................................................................................482 Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols...................................................................................484 Creating Custom Path Objects ............................................................................................................................488 Plant Symbol Specifications.................................................................................................................................491 Assigning Plant Record Information.....................................................................................................................494 Plant ID Codes.....................................................................................................................................................494 Instrument and Accessory Specifications ............................................................................................................495 Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors.........................................................................................................499 Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects.....................................................................................................500 Adding User-defined Information to Commands..................................................................................................502
vi
| Table of Contents
B Resources .............................................................................................................................................507
Object Libraries....................................................................................................................................................507 VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources ..................................................................................................513 Reserved Names .................................................................................................................................................514 Keyboard Shortcuts .............................................................................................................................................515 Menus and Tool Sets ...........................................................................................................................................515
C Standards ..............................................................................................................................................531
Layer, Class, and Viewport Standards.................................................................................................................531 Auto-classing Objects ..........................................................................................................................................535 Class Standards...................................................................................................................................................538 Project Preference Sets .......................................................................................................................................539 United Kingdom Standards ..................................................................................................................................540
D Drawing Techniques.............................................................................................................................543
Importing Manual Sketches .................................................................................................................................543 Special Wall Joins................................................................................................................................................544 VectorWorks Machine Design..............................................................................................................................545
Index .........................................................................................................................................................551
Preface
Welcome to the VectorWorks Design Series, a complete design and production management system for architects, landscape architects, lighting designers, and mechanical engineers. The VectorWorks Design Series includes the following VectorWorks products: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design, and Designer.
New Features
Product: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Machine Design
This release includes many new features and significant enhancements to VectorWorks Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design, and the standard workspaces, as described in the following sections. The VectorWorks help system reflects the most up-to-date information; it may, therefore, be more current than the printed manuals. The help system also provides additional content, such as tutorials. The following table contains a list of new and improved features for this release, and indicates the section where the functionality is documented and the product to which the feature applies.
Feature
Wall Styles pull-down menu for Wall tool and Round Wall tool Change to soffit settings Window and door Object Info palette parameters Window and door improvements
Purpose
New Mode bar pull-down menu allows the active wall style to be changed more quickly Rake Thickness was removed from the Edit Soffit Settings dialog box The majority of window and door parameters now display in the Object Info palette for easier editing Shutters have more styles and parameter options; the custom sash preview image is more detailed; sash measurements are accurate with respect to mullion width; custom sashes can now optionally include muntins and have a mullion setting separate from the transom mullion; window and door transoms can now be selected as a part from the Parts tab in the Door and Window Settings dialog box, where transom-related parameters can be specified; several new data fields are available on the Data tab of the Door and Window Settings dialog box and their display order can be changed; a variety of casement and sliding doors can now be created Allows solar animation movies to be saved to a user-specified location
Location
Creating Walls in Architect on page 41 Inserting a Soffit on page 54 Not applicable
Product
Architect
Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark
Inserting Windows on page 71 and Inserting Doors on page 81
Solar animation movie location
Creating Solar Animations on page 173
Architect, Landmark
viii
| Preface
Purpose
Create plant masses easily with a new plant rendering option; several plant masses are now available as default resources and display as unfilled symbols with a cross tick mark A new pull-down menu allows the active plant to be selected by its ID Consolidates field selection and attributes assignment in the Label Legend Manager; non-rotating label legends can now be created Lighting instruments saved as red symbols now pick up the active label legend at the time of placement The Ganging tool now allows the placement of n-fers Allows title blocks that have a Project tab, such as the US Arch title blocks, to have the same Project tab information applied to all title blocks in the file Symbols from the current file are now available for selection as the repetitive unit symbol New control point can be used to adjust the elevation value New Create Bill of Materials and Create Parts List commands facilitate the creation of bill of materials and parts list worksheets Restores window and door data editing capability from within the ID Label tool Double-clicking a Navigation palette tab displays the Organization Dialog box details view for that tab
Feature
Mass overlapping plants
Location
Creating Plant Definitions on page 181 and VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513; Placing Single or Multiple Plants on page 193 Setting Up Instrument Label Legends on page 214 Creating and Inserting Lighting Resources on page 223 Ganging Instruments on page 237 Drawing Border Properties on page 313
Product
Landmark
Plant pull-down menu in Mode bar Label Legend Manager improvements
Landmark Spotlight
Lighting instrument improvements Ganging tool change Drawing Border improvements
Spotlight
Spotlight Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Machine Design
Repetitive Unit tool improvements Elevation benchmark control point New Machine Design commands simplify worksheet placement Window and door data editing Navigation palette shortcut
Creating Repetitive Unit Details on page 321 Elevation Benchmark on page 330 Creating a Bill of Materials on page 337 and Creating a Parts List on page 338 ID Label Tool on page 355 Navigating Within Drawings on page 393
Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design
Cast shadows from removed objects in section viewports
Portions of the model that have not been included in a section viewport have the ability to cast shadows
Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400
New Features | Feature

Section viewport enhancements
ix
Purpose
Allows the creation of section viewports from orphan section lines
Location
Creating Section Viewports from Unlinked Section Lines on page 411
Product
Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design
Scaling objects during 3ds import/export
A new button allows entry of either specific dimensions or a global scaling factor for all imported/exported objects A PDF file can be imported as separate pages into VectorWorks
Importing and Exporting 3ds Format on page 452
New Import PDF command
Importing PDF Files on page 443
Export PDF and Export PDF (Batch) command
VectorWorks users on both Windows and Macintosh can now create high-quality PDF files from their drawings. VectorWorks files can be exported as a single PDF file or batch exported to PDF. The Batch Print dialog box, which is similar to the Batch Export dialog box, has been upgraded.
Exporting PDF Files on page 444 and Batch Printing on page 389
SketchUp import improvement
A new option allows no geometry mapping to be specified, and the command has been added to Machine Design Exports VectorWorks 3D drawing components to KML, the markup language used by the Google Earth application Maintains the proper coordinates when importing projected shapefiles, determines or reasonably predicts the projected shapefiles units, imports shapefiles when supporting .dbf or .shx file(s) are missing, supports the .dbf memo field, and improves round trip support for shapefile polylines, polygons, rings, and holes
Importing a SketchUp File on page 449
Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect
New Export KML command
Exporting in KML Format on page 457
Shapefile import improvements
Importing a Shapefile on page 458
Landmark
| Preface
Purpose
Adds 30 new 3D vehicles to the Entourage vehicles library and adds a custom window shutters default library Adds Imperial Kohler kitchen and bath product lines and adds Marvin door and window product lines Adds stipple patterns to the Hatches_Paving Patterns library xFrog libraries were renamed to be more intuitive and the IP Conifer, IP Deciduous, and IP Shrub library content is grouped alphabetically, rather than numerically, to more easily locate content Adds new ESP symbol object library New standards are available for use with the existing Setup commands Adds the Pressure Angle, Outside Dia. (Ref.), and Root Dia. (Ref.) parameters
Feature
New object libraries
Location
Object Libraries on page 507
Product
Architect, Landmark
New object libraries
Object Libraries on page 507 Object Libraries on page 507 Object Libraries on page 507
Architect
New object libraries Renamed object libraries
Landmark Landmark
Updated object library United Kingdom standards New spur gear and spur gear 3D parameters
Object Libraries on page 507 United Kingdom Standards on page 540 Available in the VectorWorks help system
Spotlight Architect Spotlight, Machine Design
Learning VectorWorks
There are a number of ways to learn how to use VectorWorks, including both printed and online users guides, tutorials, training CDs, and both online and classroom training.
Users Guides
This guide is the VectorWorks Design Series Users Guide, which describes the features in the VectorWorks Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design, and Designer products. It is designed for users who have purchased one or more Design Series products. The VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide is a comprehensive reference for all VectorWorks users describing the core tools, commands, and features in the VectorWorks Fundamentals product. The guide also describes the presentation capabilities of RenderWorks, for users who purchased RenderWorks. The VectorWorks help system reflects the most up-to-date information; it may, therefore, be more current than the printed guides. The following table describes the conventions used in the guides. All instructions in the guides are based on click-click drawing.
Learning VectorWorks | Convention

(Macintosh) (Windows) bold text blue indented text click double-click right click Shift-click click-click click-drag Control-letter key select
xi
Meaning
Macintosh-specific instruction Windows-specific instruction Indicates a specific button, command, class, or explicitly named item Indicates a note, tip, or warning Click the mouse button and release. Left button always implied in Windows. Click two times quickly on the mouse button and release Click with the right mouse button and release; on the Macintosh, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the mouse Hold down the Shift key and click Click the mouse button once and release. Move the cursor to the desired location and click again. This is the default drawing preference for VectorWorks at installation. Click once with the mouse button and do not release. Drag (move) the cursor to a desired location and then release. Hold down the Ctrl key and press the specified key Click-drag over an object using a lasso or rectangle marquee selection tool, or click on an object with the mouse pointer to highlight it. Handles display on the object to indicate that it is currently active. Also refers to executing menu commands.
VectorWorks Help System

The VectorWorks help system includes the following volumes: Welcome to VectorWorks: Instructions for using the help system within the VectorWorks program VectorWorks Fundamentals: Context-sensitive online version of the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Design Series: Context-sensitive online version of the VectorWorks Design Series Users Guide VectorScript Guide: Description of the VectorScript language, which can be used to automate routine tasks VectorScript Reference: Comprehensive listing of procedures and functions in the VectorScript language Tutorials: Examples using tools and commands in the VectorWorks Fundamentals and Design Series products
To access the Help system, select Help > VectorWorks Help from within the VectorWorks program. In the help system Table of Contents, open the Welcome book for complete instructions on how to use the system. The help system allows quick access to comprehensive reference information about VectorWorks. Program commands and tools are linked to the appropriate help topic, providing instant information. The help system also offers links to related topics, allows full text searches, and contains an index and table of contents to topics across all products. In some cases, additional content, such as tutorials or object parameter documentation, is provided exclusively in the help system. The VectorWorks help system on Safari may not display the Favorites tab, and the Back button may be disabled, due to Safari limitations.
xii
| Preface
Training
Visit www.nemetschek.net for details about the following training options: Training CDs Guided online training Onsite training Classroom training
Other Resources
Visit www.nemetschek.net for details about the following additional resources: Documentation updates Independent local user groups LISTSERV user lists
Technical Support
Technical support is available for registered VectorWorks users in several ways. International users should contact their local reseller for details concerning technical support (see www.nemetschek.net for reseller information). United States users can contact Technical Support using the following methods: Call 410.290.5114 Send a fax to 410.290.8050 Send an e-mail to [email protected] Visit the technical support message board at http://techboard.nemetschek.net Visit the technical support knowledge base at http://kbase.nemetschek.net E-mail VectorScript-specific problems to [email protected]
When contacting Technical Support, prepare a brief description of the problem that includes specific details about what actions were taken prior to the problems occurrence. The more information you can give your support representative, the easier it will be to solve your problem quickly. When contacting Technical Support by phone, please have access to your computer and be ready to tell the representative: VectorWorks version number VectorWorks registration number Operating system Type of computer being used Amount of RAM installed in the computer List of any recent changes to the computers setup (such as new fonts, software, or hardware)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a problem prior to calling Technical Support will also aid in a speedy resolution. Basic troubleshooting tips include: Test to see if the problem occurs in a new, blank file Test to see if the problem occurs system wide (especially print and font problems) Copy and paste part of the document to a new file to see if the problem persists Run the computer in Safe Mode (Windows) to see if there is a system conflict Check the technical support message board to see if the problem has already been reported or resolved (http://techboard.nemetschek.net)
Using Standards
Structuring the CAD File
Product: Architect and Landmark
The Setup commands automatically create the necessary structure for a complete drawing based on either Architect/ Landmark standards or custom file setup requirements. Versions of VectorWorks Architect and Landmark prior to 11 relied on layers, classes, and views (called sheets) to create the necessary file structure. Since version 11, the standards are centered around the concept of design layers (for drawing and design), classes, and viewports on sheet layers (for final drawing presentation and printing). The Setup commands automatically provide the necessary visibility settings, as well as design layer, sheet layer, class, and viewport structure, for creating a complete file based on standards. See Organizing the Drawing on page 67 and Presenting Drawings with Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. The Setup commands create the file structure necessary to fit the project; a small project (such as a residential garden) requires a smaller set of layers and classes than a larger, more complex project. United Kingdom drawing standards are available for use with the Setup commands. See United Kingdom Standards on page 540 for more information on using UK standards.
Layers, Classes, and Viewports

The VectorWorks Architect and Landmark standards take advantage of layer and class characteristics.
Class Characteristics
Drawing objects are assigned to classes; a class is an attribute of an object. Classes apply to the entire file and control the visibility of objects. Classes can be set to be visible, invisible, or grayed when they are inactive. Complex objects, such as symbols or plug-in objects, may contain more than one class; different parts of the object can be hidden or shown. Classes can also be used to assign graphical attributes and textures to objects. Many plug-in objects that are included with VectorWorks Architect and Landmark are set with pre-assigned classes. The appropriate classes are created by the Setup commands and by certain other commands (see VectorWorks Architect and Landmark Classes on page 14). The use of auto-classing is determined with the Standard Naming setup command. For more information, see Creating Classes and Layers from Standards on page 69 and Managing Classes on page 80 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Layer and Viewport Characteristics

A VectorWorks layer is a named container that holds items. VectorWorks uses two types of layers: design layers and sheet layers. Design layers are used for drawing and modeling the elements of a project. Sheet layers are created for the presentation of a finalized drawing, and can contain viewports, title blocks, notes, and other annotations. A viewport, located on a sheet layer, is a particular combination of visible, grayed, and/or hidden design layers and classes. Layers have certain characteristics that are used when drawing and structuring files: Design layers can automatically set default Z-values for objects they contain. They create natural structural divisions within a drawing for objects on different floors or different vertical locations within a floor. Design layers can be visible, invisible, or grayed. Sheet layers are always set to Active Only.
| Chapter 1: Using Standards

Design layers, as well as viewports, can be displayed at different drawing scales, for the display of all aspects of a drawing plan from the site model to details. Design layers, as well as viewports, can have different 3D views. A building can be viewed in Plan view in one viewport and in an elevation or perspective view in another. Layers can be contained in different files and shared using workgroup referencing.
Drawings set up with the Setup commands contain both design layers and sheet layers with viewports. A project file contains, at a minimum, design layers for every level, as well as a number of viewports on sheet layers.
The Setup Commands

The Setup commands create a file that adheres to predefined VectorWorks Architect/Landmark standards, or alternatively, to user-defined standards. Running these commands in a project file ensures that the desired structure is in place. Each command can be run in either a new or existing file; the Model Setup command must be run prior to using the Create Standard Viewports command. When a file is set up with the Model Setup and the Create Standard Viewports commands, the appropriate classes and layers are created automatically. The number and types of layers and classes created depend on the setup selections. Design layers are created by the Model Setup command and begin with Mod- (model layers, since this is where the model is designed). The Create Standard Viewports command creates the appropriate viewports and sheet layers for the viewports (beginning with Sheet-), along with the appropriate classes if they are not already in the file. The Standard Naming command establishes or changes the naming conventions used for these classes, design layers, sheet layers, and viewports or saved views. When using VectorWorks Landmark standards, landscape site plans are composed of shared model information on four layers: Mod-Site-Arch contains any buildings or other improvements Mod-Site-Civil contains topographic and survey information Mod-Site-DTMData contains the DTM output Mod-Site-Landscape contains tree and planting data In order to use the Task Manager, the file must be set up with the Model Setup and/or Create Standard Viewports commands. See The Task Manager on page 17 for more information. Run the Setup commands in a new, blank file, and then save as a template for future use. If an existing file already contains a set of custom standards (included as a series of worksheets), the Import LayerMap.G dialog box opens when selecting one of the Setup commands. Select whether to use the custom or standard setup. See Using the Layermap Worksheet on page 531 for more information.
Document Setup
Use the Document Setup command to set up a files basic characteristics (units, scale, drawing area, and grid) as well as define the drawing border and title block settings. To set up a drawing with the Document Setup command: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Setup.
The Setup Commands |
2. The Document Setup dialog box opens. Set the parameters for the drawing. See Setting Up the Drawing on page 35 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on units, scale, drawing grids, and print area.
Parameter
Units, Scale and Grids Drawing Units Layer Scale
Description
Click Change to open the Units dialog box; specify the global unit settings for the project Click Change to open the Layer Scale dialog box. Specify the default layer scale for the project. This scale will be used for all floor design layers (Mod-Floor-#) and associated design layers such as Mod-Slab. Click Change to open the Page Setup dialog box; specify the drawings printable area Click Change to open the Set Grid dialog box; specify the reference and snap grids If not created during setup, drawing borders and title blocks can be added manually with the Drawing Border tool (see Creating Drawing Borders on page 313) Select the drawing border to automatically include as the drawing is set up, or leave the default selection of None to create no drawing border Select the title block from either the default resources or the current files resources to automatically include as the drawing is set up (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513), or leave the default selection of None to create no title block
Drawing Area Drawing Grids Drawing Border/Title Block
Drawing Border Title Block
Use Border Settings As preferences To create a border now Saves the drawing border and title block selections and applies them to the sheet layers when the Create Standard Viewports command is selected Places the specified drawing border and title block on the selected layer immediately

3. Click OK. To use the Issue Manager (see The Issue Manager on page 385), select one of the predefined drawing border styles. Select the Document Setup command again to re-adjust a drawing border if the paper size has changed.
Model Setup
The Model Setup command creates the appropriate number of floors or levels and their corresponding design layers (Mod-Floor, Mod-Foundation, and Mod-Roof layers), as well as setting the Z and delta Z of each model design layer. It is required for running the Create Standard Viewports command. For Landmark users, if there is no floorplan geometry in the drawing, click OK in both Model Setup dialog boxes to accept the default settings. To set up the model: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Model Setup. The Model Setup - Initialize dialog box opens if the drawing is new, contains unrecognized layer/class names, or was created with VectorWorks Architect 9s Setup Assistant. If the file was previously set up using the Model Setup command, the main Model Setup dialog box opens (go to step 3).
Parameter
This is an existing drawing This is a new document Number of floors Number of basements 2. Click OK.
Description
Select this option if this is an existing drawing. The Model Setup command searches the drawing for model layers and uses the attributes of those layers to set up the model. Select the option if this is a new drawing Enter how many floors are in the building Specify the number of basement(s) in the building (zero, one, or two)
The main Model Setup dialog box opens. 3. In the Model Setup dialog box, select a level from the Level Settings list, and then specify its parameters and click OK. The selected level is indicated in the graphic with a red bullet. A maximum of three floor levels are displayed. For buildings with more than three floors above ground, the middle floor indicator is highlighted for all intermediate floors.
Parameter
Level Settings Add/Remove (Normally, Architect only) No. of Levels Elevation (F) Ceiling Height AFF (C) Slab Thickness Default Wall Height Floor to floor Bottom of overhead slab Fixed at Options Create Slab Layers
Description
Click to add levels (floors) to or remove levels from the model setup; see Adding and Removing Levels on page 6 Displays the number of levels in the building, including the foundation and roof Enter the elevation of the selected floor; this sets the Z value for the design layer Enter the ceiling height of the selected floor Enter the slab thickness of the selected floor; this value sets the delta Z of the associated slab layer Sets the delta Z of the design layer Uses the height between the selected floor and the top of the slab of the floor above as the default wall height Uses the distance between the floor and the bottom of the slab above as the default wall height Fixes the wall height to a specific dimension regardless of the floor-to-floor elevation; this is useful for special cases such as split-level homes
Select this checkbox to create slab design layers

Parameter
Use zero for ground floor
Description
When selected, floor layer numbering begins with 0 instead of 1 (for example, Mod-Floor-1 and Mod-Floor-2 would instead be Mod-Floor-0 and Mod-Floor-1, respectively) Enter the prefix to append to layer names that represent basement levels; the default is B
Basement prefix
Create Slab Layers, Use Zero for Ground Floor, and Basement Prefix can only be specified for new setups. To set up a model for split-level homes, select the Fixed at option and enter a height greater than the distance to the next level.
Adding and Removing Levels

Product: Architect
Levels (floors) can be added to or removed from the model. To add or remove a level: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Model Setup. 2. In the main Model Setup dialog box, click Add/Remove. The Model Setup - Add/Remove Levels dialog box opens.
Parameter
Add a floor above the selected level Add a basement above the selected level Remove the selected level
Description
Click to add a floor above the selected level from the list. This option appears dimmed if the selected level cannot have a floor added above it. Click to add a basement above the selected level from the list. A maximum of two basements are permitted in a drawing. Click to delete the selected level from the list; all objects on the level are deleted. This button appears dimmed if the selected level cannot be deleted. Recalculates the elevation (Z value) of the remaining levels
Adjust elevations automatically
3. Click OK to return to the Model Setup dialog box. 4. Click OK accept changes and return to the drawing. An alert dialog box opens, recommending the re-running of the Create Standard Viewports command to apply model setup changes to the viewport setup.

5. Click OK.
When using the Model Setup command for the first time, floors are automatically numbered as they are added. When run again, the floors are not renumbered until after step 4.
Creating Standard Viewports

VectorWorks Architect and Landmark take advantage of the viewport functionality introduced in version 11. Viewports are created on sheet layers, and display a specific portion of a drawing with a combination of visible, grayed, and/or hidden design layers and classes. Viewports can be cropped, rotated, and annotated, and the sheet layer print settings saved. Several viewports can be included on one sheet layer. The Create Standard Viewports command creates standards-compliant viewports and their associated sheet layers, with the layer and class visibilities of a standard drawing. See Presenting Drawings with Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. If desired, views corresponding to the viewports can also be created. This allows easy navigation through the different drawing views (with set layer and class visibilities) during the design process. Viewports are created in five categories. The available viewport types are: Site Plan Drawings Project Plan Drawings Floor Plan Drawings Auxiliary Plan Drawings Notation Drawings The Model Setup command must be run prior to using this command. Select the Create Standard Viewports command again to make changes to the project settings at any time. The column on the right shows the current viewports when the command is run again.
Setting Standard Viewport Preferences

The default viewport scale and drawing border settings can be set prior to adding standard viewports to a project. To set viewport preferences: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Create Standard Viewports. The Create Standard Viewports dialog box opens. 2. Click Preferences. The Create Viewport Preferences dialog box opens. The preferences apply as viewports are added to the list for inclusion in the drawing.
3. Set the default scale for each type of viewport and select a drawing border and, if desired, title block to add automatically to each sheet layer. The scale settings affect only the viewport scale, not the layer scale of any model layers. See Creating Drawing Borders on page 313 for more information on drawing borders. 4. Click OK to return to the Create Standard Viewports dialog box.
Creating Viewports
To create standard viewports: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Create Standard Viewports. The Create Standard Viewports dialog box opens. Select a drawing category from the Type of Drawing list. The available drawing types display in the Drawing Types list on the left, with a short description beneath. Select the viewport to be created in the Drawing Types list and then click Add to move it to the Viewports to Be Created list on the right. For auxiliary view viewports (sections and elevations), types with a -Man suffix (such as Sections-Man) typically indicate that the elements of the section or elevation are to be drawn manually on, for instance, Mod-Section or Mod-Elevation layers, which are created along with the viewports. The visibility of all other layers is set to Invisible for these viewports. Types with a -VP suffix (such as Sections-VP) are for creating a view or a section viewport of the model from existing Mod- layers. No new layers are created and the visibility of all existing Modlayers is set to Visible for these viewports.
Parameter
Type of Drawing Drawing Types Description of Drawing Type Viewports to be Created Add Remove Remove All Preferences Drawing Options Create All Levels Level Use Drawing Border
Description
Lists the categories of viewport types Lists the available viewport types in the selected Type of Drawing category Provides a description of the Type of Drawing category Lists the viewports that will be created, along with the specified scale, drawing border and sheet layer parameters Adds the selected viewport types from the Drawing Types list to the Viewports to be Created list, including them in the drawing setup Removes the selected viewport from the Viewports to be Created list Removes all viewports from the Viewports to be Created list Specifies the scale and drawing border parameter preferences when adding viewports to the Viewports to be Created list
For Floor Plan drawings, creates the selected viewport for each level of the floor plan; deselect to specify an individual Level instead For Floor Plan, Auxiliary or Notation drawings, specify the individual level for creating the viewport Places the drawing border specified in Create Viewport Preferences on the sheet layer when the viewport is added to the drawing
10

Description
Select a viewport from the Drawing Types list to set its parameters before adding it to the Viewports to be Created list. Alternatively, select a viewport in the Viewports to be Created list to set or change its options. Select a sheet layer where the viewport will be placed. A default sheet layer name is provided, but a different sheet layer can be selected. Alternatively, a new sheet layer name can be created, by selecting New Sheet Layer and providing the sheet layer name. Sets the viewport scale, view, projection, perspective, and rendering as described in Creating a Viewport from a Design Layer on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide For each viewport in the Viewports to be Created list, creates a corresponding view with the same name. It is useful during the design process to navigate among the different project views, where the proper layer and class visibilities have already been set.
Parameter
Viewport Options
On Sheet Layer
Viewport parameters
Create Corresponding View for Each Viewport
2. Once the list of viewports is ready, click OK. Any sheet layers specified that do not already exist in the drawing are created along with the listed viewports (and views if the Create Corresponding View option was selected). In a new drawing, the viewports display with a red X, indicating that they are currently empty. As the drawing is developed on the design layers, the viewports will display the contents appropriately. Depending on the rendering mode specified, some viewports may require updating with the Update Selected Viewports command.
Standard Naming
The Standard Naming command controls the layer, class, and viewport names used in a project. These names can be changed to a user-defined system other than the default VWArch naming system. Standards can be mapped for office-wide use or to convert an existing file to the office standard. This command can also be used to assign specific attributes to classes in standards, and to change the names of layers, viewports/views and classes in the current standard. The command does not create new layers, classes, or viewports/views. If classes, layers, and viewports/views have not been set up according to VWArch standards, their names may not match the example layer and class names presented here. To set the standard naming of layers, classes, and views: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Standard Naming. The Standard Naming dialog box opens. Select a naming standard for the file, and choose whether auto-classing should be enabled for objects.
The Setup Commands | Parameter

Active Standard Details
11
Description
Select the naming standard to apply to classes, design layers, sheet layers, viewports, and saved views Opens the Standard Naming Details dialog box; to edit the names for a custom standard (User 1, User 2, and User 3), the standard must be selected as the Active Standard first Turns on Auto-classing for the file and automatically places auto-classing objects into pre-assigned classes; see Automatically Created Classes on page 14. If objects were already present in the drawing when auto-classing is enabled, choose whether existing objects should be auto-classed when exiting this dialog box.
Enable Auto-classing
2. Click Details to edit custom class, layer, and viewport/view names. The Standard Naming Details dialog box opens, displaying class names on the Classes tab. Select the Design Layers tab to display design layer names, and the Sheet Layers, VP, Saved Views tab to display the names for viewports and their associated sheet layers, or for saved views. Using the reference list, verify the mapping of standard names. Custom naming can be specified for custom active standards by entering a new name for each layer, class, or viewport/view. If desired, class attributes can also be specified for each standard or custom class name. See The Attributes Palette on page 205 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
12

Parameter
Reference Standard
Description
Select a reference naming standard from the list; the relevant class, layer, or viewport/view names are displayed below. Each active entry in the list is mapped to its corresponding reference list entry. User 1, User 2, and User 3 are custom standards. More custom standards can be defined (see Creating Additional Custom Standards on page 12).
Active Standard Reference Standard List Active Standard List Description of class/layer/ view Edit Class/Layer/View Name
Displays the overall naming standard currently in effect for the file (selected in the initial Standard Naming dialog box) Lists the reference standard names for the class, design layer, viewport/sheet layer, or saved view Lists the standard name currently in effect and mapped to the reference standard for the class, design layer, or viewport/sheet layer, or saved view Describes the currently selected class, layer, viewport/sheet layer, or saved view in the list When a custom active standard is selected (User 1, User 2 or User 3), enter the custom name for the currently selected class, layer, or viewport/view Sets the attributes of a selected class in the Active Standard list Select the line style class attributes Choose a pen color from the color box Select the line weight Select the line style Select the fill style class attributes Select the fill pattern Choose a fill foreground color from the color box Choose a fill background from the color box Applies the class attributes as the classed item is created
Class Attributes (Classes tab only)

Lines Pen Color Line Weight Line Style Fills Fill Pattern Fill Fore Color Fill Back Color Use at Creation
3. When the desired class attributes have been specified, and, for custom standards, the standard names have been established, click OK. 4. In the Standard Naming dialog box, click OK. If custom viewports exist in the drawing, you are prompted to run the Create Standard Viewports command again to update the viewports/views with the new naming standard, and update any new class attributes. If auto-classing was selected and objects had already been placed in the drawing, select whether to auto-class those existing objects.
Creating Additional Custom Standards

A custom naming standard can be created rather than using the VWArch or AIA/NCS standard. Although three layer, class, and viewport/view standards are available from within the Standard Naming dialog box (User 1, User 2 and User 3), up to ninety-nine can be created for layers, classes, and viewport/views by editing the ClassNameStds,

LayerNameStds, and ViewNameStds worksheets. See Using Worksheets on page 534 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To create a custom naming standard by worksheet: 1. In a new file, select File > Document Settings > Standard Naming. The Standard Naming dialog box opens. 2. Without making any changes, click OK. Three worksheets are created in the file, and are visible in the Resource Browser: ClassNameStds, LayerNameStds, and ViewNameStds. 3. Select one of the worksheets from the Resource Browser. From the Resources menu, select Open. The worksheet opens for editing.
13
ClassNameStds Worksheet
4. Highlight column D (User 1) and from the Worksheet menu select Insert > Columns. A new column is added in front of the selected one. New columns must be inserted after the AIA/NCS column (for metric drawings, the AEC(UK) Simplified column) and before the Description or Pen Color column. 5. Enter a name in cell D1 for the new standard. 6. Enter a new standard name for each cell below D1. Cells left blank in the ClassNameStds worksheet will be assigned to the None class. Cells left blank in the LayerNameStds worksheet will be assigned to the Layer-None layer. Blank cells are not permitted in the ViewNameStds worksheet; if a worksheet with blank viewport/view names is attempted for use in Standard Naming, an error message is displayed. 7. The new standard is displayed in the Standard Naming dialog box. To use these changes in other files, either save the file as a template to be used as the basis for new drawings, or import each worksheet into the other file before running the Standard Naming command.
Coarse and Fine Custom Standards

When creating custom standard naming, naming standards may contain fewer standard names (coarser) or additional standard names (finer). A coarser custom standard names two or more of the standard class, layer, or view names with the same user-defined name. Except for auto-classing, this is an irreversible process.
14
For example, the classes Area-Main, Area-Patterns, and Area-Spec can be combined into a single class called Areas. All objects assigned to the original three classes are reassigned to Areas. When custom standard naming changes are complete, additional information displays to confirm any actions to be taken, such as merging changed class names to eliminate duplicates. A finer standard maps a single class, layer, or view name to multiple names. Mapping is required to define the standard naming change, and the Standard Naming - Mapping dialog box opens automatically. For example, the A-FP# layer AIA standard corresponds to two VectorWorks Architect layer standards: Mod-Floor-# and Mod-Slab-#. If switching from the AIA standard to the VWArch standard, select the A-FP# layer from the list on the left and indicate the mapping for objects currently on the A-FP# layer by selecting the mapping layer on the right.
All objects assigned to the A-FP# layer are assigned to the Mod-Floor-# layer. Unmapped layers are not created.
VectorWorks Architect and Landmark Classes

Automatically Created Classes

Several classes are created automatically by features in VectorWorks Architect and Landmark, regardless of whether standards have been established with the Setup commands. See Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Several plug-in objects have an option to select one of 15 Style classes. If the selected Style class does not already exist in the file, Architect creates the class using the default settings. Edit the class settings in the Edit Class dialog box. NonPlot (Architect): This class is created as part of doors and windows. The loci that define the window and door edges are created in this class, which is normally set to Invisible so that the loci are hidden. Redlines (Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design): This class is created by the Redline tool. All redline objects are placed in this class, which allows all redlines in the file to be shown or hidden. This class is toggled to visible and invisible by the Show or Hide Redlines command. Guides (Architect and Landmark): This class is created and used by selecting Modify > Guides > Make Guide. The Wall Framer command (Architect) creates the following classes: Framer-Block, Framer-Sole Plate, Framer-Header, Framer-Stud, Framer-Sill, and Framer-Top Plate.
VectorWorks Architect and Landmark Classes |
15
Site-DTM-Modifier (Landmark): This class is created by the Pad, Texture Bed, Grader, and Control Fence objects. The Landscape Walls and Roadway objects include pad and control fence objects if the Use Site Modifiers checkbox is selected on the Object Info palette. This class is toggled to visible and invisible by the Show or Hide Site Modifiers command. Irrigation-SprayPat (Landmark): This class is created by using the Irrigation Head and Drip Emitter objects. This class is toggled to visible and invisible by the Show or Hide Spray Pattern command.
Object Auto-classing
Auto-classing is the automatic assignment of certain objects to a default class. Many plug-in objects in the libraries provided have been pre-assigned to the proper class according to the Architect/Landmark drawing standard (VWArch) (for a list of auto-classing objects, see Auto-classing Objects on page 535). If the Use Auto-classing checkbox is selected in Standard Naming (see Standard Naming on page 10), then these plug-in objects will be automatically placed in the designated class as they are added to the drawing. The objects class is created automatically if it does not yet exist. If a file has not been structured with the Setup commands, or the Use Auto-classing checkbox is not selected, the objects are placed in the active class. The objects, upon regeneration, are assigned to the proper class if the file is later set up. Any symbol, when created, can be set to default to a class from the Symbol Insertion Options dialog box. The default class of the object libraries must be reset when using a naming standard other than the Architect/ Landmark standard (VWArch). Save a backup version of the object libraries before editing them. To set the default class of all the symbols in a library file: 1. Select File > Open. The standard Open dialog box opens. 2. Select the Libraries folder, and then click Open. 3. Select the first object library file to convert, and then click Open. The selected file opens in the drawing window. 4. Select Tools > Utilities > Set Default Symbol Class. A warning dialog box opens. Click Yes to acknowledge converting all symbol definitions in the file to the new default class name. The Enter String dialog box opens. 5. Enter the default class name for the symbols, and then click OK. Ensure that the name is spelled correctly to match the desired custom class standard. This command can be undone if necessary. If the name matches an existing name in the file other than a class, an alert dialog box opens. 6. Select File > Save to save the changes. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each object library. Any time that symbols are used from this file, they will take on the specified class as their default class. The command does not distinguish between one symbol definition and another. All symbol definitions in the file will take on the new class name. For that reason, to use on custom libraries, run the command on a copy of the file.
16
Imperial and Metric Object Libraries

Several of the Design Series object libraries are available as Imperial and Metric dimensioned objects. See Object Libraries on page 507 for a complete list of object libraries.
Mapping Classes and Layers

The Class and Layer Mapping command maps any set of layers and/or classes in a drawing into a new layer and/or class. The file structure can be simplified, condensed, and/or renamed. Use this feature, for example, when a consultant is using .DWG or .DXF files. Complex, multi-classed files imported from .DWG can be condensed or renamed, and empty classes deleted in a single operation. Mapping can be saved so the next time a file is received from that consultant, the file can be re-mapped in a single step. This same procedure can be revised for the process of providing files to consultants using a different file structure or drawing standard. See Managing Layers on page 70 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide and Managing Classes on page 80 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To modify layers and classes: 1. Select Tools > Class and Layer Mapping. The Class Mapping dialog box opens. Modify the existing classes, and then click Go To Layers to open the Layer Mapping dialog box. The Layer Mapping dialog box is identical in layout to the Class Mapping dialog box.
Parameter
Existing Classes/Layers Proposed Classes/Layers Add >
Description
Lists the existing classes or layers in the file; layers or classes that are not moved to the Proposed or Merged list are deleted Lists the proposed layers or classes to be created in the file; layers or classes that remain in this list are deleted when the layers and classes are modified Adds a layer or class from the list of existing layers or classes to the Proposed list
The Task Manager | Parameter

Merge > < Remove New Rename Merged Items
17
Description
Adds a layer or class to the Merged list; layers or classes in this list will be merged with the layer or class that is selected in the Proposed list Removes the selected item from the Proposed list Creates a new class or layer in the Proposed list Renames the selected proposed layer or class Lists layers or classes to merge with the selected layer or class in the Proposed list. The merge occurs when the next action is performed in the dialog box, so that layers and classes are merged on an ongoing basis. Selecting a proposed layer or class lists its merged items again so that changes can be made, if desired. Removes the selected item from the Merged list Opens a previously saved mapping file Saves the layer or class mapping as a file; layer and class mapping settings are saved separately. This saves time when making the same modifications to several drawings that are set up similarly. Moves all proposed and merged items back to the Existing list Deletes all layers and classes that have no items associated with them Toggles between the Class Mapping and Layer Mapping dialog boxes
Remove Load Save
Reset All Delete empty class/layer in proposed drawing Go To Layers/Go To Classes
When selecting existing and proposed classes and layers, press and hold the Shift key to select multiple, contiguous items or press and hold the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) to select non-contiguous items. 2. Click OK. The drawing is updated, using the new layer and class mapping. Layers and classes not moved to the Proposed or Merged list are deleted from the file, along with any objects in those layers or classes.
The Task Manager

The Task Manager provides an easy way to draw in accordance with a standard file structure by automatically setting the appropriate layer and class options for particular drawing tasks. The Task Manager contains a database of over 430 drawing tasks defined in accordance with the Architect/Landmark standard, and allows tasks to be added.
Using The Task Manager

The Task Manager and its built-in database work only with files that have been set up with the Model Setup and Create Standard Viewports commands (see Model Setup on page 4 and Creating Standard Viewports on page 7). The Task Manager cannot be used on a blank file or a file set up using unrecognized standards. To use the Task Manager: 1. Select Tools > Task Manager.
18

The Choose Viewport/Saved View and Task dialog box opens. Select the viewport or saved view and the associated task to be performed.
Parameter
In Viewport/Saved View Do task Task Description Edit Existing/Create New Task 2. Click OK.
Description
Select the viewport or view where the task should be performed Select the associated task to perform from the list of tasks relevant to the viewport or view Displays a summary of the task selected in Do task Changes the current task or allows new tasks to be added for the current viewport or view; see Editing the Task Manager Database on page 18
The Task Manager switches to the active design layer and class for the selected viewport or saved view and task. It also adjusts visibility options for layers and classes as necessary.
Editing the Task Manager Database

To edit the Task Manager database: 1. Select Tools > Task Manager. The Choose Viewport/Saved View and Task dialog box opens. 2. Select a viewport or saved view, and select a task. Click Edit Existing/Create New Task. The Edit Task Settings dialog box opens. Only layers and classes available for the selected viewport or saved view display for selection.
The Task Manager |
19
Parameter
In Viewport/Saved View Name/Description Edit Existing Create new task Name Description Layer/Class Settings Active Layer Layer Options Active Class Class Options Apply Delete
Description
Select the viewport or saved view for the task to be edited, added, or deleted
Edits an existing task; select the task to edit Creates a new task for the specified viewport or view Edit the task name or enter the new task name Edit the task description or enter the new task description Specify the layer and class settings for the edited or new task Sets the active layer for the task Specifies the layer display options for the task Sets the active class for the task Specifies the class display options for the task Applies the edit to the task, or creates the new task. More tasks can be edited or created. Removes the current task from the Task Manager
3. Click OK to return to the Task Manager.
20
Machine Design Drawing Setup

Product: Machine Design
Use the Drawing Setup command at the beginning of a VectorWorks Machine Design project to quickly set the drawing units, layer scale and print area from a single dialog box. A drawing border and title block can also be inserted automatically. An alternate method of setting up a document is to open one of the pre-configured Machine Design template files and use it as a starting point. To set up a drawing with the Drawing Setup command: 1. Select File > New. The Create Document dialog box opens.
2. Select Create blank document, and then click OK. 3. Select File > Document Settings > Drawing Setup. The Drawing Setup dialog box opens.
4. Specify the drawing units, layer scale, print area, and drawing border, and then click OK. For more information on Drawing Units, Layer Scale, and the Print Area, see Setting Up the Drawing on page 35 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Machine Design Drawing Setup | Parameter

Drawing Units Layer Scale
21
Description
The current drawing units value on the General Display tab of the Units dialog box displays; click Change to revise the current drawing units The current layer scale displays; click Change to set a different layer scale. Note: If the active layer is a sheet layer, the layer scale cannot be changed.
Print Area Insert Drawing Border Insert Title Block Insert Revision Block Insert Tolerance Block
The current print area value displays; click Change to enter different print area parameters Automatically inserts a drawing border Select the title block to insert within the drawing border, or select None to leave out the title block; see Creating Drawing Borders on page 313 Select to insert a revision history block within the drawing border; for more information, see Creating Drawing Borders on page 313 Select to insert a tolerance specifications block within the drawing border (ASME title block required); for more information, see Editing a Tolerance Block on page 314 Select to insert a projection block containing either a first angle or third angle projection symbol within the drawing border (ASME title block required)
Insert Projection Block
The drawing setup parameters are saved with the file. Use the Object Info palette to make any changes to the drawing border once it has been placed in the drawing.
22
Space Planning and Programming

Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect contains features for performing space planning, programming studies, and schematic floor plans. This set of features can be combined in various ways depending on the required workflow: Begin the design process by drawing spaces, which can be repositioned and reshaped to develop a schematic floor plan. Create walls automatically from those spaces. Begin with a solid model, and then create exterior walls from the model. Create walls first, and then create space objects automatically to determine the areas enclosed by the walls. Import an adjacency matrix provided by the client, and automatically create a bubble diagram and stacking diagram. Reshape and reposition the space objects in the bubble diagram to create a floor plan, and then create walls automatically from the spaces. Create the initial schematic design with polylines instead of spaces, and convert the polylines to spaces.
Space Planning
Product: Architect
Space planning consists of creating and repositioning spaces to lay out a schematic floor plan. VectorWorks Architect can then automatically create walls from those spaces.
Creating Spaces
Product: Architect
Spaces are path objects with a room name tag; they are drawn in the same way as polylines. For naming rooms, space objects have several advantages over simple text labels. Space objects automatically calculate their area and volume. They also display the room name, room number, dimensions, square footage, occupants name, and occupancy type. Space objects can be drawn with the Space tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434 in the VectorWorks Design Series Users Guide and Creating Polylines on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). To create a space: 1. Click the Space tool from the Space Planning tool set. Click to begin drawing the space polyline, and then click to set each polyline vertex. Click on the start point to end the polyline and create the space. If this is the first time a space object is placed on the drawing, the Space Object Properties dialog box opens. Specify the default preferences, which apply to all space objects placed subsequently in this drawing. Space properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
24
| Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming
2. The polyline can be edited with the 2D Reshape tool to add, subtract, and change vertices. More sophisticated editing operations, such as adding, clipping, intersecting and combining into surfaces can be performed on the space object by selecting Modify > Edit Group. 3. Attributes, such as fill and line weight, can be assigned directly to space objects with the Attributes palette.
Room finishes can be assigned to the space objects with the Assign Room Finishes option on the Object Info palette (see Assigning a Room Finish on page 27). Finishes assigned to a space appear on the Room Finish Schedule and on the Room Finish Legend. The Room Name Simple tool is available from the Dims/Notes tool set; this tool is a text label only and does not include room finish information.
Space Properties
Product: Architect
The space object parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Config Space Name Space Number Length/Width Proposed Area Actual Area Occupant Name Department Text Alignment
Description
Select the room name and number format (ISO format is available) Indicates the space name; spaces in an adjacency matrix are listed by space name Specifies the space number Displays the dimensions of the space Specifies the desired area for the space Displays the actual space area Specifies the occupant name Specifies the department name or number; spaces in the stacking diagram are grouped by department number Select the text alignment within the space (Left, Center, or Right)
Space Planning | Parameter

Text Rotation
25
Description
Specify the number of degrees that text should be rotated, or leave the value set to zero for horizontal text (rotating text is useful for fitting text into areas such as vertical hallways) Indicates the number of decimals to use for the Actual Area, Perimeter and Volume parameters (maximum number of decimals is nine) Select to underline the Space Name Select to display the Space Number in a box Select to recalculate the space Length and Width values Select to display the space Length and Width Select to display the Proposed Area Select to display the Actual Area Select to display the room volume (this is useful for performing HVAC calculations based on the volume of air in each room). If the file uses Imperial units, the volume displays in cubic feet. For metric units, the volume displays in cubic meters. Select to display the Occupant Name Select to allow the fill to display behind the text; deselect to place a white fill behind the text box Select to display the space object polyline Select to extrude the space name polyline; by default, the extrusion height is the default design layer delta Z value, but this can be changed by entering a value in Height Specifies the extrusion height when Extrude in 3D is selected, defaults to layers delta Z on creation Displays the volume of the space for extruded space objects (actual area x height) Displays the space perimeter Select the font size for the Space Name Select the font size for the Space Number Select the font size for the space Length and Width Specifies the space object order in the adjacency matrix Includes the space object in the Room Finish Schedule Opens the Assign Room Finishes dialog box (see Room Finishes on page 26) Edits the space object path polyline. See Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Decimals Underline Name Show Number Box Calc Dims Show Dims Show Proposed Area Show Actual Area Show Volume
Show Occupant Name Fill Behind Text Show Poly Extrude in 3D
Height Volume Perimeter Name Text Size Number Text Size Dims Text Size Matrix Order On Schedule Assign Room Finishes Polyline Parameters
26
Room Finishes
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Room Finishes
Product: Architect
Up to 1500 user-defined room finish definitions are stored in a database called the Room Finish Library. The database is stored outside of the drawing file and is part of the project preference set (typically, VA Defaults). To create or edit a room finish: 1. Create a space as described in Creating Spaces on page 23. 2. In the Object Info palette, click Assign Room Finishes. The Assign Room Finishes dialog box opens. 3. Click Edit Finishes to add, modify, or delete the available room finishes. The Edit Room Finishes dialog box opens.
Parameter
Location Finishes New Edit Delete
Description
Select the location of the finish to be edited Lists all defined finish items for the selected Location; select a finish and click Edit or Delete Opens the Edit Finish dialog box for adding a new finish Opens the Edit Finish dialog box for editing an existing finish Deletes the selected finish from the finishes list
4. To add a finish, click New; to edit an existing finish, select it and click Edit. The Edit Finish dialog box opens.
Space Planning |
27
Parameter
Key Description
Description
Displays the ID that appears in the Room Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule Displays the specification text that appears in the Room Finish Legend
5. Enter information to add a new room finish, or edit the desired fields to change an existing room finish. 6. Click OK to add or edit the finish and return to the Edit Room Finishes dialog box. 7. When all editing is complete, click OK to close the Edit Room Finishes dialog box. 8. Click OK again to close the Assign Room Finishes dialog box.
Assigning a Room Finish

Product: Architect
Room finishes can be applied to space objects (see Creating Spaces on page 23). The information displays in the Room Finish Schedule and Room Finish Legend (see Records and Schedules on page 345). To assign finishes to a space object: 1. Click on an existing space object. 2. In the Object Info palette, click Assign Room Finishes. The Assign Room Finishes dialog box opens.
28
Parameter
Title Bar Ceiling North, East, South, and West Walls Base Floor Edit Finishes
Description
Displays the name of the current Preference Set Lists all defined finish items for ceilings Lists all defined finish items for each wall Lists all defined finish items for baseboards Lists all defined finish items for floors Opens the Edit Room Finishes dialog box (see Creating, Editing, and Deleting Room Finishes on page 26)
3. Select the desired finishes for each part of the room. 4. Click OK. The information is associated with the selected space object. 5. On the Object Info palette, click On Schedule to add the finish information to the Room Finish Schedule. 6. The Room Finish Schedule can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Architectural Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the Room Finish Schedule worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with information from the objects in the current drawing.
Creating Walls from Spaces

Product: Architect
Once the floor plan has been developed with multiple spaces, the interior and exterior walls can be automatically created.
Space Planning |
To create walls from spaces: 1. Ensure that space objects are present in the drawing. To automatically create walls with a 3D height, specify a delta-Z value for the design layer where the walls will be created. 2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Create Walls from Spaces. The Create Walls from Spaces dialog box opens. Specify the style of walls to create and their location.
29
Parameter
Create Walls from Selected Spaces Only Source Layer Destination Layer Place Exterior Walls Along Inside of Spaces Along Outside of Spaces Along Centerline of Spaces Exterior / Interior Wall Style
Description
Select to allow walls to be created from selected spaces; deselect to create walls from all the spaces in the source layer Specifies the layer containing the space objects Indicates the layer on which to create the walls Select how to align the exterior walls with the spaces Creates the exterior walls along the inside of the space polylines; select this option if the spaces represent the gross area Creates the exterior walls along the outsides of the space polylines; select this option if the spaces represent the net area Creates the exterior walls centered along the outside edges of the space polylines Select a wall style for the exterior and interior walls from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 Select to create straight vertical or horizontal walls out of spaces that are not perfectly vertical or horizontal
Constrain Straight Walls
30

Description
Indicates the threshold for constraining walls; walls that deviate from vertical or horizontal within the number of degrees specified are automatically straightened
Parameter
If they are within ___ degrees of vert/hor
Original spaces not drawn straight
Resulting walls constrained horizontally and vertically
Combine Colinear interior walls
Select to draw multiple, colinear interior walls as a single wall
The available wall styles are defined by wall style resources (see Using Wall Styles on page 42). 3. Click OK to create the walls on the destination layer.
Exterior and interior walls are applied automatically to the spaces. Round walls approximating the curves are used for Bzier and cubic spline vertices in the space objects. 4. After creating the walls, the original space objects can still be modified. To update the walls to conform to the new spaces, select the Create Walls from Spaces command again. This reshapes existing walls and adds new walls where necessary, but does not interrupt any wall design development that may already have been accomplished. For example, if windows and doors were inserted and configured, they will remain in place when the walls are regenerated.
Creating Spaces from Walls

Product: Architect
Another approach to creating floor plans is to start the design by creating walls, and then automatically create spaces to determine the area of each room and label the spaces. To create spaces from walls: 1. Create the walls and ensure that they are properly joined.
Space Planning |
31
2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Create Spaces from Walls. The Create Spaces from Walls dialog box opens. Specify the minimum area for creating spaces and their location.
Parameter
Create Spaces from Selected Walls Only Source Layer Destination Layer Minimum area Units
Description
Select to allow spaces to be created from selected walls; deselect to create spaces from all the walls in the source layer Specify the layer that contains the walls Indicates the layer on which to create the spaces Specify the threshold for creating a space; spaces will be created only for areas above this value Select square feet (S.F.) or square meters (S.M.) for the minimum area threshold
3. Click OK to create the spaces on the destination layer.
32

Spaces are created for all areas enclosed by walls. Default room name information is set and should be edited to complete the floor plan (see Space Properties on page 24).
After creating the spaces, the original walls can still be modified. To update the spaces to conform to the new walls, select the Create Spaces from Walls command again. The existing spaces are reshaped without losing any space parameters that have already been specified. If the original spaces were not drawn perfectly straight, select the Create Walls from Spaces command with the Constrain Straight Walls option. Now that the walls are straight, select the Create Spaces from Walls command to straighten the spaces.
Creating Spaces from Polylines

Product: Architect
During the initial stages of a design, it may be easier to work with polylines instead of spaces. Using the Modify > Add/Clip/Intersect Surface commands, polylines can be modified more easily than spaces to create the desired shapes. Once the polyline shapes have been finalized, they can be converted into spaces to take advantage of the area calculations and room name information that space objects provide. To convert polylines into spaces: 1. Select the polylines to convert into spaces. This command also converts rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, polygons, arcs, and circles into spaces. 2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Create Spaces from Polys. The selected items are converted into spaces.
Getting Floorplan Information from a Solid Model

Product: Architect
If a solid model has been used to develop a massing study, VectorWorks Architect can extract information from the model to begin work on the floorplans. Specifically, gross area polylines can be created automatically for each building level directly from the solid model with the Model to Floorplan command. A stacking diagram can display the sum of the areas of these polylines, making it easy to determine the amount of floor area provided by a solid model before creating the floorplans. In addition, exterior walls can be automatically created. If the model changes after the polylines and walls have been created, they can be updated by running the Model to Floorplan command again. The Model Setup command must be run prior to using the Model to Floorplan command. To create a floorplan from a model: 1. Select the model. The solid model should be a CSG solid (addition, subtraction, union), solid primitive (sphere, hemisphere, cone, cylinder), extrude, or multiple extrude. 2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Model to Floorplan. The Model to Floorplan dialog box opens. Specify the layers to include and set the type of floorplan elements to create.
Space Planning |
33
Parameter
Layer list
Description
Lists the layers with heights that intersect the solid. Select the design layer(s) to include in the floorplan, and deselect layers, such as sheet layers or site model layers, which should not be included in the floorplan. A selected layer displays with a check mark. For each selected layer, creates a polyline from the exterior perimeter of the model Creates a stacking diagram showing the available area on each layer (see Creating a Stacking Diagram on page 39) Creates walls based on the model perimeter Creates exterior walls based on the model perimeter, along the inside, outside, or center of the perimeter Specify a wall style to use for the exterior walls from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513
Create Gross Area Polylines Create Stacking Diagram Create walls Position Wall Style
3. Click OK to create the floorplan objects. If selected, polylines, walls, and a stacking diagram are placed on the drawing. To update the floorplan objects based on model changes, select the Model to Floorplan command again.
34
Programming Studies
Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect provides several tools for creating and managing space programming study information in both tabular and graphical formats, including an adjacency matrix, bubble diagram, and stacking diagram. In an adjacency matrix worksheet, information is used to automatically create the following items in the drawing: a bubble diagram, containing: space objects for each space in the matrix, with the appropriate area and department information, and space links connecting the spaces, with line weights indicating the strength of the relationship between the spaces an adjacency matrix diagram an adjacency score object, showing the total lengths of all the space links a stacking diagram
Adjacency matrix
Bubble diagram
Adjacency score
Stacking diagram
Programming Studies |
The space objects are square when first created, but can be reshaped with the 2D Reshape tool. The spaces can be repositioned to create clusters of related spaces.
35
Creating an Adjacency Matrix

Product: Architect
Adjacency matrices specify, in tabular format, the spaces and area requirements that must be incorporated into a design. In addition, the relationships among the various spaces are identified. Spaces which should be located next to each other are strongly related, while spaces which can or should be separated have a weak relationship. An adjacency matrix is typically developed in a spreadsheet program and imported into VectorWorks. An adjacency matrix can also be created in a VectorWorks worksheet, exported as a tab-delimited file, and then imported back into VectorWorks to create an adjacency matrix.
Creating an Adjacency Matrix Worksheet

Product: Architect
To create an adjacency matrix worksheet in VectorWorks: 1. From the Resource Browser Resources menu, select New Resource and then select Worksheet. See Creating Worksheets on page 531 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Create the adjacency matrix, using every other row for space names and areas, and alternate rows for specifying the relationships among the spaces.
Any third-party spreadsheet program that can save a tab- or comma-delimited text file can be used to create the adjacency matrix. Ensure that there is at least one cell containing data on each spreadsheet row. Certain spreadsheet programs do not export rows without data, which could disrupt the expected sequence of data in the file as it is imported into VectorWorks. 3. Click File > Export > Export Worksheet to export the worksheet as a tab- or comma-delimited file.
36
4. Click OK and specify the name and location of the file.
Importing an Adjacency Matrix Spreadsheet

Product: Architect
To import an adjacency matrix: 1. Ensure that the file to be imported is a tab- or comma-delimited file. 2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Import Adjacency Matrix. The Import Adjacency Matrix dialog box opens. Specify the adjacency matrix file import options.
Parameter
External Filename Header Rows
Description
Enter the name of the adjacency matrix file or click Browse to specify its location; a sample file is specified by default Specifies the number of rows in the spreadsheet that do not include space or space relationship information
Programming Studies | Parameter

Row Spacing Field Delimiter Column Numbers and Preview Department Space Area Relationships Preview
37
Description
Set this to 0 (zero) if there is a space name on every row or set this to 1 if there is a space name on every other row in the drawing file Specifies the delimiter that was used to separate fields for the spreadsheet Specifies the columns to include in the adjacency matrix as well as their position Select to include department number information and specify its column number Select to include area name information and specify its column number Select to include the space area information and specify its column number Select to include the space relationship information and specify its column number Displays the data in the selected columns
3. Click OK to import the adjacency matrix. If this is the first time an adjacency matrix, stacking diagram, spaces, or space links are placed in the file, the object properties dialog box opens for each type of object. Accept the default values and click OK.
Inserting an Adjacency Matrix

Product: Architect
An adjacency matrix diagram can also be created manually with the Adjacency Matrix tool, based on spaces and space relationships currently in the file. To insert an adjacency matrix diagram: 1. Click the Adjacency Matrix tool from the Space Planning tool set. 2. Click at the desired location for the adjacency matrix. 3. Click again to set the matrix rotation. If this is the first time an adjacency matrix diagram is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the default preferences, which apply to all adjacency matrix diagrams placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette. Click OK. The adjacency matrix is created.
If no space objects currently exist in the drawing, an adjacency matrix place holder is created.
38
Adjacency Matrix Properties

Product: Architect
The adjacency matrix is more than just a presentation graphic, because it dynamically shows what is in the drawing. The adjacency matrix updates automatically when spaces or space links change. The Rotation, Height Scale and Width Scale parameters of an adjacency matrix can be edited in the Object Info palette. To adjust the order of adjacency matrix spaces, change the Matrix Order number in the Object Info palette for the relevant space object (see Space Properties on page 24).
Creating a Bubble Diagram

Product: Architect
A bubble diagram is a graphical view of the data from a space planning spreadsheet. Spaces are connected by space links that represent the relationships among the spaces. Thick links indicate a strong relationship between the spaces, while weak relationships are drawn with thin lines. The efficiency of the bubble diagram layout can be determined by calculating its adjacency score. A bubble diagram is inserted into a drawing automatically when an adjacency matrix is imported (see Importing an Adjacency Matrix Spreadsheet on page 36). A bubble diagram can also be created manually by linking spaces with the Space Link tool.
Linking Spaces
Product: Architect
To link spaces: 1. Create spaces as described in Creating Spaces on page 23. 2. Click the Space Link tool from the Space Planning tool set. 3. Click on the first space to link, and then on the second space. The space link is automatically created.
Space Link Properties

Product: Architect
The space links update dynamically as the spaces are moved around in the drawing. To change the strength of a link, select it and change the Strength value (from 1 to 18) in the Object Info palette.
Programming Studies |
39
Calculating the Adjacency Score

Product: Architect
The adjacency score object displays a numerical value that represents the efficiency of the space layout. The score value is determined by first multiplying the link length times strength for each space link, and then calculating the sum of these values for all the space links in the file. The lower the score, the more efficient the layout. To insert an adjacency score object: 1. Click the Adjacency Score tool from the Space Planning tool set. 2. Click in the document to set the object location. 3. Click a second time to set the object rotation. If spaces or space link objects are deleted, the adjacency score object value is not automatically updated. Slightly move any space or adjacency score object in the document to reset the adjacency score object value.
Creating a Stacking Diagram

Product: Architect
A stacking diagram provides a floor-by-floor representation of the total amount of area taken up by all the spaces on the floors. It is useful for balancing the allocation of spaces among several floors. A stacking diagram is inserted into a drawing automatically when an adjacency matrix is imported (see Importing an Adjacency Matrix Spreadsheet on page 36). A stacking diagram can also be inserted manually with the Stacking Diagram tool. The stacking diagram is based on spaces and space relationships currently in the file.
Inserting a Stacking Diagram

Product: Architect
To insert a stacking diagram: 1. Click the Stacking Diagram tool from the Space Planning tool set. 2. Click at the desired location for the stacking diagram. Click again to set the diagram rotation. If this is the first time a stacking diagram is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the default preferences, which apply to all stacking diagrams placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette. Click OK. 3. The stacking diagram is created.
40

The layers are stacked on the basis of their layer Z values, which can be changed in the Organization dialog box (Tools > Organization). If no space objects currently exist in the drawing, a stacking diagram place holder is created.
Stacking Diagram Properties

Product: Architect
Like the adjacency matrix, the stacking diagram dynamically shows what is in the drawing. The stacking diagram updates automatically when spaces or space links are changed. In addition, fill attributes assigned to spaces are reflected in the stacking diagram automatically. The Rotation, Height Scale and Width Scale parameters of an adjacency matrix can be edited in the Object Info palette. In addition, the Gap Scale parameter controls the distance between the stacking diagram rows. Show Totals toggles the display of the total amount of space used. The stacking diagram is arranged in rows that correspond to the layers of the drawing. The spaces present in each layer are shown in separate rows; the layer name and total area used are displayed to the left of each row. Spaces in the stacking diagram are grouped by Department name (set for each space in the Object Info palette). Adjacent spaces with the same Department name are separated by thin lines.
Spaces and area allocated to Top Floor layer Spaces and area allocated to Bottom Floor layer Thinner lines separate spaces with the same department number
Creating Architectural Drawings
Once a VectorWorks Architect drawing file has been set up according to standards, and space planning and programming has established the floorplan, Architect tools are used to create the walls, roof, and framing elements. Some of the Architect tools and commands are similar to those available in the standard VectorWorks program, but with extended capabilities required for architectural design. Certain commands which display in the Model > AEC menu in VectorWorks are also located in the AEC menu in the VectorWorks Architect workspace, but they may have enhanced functionality in Architect.
VectorWorks
Model > AEC > Pillar Model > AEC > Floor Model > AEC > Roof Face Model > AEC > Create Roof Modify > Create Polys from Walls Modify > Create Walls from Polygon Wall tool and Round Wall tool located in the Walls tool set
VectorWorks Architect
AEC > Pillar AEC > Floor AEC > Roof Face AEC > Create Roof AEC > Create Polys from Walls AEC > Objects from Polyline, with extended capabilities in VectorWorks Architect Wall tool and Round Wall tool, located in the Building Shell tool set, with extended capabilities in VectorWorks Architect
Creating Walls in Architect

Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect uses the same straight and round wall tools that are part of VectorWorks Fundamentals, but with expanded capabilities. Additional wall parameters are available only in VectorWorks Architect. Architect also adds the ability to create, save, and use wall styles. See Creating Walls on page 441 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Walls in Architect can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To create walls in VectorWorks Architect: 1. Click the Wall or Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. To draw with an unstyled wall, select <Un-Styled> from the Wall Style mode bar list, or if the desired styled wall resource has already been created, select it from the Mode bar list or double-click on the resource in the Resource Browser. Proceed to Step 7. 3. To create or edit a wall style, or change the parameters of an un-styled wall, click the Wall Preferences mode button. The Wall Preferences dialog box opens. This dialog box can be accessed any time afterward to modify default wall settings. Walls can also be drawn first, and then the parameters can be set later from the Object Info palette. Most of the parameters in the Wall Preferences dialog box are documented in Creating Walls on page 441 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the parameters that apply to VectorWorks Architect are described here.
42
| Chapter 3: Creating Architectural Drawings
Parameter
Wall Style Save Preferences as Wall Style
Description
Select a wall style for the wall; see Using Wall Styles on page 42. Alternatively, select <Un-Styled> to create the wall without linking the parameters to a wall style. Opens the Assign Name dialog box; enter a wall style name and click OK (see Creating Wall Styles on page 43)
4. Click the Data Fields tab to specify wall record information, which can be included in a wall style schedule. These fields are optional; enter text only where desired. 5. When the wall parameters have been specified, and any changes saved as a wall style resource if desired, click OK. 6. A saved or selected wall style is saved as a resource in the file, and appears in the Resource Browser and the Wall Style list on the Mode bar. 7. Click at the desired location to start drawing. 8. Click to end the segment and begin another, or double-click to end the wall.
Using Wall Styles

Product: Architect
Un-styled walls can be used in Architect. The use of wall styles, however, facilitates drawing walls by saving the Wall Preferences settings so that they can be easily applied to other walls. Wall styles are resources that can be imported into other files and shared as office standards. Wall styles, textures, and hatches are provided as default resources (default resources are automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and display in the Resource Browser; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513).
Creating Walls in Architect |
43
If a selected wall styles parameters are edited, the wall style automatically changes to un-styled, indicating that the edited style must be saved as a new style to save changes (alternatively, the changes can be applied as an un-styled wall, and not get saved). The basic properties of a styled wall (such as wall height and caps) can be changed from the Object Info palette without requiring a new style definition. Unused wall styles can be purged; see Purging Unused Objects on page 343 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Creating Wall Styles

Product: Architect
To create a wall style: 1. Select the Wall or Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set, and then click Wall Preferences from the Mode bar. The Wall Preferences dialog box opens. 2. To modify an existing wall style, select the Wall Style from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. Alternatively, select Un-Styled as the wall style and set the parameters. 3. Specify the wall and component parameters as described in Creating Walls in Architect on page 41, and Drawing Straight Walls on page 442 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. Click Save Preferences as Wall Style. The Assign Name dialog box opens. 5. Enter a unique name for the wall style and click OK. If the wall style name already exists, you are prompted to cancel and select a different name, or replace existing walls with the wall style applied with the edited wall style. If replacing wall styles, the Wall Replacement dialog box opens; specify the wall alignment properties. 6. The new wall style is saved with the file and is listed under Wall Styles in the Resource Browser as well as the Wall Style list in the Mode bar. A new wall style can also be created by clicking New Resource > Wall Style from the Resources menu in the Resource Browser. A wall style created in this way is not associated with the current wall preference setting, but can be applied later. 7. Worksheets listing the current wall styles and wall areas in the drawing can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Architectural Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the Wall Area and/or Wall Style Report worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with information from the objects in the current drawing.
Editing Wall Styles

Product: Architect
To edit a wall style: 1. Select the wall style from the Resource Browser and click Edit from the Resources menu. The Edit Wall Style dialog box opens.
44
2. Edit the wall and component parameters as described in Creating Walls in Architect on page 41, and Drawing Straight Walls on page 442 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. If a new wall style Name is specified, it replaces the selected wall style name. 3. Click OK. 4. If walls with that style already exist in the drawing, the Wall Replacement dialog box opens (see Replacing Wall Styles on page 45). The wall style to apply cannot be selected (the edited style is applied). Select the wall alignment properties. 5. Click OK to edit the wall style. Changes apply to any existing walls in the drawing with the edited wall style, and will be used for any subsequent walls created with that wall style.
Applying Wall Styles

Product: Architect
By a variety of methods, wall styles can be selected for a wall before drawing it, or applied to existing walls. Once a wall style has been selected for a wall, the Attributes palette is no longer available for changing wall attributes; attributes are set as part of the style. To apply a wall style prior to drawing the wall: 1. Select the Wall or Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. Select the desired style from the Wall Style list on the Mode bar. Alternatively, click Wall Preferences from the Mode bar. In the Wall Preferences dialog box, select the Wall Style from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513.

To apply a wall style from the Resource Browser prior to drawing the wall: 1. Ensure that no walls are selected. 2. Select a wall style in the Resource Browser, and click Apply from the Resources menu. Alternatively, double-click on the wall style in the Resource Browser.
45
3. The Wall tool is automatically made active and the selected wall style is applied to the wall as it is drawn. (If a round wall is desired, select the Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set.) To apply a wall style to an existing wall from the Object Info palette: 1. Select one or more walls. 2. From the Object Info palette, select the wall Style from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. To apply a different (default) style, select Replace (see Replacing Wall Styles on page 45). To apply a wall style to an existing wall from the Resource Browser: 1. Select one or more walls. 2. Select the wall style from the Resource Browser and click Apply from the Resources menu. Alternatively, drag the selected wall style from the Resource browser to the wall and click on the wall selection. The Wall Replacement dialog box opens (see Replacing Wall Styles on page 45). 3. Select the wall alignment properties. The wall style list is disabled (the style selected in the Resource Browser is applied). A styled wall can be converted to an un-styled wall. To remove a wall style: 1. Select one or more walls to un-style. 2. From the Object Info palette, select Convert to Un-Styled Wall. The wall is released from its style; its attributes can be edited from the Attributes palette.
Replacing Wall Styles

Product: Architect
Wall styles applied to existing walls can be replaced with a different wall style. To replace a wall style: 1. Select one or more walls. 2. From the Object Info palette, select Replace from the Style list. The Wall Replacement dialog box opens. Specify the new wall style, and then select a component (or the wall) from the current and replacement structure lists. Specify the alignment option for each selection; the preview updates, with a red line showing the replacement alignment. For example, the left side of the current wall can be aligned with the center of the replacement wall.
46
Parameter
Wall style list Previews
Description
From the list, select the wall style that will replace the current style The left preview shows the current wall style, and the right preview shows the replacement wall style selected in the wall style list. Preview walls are drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by default, indicates the left part of the wall as it will be drawn. On the left, the current wall structure is listed; the right list displays the replacement wall structure. Select one wall component from each list and specify its alignment options. The previews update with red lines to show how the replacement wall will align with the current wall. Select an option for aligning the current structure to the replacement structure
Align lists
Alignment options
If walls with different wall styles were selected for replacement, the current wall preview is blank and components are not listed. Wall alignment can only occur for the left, center, or right of the selected wall(s). 3. Click OK to replace the wall style of the selected wall(s).
Moving Connected Walls in 2D

Product: Architect
The 2D Selection tools Enable Connected Walls mode automatically maintains the connection between the wall being moved and adjoining walls. The involved wall angles remain constrained throughout the move. While dragging a wall, precise offset distances can be entered in the Offset field of the Mode bar.
Enable Connected Walls Mode
To move a wall while maintaining its connection to adjacent walls: 1. Click the 2D Selection tool from the Basic palette. 2. Select Enable Connected Walls from the Mode bar.

3. Click on the desired wall and drag it to a new location; the walls stay connected during the move.
47
When moving a wall connected between two other walls, the wall being moved is resized to maintain the connection. A wall cannot be moved beyond the ends of adjacent walls.
For corner joined walls, all involved walls are resized to maintain the connection. A wall cannot be moved in such a way that its length equals zero.
To move a collection of walls without changing the walls relative to each other, deselect the Enable Connected Walls mode, and then move the walls.
Joining Wall Components

Product: Architect
The Component Join tool joins the selected components between two straight wall segments; components within pre-existing joined wall segments can also be joined. There are three modes for joining wall components.
L Join T Join Capped Join
Mode
T Join L Join Capped
Description
Extends or shortens one wall component segment until it intersects with a second wall component segment Joins the closest ends of two wall components to create a corner Applies a capped join to the component being joined
48
Components can be joined to the edge of walls instead of specific components if desired, using any of the modes. The Component Join tool cannot be used on Y joined walls.
T Join Mode
Product: Architect
The T Join mode extends or shortens one wall component segment until it intersects with a second wall component segment. As only the first component is extended, this mode will not create corner type joins. (For those, use the L join mode. See L Join Mode on page 48 for more information.) To join wall components with the T Join mode: 1. Click the Component Join tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. Click T Join from the mode bar. 3. Select the component within the wall segment to join. 4. Select the second wall segment to join. The component to be joined is highlighted.
1st click
2nd click
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each component within the wall segment that needs to be joined.
L Join Mode
Product: Architect
The L Join mode joins the closest ends of two wall components to create a corner. Both component lengths are extended or shortened, as necessary, until they meet cleanly. To join wall components with the L Join mode: 1. Click the Component Join tool from the Building Shell tool set.

2. Click L Join from the mode bar. 3. Select the component within the wall segment to join. 4. Select the second wall segment to join. The component to be joined is highlighted.
49
1st click
2nd click
Capped Join Mode

Product: Architect
Like the T Join mode, the Capped Join mode extends or shortens one wall component until it intersects with a second component. The component end is capped at the point where it joins the other wall. To join wall components with the Capped Join mode: 1. Click the Component Join tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. Click Capped Join from the mode bar. 3. Select the component within the wall segment to join. 4. Select the second wall segment to join. The component to be joined is highlighted.
1st click 2nd click
50
Hiding Wall Components

Product: Architect
The Hide wall components preference prevents wall components from being drawn at or below a pre-set layer scale factor, creating a cleaner drawing when printing at small scales. For example, if the scale factor is set to 1:48, components in walls do not display on any layer set to 1/4 or smaller. To hide wall components: 1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. The Document Preferences dialog box opens.
2. Select Hide wall components. Enter a scale factor in the scale field. 3. Click OK.
Wall components shown at 1:2 scale
Wall components hidden at 1:48 scale
51
Fitting Walls to Defined Geometry

Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect walls can be set to the layer height at creation. After creation, they can be automatically extended upward or downward to fit to defining geometry such as roofs, floors, or NURBS surfaces. To fit walls to defined geometry: 1. Select the straight or curved wall(s) to be fit.
Roof moved to show walls before being fit to roof
2. Select AEC > Fit Walls to Roof. The Fit Selected Walls to 3D Geometry dialog box opens. Specify the location of the wall geometry and indicate the fit parameters.
Parameter
Constrain Tops of walls to 3D geometry Fit to geometry on
Description
Fits walls to geometry at the top of the wall(s) Specifies the layer of the defining geometry for the tops of the wall(s); this geometry can consist of roofs, floors, slabs, 3D polygons, extrusions, or NURBS surfaces
52

Parameter
Wall top embedding depth
Description
Specifies the distance that the wall penetrates the geometry. This can avoid problems such as gaps; for very thick walls, a negative embedding depth may be necessary so that the wall does not protrude from the geometry. Fits walls to geometry at the bottom of the wall(s) Select the layer of the defining geometry for the bottom of the wall(s) For curved walls, sets the increment for fitting the wall Select the part of the wall to fit to the constraining geometry (Center, Left, or Right)
Constrain Bottoms of walls to 3D geometry Fit to geometry on Curved wall fit interval Wall fitting reference
3. Click OK to fit the wall(s) to the constraining 3D geometry indicated. Walls or portions of walls which lie outside the constraining geometry retain their height as set in the Object Info palette. Walls which have had peaks added (with the 3D Reshape tool) do not have the peaks reset if the peaks lie outside the constraining geometry.
Adding Roof Accessories

Product: Architect
Attic, soffit, and fascia roof accessories can be inserted when a roof object is being created, or they can be added, modified, or deleted later on. If the roof is reshaped, the accessories are automatically regenerated to suit the new shape. The accessories are part of the roof object. To modify or remove them later on, select the roof object, and change the accessory settings from the Object Info palette. Roof accessories cannot be added to roof face objects. See Creating Roof Objects on page 469 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To add roof accessories: 1. With the appropriate walls selected, select AEC > Create Roof. The Create Roof dialog box opens.
Adding Roof Accessories |
53
2. Click Create Accessories. The Create Roof Accessories dialog box opens.
Parameter
Insert Attic Attic Settings Insert Soffit Soffit Settings Insert Fascia Fascia Settings
Description
Select to add an attic to the roof Opens the Edit Attic Settings dialog box for specification of attic parameters; see Inserting an Attic on page 54 Select to add a soffit to the roof Opens the Edit Soffit Settings dialog box for specification of soffit parameters; see Inserting a Soffit on page 54 Select to add fascia to the roof Opens the Edit Fascia Settings dialog box for specification of fascia parameters; see Inserting Fascia on page 55
3. Select the accessories to be added to the roof object. 4. For each selected accessory, click the corresponding settings button. A dialog box displays with parameters for that accessory. 5. Enter accessory parameters as described in the following sections and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired accessory parameters have been entered.
54
7. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, click OK to return to the Create Roof dialog box; click OK again to create the roof object with the selected accessories.
Roof with no accessories
Roof with soffit and fascia added
Inserting an Attic
Product: Architect
To add an attic accessory to a roof: 1. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, select Insert Attic, and click Attic Settings. The Edit Attic Settings dialog box opens.
Parameter
Full Height Partial Height
Description
Specifies that the attic space is the full height of the attic area Specifies that the attic space is the height entered in the box provided
2. Enter the attic parameters and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box.
Inserting a Soffit
Product: Architect
The soffit accessory has a pork chop profile.
Adding Roof Accessories |

To add a soffit accessory to a roof: 1. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, select Insert Soffit, and click Soffit Settings. The Edit Soffit Settings dialog box opens.
55
Parameter
Recess Trim Depth
Description
Specifies the distance between the bottom edges of the roof rafters and the soffit Specifies the distance between the outer edges of the rafters and inside edge of the soffit
2. Enter the soffit parameters and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box.
Inserting Fascia
Product: Architect
The fascia accessory has a rectangular profile. To add a fascia accessory to a roof: 1. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, select Insert Fascia, and click Fascia Settings. The Edit Fascia Settings dialog box opens.
56

Parameter
Fascia Width Fascia Height
Description
Specify a width for the fascia accessory Specify a height for the fascia accessory
2. Enter the fascia parameters and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box.
Framing
Product: Architect
Architect includes a suite of tools for developing framing plans. There are tools for framing roofs, walls, and floors. Both architects and builders can take advantage of these tools to visualize framing details while still in the design stage of a project, to generate framing detail drawings, and to develop material take-off lists. The Simple Beam Calculator command is also available for analysis of a simply-supported beam with a single load. A roof face area worksheet can also be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Architectural Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the Roof Face Area worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with information from the objects in the current drawing.
Framing a Roof
Product: Architect
A roof object can be automatically framed with rafters, beams, ridges, and other roof elements with the Roof Framer command. This command does not work on roof face objects. To automatically frame a roof: 1. Select the roof object. 2. Select AEC > Framing > Roof Framer. The Roof Framer dialog box opens.
Framing |
57
3. Select the tab for the type of roof framing element to create, and select the checkbox to create the framing element. More than one type can be selected at the same time; other framing elements can be added later. An individual framing element can be added with the Framing Member tool, available from the Detailing tool set. 4. Enter the framing parameters as described in the following sections. 5. Click OK to frame the roof.
Creating Rafters
Product: Architect
To create rafters: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Rafters tab, and select Create Rafters. 2. Specify the rafter parameters.
58

Description
Specifies the rafter size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) If the roof contains dormer windows, enter the size, in Width x Height, of the dormer rafters Specifies the minimum distance allowed between rafters Specifies the maximum distance allowed between rafters; for consistent rafter spacing of the entire roof, the Minimum and Maximum Spacing values should be equal Select to ensure that opposing rafters meet on the roof ridges, hips, and valleys Specifies the class for the rafters Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the rafter attributes
Parameter
Rafter Size Dormer Rafter Size Minimum Spacing Maximum Spacing Match Rafters across Ridges/Hips/Valleys Class Classes Object Attributes
3. Click OK to create the rafters.
Minimum Spacing Maximum Spacing Rafter Size
Creating Beams
Product: Architect
To create beams: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Beams tab, and select Create Beams. 2. Specify the beam parameters.
Parameter
Style
Description
Select the beam style Joist (tie beam that rests on the bearing wall) Flush Beam (tie beam that is flush to the rafters, usually attached to the rafters with metal plates) Collar Tie (tie beam that scabs onto the rafters and is attached with nails, bolts, etc.)
Framing | Parameter
Size Spacing Elevation AFF Class Classes Object Attributes
59
Description
Specifies the beam size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) Select the beam spacing (Every Rafter, Every Other Rafter, and Every Third Rafter) Specifies the elevation above finished floor of the bottom of the beams Specifies the class for the beams Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the beam attributes
3. Click OK to create the beams.

Size Elevation AFF
Creating Plates
Product: Architect
To create plates: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Plates tab, and select Create Plates. 2. Specify the plate parameters.
Parameter
Size Class Classes Object Attributes
Description
Specifies the plate size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) Specifies the class for the plates Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the plate attributes
3. Click OK to create the plates.
60
Size
Creating Purlins
Product: Architect
To create purlins: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Purlins tab, and select Create Purlins. 2. Specify the purlin parameters.
Parameter
Purlin Size Number of Purlins Elevation of 1st Purlin Bearing inset Class Classes Object Attributes
Description
Specifies the purlin size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) Indicates the number of purlins to create between the ridge and the foot of the roof Specifies the elevation above finished floor of the bottom of the lowest purlin. The rest of the purlins will be evenly spaced between this height and the bottom of the ridge. Specifies the depth at which the purlin is notched into the rafters Specifies the class for the purlins Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the purlin attributes
3. Click OK to create the purlins.
Elevation of 1st purlin
Size
Framing |
61
Creating Ridges
Product: Architect
To create ridges: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Ridges tab, and select Create Ridges. 2. Specify the ridge parameters.
Parameter
Ridge Size Ridge Elevation Flush to Top of Rafters Notched into rafters, depth Flush to Bottom of Rafters Specify AFF Class Classes Object Attributes 3. Click OK to create the ridges.
Description
Specifies the ridge size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) Specifies the ridge elevation options Indicates that the top of the ridge should be the same as the top of the rafters Specify the depth that the ridge is notched into the rafters Indicates that the bottom of the ridge should be the same height as the bottom of the plumb cut on the rafters Indicates the height of the bottom of the ridge, above the finished floor Specifies the class for the ridges Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the ridge attributes
Size
Creating Trimmers
Product: Architect
To create trimmers: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Trimmers tab, and select Create Trimmers. 2. Specify the trimmer parameters.
62

Parameter
Trimmer Size Class Classes Object Attributes
Description
Specifies the trimmer size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) Specifies the class for the trimmers Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the trimmer attributes
3. Click OK to create the trimmers.
Size
Creating Hip and Valley Rafters

Product: Architect
To create hip and valley rafters: 1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Hips/Valleys tab, and select Create Hips and Valleys. 2. Specify the hip and valley rafter parameters.
Parameter
Hip/Valley Size
Description
Specifies the size of the hip and valley rafters in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 63) Specifies the class for the hips and valley rafters Edits classes attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Specifies the hip and valley rafter attributes
Class Classes Object Attributes
3. Click OK to create the hip and valley rafters.
Framing |
63
Size
Custom Frame Element Sizes

Product: Architect
The size of the framing elements can be selected from a pre-set list, or the list can be edited to contain desired or custom sizes. To edit the size list of the frame elements: 1. From the Size field in one of the framing element tabs of the Roof Framer dialog box, select Edit List. The Edit Size List dialog box opens, listing the currently available sizes of the roof element.
Parameter
Add Remove Edit Move Up/Move Down
Description
Adds a size to the list; specify the width and height of the new size Deletes the currently selected size Edits the currently selected size; enter the new width and height parameters Changes the order of the sizes by moving the selected size up or down in the list
2. Click OK to edit the size list. The text files which populate the size lists in the framing element dialog boxes can also be edited. The text files are located in [VectorWorks]\Plug-ins\VW_Arch\Data.
64
Framing a Floor
Product: Architect
Use the Create Joists from Poly command to create the joist objects necessary to frame a floor. To frame a floor: 1. Select a polygon, polyline or floor object. 2. Select AEC > Framing > Create Joists from Poly. The Create Joists from Poly dialog box opens.
Parameter
Elevation of Top of Joist Joist Height Joist Width Center-to-Center Spacing Draw Rim Joists Delete Poly
Description
Sets elevation for top of joist Sets overall joist height Sets width of joist Sets joist spacing Creates joists around entire perimeter Deletes selected polygon/polyline after joists created
3. Enter the desired values. 4. Click OK. 5. An alert dialog box requests the selection of two points to set the joist orientation. Click OK to close the dialog box and click two points anywhere in the drawing to indicate the desired joist orientation. 6. The joists are created. In addition, a Joist Take-off worksheet is automatically created and added to the Resource Browser. If a stairwell hole exists in the floor, board objects are used for the headers. The joist parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Framing | Parameter
Config
65
Description
Select the type of joist used for framing
Solid Wood Beam
Wood I-Joist
Wood Floor Truss
Steel C-Channel Joist
Steel Open-Web Joist
Wide-Flange Steel Joist
Length (o.c.) Width Height Begin Bevelo End Bevelo Flange height Web width Web height Gauge Panel spacing Draw verticals Bottom bearing 2D Display Use Standard Sizes Imperial Standard Size Metric Standard Size Start Joist Hanger End Joist Hanger Show Label Label Text Nominal Size (read only)
Enter the length (measured on center) of the joist Enter the joist width Enter the joist height Enter the angle of the bevel at the beginning of the joist Enter the angle of the bevel at the end of the joist Enter the flange height Enter the web width Enter the web height Enter the gauge of the joist Enter the distance between each panel Select to draw the vertical elements of the joist Select to draw the bottom bearing configuration Select the type of 2D joist displays (Solid, Centerline, Width, or Width with Centerline) Select whether to use Imperial or Metric sizes Select the Imperial standardized joist size Select the Metric standardized joist size Displays joist hangers at the start of the joist Displays joist hangers at the end of the joist Select to display the Label Text next to the joist Enter the text to display next to the joist Displays the nominal size of the joist
66
Framing a Wall
Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect creates a highly detailed estimate of the placement and number of studs needed to frame walls. In addition to showing stud placement in a framing diagram, the Wall Framer command also automatically generates frame elevation drawings and two different worksheets, Frame TakeOff and Frame Wall Info.
To use the wall framer: 1. Ensure that the walls have the desired height. If necessary, change the wall height. 2. Select AEC > Framing > Wall Framer. If a framing model has not yet been created, the New Framing Model dialog box opens. Enter a name for the framing model design layer (up to eight characters).
3. Click Create. The Wall Framing dialog box opens. Select the desired settings for the framing model.
Parameter
Model Name New
Description
Select the framing model layer to be used Opens the New Framing Model dialog box to create a new model
Framing | Parameter
Delete
67
Description
Deletes the currently selected model. Click Yes to delete the selected model. This operation cannot be undone. This command cannot be used if there is only one model in the document.
Framer Output 3D Model 2D Model Creates a 3D model layer, complete with the placement of studs, top plates, sole plates, and other components required for framing Creates framing plan and framing diagram layers. The framing plan is a top view of the wall showing the sole plate and stud placement and is drawn in a layer that parallels the layers in the framing model. The top plates are removed to show the stud placement. The framing diagram is an elevation view showing the sole plate, top plates, and stud placement. The framing diagram is drawn in a new design layer and generates as many layers as needed. Creates two sets of worksheets. The first set provides details on the framing results, including a list of studs sorted by layer, class, frame, and size (Frame TakeOff). The second set provides a summary of frame information, sorted similarly, but providing area and linear footages itemized for each framed wall (Frame Wall Info). Select which layer(s) contain wall data to frame Opens the Wall Class dialog box to allow the editing of wall class values
Worksheets
Frame the following layers Options
The framing diagram and the 3D model representations also include symbols and inserted items, such as doors and windows. 4. Click Options. The Wall Class dialog box opens. Enter the framing parameters for each wall class.
68

Description
Lists the classes that contain walls to be framed; walls in the classes in this list are included in the framing model. The framing parameters for each class are displayed beneath. Click to add an additional wall class to the list to be framed Deletes the currently selected wall class from the list to be framed. Click Yes to delete the selected class. This operation cannot be undone. Enter the center-to-center distance between studs in this wall class Enter the width of the wall sheathing; this is the horizontal sheathing dimension Enter the length of lumber to be used for top and bottom frame members in this wall class Enter the width of the wall sheathing; this is the vertical sheathing dimension
Parameter
Wall Class Name
New Delete Stud Spacing Sheet Stock Width Max Plate Length Sheet Stock Height Lumber Nominal New Delete
Select the lumber type to use for this wall class; the default types are 2 x 4, 2 x 6, and 2 x 10 Click to create a new nominal lumber type Deletes the currently selected nominal lumber type. Click Yes to delete the selected lumber type. This operation cannot be undone. This command cannot be used if there is only one lumber type in the document. Enter the true short dimension for the lumber Enter the true long dimension for the lumber
Size by Output Options Fire Blocking Double End Studs Double Top Plate Double Bottom Plate
Select to have extra blocking added to this wall class between studs on walls that are shorter than the sheet stock height Select to have two studs, rather than one stud, placed at each wall end in this wall class Select to have two plates, rather than one plate, placed at top of each wall in this wall class Select to have two plates, rather than one plate, placed at the bottom of each wall in this wall class
5. Click OK to return to the Wall Framing dialog box. 6. Click OK to create the framing model. Architect creates the estimated framing for the walls and any other output information requested. The 2D results display in Top/Plan view without a top plate. To view the results with a top plate, switch to another view such as Front, Back, Left, or Right. To view the 3D results, switch to a view such as Left Isometric or Right Isometric.
Inserting Ceiling Grid Objects |

The Framer TakeOff and Framer Wall Info worksheets, if created, display in the drawing area.
69
Inserting Ceiling Grid Objects

Product: Architect
Use the Ceiling Grid tool to insert a ceiling grid object containing tiles with user-specified length, width, and placement angle. A ceiling grid object can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To insert a ceiling grid object: 1. Click the Ceiling Grid tool from the MEP tool set. 2. Click in the drawing file to set the start point of the ceiling grid object, and then click to set the position of each additional vertex. Click the last point to complete creation of the ceiling grid object. If the polyline is open, Architect automatically completes it. The Ceiling Grid object properties dialog box opens. Click OK to accept the default settings. 3. Use the 2D Reshape tool to modify the locations of the vertices after object creation, or use the vertex editing controls on the Object Info palette to move the vertices or change the degree of vertices. The tiles are automatically adjusted to fit the new shape.
Parameter
Angle Tile Width Tile Length Polyline parameters
Description
Specify the tile placement angle Specify the tile width Specify the tile length Edits the ceiling grid object path polyline
For information on editing object vertices, see Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
70
Creating Architectural Elements
Once the initial structure has been established, a variety of tools are available to add the architectural elements, such as windows, doors, stairs, and furniture to the drawing. The Update Plug-in Object command should be run on files containing windows and doors that were created in an earlier version of VectorWorks Architect. This command converts the door and window formats to the latest format; see Migrating Architect Window and Door Objects on page 482.
Inserting Windows
VectorWorks Fundamentals and all VectorWorks Design Series products include a limited window object containing parameters similar to those described here. In VectorWorks Fundamentals, the window object is inserted through the Resource Browser. In the VectorWorks Design Series products, the window object is inserted with the Window tool. VectorWorks Architect and Landmark include windowsymbols in standard sizes and various configurations, ready to install in walls. Window objects can be saved as editable red symbols that become plug-in objects when inserted into a wall (see Creating a Window or Door Symbol on page 92). The window options can be customized in the Object Info palette. Customized windows can then be made into symbols and used in the file without having to reset the parameters. See Accessing Existing Resources on page 128 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To insert a window: 1. Select the Window tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the window, and click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time a window is inserted into the drawing, the Window Settings dialog box opens. Otherwise, click Preferences from the Mode bar. Specify the default preferences which apply to all windows placed subsequently in this file. 3. Specify the window parameters on each tab to define the window. As the parameters are defined, the preview dynamically displays the window appearance.
72
| Chapter 4: Creating Architectural Elements
Parameter
Top Shape Transom Rise Spring Sash Operation
Description
Select the shape of the top of the window Select whether to add a transom above the window; the transom light is separated from the window When applicable for the selected Top Shape, enter the distance between the start of the top shape to the top of the window Enter the distance traveled above the bottom pane before the top shape starts; if Square is selected as the Top Shape, the spring is the total height Select the window type. To define a custom window sash, select Custom Sash Operation and click Custom Sash Options to open the Custom Sash Options dialog box; see Creating a Custom Window Sash Opening on page 80.
Inserting Windows | Parameter

Use Symbol Geometry
73
Description
Select Use Symbol Geometry and click Browse to select a window symbol from the current files resources. Select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK.
The symbol Name displays in the Window Settings dialog box and the preview is updated with the selected symbol. Note: When a symbol is selected, all fields pertaining to the windows geometry are disabled. Overall Width Overall Height Elevation in Wall Elevation Reference Plan Wall Offset Enter the window width measured to the jamb exterior face Enter the window height measured to the jamb exterior face Enter the window elevation Select either the sill or the head of the window as the elevation reference point Enter the distance to offset the window insertion point from the centerline of the wall
4. Click the Parts tab to specify the configuration of the window component geometry. Several features of the window are described as interior or exterior. These include trim, shutters, and wall-wrap components. These elements determine the internal and external face of the wall from the wall itself. The left side of the wall (as viewed along the wall direction) is always exterior, and the right side is interior. Flipping the window does not flip these elements.
74
Parameter
Part
Description
Select to edit the settings for various window parts (jamb and sash, transom, sill, trim, muntins, interior/exterior shutters, and lintel)
Jamb & Sash

Jamb Width Jamb Depth Use Wall Depth Sash Width Sash Depth Shim Gap Masonry Module Enter the face width of the window jamb (parallel to the wall) Enter the depth of the window jamb (perpendicular to the wall) Select to set the jamb depth to the overall wall depth Enter the sash width Enter the sash depth Enter the distance between the jamb exterior face and the rough opening Enter the masonry module dimension
Transom
Sash Width Sash Depth Mullion Width Enter the transom sash width Enter the transom sash depth Enter the transom mullion width

Mullion Depth
75
Description
Enter the transom mullion depth
Sill
Include Sill Timber Masonry Brick Select whether to include a sill and select the sill style type Specify the sill lip thickness, amount of keep for the sill, sill height, total sill depth, sill extension width, stool lip thickness, and stool nose dimension Specify the sill lip thickness, amount of keep for the sill, rise dimension, sill height, total sill depth, and sill extension width Specify the sill lip thickness, rise dimension, total sill depth, sill extension width, stool lip thickness, and stool nose dimension
Trim
Include Interior/Exterior Trim Width/Depth Trim Under Stool/Sill Select whether to include interior/exterior trim Enter the interior/exterior trim width and depth Select whether to include interior/exterior trim along the window bottom
Muntins
Apply to Pattern Vertical/Horizontal bars Bar Width/Depth Bar Offset Number of Rays Select which sashes should have muntins applied Select the muntin pattern Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars Enter the muntin bar depth/width Enter the muntin bar offset Enter the number of muntin rays
Interior/Exterior Shutters
Include Interior/Exterior Shutters Frame Depth Offset from Jamb Panel Divisions w/Sashes Equal Divisions Frame Width Custom Select whether to include interior/exterior shutters Enter the depth for the interior/exterior shutters Enter the offset distance from the interior edge of the window jamb that shutters will be positioned when fully opened Select to create paneled shutters Select to divide shutters at sash divisions Select to divide panels equally by the number of Panels specified Enter the rail and stile width of the paneled shutter Click Choose Symbol to select a custom shutter symbol from default resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 Note: Custom shutters must be 3D-only symbols made from generic solids, saved in the default content location.
Lintel
Include Lintel Select to add a lintel above the window or transom
76

Parameter
Int./Ext. Protrusion (1)Thickness (2)Angle (3)Drop
Description
Enter the interior and exterior lintel protrusion Enter the lintel thickness Enter the lintel angle Enter the length of the lintel drop
5. Click the Wall Detail tab to specify the interior and exterior wall component settings. When wall components are wrapped with the window, the window enables control points that set the exact wrapping point.
Parameter
Wall Components Number of Components Splay Wall (1)Splay Angle (2)Diagonal (3)Splay Width
Description
Select to establish interior or exterior wall component settings Specify the number of interior/exterior wall components to wrap Select whether to splay the interior/exterior wall Enter the interior/exterior wall splay angle Enter the interior/exterior wall splay diagonal value Enter the interior/exterior wall splay width

(4)Splay Depth
77
Description
Enter the interior/exterior wall splay depth
6. Click the View tab to specify the 2D line attributes and assign style classes to parts for applying textures and 3D attributes.
Parameter
Plan Detail Draw Wall Lines Show 3D Hinge Direction Show 3D Open Clerestory
Description
Select to display all the window details in a 2D view Select whether to draw wall lines at all times; wall lines are drawn in the Ceiling-main class to easily create reflected ceiling plans Select to draw lines representing the 3D hinge direction Select to draw 3D window sashes as open at the specified Open Angle Enabling Clerestory draws the window as dashed if the sill is higher than the specified elevation and draws the window as non-breaking (solid) if the sill is below the specified height Settings controlling 2D line styles and weights for the window part; if this group is selected, these settings override the line style and weight settings from the Attributes palette
Use Part Line Styles
78

Parameter
Part
Description
Choose the line style and weight to use for the selected part (jamb, sash, trim, sill, glazing, wall lines, or swing) or select Set Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 206 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Settings controlling classes for application of 3D finishes and textures Select the style Class to assign to the selected Part (interior and exterior jamb and sash, trim, and shutter; stool, sill, and lintel), or select None; see Using Style Classes on page 107 Select the glazing style or specify the desired glazing style class; see Using Style Classes on page 107
Special Classes Part
Glazing
7. Click the Data tab to specify the window record information to include on the window schedule.
Parameter
On Schedule Prefix
Description
Select whether to include this windows information in the window schedule and also set the window ID label to visible Assigns alphanumeric information before the numerical label value; adding prefix information is optional

Label Suffix Bubble Shape Bubble Size
79
Description
Assigns a numerical value to the ID; this number increments automatically if the auto-increment option is chosen in the ID Settings dialog box Assigns alphanumeric information after the label value; adding suffix information is optional Select the ID label bubble shape Enter the minimum ID label bubble size (this value represents the bubble size times the layer scale; the bubble shape is maintained relative to the text inside it for ID bubble uniformity throughout the drawing file) Select the bubble line style and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 206 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select to draw a leader from the ID label to the object; see Attribute Types on page 205 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select the leader line style and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 206 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select whether to use a marker for the ID leader line and choose the desired style, or select Edit to open the Set Arrow Attributes dialog box for creating a custom marker style; see Setting Default Arrow Heads on page 47 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select the ID label class, or select None (which sets the ID to the same class as the window), the standard class for the ID, or any other class in the document When selected, automatically rotates the ID label so that it is horizontal Select the data field from the list and its Name displays beneath the list; select the user fields to include additional user-defined information with the window Enter the data field Value for use in the window schedule
Bubble Line Style
Show Leader Line Style
Use Marker
ID Class Keep ID Horizontal Name Value
8. Click OK to set the window parameters and close the Window Settings dialog box. 9. To edit parameters, double-click the window to open the Window Settings dialog box. Window objects can also be edited in the Object Info palette. If the window has been inserted as a plug-in object, most settings from the Window Settings dialog box display. If the window is a black symbol made from a window object, fields pertaining to window geometry do not display. Two additional Object Info palette parameters are available for windows inserted in a wall: click Flip to flip the window orientation, or click Position to open the Position Symbol in Wall dialog box to enter the distance from the symbols insertion point to the corner of the selected wall. The Object Info palette display order can be changed by advanced users through the VectorScript Plug-in Editor; however, this is not recommended. 10. The Window Schedule can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command (see Records and Schedules on page 345) or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Architectural Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the
80

Window Schedule worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with information from the window objects in the current drawing. To edit the worksheet after it has been created, see Using Worksheets on page 534 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Creating a Custom Window Sash Opening

A custom window sash opening can be created for selection in the Window Settings dialog box. A rectangular sash opening can contain any number of rectangular sashes. To create a custom window sash opening: 1. From the General tab of the Window Settings dialog box, select the Custom Sash Operation and click Custom Sash Options. The Custom Sash Options dialog box opens for selecting a specifying the sash opening parameters. As parameters are defined, the preview dynamically displays the configuration operations of the sashes filling the opening.
Parameter
Num. of Rows/Columns Overall Width/Height Mullion Width/Depth Selected Sash Width/Height Operation Include Muntins
Description
Specify the number of rows and columns in the sash opening Displays the overall width and height of the custom sashes Displays the mullion width and depth The currently active sash displays in red to indicate that it is selected For the active sash, specify the desired Width and Height For the active sash, choose the desired window type Select whether to include muntins for each sash
Inserting Doors | Parameter

Lock Sash Configuration << or >>
81
Description
When selected, locks the sash dimensions and operation Click << or >> to move backward or forward to activate sashes for dimension and operation specification
2. Click OK to close the Custom Sash Options dialog box and return to the Window Settings dialog box. The Window Settings dialog box preview is updated with the customization results.
Inserting Doors
VectorWorks Fundamentals and all VectorWorks Design Series products include a limited door object containing parameters similar to those described here. In VectorWorks Fundamentals, the door object is inserted through the Resource Browser. In the VectorWorks Design Series products, the door object is inserted with the Door tool. The VectorWorks Design Series includes door symbols in standard sizes and various configurations, ready to install in walls. VectorWorks Architect and Landmark provide extensive libraries of door symbols, listed by configuration and size. Door objects can be saved as editable red symbols that become plug-in objects when inserted into a wall (see Creating a Window or Door Symbol on page 92). The door options can be customized in the Object Info palette. Customized doors can then be made into symbols and used in the file without having to reset the parameters. See Accessing Existing Resources on page 128 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To insert a door: 1. Select the Door tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. Click in the drawing file or in a wall to set the insertion point of the door, and click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time a door is placed on the drawing, the Door Settings dialog box opens. Otherwise, click Preferences from the Mode bar. Specify the default preferences, which apply to all doors placed subsequently in this file. 3. Specify the door parameters on each tab to define the door. As the parameters are defined, the preview dynamically displays the door appearance.
82
Parameter
Door Width Door Height Use Symbol Geometry
Description
Enter the door width measured to the inside of the jamb Enter the door height measured from the floor to the inside of the head jamb Select Use Symbol Geometry and click Browse to select a door symbol from the current files resources. Select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK.
The symbol Name displays in the Door Settings dialog box and the preview is updated with the selected symbol. Note: When a symbol is selected, all fields pertaining to the doors geometry are disabled.

Top Shape Transom Rise Spring Offset in Wall Configuration Operation
83
Description
Select the shape of the top of the door Select whether to add a transom above the door; the transom light is separated from the door Enter the distance between the start of the top shape to the top of the door (not applicable for Square and Round Top Shape) Enter the distance traveled above the floor before the Top Shape begins Enter the distance to offset the door insertion point from the centerline of the wall Select the general door configuration Select the advanced operation for a sliding or complex swing door, where O represents a fixed door and X represents an operating door
4. Click the Parts tab to specify the configuration of door component geometry. Several features of the door are described as interior or exterior. These include trim and wall-wrap components. These elements determine the internal and external face of the wall from the wall itself. The left side of the wall (as viewed along the wall direction) is always exterior, and the right side is interior. Flipping the door does not flip these elements.
84

Description
Select to edit the settings for various door parts (jamb, leaf, lights, transom, trim, lintel, and threshold)
Parameter
Part
Jamb
Width Depth Shim Gap Masonry Module Use Wall Depth Astragal Flange / Depth Enter the face width of the door jamb (parallel to the wall) Enter the depth of the door jamb (perpendicular to the wall) Enter the distance between the jamb exterior face and the rough opening Enter the masonry module dimension Select to set the jamb depth to the overall wall depth Use these two dimensions to determine the size of the astragal flange or depth (enter zero to display without an astragal flange); enabled if Swing Bi-part is selected in the Configuration field on the General tab
Astragal Depth
Astragal Flange
Leaf
Leaf Type Thickness Top Rail Width L/R Stile Width Bottom Rail Width Custom Leaf
Select to edit the stile and rail settings Select the desired leaf type Enter the thickness of the door slab Enter the width of the top door rail Enter the width of the left and right stile Enter the width of the bottom door rail For Custom Leaf Type, select the leaf type from the default resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. Note: Custom leaves must be 3D-only symbols made from generic solids, saved in the default content location.
Muntin Style Vertical/Horizontal Bars Bar Width Vertical/Horizontal Panels Mid Stile Width Set Top Panel
For Glass Leaf Type, select the muntin style For Glass Leaf Type, enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars For Glass Leaf Type, enter the muntin bar width For Panel Leaf Type, enter the number of vertical/horizontal panels in the door For Panel Leaf Type, enter the width of any interim stiles For Panel Leaf Type, select to set the top door panel at a different height than the other panels and specify the desired Panel Height
Inserting Doors | Parameter Lights

Include Side Lights Left/Right Width Sash Width Sash Depth Mullion Width Mullion Depth Include Muntins Style Vertical/Horizontal Bars Bar Width Select whether to include side lights Enter the left/right side light width Enter the side light and transom sash width Enter the side light sash depth Enter the side light mullion width Enter the side light mullion depth Select whether to add muntins to the side lights Select the side light muntin style Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars Enter the muntin bar width
85
Description
Transom
Sash Width Sash Depth Mullion Width Mullion Depth Include Muntins Style Vertical/Horizontal Bars Bar Width Offset Enter the transom sash width Enter the transom sash depth Enter the transom mullion width Enter the transom mullion depth Select whether to add muntins to the transom Select the transom muntin style Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars Enter the muntin bar width Enter the muntin bar offset
Trim
Include Interior/Exterior Trim Width Depth Select whether to add interior and/or exterior trim Enter the interior/exterior trim width Enter the interior/exterior trim depth
Lintel
Include Lintel Int. / Ext. Protrusion (1)Thickness (2)Angle (3)Drop Select to add a lintel above the door or transom Enter the interior and exterior lintel protrusion Enter the lintel thickness Enter the lintel angle Enter the length of the lintel drop
Threshold
Include Threshold Select whether to include a threshold
86

Description
Enter the interior and exterior threshold depth Enter the overall threshold depth Enter how far to offset the threshold from the center of the door jamb Enter the threshold thickness Enter the threshold nosing height
Parameter
(1) Depth(Int) / (2) Depth(Ext) (3) Overall Depth (4) Offset (5) Thickness (6) Nosing
5. Click the Wall Detail tab to specify the interior and exterior wall component settings. When wall components are wrapped with the door, the door enables control points that set the exact wrapping point.
Parameter
Wall Components Number of Components Splay Wall (1)Angle (2)Diag (3)Width
Description
Select to establish interior or exterior wall component settings Specify the number of interior/exterior wall components to wrap Select whether to splay the interior/exterior wall Enter the interior/exterior wall splay angle Enter the interior/exterior wall splay diagonal value Enter the interior/exterior wall splay width

(4)Depth
87
Description
Enter the interior/exterior wall splay depth
Interior control point Exterior control point Interior, locked control point Wall with interior and exterior wrapping; interior control point is being used to create a reveal
Exterior control point
Wall with exterior-only wrapping; interior control point is locked to the inside jamb corner
6. Click the View tab to specify the 2D line attributes and assign style classes to parts for applying textures and 3D attributes.
88

Description
Select to display all the door details in a 2D view Select to draw lines representing the 3D hinge direction Select whether to draw wall lines at all times; wall lines are drawn in the Ceiling-main class to easily create reflected ceiling plans Select to draw 3D doors as open at the specified open Angle Select the level of detail to include for 3D doors Settings controlling 2D line styles and weights for the door part; if enabled, these settings override the line style and weight settings from the Attributes palette Choose the line style and weight to use for the selected part (jamb, leaf, trim, swing, sash, glazing, astragal, or wall lines) or select Set Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 206 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Settings controlling classes for application of 3D finishes and textures Select the style Class to assign to the selected Part (interior and exterior rail/stile, panel, jamb, trim, and sash; lintel, threshold, and side light glazing), or select None; see Using Style Classes on page 107
Parameter
Plan Detail Show 3D Hinge Direction Draw Wall Lines 3D Open 3D Detail Level Use Part Line Styles Part
Special Classes Part
7. Click the Data tab to specify the door record information to include on the door schedule and door hardware legend.

On Schedule Prefix Label Suffix Bubble Shape Bubble Size
89
Description
Select whether to include this doors information in the door schedule and also set the door ID label to visible Assigns alphanumeric information before the numerical label value; adding prefix information is optional Assigns a numerical value to the ID; this number increments automatically if the auto-increment option is chosen in the ID Settings dialog box Assigns alphanumeric information after the label value; adding suffix information is optional Select the ID label bubble shape Enter the minimum ID label bubble size (this value represents the bubble size times the layer scale; the bubble shape is maintained relative to the text inside it for ID bubble uniformity throughout the drawing file) Select the bubble line style and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 206 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select to draw a leader from the ID label to the object; see Attribute Types on page 205 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select the leader line style and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 206 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select whether to use a marker for the ID leader line and choose the desired style, or select Edit to open the Set Arrow Attributes dialog box for creating a custom marker style; see Setting Default Arrow Heads on page 47 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select the ID label class, or select None (which sets the ID to the same class as the door), the standard class for the ID, or any other class in the document When selected, automatically rotates the ID label so that it is horizontal Select to include a door hardware set with the door object, and click Browse to open the Door Hardware Library dialog box; see Assigning, Creating, Editing, and Deleting Door Hardware Sets on page 90. The door hardware set selected in the Door Hardware Library box displays in the hardware Name field of the Door Settings dialog box. Select the data field from the list and its Name displays beneath the list; select the user fields to include additional user-defined information with the door Enter the data field Value for use in the door schedule
Bubble Line Style
Show Leader Line Style
Use Marker
ID Class Keep ID Horizontal Include Hardware
Name Value
8. Click OK to set the door parameters and close the Door Settings dialog box. 9. To edit parameters, double-click the door to open the Door Settings dialog box.
90

Door objects can also be edited in the Object Info palette. If the door has been inserted as a plug-in object, most settings from the Window Settings dialog box display. If the window is a black symbol made from a window object, fields pertaining to window geometry do not display. Two additional Object Info palette parameters are available for windows inserted in a wall: click Flip to flip the window orientation, or click Position to open the Position Symbol in Wall dialog box to enter the distance from the symbols insertion point to the corner of the selected wall. The Object Info palette display order can be changed by advanced users through the VectorScript Plug-in Editor; however, this is not recommended.
10. The door schedule and/or door hardware legend can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command (see Creating Schedules on page 352) or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Architectural Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the door schedule or door hardware legend worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with information from the objects in the current drawing. To edit the worksheet after it has been created, see Using Worksheets on page 534 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Assigning, Creating, Editing, and Deleting Door Hardware Sets

A door hardware set can be assigned to the door, and a door operator device (such as a knob or lever) can be selected to display on the 3D door from default resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. To assign, create, edit, or delete a door hardware set: 1. From the Data tab of the Door Settings dialog box, select Include Hardware and click Browse. The Door Hardware Library dialog box opens for selecting a door hardware set and door operator device.
Parameter
Title Bar Door Hardware Set list Add Remove
Description
Displays the name of the current Preference Set Lists all defined door hardware sets Creates a new hardware set Removes the selected hardware set from the library (this action cannot be undone)

Edit 2. Select Edit or Add. The Edit or Add Door Hardware Set dialog box opens. The Add dialog box is similar to the Edit dialog box except that all fields are blank.
91
Description
Edits the currently selected hardware set
Parameter
Description Hdw Set ID Hinge Qty Hinge Type Lockset Type Closer Type Stop Type Key Code Notes Symbol
Description
Indicates the name of the door hardware set Indicates the unique ID value assigned to the door HW Set field in the door schedule Indicates the number of hinges Indicates the hinge type Indicates the lockset type Indicates the closer type Indicates the stop type Indicates the key code Contains any pertinent notes about the door operator device List the available door hardware to assign to the door from the default resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513)
92
3. Complete each field with the desired information to add a new door hardware set, or edit the desired fields to change an existing door hardware set. 4. Click OK, and then click Done to return to the Door Settings dialog box. The applied information appears in the door hardware legend generated (see Creating Schedules on page 352).
Creating a Window or Door Symbol

If the same customized style of window or door is to be used numerous times in a drawing, consider turning a single instance of the object into a symbol. This eliminates the need to repeatedly apply parameters, maximizes memory efficiency, and allows global editing of symbols. See Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. If a custom window or door is unique (i.e., it has only one instance) in a project, creating a symbol from it is unnecessary. However, making a symbol of the installed window or door makes it easy to reuse it in other drawings should there be a need to do so in the future. After the symbol is created, it can be selected from the Window or Door Settings dialog box (by selecting Use Symbol Geometry as described in Inserting Windows on page 71 and Inserting Doors on page 81), where it can take advantage of functionality such as embedded IDs and data, cavity wrapping, splays, and wall offsets. To enable automatic ID labeling, from the Data tab of the settings dialog box, select On Schedule, and specify the ID parameters. If necessary, set the class to which the ID is assigned to visible. Alternatively, set the automatic ID labeling through the ID Label tool; see ID Label Tool on page 355.
Inserting Stairs
VectorWorks Architect contains a customizable stair object, which allows a user to build up a stair from a user-defined series of flights and platforms (landings) in various geometries. The stair is a hybrid object, offering complete control over the 2D appearance for both the lower and upper floors, as well as a 3D component for presentation drawings.
In VectorWorks Fundamentals, the stair object has limited capabilities and configurations. In the Design Series products, the stair object includes many more options, can be put into an unlimited number of configurations, and performs many stair design chores automatically. The stair is most effectively used in drawings that have layers set up according to the building levels in the project. The stair object can then be set to determine its own floor-to-floor height, on the basis of the difference between the layer Z heights. When layers with set Z heights are present, the stair automatically calculates the number of risers it needs,
Inserting Stairs |
93
given the floor-to-floor height and the maximum riser height. More importantly, the stair creates a going up representation of itself on the lower floor, and a coming down representation of itself on the upper floor. This avoids having to draw stairs on two different layers, and edit them separately, to completely represent the same physical staircase. Stair break options can be set differently on each layer, to get exactly the desired look in plan view. Instead of having a limited number of predetermined configurations, the stair supports a variable number of flights and landings, making it possible to create any combination of elements required by the stair design.
Creating a Stair
The stair obtains some of its parameters based on the layer where it is placed and, if it is configured to do so, displays on both the lower layer and upper layer; stairs should be placed in a drawing with layers set up according to the project building levels. A stair should be inserted on the layer representing the lower of the two floors it connects. Stairs are made up of flight and platform components, and are assembled to create unlimited possible configurations. To insert a stair: 1. Click the Stair tool from the Building Shell tool set. 2. Click to insert the stair. The first time a stair is placed in a drawing file, the Select a Stair Configuration dialog box opens automatically. Otherwise, click Preferences from the Mode bar before placing the stair to set the default stair parameters. Select an initial stair configuration from the default resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513). Components can be edited and added to the initial configuration.
Parameter
Symbol Folders Symbols 3. Click OK.
Description
Specifies the location of stair symbols Provides a graphical list of available stair symbols
The Stair Preferences dialog box opens. Click the General tab to set the overall stair height, tread and riser information, and 2D parameters.
94
Parameter
Overall Height By Layer Elevation
Description
Specify whether the stair height is obtained according to its upper and lower layer elevation or with a set value Sets the stair height according to the distance between its lower and upper layers. Select the upper and lower layers. Note: If the layers set here are different from the active layer where the stair was originally placed or when the Stair tool was selected, the stair is placed on the layers specified here, and not on the active layer.
Specify Tread and Riser Sizes Tread Depth Max. Riser Height Actual Riser Height Number of Risers
Sets the stairs height to a specific value, regardless of layer height
Sets the tread width Specifies the maximum allowable riser height Displays the actual riser height, in the current file units, based on stair height Displays the number of risers, based on riser and stair height
Inserting Stairs | Parameter

Draw Top Tread 2D Detail Draw Dashed Nosing Recess Unless Hiding Wall Components End/Start Marker Arrow Class Data Class Apply Browse Specifies whether to indicate the riser position with dashed lines
95
Description
Specify whether the stair should include a tread at the same level as the upper floor it serves
If drawing dashed lines indicating the nosing recess of risers, specify whether to hide the lines when also hiding wall components with the Hide wall components document preference Specify a starting and ending marker style for the path-of-travel arrow If desired, select a class for the path-of-travel arrow If desired, select a class for stair data that displays with the path-of-travel arrow Applies the current settings to the preview image; use the preview to judge the effect of the parameter changes Opens the Select a Stair Configuration dialog box, to select a different stair symbol from the default resources
4. Click the Flights and Platforms tab. The selected stair configuration displays in the preview, with the current component displayed in red. Stair components can be added and removed, and the stair configuration is automatically adjusted to meet the stair height. If adjacent flights and platforms (landings) do not have the same width, they are aligned by the center of the adjacent edges.
96
Parameter
Add After
Description
Opens the Add Stair Component dialog box, for adding a stair component (stair flight, winder, or platform) after the currently highlighted component. Select the component to add and click OK. If treads need to be removed to meet the stair height requirement, they are removed from the next flight. Opens the Add Stair Component dialog box, for adding a stair component (stair flight, winder, or platform) before the currently highlighted component. Select the component to add and click OK. If treads need to be removed to meet the stair height requirement, they are removed from the previous flight. Highlights the next or previous stair component, for adding or removing components, or changing parameters Removes the currently highlighted stair component When adding or editing a stair component, sets the type of component and its associated parameters. Edits are applied to the currently highlighted component. Applies the current stair component parameters to the preview image; use the preview to judge the effect of parameter changes
Add Before
Next/Previous Remove Type Apply
Inserting Stairs |
97
5. Click the Upper/Lower Floors tab to set the stair appearance in Top/Plan view for both the upper and lower floor layers. The appearance of the stair line style, line weight, and fill style can be set in the Attributes palette. If style classes are selected for the appearance of the 3D components on the Construction tab, the fill style set here is overridden. The drawing must have an upper and lower layer and have height set by layer elevation to display parameters for each floor. Otherwise, only lower floor parameters can be set.
Parameter
Show Stair Break Break at Tread #
Description
Hides a portion of the stair with a stair break, so that the upper/lower portion of the stair can be displayed in 2D Specifies where to begin the stair break; if the stair break is a platform, the break is drawn at the last tread going up (for the lower floor) or the last tread going down (for the upper floor) Select to display the path-of-travel arrow Select to display stair data with the path-of-travel arrow Displays the number of risers
Show Arrow Show Stair Data Number of Risers
98

Description
Displays the riser height
Parameter
Riser Height
6. Click the Construction tab to set the 3D stair appearance, including construction style, and tread, riser, and stringer parameters and style classes (see Using Style Classes on page 107).
Parameter
Construction Style Treads Nosing Depth Tread Thickness Class Risers Riser Style
Description
Select the construction material of the stairs
Specify the nosing depth Specify the vertical thickness of the nosing Select a tread style class
Specify whether risers are open or vertical
Inserting Stairs | Parameter

Riser Thickness Class Stringers Style Offset from Outside Stringer Thickness Stringer Height Class Specify whether stringers are underneath or outside the stair For Underneath stringer styles, specifies the distance between the outside of the stair tread to the outside of the stringers Specifies the stringer width Specifies the stringer height; if the stringers are underneath the treads, this height includes notches and cannot be less than the notch depth +2 Select a stringer style class
99
Description
Indicates the horizontal thickness for vertical riser styles (for wood stairs, this refers to the grade of lumber used to construct the stair) Select a riser style class for vertical riser styles
7. Click the Handrails tab to specify handrail settings for the left and right sides of the stair. The preview displays the handrails on one side.
100

Description
Select to add a rail to the left or right side of the stair (going up) When selecting a rail, specify whether it contains balusters (upright supporting posts) Specify the handrail settings, which apply to both the left and right handrails except where indicated Indicates the horizontal distance of the handrails from the outside edge of the stairs Specifies the height of the top rail Specifies the diameter of the top rail Indicates the number of horizontal intermediate rails (parallel to the top rail) Sets the distance between the intermediate rails (when there are more than one) Sets the diameter of the intermediate rails Specifies the distance between the balusters; baluster spacing cannot exceed the Tread Depth (specified on the General tab) Specifies the diameter of the balusters For the left and right rails, specify the distance to extend the top stair rail past both the top and/or bottom of the stair Select a rail style class
Parameter
Left/Right Rail Left/Right Balusters Settings Inset from Edge Overall Height Top Rail Diameter Num Inter Rails Inter Rail Spacing Inter Rail Diameter Baluster Spacing Baluster Diameter Extend Top Rail Past Last Tread Rail Class
Stairs with multiple horizontal rails can take a long time to regenerate. Temporarily deselect Detail 3D Handrails in the Object Info palette to speed up performance. 8. Click OK. 9. Click in the drawing to insert the stair. Click again to set the stair rotation.
Stair Properties
The properties of a stair object can be edited in the Object Info palette. Frequently-accessed parameters are available directly in the palette; click Settings to access the rest of the stair parameters.
Inserting Cabinets |
If moving a stair object, temporarily deselect Detail 3D Handrails from the Object Info palette to decrease regeneration time.
101
Parameter
Flr-Flr Height Max Riser Tread Depth Tread Height Nosing Depth Stringer Width Draw Top Tread Detail 3D Handrails Left Rail Right Rail Rail Height Rail Width Upper Break Lower Break Settings
Description
Sets the stairs height to a specific value, regardless of layer height Specifies the maximum possible riser height Sets the horizontal (front to back) tread width Sets the vertical tread thickness Specifies the depth of the stair nosing Specifies the stringer width Specify whether the stair should include a top tread For speedier performance, draws handrails as NURBS curves, rather than extrude-along-path objects Select to include a handrail on the left side of the stair (going up) Select to include a handrail on the right side of the stair (going up) Specifies the height of the top rail Indicates the rail diameter Specifies where to begin the stair break on the upper portion of the stair Specifies where to begin the stair break on the lower portion of the stair Opens the Stair Settings dialog box, for editing stair parameters. The tabs and settings on this dialog box are the same as those in Stair Preferences; see Creating a Stair on page 93.
Inserting Cabinets
VectorWorks Fundamentals and all VectorWorks Design Series products include three types of cabinets for inserting in a drawing filebase, wall, and utility cabinets. In VectorWorks Fundamentals, the cabinet objects are inserted through the Resource Browser. In the VectorWorks Design Series products, the cabinet objects are inserted with the various cabinet tools. Cabinet door and drawer handles are provided as default resources (default resources are automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and display in the Resource Browser; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513).
102
Inserting Base Cabinets

To insert a base cabinet: 1. Select the Base Cabinet tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set. 2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the cabinet, and click again to set the rotation. If this is the first time a base cabinet is placed in the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box opens. 3. Specify the default properties which apply to all base cabinets subsequently placed in this document. Cabinet properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Flip Position
Description
When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to flip the cabinet orientation When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to set the position of the cabinet; in the Position Symbol in Wall dialog box, enter the distance from the symbols insertion point to the selected corner of the wall Select the cabinet style Select the cabinet finish Specify the direction of the blind, or none Enter the cabinet length Select whether the cabinet has an uneven length corner, and if so, enter the left corner length Enter the cabinet height and depth Select the cabinet door mounting style Select whether to draw the cabinet drawer(s) Specify the drawer style Select the number of cabinet doors Select the cabinet door style Select the door panel style
Style End Finish Blind Length Uneven Length Corner Height / Depth Door mounting Draw Drawer Drawer Style Number of Doors Door Style Panel Style
Inserting Cabinets | Parameter

Arch Height Factor Door Swing Rail and Stile Width Bevel Edge Bevel Inside Reveals Number of Shelves Draw Kick Kick Height / Depth Draw Counter Back Splash Splash Height Splash Thickness Counter Thickness Overhang Reveal Show Detail Door Handle Height Door / Drawer Handles
103
Description
Specify the proportion of the arch height in relation to the door width (a larger value produces a taller arch) Specify the door swing direction Select the rail and stile width Select whether to bevel the outside door and drawer edges Select whether to bevel the inside door and drawer edges Enter the Top, Mid, Bottom, Side, and Center reveal height or width Enter the number of shelves Select whether to draw a kick Specify the kick height and depth Select whether to draw a counter Specify where to place the back splash, or none Enter the back splash height Enter the back splash thickness Enter the counter thickness Enter the counter overhang length Enter the thickness for the bottom portion of the counter Select whether to draw various cabinet details. Select the cabinet door, kick, and/or counter style class, or none; see Using Style Classes on page 107 Enter the door handle height Click Door Handles or Drawer Handles to select a handle from the default resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513); select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK (or select the No Pull symbol to remove the door or drawer handles)
4. Click OK to set the cabinet parameters and close the Object Properties dialog box.
104
Inserting Utility Cabinets

To insert a utility cabinet: 1. Select the Utility Cabinet tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set. 2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the cabinet, and click again to set the rotation. If this is the first time a utility cabinet is placed in the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box opens. 3. Specify the default properties which apply to all utility cabinets subsequently placed in this document. Cabinet properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Flip Position
Description
When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to flip the cabinet orientation When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to set the position of the cabinet; in the Position Symbol in Wall dialog box, enter the distance from the symbols insertion point to the selected corner of the wall Enter the cabinet length Enter the cabinet height and depth Select the cabinet door mounting style Select the number of cabinet doors Specify the door swing direction Select the cabinet door style Select the door panel style Select the cabinet mullion style, or none Enter the door handle height Enter the number of shelves Enter the upper cabinet door height Select the upper cabinet door style
Length Height / Depth Door Mounting Number of doors Door Swing Door Style Panel Style Mullion Style Handle Height Number of Shelves Upper Door Height Upper Door Style
Inserting Cabinets | Parameter

Upper Panel Style Upper Mullion Style Upper Handle Height Upper Number of Shelves Arch Height Factor Rail and Stile Width Bevel Edge Bevel Inside Reveals Draw Kick Kick Height / Depth Show Detail Handles
105
Description
Select the upper cabinet door panel style Select the upper cabinet mullion style, or none Enter the upper cabinet door handle height Enter the number of shelves in the upper cabinet Specify the proportion of the arch height in relation to the door width (a larger value produces a taller arch) Select the rail and stile width Select whether to bevel the outside door and drawer edges Select whether to bevel the inside door and drawer edges Enter the Top, Mid, Bottom, and Side reveal measurement height or width Select whether to draw a kick Specify the kick height and depth Select whether to draw various cabinet details. Select the cabinet, door, kick, and/or glazing style class, or none; see Using Style Classes on page 107 Click Door Handles or Drawer Handles to select a handle from the default resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513); select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK (or select the No Pull symbol to remove the door or drawer handles)
106
Inserting Wall Cabinets

To insert a wall cabinet: 1. Select the Wall Cabinet tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set. 2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the cabinet, and click again to set the rotation. If this is the first time a wall cabinet is placed in the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box opens. 3. Specify the default properties which apply to all wall cabinets subsequently placed in this document. Cabinet properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Flip Position
Description
When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to flip the cabinet orientation When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to set the position of the cabinet; in the Position Symbol in Wall dialog box, enter the distance from the symbols insertion point to the selected corner of the wall Select the cabinet style Select the cabinet finish Specify the direction of the blind, or none Enter the cabinet length Select whether the cabinet has an uneven length corner, and if so, enter the Left Corner Length Enter the cabinet height and depth Enter the cabinet height above the finished floor Select the cabinet door mounting style Select the number of cabinet doors Specify the door swing direction Select the cabinet door style
Style End Finish Blind Length Uneven Length Corner Height / Depth AFF Door mounting Number of Doors Door Swing Door Style
Using Style Classes | Parameter

Panel Style Mullion Style Number of Shelves Arch Height Factor Handle Height Rail and Stile Width Bevel Edge Bevel Inside Reveals Glazing Show Detail Handles
107
Description
Select the door panel style Select the cabinet mullion style, or none Enter the number of shelves Specify the proportion of the arch high in relation to the door width (a larger value produces a taller arch) Enter the door handle height Select the rail and stile width Select whether to bevel the outside door and drawer edges Select whether to bevel the inside door and drawer edges Enter the Top, Mid, Bottom, and Side reveal measurement height or width Select the glazing style class, or none; see Using Style Classes on page 107 Select whether to draw various cabinet details. Select the cabinet and/or door style class, or none; see Using Style Classes on page 107 Click Door Handles or Drawer Handles to select a handle from the default resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513); select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK (or select the No Pull symbol to remove the door or drawer handles)
Using Style Classes

Product: Architect
Certain plug-in objects in VectorWorks Architect, such as windows, doors, stairs, and cabinets, offer the ability to set portions of the object to style classes (Style-1, Style-2, etc.). When a style class is selected, the class is automatically added to the file, and the plug-in object component is assigned to that class. Select Tools > Organization to set the class properties from the Classes tab. See Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
108
Certain plug-in objects, such as the wall cabinet, allow class styles to be set from the Object Info palette. The plug-in object style class names for these types of objects can be edited to provide a more meaningful name for office standards. When a newer version of VectorWorks is installed, this procedure must be repeated. Before editing any plug-in objects, create a backup of the file. To edit the class style names of a plug-in object: 1. Select Tools > Scripts >VectorScript Plug-In Editor. The VectorScript Plug-In Editor dialog box opens.
2. Select the plug-in object to edit, and click Parameters. The Parameters dialog box opens.
Using Style Classes |
109
3. Locate the parameter that displays in the Object Info palette and is associated with the objects class style names and click Edit. The Edit Parameter dialog box opens.
4. The Type of this parameter is Pop-Up. Click Choices to add or change class style names. The Edit Choices dialog box opens.
5. Add additional choices to the list of class names. Editing the current choices is also possible, but is not recommended, since existing objects may still use those class style names. 6. When the list of class style name choices is complete, click OK. Click OK to close all the plug-in editor dialog boxes and return to the drawing. 7. The new choices are available from the style class list of the Object Info palette.
110
Adding MEP Information to the Design

Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect includes the Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing (MEP) components required to complete the design. With menu commands, tools, and symbols, Architect facilitates the addition of plumbing, circuit, and HVAC elements to a project.
Plumbing and Piping Objects

Product: Architect
Plumbing and piping objects are available from the MEP tool set and [VectorWorks]\Libraries (see Object Libraries on page 507). These objects are accessed through the Resource Browser and consist of hybrid 2D/3D representations of common plumbing fixture elements. See Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
HVAC
Product: Architect
The Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) tools and objects add HVAC ducts and diffusers in a variety of configurations to a drawing. These geometric models can represent a variety of actual items. For example, the diffuser object can have its dimensions and parameters set to develop many differently sized diffusers, including industry standard sizes that can be predefined. HVAC objects are available in [VectorWorks]\Libraries (see Object Libraries on page 507). These objects are accessed through the Resource Browser and consist of hybrid 2D/3D representations of common HVAC ductwork elements. See Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Ductwork objects include optionally displayed labels and elevation marker tags. The label contents are determined by a user-defined string of values, such as width and height (obtained automatically) and any text desired. The elevation marker tag indicates the top and bottom above the finish floor of an HVAC ductwork item; Show 3D Detail must be enabled to display the elevation marker tag. Both the HVAC label and elevation marker tag can be easily moved by dragging its control point to the correct location.
Control Points
Elevation Marker Specify rectangular, round, or oval duct types (some ducts have additional options)
Label This value is added to top and bottom elevations, allowing ducts to be measured from the floor rather than the ceiling
Specify whether the duct is insulated and/or lined and indicate the thickness of the lining/insulation
112
| Chapter 5: Adding MEP Information to the Design
A diffuser report, containing a diffuser, register, and grille schedule, can be included. It can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\HVAC Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the Diffuser Report worksheet to the drawing. An HVAC Diffuser, Register and Grille worksheet, populated with information from the objects in the current drawing, is automatically created. For more information on labels, elevation marker tags, and HVAC reports, refer to the Duct_Object.pdf file included in [VectorWorks]\Extras.
Electrical and Communication Circuiting

Product: Architect
The communications and electrical circuiting tools and objects add electrical and communication objects, including panels and disconnects, to a drawing. The circuiting tools link these objects, creating a communication or electrical circuit.
Electrical and Communication Objects

Product: Architect
Electrical and communication objects are available from the MEP tool set and in specific object libraries (see Object Libraries on page 507). These objects are accessed through the Resource Browser, and consist of hybrid 2D/3D representations of common electrical devices. These symbols already have the correct records attached for proper circuiting. See Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. It is also possible to create custom electrical symbols, panels and disconnects; attaching the correct record to these symbols makes them circuitable. See Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols on page 484 for information.
Naming Panels
Product: Architect
When inserting panels (electrical or communication) from object libraries, give each panel its own name so that it can be uniquely identified by the Circuiting tool. To identify an inserted panel with a unique name: 1. Insert the panel from the Resource Browser.
2. With the panel still selected, click the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Provide the unique panel name under the Panel record information.
Electrical and Communication Circuiting |
113
Click on the Panel record to change the name Click on the default name to edit it
Provide a unique name for the panel by typing it here
Circuiting Tool
Product: Architect
Once electrical or communication panels and objects have been inserted, the Circuiting tool links the objects by assigning each item a circuit number and associating it with a panel board. The symbol or object that is being circuited must be on a visible (not grayed) layer. If the symbol is not on the active layer, the symbol is copied to the active layer, and then the record information is attached. This is designed so that an electrical engineer can use workgroup referencing to access architectural layers with preliminary outlet locations. The engineer can then copy those outlets to the proper layer without re-entering data.
Creating a Circuit
Product: Architect
When creating a circuit, do not include the panel symbol. To create a circuit: 1. Click the Circuiting tool from the MEP tool set. 2. Click on the first item to be circuited. If selecting a custom symbol without a Circuiting record attached, the tool attaches the record to the current symbol, as well as to all subsequent symbols in the circuit. In this case, specify whether an electrical or communication circuit is being created. Based on the items record, the tool determines whether this is an electrical or communication device. The Circuiting Tool dialog box opens.
114
Parameter
Circuit Information Panel Circuit # Trip Wire Size Conduit Size V.A./Watts Remarks Check Voltage and Phase of Circuit Items Draw circuiting lines Overwrite existing object data Object Data Phase/Pole Voltage V.A./Watts Remarks
Description
Enter the circuit information (used on the panel schedule) Select the associated panel Enter the circuit number Enter the trip rating Enter the size of the wire Enter the conduit size Enter the total V.A./Watts rating Enter remarks for the circuit Select to verify that the voltage and phase of circuited items is correct Select to draw connecting circuiting lines Select to apply the current object information to all objects in the circuit Enter parameters for the object being circuited Enter the number of phases/poles Enter the voltage Enter the V.A./Watts for this object Enter remarks for the object
3. Enter the desired information for the circuit and the objects in the circuit. 4. Click OK. The information is transferred to the objects record.
Electrical and Communication Circuiting |

5. Continue clicking on the items to be circuited in the order the circuit loop should be drawn.
115
6. To complete the circuit, click in an empty area of the drawing. Confirm that you wish to place the Home Run marker. The Circuiting tool generates a Home Run marker and phases are denoted as specified.
Home Run marker Circuit
Adding to a Circuit
Product: Architect
To add an item to an existing circuit: 1. Click the Circuiting tool from the MEP tool set. 2. Click the communication or electrical device from which to begin the new circuit connection. A notice displays, asking if additional items are to be added to this circuit. Click Yes.
2nd click
1st click 3rd click
3. Click the item to add to the circuit, and then select the next item in the circuit.
To complete the circuit, click away from any selectable objects. A notice displays asking if you wish to continue. Click No to end this procedure. If adding an item at the end of a circuit, place the third click anywhere on the drawing. The item is chained to the item that previously had the Home Run marker attached. A notice displays, confirming whether to place the Home Run. Click Yes. The Circuiting tool generates a Home Run marker and phases are denoted.
Editing Circuits
Product: Architect
The Edit Circuiting tool modifies existing circuit information. Use this tool to reassign circuit numbers and update the information attached to the circuited elements.
116

To edit existing circuits or a circuited item:
1. Click the Edit Circuiting tool from the MEP tool set. 2. Click on the circuited item to be edited. The Edit Circuit Tool dialog box opens.
Parameter
List of editing operations
Description
Selects the editing operation to perform. Select Edit circuit information only to edit the information which applies to the entire circuit. Select Edit selected item only or Edit all items on the circuit to enter edits which apply only to the selected circuiting item or edit both circuit and circuited object information. Select Delete selected item only or Delete entire circuit to delete the circuited item from the circuit or delete the entire circuit (the circuited items remain on the drawing).
Circuit to Edit Circuit Information Panel Name Circuit # Trip Wire Size Conduit Size V.A./Watts Remarks
Selects the specific circuit to edit; available if selected item has multiple circuit assignments associated with it Enter the circuit information (used on the panel schedule) Select the associated panel Enter the circuit number Enter the trip rating Enter the size of the wire Enter the conduit size Enter the total V.A./Watts rating Enter remarks about the circuit
Sizing Calculators | Parameter

Check Voltage and Phase of Circuit Items Item Data Phase/Pole Voltage V.A./Watts Remarks
117
Description
Select to verify that the voltage and phase of circuit items is correct Enter parameters for the object being circuited Enter the number of phases/poles Enter the voltage Enter the V.A./Watts for this object Enter remarks for the object
3. Select the operation to perform. If there are multiple records attached to this item, select the record to edit from the Circuit To Edit list. The record information displays in the Circuit Tool dialog box. 4. Click OK.
Sizing Calculators
Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect provides sizing calculators for performing calculations and adding drawing specifications without leaving the program. Architect includes a standard database of wire specifications used for the Conductor Sizing and Conduit Sizing calculators. The database contains the names, dimensions, and physical properties of a selected group of wiring types.
Conductor Sizing Calculator Command

Product: Architect
The Conductor Sizing Calculator reports the correct wire size for a given load, based on a single conductor and the length of travel. To perform conductor sizing calculations: 1. Select AEC > Electrical > Conductor Sizing Calc. The Conductor Sizing Calculator dialog box opens.
118
Parameter
Calculate Phase Factor Wire Properties Type/Manuf. Size/Part Number Sectional area of the wire, cmil Approximate AWG Resistance of conductor material at 75c Temperature (c) Amps Length (ft.) Type Voltage Drop Voltage Calculate
Description
Select the type of calculation to perform Specifies the phase factor Enter the known conductor parameters; values returned by the calculation will appear dimmed Select the wire type or manufacturer Select the wire size or the manufacturer part number Enter the cross sectional area of the conductor wire in cmils Enter the approximate AWG (American Wire Gauge) of the conductor Enter the resistance of the conductor material at 75c Enter the operating temperature in Celsius Enter the amp rating Enter the conductor length in feet Select whether the conductor type is Aluminum or Copper, and then enter an Alpha value if other than standard Select whether the voltage drop is a Percentage or Absolute. If a percentage, enter the value. Enter the working voltage Performs the selected calculation
2. Select the type of calculation to perform, based on the current parameters, from the Calculate list.
Sizing Calculators | Calculation

Wire Size Ohms/ft/cmil-ft Voltage Drop Phase Factor Voltage Ampacity Length of Run
119
Description
Provides the sectional area of the wire (cmil) and the approximate AWG for wire sizes below 250 kcml Calculates the resistance per sectional area of wire Calculates the voltage drop across the length of the conductor, either as a percentage or absolute value Provides the phase factor value of the conductor Calculates the voltage value of the conductor Determines the amp rating of the conductor Calculates the allowable length of the conductor specified for the load given
3. Enter the required values in the fields. Fields where the result will be displayed appear dimmed. Some calculations require the selection of the wire type or manufacturer, as well as the wire size or part number. When all the required parameter values are complete, the Calculate button becomes available; click to perform the calculation. 4. The calculation results are displayed. Select another calculation to perform or click Close to exit.
Conduit Sizing Calculator Command

Product: Architect
The Conduit Sizing Calculator reports the proper size conduit(s) required for a given set of wires. To perform conduit sizing calculations: 1. Select AEC > Electrical > Conduit Sizing Calc. The Conduit Sizing Calculator dialog box opens.
2. Using the information contained in the wire specifications database, select a wire type or manufacturer and a wire size or part number. The cross-sectional area of the wire is displayed. 3. Enter the number of conductors of this type and size.
120
4. Click Add to include the conductor type in the conduit. Repeat steps 2 4 to add more conductors to the conduit. 5. Click Remove to remove a selected conductor from the Conductors Currently in Conduit list; click Clear All to remove all conductors from the list. 6. Select a Conduit Type from the list and specify the Number Of Conduits and Conduit stuff percentage. Though a percentage is suggested, this can be modified. 7. The Results section of the dialog box displays the actual and nominal conduit sizes required. 8. When calculations are complete, click Close.
Creating Piping Runs

Product: Architect
Determine the section lengths and amount of material required for piping runs. Piping runs can be drawn by clicking the Piping Run tool on the Objects palette, by drawing a polygon and selecting the Create Piping Runs command, or by drawing a polyline and selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To create a piping run: 1. Draw one or more polygons to represent the piping run. 2. With the polygon(s) selected, choose AEC > Electrical > Create Piping Runs. The piping run results are displayed and can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Conduit Size Material Remarks Show Tag
Description
Specifies the diameter of the conduit Select the piping run material from the list; this selection can be displayed in the piping run tag Specify any remarks to be displayed in the piping run tag Select to display the piping run Conduit Size and Material
Show Remarks Length Section Length Num of Runs Num of Sections Couplings Turns
Select to display the piping run Remarks; Show Tag must be selected in order to display the remarks Displays the length of the piping run Specifies the length of piping run sections; edit this parameter to determine various piping run requirements Specify the number of runs; increase the number to estimate the additional material required Displays the number of sections required Displays the number of couplings required Specifies the type of turns to use for the piping run corners
Panel Scheduling and Diagramming | Parameter

Use Bends Use Elbows Radius 45s / 90s
121
Description
Bends the conduit and includes the bend in the length Counts the number of 45o and 90o elbows and displays the number Specify the bend radius Displays the number of elbow turns (when Use Elbows is selected)
The piping run does not count turns at a junction box (at the location of an electrical object).
Panel Scheduling and Diagramming

Creating a Panel Schedule
Product: Architect
The Create Panel Schedule command generates panel schedules based on the circuiting information assigned to the file. If necessary, modify the dimensions and layout of the panel to conform to existing office standards. To create a panel schedule: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Panel Schedule. The Create Panel Schedule dialog box opens. Specify the panel schedule criteria and click OK.
Parameter
Panel list Place in worksheet Place in Document Choose Schedule Layer Class Panel Style Edit
Description
Select a panel from the list of available panels for creating the schedule Select to place scheduling information in a worksheet resource named with the panel name Select to place a panel schedule on the drawing Indicates the location for placing the panel schedule on the drawing Specifies the layer for placing the schedule Specifies the class for the schedule Select the panel formatting style from the list Changes the panel schedule formatting
122
2. If placing the schedule on the drawing, click at the desired location.
If placing the panel schedule in a worksheet, a worksheet is created with the panel name. If circuiting changes are made, delete the outdated panel schedule and repeat the create panel schedule procedure.
Changing the Panel Schedule Format

Product: Architect
To format a panel schedule: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Panel Schedule. The Create Panel Schedule dialog box opens. 2. Select the panel schedule and its location as described in Creating a Panel Schedule on page 121. 3. Click Edit. 4. The Schedule Formatting dialog box opens. Select the schedule to format from the Schedule list. A list of available fields and, if applicable, the schedules printed name displays.
Panel Scheduling and Diagramming | Parameter

Schedule Printed Name Available Fields Schedule Columns Move > < Move Move Up / Move Down Printed Schedule Width Column Headers Body
123
Description
Select the schedule to format Specifies the name that is printed on the schedule Lists all possible schedule column items Lists, in order, all included schedule columns Moves a selected item from the Available Fields list to the Schedule Columns list Moves a selected item from the Schedule Columns list back to the Available Fields list Moves a selected item in the Schedule Columns list to adjust the list order Specifies the total width of all schedule columns when printed Displays the current font, style, and size for header information in the schedule. Click Change to edit the font format. Displays the current font, style, and size for body text in the schedule. Click Change to edit the font format.
The columns shown in the Column Order list appear in the schedule in order. Panel schedule formatting is stored as a worksheet named Panel Schedule Fmt. This worksheet can be imported, using the Resource Browser, into other files where the same formatting is desired. 5. Click OK to return to the Create Panel Schedule dialog box. Click OK to place the schedule with the specified format.
Creating Panel Riser Diagrams

Product: Architect
Panel riser diagrams summarize the electrical panels and disconnects in a project file. To create a panel riser diagram: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Panel Riser Diag. 2. Click on the drawing to place the panel(s) at that location.
A panel displays the Panel Name, Number of Phases/ Poles, Voltage, Amps, Number of spaces, Device Name, and Circuit where it is connected
A disconnect displays the Disconnect Name, Number of Phases/Poles, Voltage, Amps, Device Name, and Circuit where it is connected
124

Panels and disconnects can be rearranged, edited and annotated; graphics can be added to complete the panel riser diagram. If the panels are regenerated, any edits are lost. Once the panels have been generated, they can be arranged into a completed panel diagram, as seen in the following illustration:
Site Modeling
Sitework Overview
The sitework-related commands allow the development of complex 2D and 3D models of site terrain in VectorWorks Architect and Landmark. Landmark contains certain additional commands. The source data for a site model is the 3D information used to create a representation of the existing site. The information can be in the form of 3D loci, 3D polygons, or surveyor data. The site model object created from the source data contains both 2D and 3D site information, and it can be copied to other layers and files. Special snapshot copies of the site model allow different forms of site model to be shown side by side. When the site model is generated, two forms of the digital terrain model (DTM) are created and can be displayedthe existing DTM and the proposed DTM. The existing DTM is a direct representation of the source data. The proposed DTM is the existing DTM, plus the geometric effects of site modifiers, such as roads and pads. The existing and proposed DTM can be displayed or hidden at creation or from the Object Info palette. Site models use the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) method to connect input data. This method can work with data that are scattered and in clumpsthey do not have to be organized in a rectangular grid. The model uses all the data, without doing approximations, to create a network of triangles. These triangles form the terrain model; the model then performs interpolation to calculate the threading of contour lines. When upgrading a DTM from a previous version of VectorWorks, see Migrating Site Models from Previous Versions on page 483.
Site Model Source Data

Four commands can be used to input source data into the drawing for the development of a site model: Import Survey File, 2D Polys to 3D Contours, 3D Polys to 3D Loci (Landmark only), and Grid Method Entry. The selection of a method depends on the type of source information. In addition, 3D loci or 3D polygons can be used directly as the source data for the site model. No conversion is necessary before using this type of source data. Before creating the site model, the source data can be checked with the Validate 3D Data command to ensure that a valid DTM will be created.
Importing Source Data from an External File

Site model source data can be generated by tabular coordinate information from an external file. This file must be a text file with fields delimited by separators in one of the formats available. To import survey information for use as source data: 1. On the layer to receive the imported data, select Active Layer Scale from the drawing context menu to set the scale, or select the File > Document Settings > Document Setup command (see Document Setup on page 2). 2. Select AEC > Survey Input > Import Survey File. The standard Open File dialog box opens. Select the file to import. The Import Survey File dialog box opens. Specify the file format options, and click OK.
126
| Chapter 6: Site Modeling
Parameter
Data from selected file Line # File format Units Field separator Tab delimited Other character
Description
Displays the first line of data in the selected file Displays the line number of the data displayed; click the < or > button to check each line in the file Select the file format of the imported file Select the unit of the imported file Specifies the file field delimiter Select if fields are separated by tabs If fields are not separated by tabs, select Other character and then enter the character separating each field
As each line of the file is read, a stake object is inserted into the drawing with the appropriate Easting, Northing, and Elevation values. If this is the first time a stake object has been inserted in the drawing, the Stake Object Preferences dialog box opens. Accept the defaults and click OK. Stake objects are simple objects that represent a 3D point in space, with text to display the elevation when in Plan view (see Determining the Elevation of a Point on the Site Model on page 178). In addition to stake objects, 3D polygons and 3D loci can be used as source data for a site model.
Adding Source Data with 2D Polygons

Another way of generating the site model source data is to draw, trace, or import 2D polygons representing contours; then use the 2D Polys to 3D Contours command to convert the polygons to 3D polygons. To generate source data with the 2D Polys to 3D Contours command: 1. Create or import the 2D polygons representing contour lines.
Site Model Source Data |
127
Polylines cannot be used. If contours are drawn with polylines, convert them to polygons first with the Modify > Convert to Polygons command. 2. Select AEC > Survey Input > 2D Polys to 3D Contours. The 2D Poly to 3D Contour Setup dialog box opens. Enter the first elevation and change in elevation between contour lines, and then select the type of object to be created.
Parameter
Start Elevation Interval Create 3D Polygons/3D Loci 3. Click OK.
Description
Indicates the elevation of the lowest contour in the drawing Specifies the change in elevation from one contour line to the next Select whether to create 3D polygons or 3D loci
The Set Elevation dialog box opens, and the first polygon (representing the lowest elevation) in the drawing order is highlighted. If necessary, use the Up or Dn buttons to set the elevation of the highlighted polygon, and then click Next. When prompted, indicate whether to delete the original 2D polygons.
Parameter
Up/Dn Use same height as prev. Next Done
Description
Changes the elevation of the selected polygon Sets the elevation for successive polygons to the same value Selects the next polygon Stops setting polygon elevations; click when all the polygon elevations have been specified
128
4. Repeat for all of the polygons in the drawing. This process can be interrupted by clicking Done. Resume setting elevations by selecting the starting polygon and selecting the 2D Polys to 3D Contours command. Either 3D polygons or loci are created from the 2D polygons, with Z values equal to the assigned elevations. These Z values can be edited in the Object Info Palette if they are incorrect.
Converting 3D Polygons to 3D Loci

Product: Landmark
The 3D Polys to 3D Loci command converts the vertices of 3D polygons into 3D loci. These loci can then be used to create the site model. To create 3D loci from 3D polygons: 1. Select AEC > Survey Input > 3D Polys to 3D Loci. The 3D Poly to 3D Loci Command dialog box opens.
2. To remove the 3D polygons, select Delete original 3D polygons. 3. Click OK. The vertices of any 3D polygons located in the current layer are converted to 3D loci. The loci retain the Z values of the original polygons. These 3D loci can then serve as source data for the site model.
Original 3D polygons
Resulting 3D loci
Adding Source Data by Grid Method Entry

The Grid Method Entry command creates a rectangular grid of points on the screen, and prompts you to enter the elevations of those points. The Create Site Model command then creates a topographical model based on those points. Use this method when the source data is extracted from a paper map. Draw a grid on the map, and then determine the elevation of each grid intersection by interpolation between adjacent contour lines. Use these elevation values to create the grid.
Site Model Source Data |

To generate source data with the Grid Method Entry command: 1. Select AEC > Survey Input > Grid Method Entry. When prompted, click at the upper left corner of the grid. 2. After the starting point is picked, the Point Entry Grid Setup dialog box opens.
129
Enter the number of rows and columns of points to be created, as well as the distance between the points (Grid Spacing), and then click OK. A grid of red 3D loci is created. 3. The Enter Z Values dialog box opens.
The first point on the drawing, at the upper left hand corner, is automatically selected. Enter the elevation of the point, and click Next. The elevation is applied to that point, and then the second point in that row is automatically selected. Enter the elevation for that point; continue until elevations have been entered for all of the points in the grid, and then click Done.
Validating 3D Source Data

Prior to creating the site model, problems can be avoided by checking the 3D source data for errors with the Validate 3D Data command. Even if a site model already exists, the source data can be checked. If problems occur due to erroneous DTM source data, error alerts are automatically displayed. A site model with errors can still be created; however, results may not be as expected. The following problems can generate errors: Duplicate 3D data points or polygons 3D data points that are coincident or vertically placed Crossing contours (3D polygons) in the 3D source data To validate 3D source data: 1. Select the source data (3D loci, 3D polygons, or stake objects) to be checked.
130
2. Select AEC > Terrain > Validate 3D Data. 3. If the source data are valid, a dialog box states that no problems were found. Proceed with creating the site model as described in Creating the Site Model on page 131. 4. If there are errors in the source data, the Problems with DTM Source Data dialog box opens. Problems encountered are listed, and some conditions have an associated button for correcting each error by modifying or deleting the erroneous data. If a site model already exists, the problem data can be viewed by selecting the site model and selecting Modify > Edit Group. Problem data conditions are highlighted and annotated. 5. When problem correction is complete, click Close. Select Validate 3D Data again to ensure that the errors have been corrected.
Filtering 3D Polygons
If the existing site model is created from 3D polygons (not 3D loci), processing time can be decreased by removing redundant polygon vertices within a specified tolerance. For example, this removes extra vertices in straight or nearly-straight segments of imported 3D polygons used as source data. This feature does not significantly change the appearance of the site model, but can dramatically decrease the time it takes to process the model. To filter redundant 3D polygon vertices: 1. Select the 3D polygon(s). (The original polygons remain unchanged.) 2. Select AEC > Terrain > Filter 3D Polygons. The Filter Selected 3D Polygons dialog box opens.
Parameter
Filter Deviation Distance Put Filter Results on Layer 3. Click OK.
Description
Specifies the tolerance for removing unnecessary vertices Select the layer where the filtered polygons will be placed
Redundant vertices are removed from the 3D polygon(s) and the results are sent to the layer specified.
Creating the Site Model |
131
Creating the Site Model

Creating a Site Model from the Source Data
Once source data has been obtained for the site model, the site model can be created. To create a site model from source data: 1. Ensure that valid source data exists. The site model can be created from 3D loci, 3D polygons, stake objects, or by one of the methods described in Site Model Source Data on page 125. Verify that there are no problems with the source data with the Validate 3D Data command (see Validating 3D Source Data on page 129). 2. Select the source data. 3. Select AEC > Terrain > Create Site Model. The Create Site Model dialog box opens. Specify the site model settings.
132

Description
Enter a name for the site model object Leaves a copy of the source data in the layer (the site model always retains a copy of the source data in its profile group). This parameter displays only during initial site model creation.
Parameter
Site Model Name Keep Original Source Data in Layer Settings Minor Contour Interval Major Contour Multiple Start Contour Offset
Specifies the standard contour line placement interval Specifies the placement interval of major (heavy) contour lines Indicates the creation offset for the first contour line. The contours are measured from this point. (Usually this number is 0; entering an odd value allows contour intervals to be set with odd numbers) Specifies the highest contour elevation to be displayed. No contours are created if the maximum elevation is lower than the minimum elevation, but this can be useful for cut and fill calculations (for example, for pond or backfill volumes). Specifies the lowest contour elevation to be displayed Indicates the reference elevation used to define the bottom of a site model when the 3D Mesh Solid style is selected in 3D Display Settings; set to zero for normal cut and fill calculations Determines the placement of the flow arrows Sets the grid (mesh) size; also determines flow arrow placement When selecting a triangulation method for 2D and/or 3D site model display, sets the distance for adding new points to the contours. Enter zero to use the original contour points for triangulation. Entering a value that is too low may result in long calculation times.
Maximum Elevation
Minimum Elevation Datum Elevation
Flow Arrow Spacing 3D Grid Spacing Smoothing Interval
2D Display Settings
Display Select whether to display the existing site model only, proposed site model only, or both existing and proposed site models. The display option can be changed later from the Object Info palette. Displays only the current model Displays only the proposed model (the current model changed by any site modifiers) Displays both the proposed model and the existing model; this option is useful when using the site model for a grading plan, with different existing and proposed topographical line styles Select a 2D DTM display mode Draws contour lines Smooths contour lines
Existing Only Proposed Only Proposed + Existing
Style 2D Contour 2D Contour (smoothed)
Creating the Site Model | Parameter

2D Contour (colored elevations)
133
Description
Draws contour lines and colors the elevations for conducting an elevation analysis (elevation analysis parameters are specified by clicking Graphic Properties and selecting the Site Analysis tab; see Setting Site Model Graphic Properties on page 134) Represents the surface as triangular facets For 2D triangle display, colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope analysis (slope analysis parameters are specified by clicking Graphic Properties and selecting the Site Analysis tab; see Setting Site Model Graphic Properties on page 134) Draws 2D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing Interval Draws 2D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing Interval, and colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope analysis Adds arrows to show the downward direction for drainage analysis Labels major 2D contour line elevations When labels are selected for display, labels are parallel to the topography lines Draws a closed 2D polygon along the hull (outer edge) of the DTM
2D Triangle 2D Triangle (colored slopes)
2D Triangulated Contours 2D Triangulated Contours (colored slopes) Show Flow arrows Show Labels Parallel to the topo line Draw Hull
3D Display Settings
Display No 3D Display Existing Only Proposed Only Style 3D Contour 3D Grid 3D Mesh solid 3D Triangle 3D Triangles (colored slopes) 3D Extruded Contour Select the 3D site model display. The display option can be changed later from the Object Info palette. Displays only the 2D site model, with no 3D component Displays the existing 3D site model Displays the proposed 3D site model Select a 3D DTM display mode Draws the DTM using horizontal 3D polygons Draws the DTM using a regular grid (mesh) of squares (closed 3D polygons); allows the mesh to be colored, filled, and rendered with shadows Groups 3D triangles to form a VectorWorks mesh; a skirt and bottom are added to create a valid solid Generates 3D triangles with the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) method; this method is the most accurate, as it involves no interpolation Generates 3D triangles with the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) method, and colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope analysis Creates horizontal solids with a thickness equal to the contour interval; top edges run along contour lines or the hull. This creates a layer cake or chipboard model effect. Draws 3D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing Interval
3D Triangulated Contours
134

Description
Draws 3D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing Interval, and colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope analysis Superimposes a 3D grid on the model; specify the grid spacing value in Spacing Displays 3D grid squares with a fill; Show 3D Grid does not need to be selected to display a filled grid Superimposes a 3D contour on the model
Parameter
3D Triangulated Contours (colored slopes) Show 3D Grid Fill Show 3D Contour Use Site Modifiers on All Layers Same Layer as Site Model only Graphic Properties
Modifies the proposed site model with modifiers from any layer in the file Modifies the proposed site model with modifiers that exist only on the site model layer Specifies the DTM appearance, along with slope and elevation analysis parameters (see Setting Site Model Graphic Properties on page 134)
4. Click OK. A site model is created in the active layer and displays as specified.
Setting Site Model Graphic Properties

The site model 2D and 3D graphic display properties can be specified to obtain the desired graphic component colors and line styles. In addition, the colors can be specified for conducting elevation and slope analyses. These graphic properties can be set when the site model is first created, or changed later from the Object Info palette. To set the site model graphic properties: 1. If creating a new site model, click Graphic Properties from the Create Site Model dialog box. If editing a current site model, click Site Model Settings from the Object Info palette, and then click Graphic Properties from the Site Model Settings dialog box. The Graphic Properties dialog box opens.
Creating the Site Model |
135
2. On the Site Model tab, the 2D (existing and proposed) and 3D site model display can be completely customized by selecting the color and line style for all components, and the marker style for flow arrows.
Major contour Hull Minor contour
2D Triangles Flow arrow
2D Contour Style
2D Triangle Style
136
3D Fill
3D Triangles
3D Sides/Bottom
3D Grid Style
3D Mesh Solid Style
3. On the Site Analysis tab, set the slope and elevation analysis graphic parameters. A slope analysis shows the slope change of the DTM with color ranges indicating the steepest to the shallowest slope. An elevation analysis shows the elevation change of the DTM as a gradient of color from the minimum to the maximum elevation.
Setting Site Model Properties | Parameter

Slope Colors Number of slope categories Category __ maximum slope % Slopes exceeding maximum category Elevation Colors Minimum Elevation Color Maximum Elevation Color
137
Description
Specify the slope analysis settings Indicate the number of slope levels to use in the analysis For each category, indicate the maximum slope percentage and its associated color; slopes below the specified percentage will be colored as specified Slopes above the maximum categorys percentage will receive the selected color Specify the elevation analysis color settings; a color gradient from the minimum to the maximum elevation is applied to the site mode for the elevation analysis Select the starting color for the lowest elevation Select the starting color for the highest elevation
4. Click OK to close the Graphic Properties dialog box. 5. To display a slope analysis, select a 2D display Style of 2D or 3D Triangle (colored slopes) or 2D or 3D Triangulated Contours (colored slopes) for the site model. To display an elevation analysis, select a 2D display Style of 2D Contour (colored elevations) for the site model.
Slope analysis
Elevation analysis
Create a snapshot of the site model to easily display a slope or elevation analysis along with the site model (see Creating a Site Model Snapshot on page 139).
Setting Site Model Properties

Site Model Properties
The site model object can be copied, cut, pasted, rotated, and deleted like other objects. In 2D Top/Plan view, the 2D Display selected for the site model is shown; if both existing and proposed models are selected for display, they are superimposed. In any 3D view, the 3D Display selected (if any) is shown.
138
If RenderWorks is installed, the site model can be textured from the Render tab of the Object Info palette. The texture is applied to the surface of the site model, and is scaled to fit the site model bounding box. To see the original source data that were used to create the site model, select Modify > Edit Group. Changes can be made to the source data, and the source data can be validated (see Validating 3D Source Data on page 129). Return to the site model by clicking Exit Group at the top right of the drawing window. Click Update in the Object Info palette to reflect any source data changes in the site model. Double-click on a site model to access the Site Model settings dialog box. Select the Create Drape Surface command to create a smoothed version of the DTM contours (see Creating a Drape Surface on page 296 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). The parameters of a selected site model can be changed from the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Site Model Settings
Description
Opens the Site Model Settings dialog box. The settings here (and the related graphic properties settings) are identical to those specified at site model creation, and are described in Creating the Site Model on page 131. Note: The option to keep or delete original source data is only available at site model creation.
Update Create a Snapshot 2D Display 2D Style 3D Display 3D Style Area Display Type Projected Area (Existing) Projected Area (Proposed) Surface Area (Existing) Surface Area (Proposed) Volume Display Type Cut Volume Fill Volume
Updates the site model and any associated snapshots, when the existing site data has changed or site modifiers have been added or changed Creates a snapshot of the site model with the current site model settings, for displaying different versions of the site model (see Creating a Site Model Snapshot on page 139) Select the display type for the 2D site model Select the display style for the 2D site model Select the display type (or no display) for the 3D site model Select the display type for the 3D site model Select the units for displaying the projected and surface areas for existing and proposed site models Displays the projected area (the area projected in plan view) of the existing site model Displays the projected area of the proposed site model (when one exists) Displays the 3D surface area of the existing site model Displays the 3D surface area of the proposed site model (when one exists) Select the units for displaying the cut and fill volumes When the proposed site model has been modified by a site modifier, displays the volume cut from the site model When the proposed site model has been modified, displays the volume of fill added to the site model
Setting Site Model Properties | Parameter

Net C&F Volume
139
Description
Displays the net cut or fill volume, indicating whether fill is required or extra cut volume needs to be removed from the site
To change the font size of the contour labels, set the size from the Text > Size menu, and then click Update in the Object Info palette of a selected site model. To create a custom hull shape for the DTM, select the site model and select Modify > Edit Group. Using the 2D Polygon tool, draw the desired hull. Exit the group and update the site model; with a contour style of 2D display and the Draw Hull option selected, the custom hull displays.
Creating a Site Model Snapshot

Creating a snapshot of the site model allows several display styles of the DTM to be viewed at one time. The snapshot views cannot be edited directly; however, if the original site model is modified, the changes apply to all related snapshots automatically upon updating.
To create a site model snapshot: 1. Set the properties of the site model as desired for the snapshot. The snapshot is created based on the current site model settings. 2. From the Object Info palette of a selected site model, click Create a Snapshot. 3. The snapshot is created on the active layer, over the original site model. The Object Info palette of a selected snapshot displays the parameters of the original site model, and cannot be changed for the snapshot (with the exception of the display units). 4. Any changes to the original site model are reflected in associated snapshots when clicking Update in the Object Info palette of the selected original site model.
Sending Objects to the Model Surface

Once the site model is complete, objects, such as cars, trees, or other site fixtures, may need to be placed on the surface of the model. For this purpose, use the Send to Surface command. This command is effective for 3D loci, 3D polygons, extrudes, sweeps, meshes, slabs, light objects, and symbols with a 3D component. If a 2D polyline or 2D polygon is selected, it will first be converted into its 3D equivalent before being sent to the surface.
140
To send an object to the surface: 1. Make the layer with the site model object the active layer. 2. Place the object on the ground plane or change to Top view. Move the object to the desired location on the site model. 3. Select AEC > Terrain > Send to Surface. The correct Z value is given to place the object on the surface of the site model.
Move the object to the desired location
Modifying the Site Model

Modifying the Site Model
As discussed in Sitework Overview on page 125, when the site model is generated, two different display modes of the site model object are availableexisting and proposed. The proposed DTM is a calculation of the existing data altered by site modifiers. Site modifiers are specific objects with capabilities to modify the site model. Site modifiers can be placed on any layer; however, the site model properties specify whether modifiers in another layer can affect the site model (see Creating the Site Model on page 131).
Creating a Pad
A pad is a 3D polygon representing the shape of an element which is to be added to, and normally, modifies, the site model. The proposed site model is modified when the site model is updated. Pads can be drawn with the Site Modifier tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To create a pad: 1. Click the Site Modifier tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Draw the pad object. Pads can be drawn closed or open (open pads are sometimes called break lines).
If this is the first time the Site Modifier tool has been used, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the defaults and click OK. 3. In the Object Info palette, select Pad in the Config field. 4. If the pad is sloping, enter the Slope value (positive for rising, negative for falling), and select the slope definition unit (Angle or Percent in the SlopeDef field). A slope arrow is automatically drawn on the pad, indicating the direction of the slope. The bulls-eye at the start of the slope arrow indicates the zero elevation point of the sloping pad. Select the control points of the slope arrow to move either end. Deselect Show Slope Arrow to hide the slope arrow.
Parameter
Config Elevation Slope
Description
Indicates the type of modifier object Sets the reference elevation of the pad Determines the angle of the pad; if the value is zero, the pad has no slope, and the following two parameters are not displayed
142
| Chapter 7: Modifying the Site Model

Description
Select Angle or Percent to determine the slope units If selected, displays a modifiable slope arrow and the current slope in Top/Plan view; Show Slope Arrow only displays if the slope value is other than zero
Slope directional control point
Parameter
SlopeDef Show Slope Arrow
Reference Elevation control point
The Site Modifier tool generates a 3D pad polygon modifier that is always planar. 5. Normally, create a control fence around the pad (see Creating a Control Fence on page 143).
Pad
Control fence
Site modifiers before updating the site model
6. The proposed DTM requires updating to reflect the pad modification. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
The proposed site model has been modified by the pad, but only the area within the control fence enclosure has been changed
The existing site model is indicated with dashed lines in this example
2D view
Rendered 3D view
Modifying the Site Model |

For predictable results, pads should not overlap. All pads should be either completely inside or completely outside of all control fences. Pads, including those that may be incorporated into plug-in objects (such as landscape walls) cannot cross outside a control fence.
143
Creating a Control Fence

A control fence is a 2D polygon which limits the area of topographical transition between existing site data and site modifiers enclosed in the fence; it can be thought of as a limit of construction. Outside the fence, the site remains unchanged; within the fence, the site model is defined by the pads contained within the fence. A control fence can overlap or enclose another control fence, but should not cross a pad or grader. Control fences are created automatically around certain site modifiers, such as roads. Control fences can also be drawn with the Site Modifier tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To create a control fence: 1. Click the Site Modifier tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Draw the control fence.
Control fence
If this is the first time the Site Modifier tool has been used, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the defaults and click OK. 3. In the Object Info palette, select Fence from the Config field. 4. The proposed DTM requires updating to reflect the control fence modification. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
144
Without control fence
With control fence
Creating a Control Fence Automatically

Product: Landmark
Because a control fence is often associated with a pad or other type of site modifier, VectorWorks Landmark can create a control fence automatically around a site modifier, based on specific parameters. A control fence can be created with a gradual sloping transition from the existing site contours to the modifier, placed at a variable or fixed distance from the modifier. The control fence cuts and fills the site model to create a constant slope (batter slope). To create a control fence automatically around one or more site modifier(s): 1. Select the site modifier(s) which require a control fence. Valid modifiers include pads, road objects, massing models, and landscape walls. 2. Select AEC > Terrain > Create Fence from Pad. 3. The Create Fences from Pads dialog box opens. Select the control fence parameters.
Parameter
Fence Offset Control Distance
Description
Creates a control fence at a fixed offset distance
Modifying the Site Model | Parameter

Batter Slope Max. Offset Max. Slope Slope Control Options Use Midpoints Test Increment Enables additional testing points for a more uniform slope Specifies the number of midpoints to test; a smaller increment distance increases the accuracy of the slope calculations, but can also increase the time to create the control fence (the minimum increment is 12)
145
Description
Creates a variable offset fence based on slope (the slope variation determines the offset; the fence is located at the intersection of the slope and the existing terrain) Sets the fixed offset distance for Distance offset control, or specifies the maximum offset distance allowed for Batter Slope offset control For Batter Slope offset control, specifies the maximum allowable slope (in degrees)
4. Click OK to create the control fence. 5. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
Pads
Control fence
Creating a Grading Area

The grader object helps to balance the cut and fill so that the site does not require earth to be moved in or out. A grader applies an even thickness of fill for the site over its area. Graders can be drawn with the Site Modifier tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434).
146
To create a grading area: 1. Create the site model and add any modifiers, such as pads and roads, and update the proposed site model by clicking Update from the Object Info palette of the selected site model.
2. The initial cut and fill volumes are displayed in the Object Info palette (see Site Model Properties on page 137). 3. Click the Site Modifier tool from the Site Planning tool set. 4. Draw the grader area. If this is the first time the Site Modifier tool has been used, the Object Preferences dialog box opens. Accept the defaults and click OK. 5. In the Object Info palette, select Grader from the Config field. Adjust the elevation of the grader up or down depending on whether fill is required or excess fill is present.
Parameter
Config Elevation
Description
Indicates the type of modifier object Sets the reference elevation of the grader
6. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
Grader
7. Evaluate the results of the grader by checking the Net C&F Volume results in the Object Info palette of the selected site model. If the grader value needs adjustment, select the grader and enter a new Elevation value in the Object Info palette.

8. Continue adjusting the grader elevation until a balanced cut and fill volume is achieved.
147
Creating a Texture Bed

The texture bed site modifier converts a 2D polygon into an area of the drawing that can be textured. For example, texture a lawn with grass, a terrace with bricks, or a sand trap with sand for a photorealistic rendered appearance. Texture beds can be drawn with the Site Modifier tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). RenderWorks is required for creating and rendering texture beds. To create a texture bed: 1. Click the Site Modifier tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Draw the texture bed.
3. In the Object Info palette, select Texture Bed from the Config field.
Parameter
Config Elevation Class
Description
Indicates the type of modifier object Sets the reference elevation of the texture bed above the DTM surface Specify the class for the texture bed; the indicated class should have a texture applied, with Use Textures At Creation selected
See Textures and Shaders on page 597 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on textures. 4. The proposed DTM requires updating to reflect the texture bed modification. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette. 5. Render the model with a RenderWorks rendering mode to see the texture bed.
Creating a Massing Model

The Massing Model tool creates a building shell for illustrative purposes. This is an easy way to create a representative or context building when a detailed building is not required. Building models can also be created by
148
drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). A massing model can be a site modifier. To create a building model: 1. Click the Massing Model tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. In Top/Plan view, click to begin drawing the outline of the building. Continue clicking to draw the shell polyline. Double-click, or click once at the start point, to end the polyline.
3. The massing model parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Name Show in Plan Label
Description
Enter a building name for labeling Select whether to show the building roof or footprint in Plan view Select a text label, if any, for the building shell in Plan view; move the text control point to reposition the text
Text control point
Height NumFloors Wall Class Roof Overhang Roof Thickness Roof Class Pitched Roof Eave Style Roof Slope Draw Floors
Specifies the building height (to the eave) Specifies the number of floors in the building Select a class to use for wall style attributes Specifies the distance the roof extends from the building Indicates the roof thickness Select a class to use for hipped roof style attributes Select to add a roof to the building shell Select an eave style from the list Specifies the roof pitch angle in degrees Select to draw floors in the building

Slab Thickness Use Site Modifiers Gross Area Polyline parameters
149
Description
Specifies the floor thickness Adds a pad and control fence to the base of the building and allows the building to modify the site model Displays the gross area value for all the floors Edits the object vertices. See Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. If the massing model is used as a site modifier, the proposed DTM requires updating. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
Creating a Road
Product: Landmark
A road object can be set to be a site model modifier, and changes the proposed DTM when the site model is updated. Creating a road is a multi-step procedure. The centerline of the road is defined with a polyline, and then stakes are added. The elevation of the stakes, which are initially set to the surface of the site model, can be modified before the road is created. Finally, the site model is updated and modified by the road object. A Roadway (NURBS) object offers a simpler, but less exacting, way of inserting a road on a DTM, and is available in both VectorWorks Architect and Landmark. See Creating NURBS Roadways on page 154 for more information.
Creating the Road Centerline

Product: Landmark
The road design elements can be created on a separate layer to facilitate modifications later. To create the road centerline: 1. If desired, create a new layer for the road by selecting Tools > Organization. The layer scale should be the same as the site model layer scale. Set the site model layer to visible, and select View > Layer Options > Show/Snap Others. 2. Using the Polyline tool, create a polyline that represents the road shape. For more information on polylines, see Creating Polylines on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Interior vertices of the polyline must be arc-smoothed (no Bzier or cubic vertices).
150
The road must be contained within the site model boundary.
Placing Station Points Along the Road Polyline

Product: Landmark
VectorWorks Landmark places station points (stake objects) along the selected polyline at a specified interval. To place station points: 1. Select the polyline, and then select AEC > Roads > Station on Polyline. The Place Station Points Along Polyline dialog box opens. This command places stations at 100 (or 30.48 m) intervals. In addition, partial station points can be placed at smaller intervals. Enter the interval between partial stations and select a labeling option for the curve information.
Parameter
Partial Station Interval Create individual curve labels Create circular curve data table No curve data
Description
Indicates the spacing interval between partial station points Creates curve data tables at each polyline curve Creates a Station Worksheet with the curve data; the worksheet number corresponds to the polyline number No curve data tables or tangent guide lines are created
2. Click OK to create the station points along the polyline. If this is the first time a stake has been placed in the file, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and click OK. Stake properties are described in Determining the Elevation of a Point on the Site Model on page 178). Each station point is labeled. If curve data tables were created, they can be selected and moved if necessary.
151
Tangential guide line
Curve data table
Station point (stake)
3. The stakes have all been set to the elevation of the site model; the next step is to automatically set the road stake elevations as described in Setting Stake Elevations on page 151.
Setting Stake Elevations

Product: Landmark
In Placing Station Points Along the Road Polyline on page 150, the stake elevations were set according to the site model; in real situations, a road is often set to a grade other than natural grade. The Align Stakes Vertically command sets the elevation of the stakes to a specific plane. To set the stake elevations (with a linear alignment): 1. Set the elevation of only one of the terminal stakes (one of the stakes at the ends of the segment to align) by selecting the stake and entering its elevation in the Object Info palette. If a DTM was present when the Station on Polyline command was executed, the elevation of the stake is set to the proposed DTM elevation for reference. 2. In the segment to align, press the Shift key to select both the first and last stake (the stakes at either end of the desired elevation alignment), and then select AEC > Roads > Align Stakes Vertically. The Align Stakes Vertically dialog box opens.
3. Enter either a slope value in percentage for the road or the elevation of the last stake, and click OK. The elevations of the stakes located between the selected stakes are set to the specified plane.
152
Creating the Road

Product: Landmark
This procedure creates the road by automatically making an individual road object between each stake. The road follows the centerline polyline, and is set to the elevations specified by the stakes. To create the road: 1. Select the center polyline or any of the station points, and select AEC > Roads > Create Road from Stakes. The Create Road from Stakes dialog box opens. Enter the road parameters.
Parameter
Width Curb Height/Width Paving Thickness
Description
Specifies the road width between the curbs Specifies the height and width of the road curbs Indicates the thickness of the road paving
2. Click OK. The polyline and stakes are used to create a road section between adjacent stakes. If this is the first time a road has been created in the file during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens for creating straight and curved roads. Accept the default values and click OK in both dialog boxes. 3. Once created, the straight and curved sections of the road need to become site modifiers by selecting the road sections and then selecting Use Site Modifiers in the Object Info palette. Use the Custom Selection command to select the straight and curved road sections; see Creating Custom Selection Scripts on page 561 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. The fence offset can be set manually, or fences can be turned off and created separately using the Create Fence from Pad command (see Creating a Control Fence Automatically on page 144). When site modifiers are used, each road section contains a pad (see Creating a Pad on page 141 and Creating a Control Fence on page 143).
153
Parameter
Z Radius (curved roads) Width (curved roads) Road Length (straight roads) Paving Width (straight roads) Curb Height Curb Width Paving Thickness Rise Show Joints Use Site Modifiers Use Fence Left/Right Fence Offset Sweep (curved roads)
Description
Elevation of the first stake in the segment Arc radius of the segment (set by the command) Width of the segment (set by the command) Length of segment (set by the command) Width of the segment (specified in the Create Road from Stakes dialog box) Sets the height of the curb (specified in the Create Road from Stakes dialog box) Sets the width of the curb (specified in the Create Road from Stakes dialog box) Sets the thickness of the road (specified in the Create Road from Stakes dialog box) Difference in height between stake elevations Displays the connecting joint between road sections When selected, creates a pad and control fence for each section to modify the site Places a control fence with the road Controls the fence offsets on either side of the road Sets the degree (arc angle) of the sweep of the segment
Stakes should not be moved (except in elevation) when using the Create Road from Stakes command. If an additional stake is required, add a vertex point to the polyline, provide an elevation value, and run the Create Road from Stakes command again.
154
4. The proposed DTM requires updating. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette. If the road was created on a different layer from the site model, click Site Model Settings from the Object Info palette and ensure that Use Site Modifiers on All Layers is selected. The proposed site model is updated. If Use Site Modifiers was selected for the road sections, the contour lines are adjusted to rise or fall to meet the level of the road.
Use the Attributes palette to add a solid fill color to the road
Creating NURBS Roadways

Roadway objects can be used to modify the site model. Roadway objects can be drawn with the various roadway tools on the Objects palette, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434).
155
One of the most flexible roadway objects is the Roadway (NURBS) tool, which uses NURBS curves to define the road shape. The Roadway (NURBS) object, while easy to edit, does not represent accurate alignments of low-speed roadways, which are typically constructed with arcs (constant radius) and tangents (straight lines); VectorWorks Landmark provides these roadway objects (see Creating a Road on page 149). A suggested process for using the Roadway (NURBS) object is: Create the road in Top/Plan view Select the Send to Surface command to set the road to the existing terrain Select Redistribute and Smooth Curve from the Object Info palette of the selected roadway once or twice to smooth out the road slightly, so it does not follow every hill and valley in the existing terrain Manually reshape the road in 3D as required (to match other road elevations, garage elevations, etc.) Only select Redistribute Stations for more or fewer stations annotated in Top/Plan view. Fewer stations are easier to work with when sketching and reshaping, but a road construction company might require more stations to be specified. Redistribute Stations is also useful to ensure that the station spacing is equal after reshaping the road. To create a road with the Roadway (NURBS) object: 1. Click the Roadway (NURBS) tool from the Site Planning tool set. The following modes are available.
NURBS Curve by Interpolation Point NURBS Curve Degree Setting
NURBS Curve by Control Point
See NURBS Curves on page 274 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Click in the drawing file to set the start point of the road, and then click to set the position of each additional NURBS vertex. Double-click the last point to complete creation of the roadway (NURBS) object. The roadway (NURBS) object properties dialog box opens. Click OK to accept the default settings. 3. The roadway (NURBS) properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Z height Road Length Paving Width Paving Height Curb Width Curb Height Left Guardrail Right Guardrail
Description
Adjusts the elevation of the entire road Displays the length of the road Specifies the overall width of the paved road surface (without curbs) Specifies the road paving thickness (without curbs) Specifies the curb or shoulder width Specifies the curb or shoulder height Adds a guardrail to the left side of the road Adds a guardrail to the right side of the road
156

Description
The NURBS curve vertices are used as the station points; select to display the station points. In 2D, stations display as loci with text displaying the point elevation. In 3D, the stations display as round stakes. Select for the Roadway (NURBS) object to create its own pad modifier Select for the Roadway (NURBS) object to create its own fence modifier, which controls the zone in which the terrain transitions between the existing elevation and the road elevation Specify whether to create an offset or slope fence When creating an offset fence, specify the distance from the road to the control fence When creating a slope fence, specify the batter slope Select the class for the paved portion of the road Select the class for the curb or shoulder Redistributes the stations at a specified spacing interval Redistributes the station points at a specified spacing interval and smooths the NURBS curve Click to set the Z value of the stations to the surface of the DTM. The stations can be set to either the surface of the existing DTM, or to the surface of the proposed DTM, which may have been altered by modifiers. If the stations are sent to the surface of a proposed DTM which has been changed by modifiers, it may be necessary to deselect Create Pad for DTM and Create Fence for DTM for the Roadway (NURBS) in order to prevent site modifier errors caused by crossing pads or fences.
Parameter
Show Stations
Create Pad for DTM Create Fence for DTM
Fence Method Fence Offset Fence Slope Paving Class Curb Class Redistribute Stations Redistribute and Smooth Curve Send Stations to Surface
Align Stations Vertically
Sets the elevation of the indicated station points to a specific plane. As the starting and ending stations are indicated, a red line previews the included station points. The % Grade indicates the grade that will be set between station points. Edits the roadway NURBS curve
NURBS curve parameters
4. If necessary, use the 3D Reshape tool to modify the locations of the vertices after object creation, or use the vertex editing controls on the Object Info palette to move the vertices or change the degree of vertices. 5. Update the site model. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
157
Creating Landscape Walls

Product: Landmark
A landscape wall object (retaining wall) can be set to be a site model modifier. It changes the proposed DTM when the site model is updated. Straight, arc, and Bzier landscape walls can be drawn using the landscape walls tools, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). Place the different types of landscape walls next to each other to achieve a particular design or effect. To create a row of straight and curved landscape walls, use the Objects from Polyline command.
Straight Landscape Walls

Product: Landmark
To insert a straight landscape wall: 1. Click the Landscape Wall tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click and drag to define the length and angle of the landscape wall. Click again to set the end point. If this is the first time the tool is used during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and click OK. The straight landscape wall parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Top width
Left pitch
Right pitch Cross section
Parameter
Z Rot
Description
Elevation of starting point of wall Angle of rotation of wall
158

Description
Total length of all wall sections in the object Width of wall at top (see diagram) When the wall starting point and ending point are different, this parameter indicates the height of the step between sections Wall height above Z value Difference in height between wall starting and ending points Angle of wall on left and right sides (see diagram); for a straight wall with site modifiers, the left side is always the side that retains earth Adds a pad and control fence to each wall section and allows the landscape wall to modify the site model Places a control fence with the wall Controls the fence offsets on either side of the wall (applies only when site modifiers are used) Displays the connecting joints between wall sections
Parameter
Length Top Width Step Height Wall Height Rise Left/Right Pitch Use Site Modifiers Use Fence Left/Right Fence Offset Show Joints
Arc Landscape Walls

Product: Landmark
To insert an arc landscape wall: 1. Click the Landscape Wall Arc tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click to define the placement of the arc landscape wall and click again to set the rotation. If this is the first time the tool is used during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and click OK. The landscape wall arc parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Top Width
diu s
Inside pitch
Outside pitch
Arc sweep angle
Ra
Cross section
Parameter
Z Radius Top Width
Description
Elevation of starting point of wall Radius of all wall sections Width of wall at top (see diagram)

Step Height Wall Height Rise Inside/Outside Pitch Show Joints Retained Side Arc Sweep Use Site Modifiers Use Fence Left/Right Fence Offset
159
Description
When the wall starting point and ending point are different, this parameter indicates the height of the step between sections Wall height above Z value Difference in height between wall starting and ending points Angle of wall on the inside and outside (see diagram); for an arc wall with site modifiers, the side of the wall that retains earth must be selected in Retained Side Displays the connecting joints between wall sections For an arc wall with site modifiers, select the side of the wall that retains earth Angle, in degrees, of arc (see diagram) Adds a pad and control fence to each wall section and allows the landscape wall to modify the site model Places a control fence with the wall Controls the fence offsets on either side of the wall (applies only when site modifiers are used)
Bzier Landscape Walls

Product: Landmark
To insert a Bzier landscape wall: 1. Click the Landscape Wall Bezier tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click and drag to define the length and angle of the landscape wall. Click again to set the end point. If this is the first time the tool is used during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and click OK. 3. Adjust the control points of the Bzier wall by clicking and dragging to obtain the desired curvature.
Control points
The Bzier landscape wall parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Top width
Left pitch
Right pitch Cross section
160

Description
Elevation of starting point of wall Total length of all wall sections Width of wall at top (see diagram) Wall height above Z value Select a 3D display resolution; low resolution displays fastest, but high resolution provides the best quality Difference in height between wall starting and ending points Angle of wall on left and right sides (see diagram); for a Bzier wall with site modifiers, the left side is always the side that retains earth Displays the connecting joints between wall sections Adds a pad and control fence to each wall section and allows the landscape wall to modify the site model Places a control fence with the wall Controls the fence offsets on either side of the wall (applies only when site modifiers are used)
Parameter
Z Wall Length Top Width Wall Height Resolution Rise Left/Right Pitch Show Joints Use Site Modifiers Use Fence Left/Right Fence Offset
Creating Hardscape Objects

Product: Landmark
A hardscape object is comprised of paved areas with joint patterns and optional borders. A hardscape object can be drawn with the Hardscape tool, or by creating a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). The hardscape object can modify the site model. To create a hardscape object: 1. Click the Hardscape tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click Preferences from the Mode bar to specify the default Hardscape tool parameters for this session. The Hardscape Object Settings dialog box opens.
161
Parameter
Definition Name ID Tag Style
Description
Enter a name for the hardscape object, which displays as the ID in the ID tag Select the ID tag display style. Select ID Only to display the name of the hardscape object only (as defined in the Name field). Select ID-Area(s) to display the hardscape object name, area and, if applicable, the area of the border. Select ID-Area(s)-Perim to display the hardscape object name, perimeter length and, if applicable, the area of the border. To display the ID tag, select Right or Left in the Tag Display field of the Object Info palette. Note: The ID tag is automatically classed to the Landscape-Spec class.
Configuration Boundary/ Pathway
Sets the boundary and pathway parameters for the hardscape object Boundary defines the hardscape object with a user-defined polyline as the outer edge of the hardscape object (e.g. define regular or irregular patio areas), while Pathway defines the hardscape object with a user-defined polyline as an alignment for a linear path
Boundary
Pathway
162

Description
Width of the pathway hardscape object Offset of the pathway centerline from the placement line Select the main joint pattern
Parameter
Width Offset Joint Pattern
None
Flagstone
Pavers-Grid
Pavers-Running
Hatch
Stipple
The Set Joint Pattern Options dialog box opens when Flagstone, Pavers-Grid, or Pavers-Running is selected. Enter the pattern size and angle and click OK. The joint pattern origin has a control point marked with a red locus for identification. The joint pattern origin is editable.
The Choose Fill dialog box opens when Hatch or Stipple is selected. The stipple patterns displayed are saved symbols in the current file (see Saving the Stipple Object Settings on page 418). The displayed hatches are from either the default resources or the current files resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 or Defining Hatches on page 211 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). Select the desired hatch or stipple pattern and click OK. The selected resources name displays beneath the Joint Pattern list. Draw Border Width Select to include a border pattern along the edges of the hardscape object Enter the width of the border

Joint Pattern
163
Description
Similar to the main hardscape Joint Pattern, select the border paving pattern. The Enter Value dialog box opens when Spaced Joints is selected. Enter the desired joint spacing value. The Choose Fill dialog box opens when Hatch or Stipple is selected. The stipple patterns displayed are saved symbols in the current file. The displayed hatches are from either the default resources or the current files resources. Select the desired hatch or stipple pattern and click OK. The selected resources name displays beneath the Joint Pattern list. The joint pattern origin has a control point marked with a green locus for identification. The joint pattern origin is editable.
Border Background Color Path Border at Ends
Click the color box to select the desired border color Select the border configuration for pathway hardscape objects with borders
Start
End
Both
Neither
Draw 3D 3D Type
Select to draw a 3D hardscape object The hardscape object can act as a 3D slab object or as a pad or texture bed site modifier for a DTM. Select the type of 3D element to create. Select Slab or Pad if the paving area is flat. Select Texture Bed if the paving area is a pathway that covers a large area of a site with some topographical changes. For more information, see Modifying the Site Model on page 141. For a slab or texture bed, enter the thickness parameter (for texture beds, this is the distance of the bed above the site) Enter the class for the texture bed Select the joint display option to use when sketch rendering is applied to the hardscape
Thickness Class Sketch Style
Single sketch
Double sketch
164

Both the Flagstone and Stipple joint patterns are processor-intensive actions for large hardscape objects and can significantly increase regeneration time. To decrease the regeneration time for large flagstone areas, increase the pattern size. When drawing a hardscape object with a curved boundary, speed the regeneration time by setting the 2D conversion resolution in VectorWorks Preferences to low (see Edit Preferences on page 26 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide).
3. Click OK. 4. Click the appropriate mode in the Mode bar to specify the creation method of the hardscape object. For information on the Polyline tool modes, see Creating Polylines on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 5. Click to set the hardscape objects start point. 6. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until the hardscape object is complete. 7. Update the site model. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
Editing the Hardscape Object Settings

Product: Landmark
The parameters can be edited for selected hardscape objects through the Hardscape Settings button on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette. To modify the default hardscape object settings, click the Preferences button on the Mode bar. Many of the parameters are identical to those used to create the hardscape object (see Creating Hardscape Objects on page 160). However, certain parameters are accessible in the Object Info palette only.
Parameter
Hardscape Settings Save Hardscape Tag Display
Description
Click to edit the selected hardscape object; for more information, see Creating Hardscape Objects on page 160 Click to save the selected hardscape object as a symbol; for more information, see Saving the Hardscape Object Settings on page 165 Determine the method of displaying ID tags for the hardscape object; select Right or Left to display the text to the right or left of the tag control point. Select None to display the hardscape object without an ID tag. Specifies the size of the joint pattern units Specifies the rotation angle of the joint pattern Enter the angle of the pattern inside the border Displays the size of the main area Displays the size of the border area Displays the perimeter measurement
Joint Pattern Size Joint Pattern Angle Border Pattern Angle Main Area Border Area Perimeter
Modifying the Site Model | Reshaping the Hardscape Object Product: Landmark
165
Double-click the hardscape object to activate the 2D Reshape tool. Select the object handles to reshape the hardscape object. For more information, see Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Saving the Hardscape Object Settings Product: Landmark

Once the hardscape object is set to the desired appearance, the settings can be saved for future use or importing into other files, by saving the hardscape object. When inserted from the Resource Browser, all the hardscape object settings are preset. To save the selected hardscape object settings: 1. Select a hardscape object. 2. In the Object Info palette, click Save Hardscape. The Enter String dialog box opens. 3. Enter a unique name. 4. Click OK. The hardscape object is saved in the Hardscapes symbol folder in the Resource Browser. Boundary and pathway hardscape objects are assigned unique thumbnail view icons for easy identification. For more information on the Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 5. To use a saved hardscape object, double-click on it in the Resource Browser.
Editing Hardscape Object Fills

Product: Landmark
Hardscape object fills can be changed through the Attributes palette. If a joint pattern was specified, the joint pattern is drawn over the fill attribute of the hardscape object. Hardscape objects can also use images and gradients as fills. Use the Attribute Mapping tool to adjust the fill direction and size. For more information on using image or gradients, see The Attributes Palette on page 205 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide; for more information on using the Attribute Mapping tool, see Editing Gradient and Image Fills on page 224 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The angle or origin point of a hardscape fill can be adjusted. Move the control point at the center of the hardscape to control the origin point of the paving pattern (including a hatch) and change the Joint Pattern Angle value to adjust the angle.
166

When joining bordered hardscape objects with similar borders, the top hardscape object should use a pathway configuration. Draw the path from the inside edge of the bottom hardscape object, so that the borders meet cleanly, with the bottom objects border covered. To coordinate the joint patterns of several hardscape objects, configure the hardscape objects with the same settings and drag their main pattern origin control points (marked with the red locus) to a common location.
Set joint patterns of all hardscape objects to same point
Boundary hardscape
Boundary hardscape
Path hardscape
Showing and Hiding Site Modifiers

Product: Landmark
Site modifiers, such as pads, control fences, and portions of roads and landscape walls can be made hidden or visible. The modifications to the proposed site model are still visible even when the modifier is hidden. To show or hide site model modifiers: 1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide Site Modifiers. 2. If site modifiers were hidden, they are displayed; if they were visible, they become hidden.
Correcting Site Modifier Errors

When the site model has been modified, if errors or problems are detected with the site modifiers, the Problems with DTM Modifiers dialog box automatically opens when the site model is updated. The following modifier problems can generate errors: Intersecting pad objects Intersecting fence objects Grader intersecting texture bed Grader intersecting fence
Drawing Property Lines |

Texture bed intersecting fence Pad intersecting fence object or the hull If these errors exist, the DTM can still be modified; however, results may not be as expected. Resolve the errors by locating the offending modifier and making adjustments to prevent intersecting modifiers.
167
If a site model already exists, the problem data can be viewed by selecting the site model and selecting Modify > Edit Group. Problem data conditions are highlighted and annotated. Update the site model to ensure that the errors have been corrected.
Drawing Property Lines

Property lines can be drawn with the Property Line tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434).
Property Line Tool

The Property Line tool interactively creates property boundaries from surveyors descriptions. The resulting polyline is composed of line and/or arc segments. The closing error can be automatically drawn and measured. Each segment can be individually labeled with distance and bearing; a curve data worksheet displays curve data. To create property lines using the Property Line tool: 1. Click the Property Line tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click to set the starting point of the first property segment. A red bulls-eye is placed on the drawing to mark the starting point; the Define Property Line dialog box opens. 3. Specify the segment parameters and click Add to update the drawing file; the bulls-eye cursor moves to the end of the segment. Continue to add or remove segments as needed.
168
Parameter
Line Bearing
Description
Specify whether the current segment is a line Enter the azimuth or bearing of the line segment; if entering a bearing, a variety of formats are supported. Use spaces (N 10 30 0 E), degreesd for degrees, m for minutes, and s for seconds (N10d0m0s E), or decimal degrees (N 10.5d 0m 0s E). Enter the distance of the line segment Specify whether the current segment is a curve Forces the back tangent to be collinear with the previous segment Enter the azimuth of the back tangent of this curve; a variety of formats are supported. Use spaces (10 30 0), degreesd for degrees, m for minutes, and s for seconds (10d0m0s), or decimal degrees (10.5d 0m 0s). Enter the radius of the curve segment Select to use the distance along the arc
Distance Curve Start Tangent to Previous Back Tangent
Radius Arc Dist
Chord Dist
Select to use the distance between the point of tangency and the point of curvature
Drawing Property Lines | Parameter

Tangent Dist
169
Description
Select to use the distance from the end point of the last segment to the point of the intersection of the curve
Delta Angle
Select to use the central angle of the curve as measured from the center of the arc
Chord Bear. Forward Tangent Counter-Clockwise Remove Update Add Previous / Next Automatically create closing segment
Select to use the bearing of the arc chord Displays the forward tangent value Select to draw the curve Counter-Clockwise Click to remove the selected segment from the property line Click to update the parameters for the current segment Click to add a segment to the property line Click to move backward and forward through the segments Select to automatically create the final segment between the last point and the first
4. Click OK to create the property line. If this is the first time the Property Line tool has been used, the Object Preferences dialog box opens. Accept the defaults and click OK.
170
To create property lines by drawing a path object, rather than specifying parameters in a dialog box, add the Property Line object to the workspace through the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets on page 686 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Once added to the workspace, click the Property Line object and draw the path object(s) as desired.
Editing Property Lines

Property lines can be edited using the 2D Reshape tool after creation, or by clicking the Edit with Dialog button in the Object Info palette. Additional parameters can also be modified in the Object Info palette. See Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on using the 2D Reshape tool for editing. To edit property lines using the Object Info palette: 1. Select the property line. 2. Modify the parameters in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Name Number Area Perimeter Show Name Show Number Show Area Area Units Decimals Text Rotation
Description
Enter a property line name Enter a property line number Displays the area of the property line Displays the length of the property line perimeter Select to display the property line name Select to display the property line number Select to display the area of the property line, along with a leader line If using Imperial drawing units, select Acres or Square Feet; if using metric drawing units, select Hectares or Square Meters Indicates the number of decimal places to display for the property line area Specifies the text rotation degrees
Analyzing the Site Model | Parameter

Fill Behind Text Annotate Segments Annotation Style Angle Format Show as Texture Bed on DTM Texture Bed Class Edit with Dialog Polyline parameters
171
Description
Select to display a fill behind text Select to annotate each segment of the property line When Annotate Segments is selected, indicate the annotation information to display Select whether the annotations display in Azimuth or Bearing angle format Select to display the property line as a texture bed on a DTM (see Creating a Texture Bed on page 147) If Show as Texture Bed was selected, specify the texture bed class Click to display the Define Property Line dialog box for editing the property line; see Drawing Property Lines on page 167 for information on parameters Edits the property line path polyline
For information on editing object vertices, see Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 3. If the property line was designated to be a texture bed on the DTM, select Tools > Organization. On the Classes tab, select the class designated as the texture bed class, and assign it a distinctive fill color, or, if RenderWorks is installed, a texture. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette; the property line displays as a texture bed on the DTM. Switch to a 3D view and render for the full effect. 4. When Annotate Segments is selected and curve data exists, a curve data worksheet is automatically created, showing curve data in worksheet form. Select Window > Worksheets to display the worksheet, or view it from the Resource Browser.
Analyzing the Site Model

Zone of Visual Influence Analysis
Product: Landmark
This type of analysis creates a representation of shadowed and lighted areas as seen from a specified point of view. To perform a zone of visual influence analysis: 1. Select the site model to analyze. 2. Select AEC > Terrain > Zone of Visual Influence. The Zone of Visual Influence dialog box opens. Specify the analysis parameters.
172

Parameter
Select Site Model View height above DTM
Description
Select the site model to analyze Represents the view point elevation for the study. For example, 60 inches (152.4 cm) is often used as a standard eye level when standing.
3. Click OK to perform the analysis. Click on the site model to indicate the observation point. 4. Click again to complete the analysis. A light source is automatically inserted, and the layer is rendered to complete the analysis. Dark regions indicate areas that cannot be seen from the specified observation point at that viewing level.
Observation point
Zone of Visual Influence analysis
5. Click again to end the analysis and return to the original view.
Shadow Analysis
Product: Landmark
A shadow analysis can help determine the areas of the drawing that will receive less sunlight or remain in a shadow during a particular time of the year. By inserting several directional light sources, each representing a different time of day, an overlapping range of shadows is created which indicates the amount of time a particular area is in the shade over the course of the day. RenderWorks is required to conduct a shadow analysis. To perform a shadow analysis: 1. Add the objects to the drawing that will cast a shadow on the site (a house, for example). 2. Orient the drawing to page north. If the drawing was not created with this orientation, this can be compensated through the Set Sun Position dialog box described in the next step.
Analyzing the Site Model |
173
3. Insert each directional light source by selecting View > Lighting > Set Sun Position. Inserting one light source provides shadow information for that time of day only; several light sources set to different times of day yield an actual shadow analysis with overlapping shadows. The Set Sun Position dialog box opens. See Adding Sunlight on page 391 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. For each light source inserted with this command, specify the same parameters except for time of day. At a minimum, a light source for morning, noon, afternoon, and evening should be inserted. 4. Verify the parameters of each directional light source in the Object Info palette. Ensure that Cast Shadows is selected, and decrease the Brightness so that the combination of lights is not too harsh. 5. Render the drawing with the Fast RenderWorks with Shadows, Custom, or Final Quality RenderWorks option. Use the Render Bitmap tool to render a portion of the image for presentations. See Rendering a Selected Area on page 661 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on the Render Bitmap tool.
The darkest areas are in shade for the longest portion of the day
June 21st 5 PM Top view Shadow analysis 3 PM 12 PM
9 AM
Creating Solar Animations

A sun study is an animated movie of sunlight over a specified day of the year. It illustrates the way shadows are cast over a project as the suns position changes. One of the most dramatic ways to present results from a sun study is to create a solar animation. The solar animator can transform a series of frames into a movie file that can then be played with the QuickTime movie viewer supplied with VectorWorks. Each frame of the movie is a rendered image from the current view and shows, in succession, the model lighted by the sun over the course of a day. This demonstrates the sunlight and shadows cast on the model as the suns position changes for any day of the year from any location on earth. The solar animator, combined with a top view of a project, can illustrate shadows cast over a site or onto adjacent properties.
174

In order to create QuickTime movies, QuickTime must be installed. This is available on the VectorWorks CD. In order to show shadows, RenderWorks is required.
To create a solar animation: 1. Set the active window to the desired view and rendering mode. (Specify the image size using the view clipping frame if in Perspective mode.) Resize the active window to the desired frame size.
2. Create and select a directional light source. If there is none, the solar animator will create one. See Adding Light on page 389 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on light sources. 3. Select Model > Create Solar Animation. The Create Solar Animation dialog box opens. Enter the solar animation criteria.
Parameter
Site
Description
Specifies the site location information. Time Zone Meridian must agree with Longitude unless the time zone of the location is not within the generalized 15 degree increment from Greenwich Mean Time. It cannot be more than one time zone out of agreement with the Longitude. Indicates the animation month and day Indicates the angular difference between page north and true north Select to create a time stamp in the rendered scene using the current attributes
Date Page North Show Frame Counter
Obtaining Site Model Data | Parameter

Daylight Savings Daylight minutes per QT frame
175
Description
Select if Daylight Saving Time is in effect Specifies the number of minutes per movie frame (length of movie)
4. Click Save Movie, and then enter a name and location for the QuickTime file when prompted. 5. The Compression Settings dialog box opens.
6. Enter the compression settings for the movie file. For the video Compression type, Motion JPEG A may provide the best results. See Animating Drawings with QuickTime on page 569 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Also, see Apples Quicktime website for more information on QuickTime. QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. Consult QuickTime documentation before changing Compression Settings. 7. If Show Frame Counter was selected in the Create Solar Animation dialog box, enter a click point to locate the time-stamp text in the frame. The frame counter feature uses the current text size to calculate the proper text size based on the current view clip frame. 8. When the rendering is complete, close or hide VectorWorks. 9. View the movie in an application such as the QuickTime Player to watch the solar animation.
Obtaining Site Model Data

Site Model Section
Use the Site Model Section command to create a profile or sectional views of the site.
176
To create a site model section: 1. Draw or select a 2D polygon or polyline to define the section alignment. In Landmark, if selecting a previously drawn polyline with station points, a station point profile can be created.
The polygon or polyline vertices must be contained within the limits of the site model. 2. With the polygon or polyline selected, click AEC > Terrain > Site Model Section. The Create Site Model Section dialog box opens. Specify the site model section parameters.
Parameter
Create section on layer Draw Background Grid Draw Existing Site Profile Draw Proposed Site Profile Draw Selected Station Profile (Landmark only)
Description
Specify the layer where the section will be placed or click New Layer to create a new layer for the section Select to draw a background grid, and click the color box to specify the grid color Select to draw a profile for the existing site model, and click the color box to specify the profile color Select to draw a profile for the proposed site model, and click the color box to specify the profile color Select to draw a profile of the station points, and click the color box to specify the profile color; this option is available only if a polyline associated with station points is selected
Obtaining Site Model Data | Parameter

Station Points Draw points at polygon vertices Draw points at interval Draw points at existing stakes (Landmark only) Formatting 3. Click Formatting.
177
Description
If the selected polygon does not contain stake objects, select to create station points at the polygon vertices; this option is available only if a station polyline is selected If the selected polygon does not contain stake objects, select to create station points at the specified interval When stakes exist along the profile polygon, station points are automatically created for the stakes; this option is available only if a polyline with station points is selected Click to specify the section graphic formatting
The Site Model Section Formatting dialog box opens. Specify the formatting for the site model section graphic.
Parameter
Display Scale Factor Vertical Magnification Factor Vertical Margin Horizontal Margin Draw Legend Text Legend point size
Description
Specifies the site model scale factor; the layer scale factor is entered by default Sets an independent scale factor for the Y axis of the graphic Specifies the distance, in page units, between the highest and lowest points in the graph and the graph margins Specifies the distance, in page units, between the graph start and end and the graph margins Indicates whether to create a legend for the graph; legend text is color coded to match the section profiles Specifies the size, in points, of the legend text
178

Description
Indicates whether to display the elevation of the profiles along the station points Specifies the size, in points, of the elevation text Sets the type of label, if any, to apply to the station points on the background grid Specifies the thickness of the profile lines Specifies the thickness of the station lines
Parameter
Draw Elevations Elevation point size Station Point Labels (Landmark only) Profile Line Weight Station Line Weight
4. Click OK to return to the Create Site Model Section dialog box. 5. Click OK to create the sectional view of the site. If the site model changes, the site model section needs to be recreated.
Station lines Station point labels (Landmark only)
Profile lines
Legend
Elevations
Determining the Elevation of a Point on the Site Model

Stake objects represent a 3D point in space, with text to display the elevation when in Plan view. Using a stake object, the elevation information for a point on the site model can be determined and labeled. To insert a stake object with an elevation label: 1. Click the Stake Object tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click on the site model where the elevation needs to be determined. 3. Click again to set the rotation of the stake and its label. The stake properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Obtaining Site Model Data |
179
Parameter
Z-value
Description
Specifies the stake elevation. For Landmark road stakes, set the elevation of the first stake along the polyline, and the elevation of the remaining stakes is automatically calculated (as described in Setting Stake Elevations on page 151)
Mode Include as site model data Set elev to site model Use as 2D graphic only Site modifier object Style Uses the stake as DTM data if it is located in the source data layer (select when using stakes to create a site model) Sets the stake elevation to the existing DTM elevation Treats the stake like a 2D text box and does not create a 3D locus for the stake Treats the stake object as a site modifier, which has an effect on the proposed site model Selects the graphic style of the stake object
Triangle
Circle
Dot
Cross
Tick Mark
Label Reference Description ID Prefix ID Number Stationing Data Scale Factor
Selects the type of information to display in the label; select No Label to display no text. The available label fields depend on the label reference selected. For Description and ID/Description labels, enter description text For ID/Elevation labels, enter a prefix to display with the ID For ID/Elevation labels, specify the ID number For Stationing Data labels, indicates the station point data for the selected stake object Determines the size of the label display
180
Planting and Irrigation Design

Product: Landmark
VectorWorks Landmark provides a complete set of commands, tools, and symbols for adding plants and irrigation to the design. The Place Plant tool both defines and places plant objects. The Plant Reference Database maintains an extensive set of plant data that can be attached to plant definitions. Placing plants is extremely flexible. Plants, defined with species information and appearance settings, can be placed with the Place Plant tool, or generic plants can be placed in the drawing and re-assigned to a specific plant species later in the design process. A selected plant can be placed individually or in multiples. Once a plant group has been placed, the group can be changed into individual plants, and individual plants can be grouped. In addition, undefined plant masses can be created according to several methods.
Add irrigation heads, drip emitters, and irrigation lines with specific parameters to complete the drawing. Planting plans and irrigation plans generate worksheets calculating project costs, materials required, and other factors. Landscape and irrigation plans are easily set up by using the Create Standard Viewports command to create typical standards (see The Setup Commands on page 2); however, this is not a requirementLandmark functions with custom file setup parameters as well.
Defining Plants
Product: Landmark
The Place Plant tool is used to define or edit specific plants for placement, or simply to place generic plants, which can be replaced later by specific plants.
Creating Plant Definitions

Product: Landmark
Plants can be defined by entering parameters or by loading (and editing) pre-defined parameters from the Plant Reference Database. The parameters specified apply by default when the selected plant is inserted on the drawing; after placement, plants can be edited on an individual basis. To create new plant definitions: 1. Click the Place Plant tool from the Site Planning tool set.
182
| Chapter 8: Planting and Irrigation Design
2. The Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box opens automatically if plants have not yet been placed in the drawing. Otherwise, click Settings from the Mode bar. The Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box opens. 3. If desired, select a plant definition that is close in appearance to the attributes of the new plant. 4. Click New Plant. The New Plant Definition dialog box opens, set to the attributes of the selected plant. Provide an ID number and plant name, and then specify the plant parameters on each tab to define the plant. As the parameters are defined, the preview dynamically displays the plant appearance. To add plant information from the Plant Reference Database (see The Plant Reference Database on page 189), click Plant Data from the Definition tab. The Plant Reference Database opens. Select the desired plant data to associate with the plant definition and click OK to return to the Define Plant dialog box. The relevant plant parameters are automatically added to the plant definition, including default Name and ID. To copy a plant definition, select the plant to copy in the Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box, and then click New Plant.
Parameter
ID
Description
Identifies the plant with a unique code; this code identifies the plant definition symbol and appears in the plant list (see Plant ID Codes on page 494 for the definition of common code categories) Specifies the name of the plant definition Dynamically previews the plant appearance, showing how it will appear when added to the drawing with the Place Plant tool
Name Preview
Defining Plants | Parameter

Plant Information Species Common Name Plant Data Specifies the plant genus and species; if plant information was attached from the Plant Reference Database (by clicking Plant Data), this information is automatically entered Specifies the plant common name or names; if plant information was attached from the Plant Reference Database (by clicking Plant Data), this information is automatically entered Click to access the Plant Reference Database; if a plant is selected in the database, its plant information is automatically attached to the current plant definition when clicking OK to close the database Click to enter pricing and price code information in the Enter Unit Price Information dialog box; the plant cost and quantity are reflected in the Extended Price calculation in the Plant List worksheet. The plant ID number is the default Price Code (SKU) entry when a plant with default Name and ID fields is added from the Plant Reference Database.
183
Description
Cost Data
Schedule comments Scheduled Size Quantity Tag Type Tag Class Appearance 2D Symbol
Specifies default comments about the plant that display in the Plant List worksheet Indicates the plant caliper or container size; displays in the Plant List worksheet Select the quantity unit for the plant; quantity can be defined as unit count, dripline area, or border area Determine the method of displaying ID tags for the plant; select Custom to define a custom ID text string formula. Specifies the default class for the plant ID tag
Select a 2D plant symbol from either the default resources or current files resources to represent the plant in 2D views; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 Select a 3D plant symbol from either the default resources or the current files resources to represent the plant in 3D views (image props, such as those provided by Xfrog, can also be assigned as 3D plant symbols); see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513
3D Symbol
5. Click the Attributes tab to specify the plant fill and pen attributes.
184

Plant attributes cannot be set or modified from the Attributes palette. Set the plant definitions attributes on the Attributes tab, and edit the appearance of a plant instance by clicking Edit Plant Appearance from the Object Info palette. For more information on fill and pen attributes, see Applying Object Attributes on page 205 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Parameter
Fill Symbol Fill(s) Custom Fill
Description
Uses the fill style specified by the 2D symbol Specifies a custom fill style for the plant; select the fill Style and then specify its parameters, or select the desired hatch, gradient, or image from the either the default resources or the current files resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513) Applies the fill only to the first filled element (oval, circle, rectangle, polyline, or polygon) at the bottom of the 2D symbol stacking order
Fill Background Only
Pen
Symbol Pen(s) Custom Pen Line Uses the pen style specified by the 2D symbol Specifies a custom pen style for the plant; select the pen Style and then specify its parameters When a custom pen style is selected, set the line thickness
Defining Plants |
185
6. Click the Render tab to specify the 2D plant styles. These effects display in Top/Plan view only. In a complex drawing with many plants, these settings can take a significant amount of time to display and edit, so they are not on by default at plant placement. They can be turned on after placement for selected plants by choosing Enable Plant 2D Rendering from the Object Info palette, or for all plants by selecting View > Show > Show or Hide Plant Styles.
Parameter
Turn on Rendering at Creation Outline
Description
Enables plant style display at plant placement; in a complex drawing, this may require a significant amount of time Select up to three offset plant outlines
No outline
One outline
Three outlines
186

Description
Joins the outlines, and removes the interior lines, of plants that overlap to easily create a plant mass
Parameter
Mass Overlapping Plants
Plant Shadows in Plan View Offset Angle Fill Style Solid Color Hatch
Specifies special shadow effects that display in Top/Plan view only Specifies the offset distance of the shadow from the plant Controls the plant shadow location; select an angle for the shadow Select the type of shadow to display Click the color box to select a solid shadow color Select a hatch for the plant shadow from the either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513
Image
Select a shadow image from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513
7. Click the Default Prefs tab to specify default plant values and options.
Defining Plants |
187
Parameter
Size Spread Height Spacing Display Tag Display Tick Style
Description
Specifies the plant spread diameter (the maximum width of the mature plant, as drawn) for both single and multiple plant placement Indicates the typical mature plant height Indicates the plant spacing distance for the Poly-Edge Spaced, Rectangular Array, and Triangular Array cluster placement methods
Select whether to display the plant tag to the right or left of the leader line, or not at all Select a tick mark (plant center mark) style
Cross
Dot
Tick Size
Specifies the tick mark size
188

Description
For multiple plant placements, changes the display of the boundary or center polygon defining the plant cluster shape
Parameter
Polygon Display
None
Centers - solid
Centers - dashed
Boundary - solid
Boundary - dashed
Gapped - solid
Gapped - dashed
Miscellaneous Random Rotation Draw 3D Randomly rotates the plants within a selected cluster for a more natural appearance When selected, 3D plant display is enabled at plant placement; displaying many complex 3D symbols can require a significant amount of time. A selected plant can be displayed in 3D by selecting Draw 3D in the Object Info palette (see Plant Properties on page 196) or with the View > Show > Show or Hide 3D command (see Displaying 3D Objects on page 414). Includes the plant object in the Plant List worksheet
On Plant List
8. When the default plant parameters have been defined, click OK to return to the Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box. From there, additional plants can be defined or edited, and a plant can be selected for placement. When using workgroup referencing, the plant definitions should exist in the same file as the site model they reference, so that their Z values can be set to the DTM surface.
Editing Plant Definitions

Product: Landmark
Plant definitions can be edited.
Defining Plants |
To edit plant definitions: 1. Click the Place Plant tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Select Settings from the Mode bar. The Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box opens. 3. Select the plant to edit from the graphical list. 4. Click Edit Current.
189
5. The Edit Plant Definition dialog box opens, set to the attributes of the currently selected plant. The ID number and plant name are displayed, but cannot be changed. The definition of the selected plant can be edited as described in Creating Plant Definitions on page 181). 6. Click OK to return to the Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box. From there, additional plants can be defined or edited, and a plant can be selected for placement.
Plant Resources
Product: Landmark
The plants available for placement are associated with a 2D symbol, and optionally, a 3D symbol. When placing plants with the Place Plant tool, the correct symbol is used for the selected plant. Once a plant resource is placed in a drawing, the plant definition is automatically imported into the current file and appears in the Resource Browser under Symbols/Plug-In Objects. When VectorWorks Landmark is installed, 2D and 3D plant symbols are provided as default resources (default resources are automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and display in the Resource Browser; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513). The resources in the Plant Symbols.mcd file are available in the Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box. Do not insert plants as symbols from the Resource Browser with the 2D Symbol Insertion tool; they will be missing the functionality of a plant object. Custom plant symbols can also be created; see Plant Symbol Specifications on page 491.
The Plant Reference Database

Product: Landmark
The Plant Reference Database contains an extensive list of plant names and information which can be used to associate specific plant data with plant definitions.
Accessing the Plant Reference Database

Product: Landmark
To access the plant reference database: 1. Select AEC > Plants > Plant Reference Data. The plant reference database can also be accessed from the Edit Plant Definition dialog box, by clicking Plant Data.
190
Parameter
Name List Display Filter
Description
Select whether to display the plants in the database list according to botanical or common name Select a filter from the list to display only the plants in the database which match the selected category or custom criteria (see Customizing Plant Database Display on page 192) Select to edit the information for a selected plant (this item is also enabled by double-clicking an entry in the list) Click New to add a plant to the database (see Adding a Plant to the Plant Reference Database List on page 193) Duplicates the currently selected plant database entry; the word copy is appended to the copy of the plant name Click Delete to remove the selected plant from the database (see Removing a Plant from the Plant Reference Database List on page 193)
Enable Item Editing New Duplicate Delete
Defining Plants | Parameter

Plant Names Classification Botanical Common Category Code Plant Characteristics Landscape Use Growth Habit Height Spread Flowers Characteristic Floral Color Blooms Begin Foliage Characteristic Foliage Color Fall Colors Plant Ranges Persistence Tolerances Water Range Soil Range pH Range Light Range Plant Zone Fruit Characteristic Fruit Color Comments Select the primary fruit distinguishing characteristic Specifies the predominant fruit color(s) Specifies additional information about the plant and its growing habits Select the foliage persistence characteristic Select the plant tolerance characteristic Select the recommended moisture conditions Select the recommended soil conditions Specifies the acceptable soil pH range Select the recommended light and shade tolerance Indicates the suitable plant hardiness zone Select the primary foliage distinguishing characteristic Select the predominant foliage color Specifies the predominant autumnal foliage color(s) Select the primary flower distinguishing characteristic Specifies the color(s) of the flower Select the time of year when the blooming season begins Select the plants primary landscaping purpose Select the typical plant growth form Indicates the mature plants maximum height range Specifies the mature plants maximum width range Specifies the plant genus and species Specifies the plant common name or names Select a category for the plant for identification and filtering purposes Indicates the plant classification code (USDA codes, when available, are provided by default)
191
Description
192
2. The Plant List on the left displays the plants contained in the plant database. The information for a selected plant is displayed on the right. The data fields appear dimmed in display mode; select Enable Item Editing or double-click on a list item to edit the fields or add a new database entry.
Displaying and Locating Plant Database Information

Product: Landmark
To limit the display of plants in the Plant Reference Database list, select a filter from the list. Use a custom filter with specified filtering criteria to display a particular plant or plants in the list.
Displaying Plant Database Information Product: Landmark

To display plant information: 1. From the Plant Reference Database dialog box, select whether to filter the plants in the database according to Botanical or Common name by clicking the appropriate selection under Name List Display. 2. Optionally, select a display Filter from the list. The Plant Database is filtered according to the selected category. Select a plant from the list to display its information. The plant database information displayed depends on the plant; some fields are not required for certain plants. Landmark assigns blank fields a - (dash).
Customizing Plant Database Display Product: Landmark

By specifying custom filter parameters, a subset of plants with specific criteria can be displayed. To locate and display specific plants: 1. From the Plant Reference Database dialog box, click Filter and select Custom Filter. The Define Custom Filter dialog box opens.
2. Select the type of parameters for the search, the search options, and specific search value, parameter, or text. Several levels of search criteria can be specified to narrow the search results. When searching for a text string, use the contains option. 3. Click OK to list the items in the plant database that meet the search criteria.
Adding Plants to the Design |
193
Managing Plant Reference Database Entries

Product: Landmark
New entries can be made in the plant database, current entries can be removed, and database information can be attached to a plant definition (see Creating Plant Definitions on page 181).
Editing Plant Reference Database Entries

Select a plant from the Plant List to edit its information. To edit the parameters of a selected plant: 1. From the Plant Reference Database dialog box, either double-click the desired plant to enable editing mode, or select the plant and then select Enable Item Editing 2. The fields become available for editing. Edits are automatically saved when another plant is selected or when exiting the Plant Reference Database dialog box. If the number of characters in a field exceeds 255, the text will be truncated.
Adding a Plant to the Plant Reference Database List Product: Landmark

To add a plant to the plant database list: 1. From the Plant Reference Database dialog box, click New. Enable Item Editing must be selected to add a new plant. 2. Enter the new plant information. New information is automatically saved when another plant is selected or when exiting the Plant Reference Database dialog box. If the number of characters in a field exceeds 255, the text will be truncated.
Removing a Plant from the Plant Reference Database List Product: Landmark
To remove a plant from the plant database list: 1. Select the plant to remove from the Plant Reference Database list (Enable Item Editing must be selected). 2. Click Delete.
Adding Plants to the Design

Placing Single or Multiple Plants
Product: Landmark
Use the Place Plant tool to select a plant definition and place it in a single or multiple arrangement on the drawing. Plants can also created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). Seven modes are available.
194

Poly-Vertex Placement Single Plant Placement Poly-Edge Spaced Triangular Array Rectangular Array Pickup Settings
Mode
Single Plant Placement Poly-Vertex Placement
Description
Places a single specified plant at each mouse click Places plants at each clicked polygon vertex
Poly-Edge Spaced
Specify the Spacing distance in the plant definition or Object Info palette; plants are spaced along the user-entered polygon at the spacing distance specified
spacing
Rectangular Array
Specify the Spacing distance in the plant definition or Object Info palette; plants fill the polygon in a rectangular array at the spacing distance specified
spacing
Triangular Array
Specify the Spacing distance in the plant definition or Object Info palette; plants fill the polygon in a triangular array at the spacing distance specified
spacing
Adding Plants to the Design | Mode

Pickup Settings
195
Description
Sets the default plant settings to match those of a selected existing plant Opens the Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box, for specifying the plant to place, its placement options, and its definition
To place plants on the drawing: 1. Click the Place Plant tool from the Site Planning tool set. The Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box opens automatically if plants have not yet been placed in the drawing. Otherwise, click Settings from the Mode bar to select the plant to place; plants are also defined from this dialog box, as described in Creating Plant Definitions on page 181. The plant to place can also be selected by its ID number with the Plant ID list on the Mode bar. The plant resources in the active drawing display alphabetically at the top of the list.
Parameter
Plant Graphical plant list Spread Height Spacing Edit Current New Plant
Description
Displays the currently selected plant name Displays a graphical list of available plants, with the 2D symbol and the plant ID. The currently displayed plant is selected for placement. Specifies the plant spread diameter (the maximum width of the mature plant, as drawn) for both single and multiple plant placement Indicates a typical mature plant height Indicates the plant spacing distance for the Poly-Edge Spaced, Rectangular Array, and Triangular Array cluster placement methods Edits the definition of the currently selected plant (see Editing Plant Definitions on page 188) Creates a new plant definition (see Creating Plant Definitions on page 181)
196
2. Click OK. The Place Plant tool uses these settings until they are changed again by selecting a different plant ID from the Mode bar, clicking Settings from the Mode bar, or until Pickup mode is selected, which changes the default settings to those of a selected existing plant. 3. Select the plant placement mode from the Mode bar. Depending on the placement method selected, either click in the drawing to place a single plant, or draw a polygon. As the Place Plant tool is clicked in the drawing, a preview of the plant spread is displayed to help with plant placement.
Placement
Single Plant Poly-Vertex Placement
Preview
2nd click 1st click 3rd click
Poly-Edge Spaced
1st click
2nd click 3rd click
Rectangular/Triangular Array
2nd click
3rd click
1st click
4. The specified plant symbol is placed in the drawing as indicated. The Place Plant tool parameters are retained so that the successive placement of plants is easily accomplished. For multi-plant placement options, edit the polygon defining the plant with the 2D Reshape tool if necessary, and the plant placement is automatically adjusted to fit the new shape.
Plant Properties
Product: Landmark
The plant properties can be edited in the Object Info palette. As plants are placed, they take on the properties of the associated plant definition. Changes made in the Object Info palette for the selected plant(s) apply to those individual plants only; changes are not reflected in the plant definition.
Adding Plants to the Design | Parameter

Plant ID Plant Description Replace Plant Edit Plant Appearance
197
Description
Displays the plants unique ID code; this code identifies the plant definition symbol and appears in the plant list Displays the plant definition name Opens the Replace Plant dialog box; select the plant to replace the currently selected plant Opens the Edit Plant Appearance dialog box, displaying a preview of the currently selected plant, along with its ID, name, and current appearance settings. The plant attribute and render settings can be edited. This changes the current plant instance, but does not edit the plant definition. Attribute and render settings are described in Creating Plant Definitions on page 181. Specifies the plant spread diameter (the maximum width of the mature plant, as drawn) for both single and multiple plant placement Indicates the plant spacing distance for the Poly-Edge Spaced, Rectangular Array, and Triangular Array cluster placement methods Indicates the typical mature plant height Specifies the plant insertion mode (see Placing Single or Multiple Plants on page 193); a different insertion mode can be selected for multi-placement plants Select whether to display the plant tag to the right or left of the leader line, or not at all For plant placements other than single, changes the display of the boundary or center polygon defining the plant cluster shape
Spread Spacing Height Mode Tag display Polygon display
None
Centers - solid
Centers - dashed
Boundary - solid
Boundary - dashed
Gapped - solid
Gapped - dashed
198

Description
Select a tick mark (plant center mark) style
Parameter
Tick Style
Cross
Dot
Tick Size Random Plant Rotation Draw 3D On Plant List Enable plant 2D Rendering Polyline parameters
Specifies the tick mark size Randomly rotates the plants within a selected cluster for a more natural appearance Select to enable 3D display of the plant (a 3D symbol must be selected in the plant definition); showing many 3D plant symbols in a complex drawing can cause slower display times Select to include the plant object in the Plant List worksheet Select to display the plant style settings associated with the plant (see Creating Plant Definitions on page 181); showing plant styles in a complex drawing can cause slower display times Edits the plant placement for multi-plant placements
Modifying Plant Clusters

Product: Landmark
Plants placed in a multiple placement mode of the Place Plant tool are associated as a cluster. The cluster moves together, and parameter changes affect all plants in the cluster. However, it is possible to dissociate the cluster to make individual plant changes. In addition, new clusters can be created with different combinations of plants. Clustering identical plants which are in close proximity can be desirable for labeling and identification purposes.
Converting Plant Clusters

Product: Landmark
One or more plant clusters can be disassociated to change individual plant parameters or location. To convert a plant cluster to individual plants: 1. Select the plant cluster or clusters to convert. 2. Select AEC > Plants > Change Plant Grouping. 3. If one plant cluster is selected, the plants in the cluster are automatically converted to individual plants. 4. If more than one plant cluster is selected, the Choose Mode dialog box opens.
Adding Plants to the Design |
199
5. Select Convert Selection into Individual Plants. 6. Click OK. The plants are converted, retaining their original plant type; they can be moved and changed individually.
Combining Plants
Product: Landmark
Individual plants and plant clusters can be combined into a single plant cluster. The converted cluster will be a multi-plant placement at polygon corners. To convert plants to a plant cluster: 1. Select the individual plants, plant clusters, or combination of individual plants and clusters to convert. 2. Select AEC > Plants > Change Plant Grouping. 3. If the selection consists of individual plants of the same type, they are automatically converted to a single plant cluster. 4. If individual and clustered plants are selected, the Choose Mode dialog box opens.
5. Select Combine Plants into One Single Plant. 6. Individual and clustered plants of the same type are automatically converted to a single plant cluster.
200
7. If the selection consists of more than one plant type, the Please Choose Plant dialog box opens.
8. All the plants in the selection will be converted to one of the plant types. Select the plant type from the list and specify the Plant Spread value. Click OK. 9. The selected plants are converted to a single cluster of identical plant types.
Plants are clustered based on their drawing order. If the joining polygon of the resulting plant is not as expected, change the drawing order of the plants prior to joining them.
Plant Graphics
Product: Landmark
Undefined plant masses and groups can be added with the Plant Line and Vegetation Line commands. Plant lists can be created, and plant styles and ID tags can be displayed or hidden.
Creating a Plant Line

Product: Landmark
The Plant Line command creates a freehand plant line along a line, polyline, or polygon. It can be used to represent a single plant, line of plants, or general plant mass. To create a plant line: 1. Select the object (line, polyline, or polygon) with the 2D Selection tool. 2. Select AEC > Plants > Plant Line. The Plant Line dialog box opens. Suggested values are based on the selections perimeter.
Plant Graphics |
201
Thickness Segment Length
Parameter
Segment Length Thickness Corner Types Delete original
Description
Maximum length of each plant line segment; longer segments create a rougher plant line appearance Maximum perpendicular distance of each segment; a higher thickness value results in a rougher plant line appearance Specifies the type of corner to create between segments; each type produces a different plant line effect Select to remove the object that forms the basis of the plant line
3. Select the desired plant line parameters and click OK. The plant line is created. If desired, apply colors, textures, and other attributes to the plant line with the Attributes palette.
Normal Corner Type Segment Length: 0.16 Thickness: 0.0251
Cubic Corner Type Segment Length: 0.0516 Thickness: 0.251
Bzier Corner Type Segment Length: 0.16 Thickness: 0.251
Arc Corner Type Segment Length: 0.0516 Thickness: 0.251
Random Corner Type Segment Length: 0.0516 Thickness: 0.0251
Plant Line command executed twice
Plant Line command executed three times
202
Creating a Vegetation Line

Product: Landmark
The Vegetation Line command creates a vegetation line around a selection of closed objects or symbols. It can be used to represent a massed collection of vegetation. To create a vegetation line: 1. Select the closed objects or symbols that will form the basis of the vegetation line. The items should overlap.
2. Select AEC > Plants > Vegetation Line. The Vegetation Line dialog box opens.
Parameter
Minimum/Maximum Radius Billow Height Delete Original
Description
Specifies the minimum and maximum radius of each arc in the cloud Specifies the cloud billow height factor Select to delete the original selection of objects when creating the vegetation line
3. Either a standard or cloud type of vegetation line can be created. The standard line creates an outline based on the outer perimeter of the selections. A cloud vegetation line creates a cloud outline of the selections, based on the radius and billow height specified. The original items can be deleted by selecting Delete Original.
Plant Graphics |
203
Standard Vegetation Line
Cloud Vegetation Line
4. Click OK to create the vegetation line. If desired, apply colors, textures, images, hatches, gradients and other attributes to the vegetation line with the Attributes palette. See The Attributes Palette on page 205 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on applying attributes. The vegetation line can be assigned to a class (with the desired attributes). The original plant symbols can remain hidden by a vegetation line with a solid fill; however, the underlying vegetation can be revealed by hiding the vegetation line class.
Adding Plant Lists to the Design

Product: Landmark
Plants to be included in the Plant List must have On Plant List selected in the Object Info palette. To add plant lists to the design: 1. From the Resource Browser, open the [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Plant Lists.mcd object library that is included with Landmark. Four types of worksheets are included (Basic, Colors, Costing, and Simple). 2. Select one of the worksheet symbols and choose Make Active from the Resources menu. Click to place the symbol in the drawing, and again to set the symbol rotation. The worksheet, populated with information from the plants in the current drawing, is automatically created.
For more information on worksheets, see Worksheets on page 531 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Show/Hide Plant Styles

Product: Landmark
The Show or Hide Plant Styles command controls the visibility of the plant styles set on the Render tab of a plant definition (see Creating Plant Definitions on page 181). To show or hide the plant styles: 1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide Plant Styles.
204
2. If the plant styles are currently hidden, this command causes the plant styles of all plant objects with a defined style to become visible. In the Object Info palette, Enable Plant 2D Rendering is selected automatically.
If the plant styles are currently visible, this command causes the styles of all plant objects to become hidden. In the Object Info palette, Enable Plant 2D Rendering is automatically deselected.
Irrigation
Irrigation Tools
Product: Landmark
The irrigation tools on the Landmark palette insert generic drip emitters, irrigation heads, and irrigation lines into the drawing. A selection of standard pre-configured manufacturers irrigation products are available through the Resource Browser, and are located in the following three libraries: 02_Sitewk_Irrigation heads 02_Sitewk_Drip Emitters 02_Sitewk_Irrigation Pipe For more information on the Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Inserting a Drip Emitter

Product: Landmark
A generic drip emitter can be inserted into the drawing with the Drip Emitter tool. Alternatively, use a drip emitter from one of the irrigation object libraries. To insert a drip emitter: 1. Click the Drip Emitter tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click in the drawing to insert the drip emitter. Click again to set the rotation. The first time the tool is used, the Drip Emitter Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default parameters and click OK to insert the drip emitter. 3. The drip emitter properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.
Irrigation | Parameter
Manufacturer Model Type Head Style Spray Nozzle Working Pressure Flow Rate Unit Scale Factor Microtube Control
205
Description
Displays the manufacturers name or Generic Displays the manufacturers model number Options include Pressure Compensating and Non-Pressure Compensating Selects the type of emitter head (Micro-Spray, Drip Manifold, or Sub-surface Drip) For Micro-Spray head style, indicates the arc degrees of spray Displays the water line pressure, for use in worksheets Displays the flow rate per hour in either metric or imperial units Selects the units for the display of flow rate Determines the size of 2D drip emitter display For Sub-surface Drip head style only, displays the coordinates of microtube placement (1 is the microtube curvature, and 2 is the end point)
2nd click 2nd click
1st click
1st click
Click in the center of the drip emitter to obtain the control point, and then on the end point
Click in the center of the drip emitter again to obtain the second control point, and then define the curvature
The Sub-surface drip emitter contains control points in the center of the symbol; click and drag first to determine the microtube end point, and then again to define the curvature
Inserting an Irrigation Head

Product: Landmark
A generic irrigation head can be inserted into the drawing with the Irrigation Head tool. Alternatively, use an irrigation head from one of the irrigation object libraries. To insert an irrigation head: 1. Click the Irrigation Head tool from the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click in the drawing to insert the irrigation head. Click again to set the rotation. The first time the tool is used, the Irrigation Head Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default parameters and click OK to insert the irrigation head. 3. The irrigation head properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.
206

Description
Manufacturers name or Generic Manufacturers model number Selections include Circular, Rectangular, and Special Indicates a Fixed Spray or Rotary sprinkler Spray head height (for use in worksheets) Manufacturers nozzle type For circular spray patterns, displays the radius of the spray; for rectangular spray patterns, displays the spray width Displays the length of a rectangular spray pattern Select to display the irrigation spray pattern Indicates the arc of the spray pattern and determines the spray pattern display Angle (in degrees) of water as it is thrown from the spray head (for use in worksheets) Water line pressure (in psi or kg/cm3) for use in worksheets Indicates triangular or square spacing Number of inches or millimeters of water placed over a certain area per hour, for use in worksheets Determines the size of 2D irrigation head display Specify either Metric or Imperial units
Parameter
Manufacturer Model Spray Pattern Head Type Body Nozzle Spray Radius or Width Length of Rect Spray Show Spray Pattern Spray Arc Trajectory Working Pressure Spacing Precipitation Rate Head Scale Factor Unit
The spray pattern can be hidden and displayed with the Show or Hide Spray Pattern command (see Show/ Hide Spray Pattern on page 207).
Inserting an Irrigation Line

Product: Landmark
An irrigation line can be inserted into the drawing with the Irrigation Line tool. Alternatively, use an irrigation line from one of the irrigation object libraries. To insert an irrigation line: 1. Click the Irrigation Line tool the Site Planning tool set. 2. Click and drag to define the length of the irrigation line. The first time the tool is used, the Irrigation Line Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default parameters and click OK to insert the irrigation line. 3. The irrigation line properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.
Irrigation | Parameter
Length Type Diameter Has Sleeve Sleeve Diameter
207
Description
Displays irrigation line length Indicates the irrigation line material (PVC, PE, Galvanized Steel, or Copper) Displays irrigation tubing diameter Select if the irrigation line has a sleeve When the Has Sleeve option is selected, indicates the tubing diameter of the sleeve
Irrigation Plans
Product: Landmark
Once the drip emitters, irrigation heads, and irrigation lines have been placed in the drawing, as required, irrigation plans are created by using the ID Label tool and worksheets together. To create irrigation plans: 1. Use the Irrigation tools to add irrigation to the design. (See Irrigation Tools on page 204.) 2. Select the ID label type and style. Place ID labels on the drawing with the ID Label tool. (See ID Label Tool on page 355.)
3. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Irrigation Reports.mcd file that is included with Landmark. Drag the Irrigation Head Schedule or Irrigation Line Schedule worksheet to the drawing. An Irrigation Schedule worksheet, populated with information from the irrigation in the current drawing, is automatically created. For more information on worksheets, see Worksheets on page 531 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Show/Hide Spray Pattern

Product: Landmark
The Show or Hide Spray Pattern command controls the visibility of the spray pattern of irrigation head objects. To show or hide the spray pattern: 1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide Spray Pattern.
208
2. If the spray patterns are currently hidden, this command causes the spray pattern of all irrigation head objects to become visible. In the Object Info palette, Show Spray Pattern is selected automatically. If the spray patterns are currently visible this command causes the spray pattern of all irrigation head objects to become hidden. In the Object Info palette, Show Spray Pattern is automatically deselected.
Lighting Positions and Labels

Product: Spotlight
Before placing lighting instruments on the light plot, the basic elements of the plot must be defined. It is easiest to create design layers, create classes, define the lighting positions, and establish the legends (and legend format) before creating the rest of the plot.
Light Plot Structure

Product: Spotlight
A structured system of layers and classes makes selecting, viewing and printing items considerably easier. When creating a light plot, develop a standard layer and class structure, along with a system for assigning items to the appropriate layers and classes. For more information on layers and classes, see Managing Layers on page 70 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide and Managing Classes on page 80 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Placing the stage, lighting positions, lighting instruments, focus points, and scenic elements in separate design layers is recommended. Select Tools > Organization and click the Design Layers tab to create and manage layers. Use the same scale for all the layers. Place light plot items in their own classes. This allows you to globally turn off the display of certain classes for viewing and printing. Select Tools > Organization and click the Classes tab to create and manage classes. Spotlight automatically creates certain classes to control instrument label visibility. These include the Label class and its sub-classes, and the Setup Notes class.
Layer and Class Examples

Product: Spotlight
An example of the use of layers and classes would be a show file with all of the scenery on a single design layer, and classes created to represent Act 1 and Act 2. When adding scenic elements, place them on the scenery design layer, and assign them to either the Act 1 or Act 2 class. With this structure, use layer visibility to view only the scenery design layer, and class visibility to turn the Act 1 or Act 2 classes on and off. This method allows the position of the set pieces in each act to be viewed independently.
210
| Chapter 9: Lighting Positions and Labels
Scenery position for Act 1
Scenery position for Act 2
Another way to take advantage of structuring is to also use classes for the lighting instruments. In a situation with multiple shows in repertory, assign each instrument to the class of the show where it is used. This allows you to display each shows instrumentation independently of the other shows.
Adding Lighting Positions

Product: Spotlight
Lighting positions represent the hanging points for instruments; they should be placed on the light plot before the instruments are added. Lighting positions manage the numbering of instruments according to the instruments location on the lighting position. Defining the lighting positions first is useful because once the space has been created, with the stage and lighting positions defined, the file can be used as a template for future light plots in that space. For more information on creating templates, see Creating Templates on page 51 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Place the lighting positions in their own design layer and in their own classes. A drawing structure based on layers and classes facilitates selecting, viewing, and printing the light plot. Symbols can have a separate 2D and 3D representation. The lighting position object automatically uses the appropriate portion of the symbol. At a minimum, the symbol must have at least a 2D component, though it may not display correctly in all the views. Correct this by editing the symbol definition and adding a 3D component. For more information on symbols, see Understanding Symbols on page 133 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Lighting positions can be placed on the light plot in two ways. In the Resource Browser, either select one of the lighting symbols from the symbol libraries or one of the symbols you have created in this file or a Favorites file. Insert the symbol with the Light Position Obj tool to place a lighting position on the light plot. This method is described in Inserting Lighting Positions on page 211. Symbols that have already been placed on the plot can be converted to lighting positions. This method is described in Creating a Lighting Position on page 211.
Adding Lighting Positions |
211
Inserting Lighting Positions

Product: Spotlight
When a lighting position is to be used in several locations, insert the symbol from the Resource Browser with the Light Position Obj tool. This can be a symbol that you have created, located in a Favorites file or the current file, or it can be one of the symbols imported from the libraries included with Spotlight ([VectorWorks]\Libraries); see Object Libraries on page 507. For information on importing and creating symbols, see Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. For example, a generic 42 electric batten may be used to represent each stage electric. Create a single symbol for the 42 electric. Place this lighting position as many times as required by inserting it with the Light Position Obj tool. To insert lighting positions: Lighting positions must be inserted in Top/Plan view. 1. Select View > Standard Views > Top/Plan. 2. Click the Light Position Obj tool from the Spotlight tool set. 3. Select the desired lighting position symbol from the Resource Browser and choose Make Active from the Resources menu to make it the active symbol definition. Alternatively, double-click on the symbol to activate it. 4. Click in the drawing to insert the active lighting position symbol definition, and then click again to set the lighting position rotation. If the lighting position symbol is inserted without first clicking on the Light Position Obj tool, the symbol will be inserted by the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. However, the lighting position functionality will not be present. When correctly inserted, the Object Info palette displays Light Position Obj for the selected lighting position. Once the Light Position Obj tool has been selected, it remains selected by default so that lighting positions can be repeatedly inserted. To place non-lighting position symbols after placing lighting positions, switch to the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. 5. A different type of lighting position can be placed by changing the active symbol definition and continuing to use the Light Position Obj tool.
Creating a Lighting Position

Product: Spotlight
Creating a lighting position from a selected object is suggested when only one instance of a lighting position is to be used. For example, a special box boom used only on the right side of the stage can be drawn and converted to a lighting position. To create a lighting position: 1. Draw the object, and then select it. The object must contain, at a minimum, a 2D representation of the lighting position. 2. If multiple objects are to be converted to a single lighting position, group the objects first by selecting Modify > Group. Only one lighting position can be created at a time. 3. Select the Modify > Convert > Convert to Light Position command. 4. The Enter String dialog box opens; specify the name of the lighting position, and then click OK.
212

The selected object is converted to a symbol, and a lighting position of the same name is inserted in the file. Instruments can then be placed on the lighting position.
5. Once the object has been converted into a lighting position, it is saved as a symbol in the file. Select it as an active symbol definition and use the Light Position Obj tool to insert it again if required.
Lighting Position Properties

Product: Spotlight
The lighting position object information can be viewed and edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Z (Height) Position Name Position Summary Sum Insts Sum Colors Sum Circuits Auto Number Starting Number Increment Numbering Direction Multi Circ Num Style Symbol Name
Description
For 3D lighting positions, specifies the height Displays the name of lighting position symbol; this name is editable Select to display the lighting position summary; see Displaying the Lighting Position Summary Label on page 213 Displays the total number of instruments in the summary label Displays a summary of color gels sorted by color in the summary label Displays a summary of circuiting information in the summary label Select to automatically number instruments and multi-circuit instruments on the lighting position Specifies the starting number for instrument auto-numbering Specifies the increment for auto-numbering instruments Specifies the page relative numbering direction Specifies the multi-circuit numbering format for multi-circuit instruments (see Instrument Auto-numbering on page 213) For reference, displays the name of the symbol used to create the lighting position
The Z-value of a lighting position can only be specified for lighting positions with 3D geometry. However, the Z-value can be specified for the lighting instruments placed on any type of lighting position (2D, 3D or hybrid).
Lighting Position Properties |
213
Instrument Auto-numbering
Product: Spotlight
The lighting position controls the auto-numbering of the instruments and multi-circuit instruments that are placed on the position. Define the numbering preferences in the lighting position Object Info palette. To automatically number the lighting instruments according to their location on the lighting position object, select Auto Number. Enter the starting instrument number and increment value, and then select the numbering direction from the Numbering Direction list. The numbering direction is page relative. For Multi-circuit numbering, specify the numbering format by selecting the Multicirc Num Style from the list.
Numbering Format
AlphaNum Num.Alpha Num.Num
Description
Numbers the multicircuit instruments with A1, A2, A3... Numbers the multicircuit instruments with 1.A, 1.B, 1.C... Numbers the multicircuit instruments with 1.1, 1.2, 1.3...
Deselect Auto Number to manually number the instruments (see Numbering Instruments Manually on page 232). After changing Auto Number settings, select Modify > Refresh Instruments to view the results.
Displaying the Lighting Position Summary Label

Product: Spotlight
A Position Summary can be appended to the lighting position by selecting Position Summary in the Object Info palette and specifying the summary information to display.
Position Summary
Select whether instruments, colors, and circuits will be included in the summary by selecting the appropriate checkboxes in the Object Info palette. The position summary uses the current text attributes from the Text menu by default; to change the text format, select the lighting position and choose the format (font, size, and style) from the Text menu. If desired, change the color of a selected position summary in the Attributes palette. To hide the position name and summary, deselect Position Summary.
214
Setting Up Instrument Label Legends

Product: Spotlight
Label legends specify the labels and label formatting for lighting instruments on the light plot. Multiple label legends can be defined and then selectively applied to different instruments. The active label legend is applied to instruments as they are placed.
Label Classes
Product: Spotlight
Each label is automatically placed in its own VectorWorks Label class. This allows the labels to be globally turned on and off. For example, if the designer is printing the light plot for an electrician, the Label-Purpose class of labels can be hidden so that only electrical information labels are shown. The labels display the lighting instrument object information. The instrument Object Info palette also shows this information (Lighting Instrument Properties on page 224).
Using the Label Legend Manager

Product: Spotlight
The Label Legend Manager controls the setup and modification of the instrument label styles. Select Tools > Label Legend Manager to set up the legends for the light plot. The Label Legend Manager dialog box opens.
Parameter
Active
Description
To activate the default legend for lighting instruments, select the label legend and click in the Active column. The active legend is indicated with a check mark. Any new instruments created will use the active legend as the default label legend; the legend name is displayed in the instrument Object Info palette, and can be changed at any time (see Changing the Instrument Label Legend on page 233).
Legend Name Add Remove Edit Fields Edit Layout
Lists the files current legends Creates a new label legend and specifies the labels to include, as well as their attributes (see Creating Label Legends on page 215) Deletes the selected label legend; the active label legend cannot be removed Edits the labels included in the selected legend, along with their attributes (see Editing Label Legends on page 216) Specifies the position of the labels in relation to an instrument (see Formatting the Label Legend on page 217)
Setting Up Instrument Label Legends |
215
Creating Label Legends

Product: Spotlight
To create a new legend: 1. In the Label Legend Manager dialog box, click Add. The Add New Legend dialog box opens. Select the labels for placement and specify their attributes. Indicate the instrument symbol to use when formatting the label legend, and select whether the legend rotates with the instrument.
Parameter
Legend Name Attributes Use Attribute Right Reading
Description
Provide a name for the new legend by typing it in the Legend Name field. A name must be entered before closing the dialog box.
Click to select an item to appear in the label legend; up to eight labels can be selected. A check mark indicates the label is included. Click again to remove the label from use. Lists the possible labels that can be selected for inclusion in the label legend For each label, select whether it will always be right-reading or allowed to rotate with the instrument. A check mark indicates the field is right-reading; deselect to allow the field to rotate with the instrument.
Right Reading selected
Right Reading deselected
216

Description
Select the container for each label by clicking in the Container field until the desired container is displayed. Custom container symbols can be added to the list of available containers. Draw a container object, and then click Modify > Create Symbol. Enter a name for the container; click OK. In the Move Symbol dialog box, specify the location of the Containers folder and click OK. The symbol is added to the list of available containers. Any symbol can be placed in the containers folder and used as a label container. The pre-defined container symbols can also be edited and customized.
Parameter
Container Type
Lighting Instrument Layout Symbol
Specifies a symbol to use for label placement when editing the label layout (see Formatting the Label Legend on page 217); by default, the active symbol is selected. Click Choose to open the Choose an Instrument dialog box, where a different symbol can be selected from the current files resources. Specifies whether the label legend rotates with the instrument, or remains stationary as the instrument rotates
Non-Rotating
Non-Rotating deselected
Non-Rotating selected
2.
When all the label items and attributes have been specified for the legend, click OK. The new legend name displays in the Legend Name list in the Label Legend Manager dialog box.
Editing Label Legends

Product: Spotlight
To edit a legend: 1. In the Label Legend Manager dialog box, select the legend, and then click Edit Fields. The Edit Label Legend dialog box opens.
217
The legend name displays at the top of the dialog box, and cannot be changed. In addition, the layout symbol for the legend cannot be changed; it can only be specified at legend creation. See Creating Label Legends on page 215 for a description of the legend parameters. 2. The currently selected label items have a check mark next to the label name. Select any additional label items to appear in the legend by clicking in the Use column; up to eight labels can be selected. To deselect a label item, click in the Use column; the check mark is removed. 3. Click OK. To rename a label legend, locate it in the Resource Browser in the Label Legends folder of the current file, and select Rename from the Resources menu. (Any existing instruments that use the old legend name will lose their labels.)
Formatting the Label Legend

Product: Spotlight
Once a legend has been created, format it so that the labels are displayed in specific positions. The labels, containers, and layout symbol are selected when creating the label legend; see Creating Label Legends on page 215. To format the label legend: 1. In the Label Legend Manager dialog box, select the legend, and then click Edit Layout. The Edit Symbol window opens, where the default position and format of the labels is specified for instruments that use this label legend. The name of the current label legend is displayed at the top of the Edit Symbol window. The instrument used for the layout is either the symbol selected in Lighting Instrument Layout Symbol or the active symbol at the time the legend was created.
218

Name of legend currently being edited
Labels available for instrument Drag labels into position
2. The labels selected for the legend display to the left of the instrument diagram. Drag each label to its position on or around the instrument. The labels formatting can be set by selecting the label, and then using the Text menu to select the labels font, size, style, and justification. The label stacking order can be changed with the Modify > Send commands; the instrument is part of the stacking order. Change the color of the label by selecting it and applying a solid pen color from the Attributes palette. 3. When the labels are set, click Exit Symbol in the upper right corner of the window to return to the drawing. The formatting and position of the labels applies to all instruments that use this legend.
Repositioning Labels
Product: Spotlight
Labels should be repositioned through the Label Legend Manager. On a complex light plot, however, a label can be hidden by the nearest object. If that occurs, click on the instrument to select it, and then click on the instrument label control point with the 2D Selection tool; drag the label to another location. This one-time repositioning does not affect the label legend.
Fresnel color information obscured by Altman lighting instrument
Fresnel color information now visible
219
Importing Label Legends from Another File

Product: Spotlight
Label legends from another VectorWorks Spotlight file can be imported into the current file. Import the Label Legends symbol folder contents from the original file into the new file with the Import command in the Resource Browser; place the legends into the Legends folder. The imported label legends are listed in the Label Legend Manager. See Importing a Symbol Folder on page 150 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
220
Creating and Editing Instruments

Product: Spotlight
10
VectorWorks Spotlight lighting instruments represent more than simply a graphical symbol. An instrument contains design information, such as labels, focus, position, channel, and color. Instruments are labeled with lighting information according to the label legend format. When placing instruments, either use one of the standard instrument symbols, or convert your own custom symbols to instruments. Place the lighting instruments in their own design layer and in their own classes. A drawing structure based on layers and classes facilitates selecting, viewing, and printing the light plot. Once the lighting positions have been created and the lighting instruments have been defined and placed, the instruments can be edited to conform to changes in the lighting design. The instruments can be combined into multi-circuit instruments. In addition, the focus point of the instruments can be defined, and photometric data can be obtained.
Adding Lighting Instruments

Product: Spotlight
Instruments can be placed on the light plot in three ways. In the Resource Browser, either select one of the lighting symbols from the symbol libraries or one of the symbols you have created in this file or a Favorites file. Insert the symbol with the Inst Insertion tool to place a lighting instrument object on the light plot. This method is described in Inserting Instruments on page 221. Symbols that have already been placed on the plot can be converted to lighting instruments. This method is described in Creating a Lighting Instrument on page 222. The instrument symbols from the libraries included with Spotlight contain all the required attribute information. When creating or using your own symbols with Spotlight, see Lighting Instrument Specifications on page 495. Existing lighting instruments with specific parameters can be saved as symbols. These red symbols can be easily placed from the Resource Browser, picking up the active label legend at placement. This method is described in Creating and Inserting Lighting Resources on page 223.
Inserting Instruments
Product: Spotlight
Existing instrument symbols are inserted with the Inst Insertion tool. This can be a symbol that you have created, located in a Favorites file or the current file, or it can be one of the symbols imported from the libraries included with Spotlight ([VectorWorks]\Libraries); see Object Libraries on page 507. When Spotlight is installed, lighting instrument symbols are also provided as default resources. Default resources are automatically imported into the file (when selected while changing instrument properties) and display in the Resource Browser; see Changing Instrument Properties on page 228 and VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. For information on importing symbols, see Accessing Existing Resources on page 128 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To insert a lighting instrument: 1. Click the Inst Insertion tool from the Spotlight tool set.
222
| Chapter 10: Creating and Editing Instruments
2. Select the instrument symbol from the Resource Browser and choose Make Active from the Resources menu to make it the active symbol definition. Alternatively, double-click on the symbol to activate it. 3. Click once to insert the active instrument symbol definition, and then again to determine the instrument rotation. By default, the active Label Legend is applied to the instrument.
If the instrument symbol is inserted without first clicking on the Inst Insertion tool, the symbol will be inserted by the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. However, the instrument functionality will not be present. When correctly inserted, the Object Info palette displays Lighting Device (with a Device Type of Light) for the selected instrument. Once the Inst Insertion tool has been selected, it remains selected by default so that instruments can be repeatedly inserted. To place non-instrument symbols after placing instruments, switch to the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. 4. Place instruments on a lighting position to add them to that lighting position and enable numbering. As instruments are placed, their unit number is automatically determined and they are numbered according to the lighting position numbering format (see Instrument Auto-numbering on page 226). To view the numbering, select Modify > Refresh Instruments. To change the numbering format, turn off instrument auto-numbering by the lighting position (deselect Auto Number in the lighting position Object Info palette). Then, select the Modify > Number Instruments command as described in Numbering Instruments Manually on page 232. 5. A different type of instrument can be placed by changing the active symbol definition and continuing to use the Inst Insertion tool.
Creating a Lighting Instrument

Product: Spotlight
Spotlight provides hundreds of lighting symbols; however, it is not necessary to use only these pre-defined symbols. Create a Spotlight instrument out of a currently selected symbolonce the symbol is converted to an instrument, the instrument functionality is present and the label legend is attached. See Lighting Instrument Specifications on page 495 for more information and restrictions on using custom symbols for lighting instruments, and information on attaching the Light Info Record. To create a lighting instrument: 1. Convert the object to a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol. For information on symbols, see Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Select the symbol(s). Symbols can have a separate 2D and 3D representation.The lighting instrument object automatically uses the appropriate portion of the symbol. At a minimum, the symbol must have at least a 2D component, though it may not display correctly in all the views. Correct this by editing the symbol definition and adding a 3D component.
Adding Lighting Instruments |

3. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Instrument.
223
The selected symbol(s) is converted into a lighting instrument. The active label legend, if any, is applied to the instrument(s); see Using the Label Legend Manager on page 214 for more information. The instrument properties can be changed through the Object Info palette; some of the instrument parameters may need to be entered. If creating multi-circuit instruments, first create each instruments symbol (see Multi-circuit Instrument Specifications on page 498). Then insert the multi-circuit instruments as described in Inserting Multi-circuit Instruments on page 236. 4. Once the instrument has been converted, it is saved as a symbol in the file. Select it as an active symbol definition and use the Inst Insertion tool to insert it again if required.
Creating and Inserting Lighting Resources

Instruments created with the Convert to Instrument command (see Creating a Lighting Instrument on page 222) are black symbols. They must be inserted with the Inst Insertion tool and their parameters specified. Any instrument that has been inserted from a library or converted from a symbol can be saved as a red plug-in object resource. Its appropriate default values are retained, and when inserted from the Resource Browser, the instrument picks up the lighting position and active label legend. For more information on red symbols, see Symbol Types on page 134 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To create a lighting instrument resource with pre-defined parameters: 1. Select a current instrument and ensure that all its parameters have been specified as desired. In the Object Info palette, delete the label legend name (Use Legend parameter) and lighting position (Position parameter). Set the Z height of the instrument to 0. Set a label legend name to use a specific label legend, rather than the current one, upon insertion. If the label legend is not in the file at the time of symbol insertion, it is automatically imported. 2. With the instrument selected, select Modify > Create Symbol. The Create Symbol dialog box opens. Provide a name for the new symbol. For information on symbols, see Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 3. Click Options. The Insertion Options dialog box opens.
4. Select Convert to Plug-in Object, and then click OK.
224
5. Click OK to create the symbol. If the Move dialog box opens, specify the location of the resource. 6. The lighting symbol is saved in the Resource Browser as a red symbol. When the symbol is inserted, it functions as a plug-in object and the saved parameters are retained.
A lighting instrument that has been saved as a red symbol can be inserted with the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. To insert a lighting instrument resource as a plug-in object: 1. In the Resource Browser, locate the red symbol instrument resource. 2. Double-click on the resource to make it the active symbol and to activate the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. 3. Click in the drawing to insert the instrument. The active label legend and lighting position are applied, and the parameters that were saved with the instrument are retained.
Lighting Instrument Properties

Product: Spotlight
The instrument parameters can be viewed and edited in the Object Info palette. Double-click on an instrument, or click Edit from the Object Info palette of one or more selected instruments. The Lighting Device dialog box opens, facilitating instrument parameter modifications; see Editing Instruments and Objects on page 228.
Lighting Instrument Properties |

For a custom instrument symbol without an information record attached, enter the required instrument object parameters (see Attaching the Light Info Record on page 497). An entry is not required for every field.
225
Parameter
XYZ/IJK Location/ Rot Edit Device Type Inst. Type Wattage Purpose Position Unit Number Color Dimmer Channel Universe Circuit Number Circuit Name System User Field 1 6 Num Channels Frame Size Field Angle Beam Angle Weight Gobo 1
Description
Changes the instruments location and rotation; the instrument labels rotate with the instrument unless Right Reading was selected in the Label Legend Manager (see Formatting the Label Legend on page 217) Opens the Lighting Device dialog box, for editing instrument parameters of one or more lighting instruments; see Editing Instruments and Objects on page 228 Displays the type of object that is selected; normally, instruments are Light device types Displays the specific type of lighting instrument Indicates the power consumed by the instrument Specifies the purpose for using Displays the name of the lighting position Identifies the instrument location on the lighting position Specifies the gel color number; if Light On is selected for the lighting instrument, Color specifies the actual light color Specifies the dimmer or DMX address number of the instrument Specifies the channel number of the instrument Indicates the DMX group of the dimmer Indicates the circuit number where instrument is plugged in Specifies the name of bundled circuit group Specifies the letter describing the control system (Lightwright-compatible parameter) Provides user-defined fields; use these extra fields to keep track of any desired data Identifies the number of control channels used by the instrument Indicates the dimensions of the color cut Sets the field angle of the instrument Sets the beam angle of the instrument Specifies the instrument weight Indicates the gobo texture number for the first gobo Note: Specifying the gobo texture by clicking Edit in the Object Info palette provides a graphical method of selecting textures from the default resources (see Editing Instruments and Objects on page 228)
Gobo 1 Rotation Gobo 2 Gobo 2 Rotation Gobo Shift
Sets the rotation angle of gobo texture 1 Indicates the gobo texture number for the second gobo Sets the rotation angle of gobo texture 2 Adjusts the position of the instrument gobos to the front or rear
226

Description
Provides a user-defined label (Lightwright-compatible parameter) Select to draw an accurate wireframe representation of the light beam; the light beam is drawn based on the instrument parameters, and can be used to check whether the stage and focus areas have been adequately lit (see Drawing Light Beam Representations on page 240) Adds a spot light to the lighting instrument, and turns the light on; the light beam and spread are specified by the Beam Angle and Field Angle parameters, and the Color parameter sets the light color Enables the lit fog weather effect; see Creating Weather Effects on page 621 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Enter a numerical value to control the intensity of the light inside the lighting device Displays the name of the symbol used to create the instrument Replaces the selected instrument with the current active symbol (see Replacing Instruments on page 231) Shows the label legend applied to the instrument; the active label legend name is shown when an active Label Legend has been selected (see Using the Label Legend Manager on page 214) Refreshes instrument labels if label changes have been made Specifies the focus point for the lighting instrument. The focus point must be defined first (see Focusing Instruments on page 238). Select to display additional object data for technical support use; do not edit these fields
Parameter
Mark Draw Beam
Light On
Lit Fog (RenderWorks required) Brightness(%) Symbol Name Replace with Active Symbol Use Legend
Refresh Labels Focus ShowData
For instruments and accessories, do not provide a name on the Data tab. The instrument or accessory Unique ID Number (UID) is automatically entered and must be used as the instrument or accessory name.
Instrument Auto-numbering
Product: Spotlight
As the instruments are placed, they are numbered according to the lighting position auto-numbering format (see Lighting Position Properties on page 212). To view the numbering, select Modify > Refresh Instruments. Select Tools > Options > Toggle Auto Numbering to globally set the Auto-numbering value for all lighting positions to on or off. The instruments can then be numbered manually (see Numbering Instruments Manually on page 232).
Aligning Instruments
Product: Spotlight
Lighting instruments can be automatically aligned and distributed along a specified guide line with the Align and Distribute Items tool.
Aligning Instruments |
To align and/or distribute instruments along a line: 1. Select the objects to be aligned or distributed. 2. Click the Align and Distribute Items tool from the Spotlight tool set. 3. Click to define the beginning of the guide line, and click to end. The Align and Distribute dialog box opens.
227
The instruments can be aligned and distributed according to several options.
Original instrument alignment and distribution
Parameter
Just Align
Description
The instruments are aligned, but their distribution is not changed
Along line on centers
Aligns and distributes selected objects along the guide line using a specified spacing setting between the center point of the instruments
Evenly between points
The instruments are aligned and distributed evenly between the guide line points, starting with instruments at the beginning of the guide line
228

Description
The instruments are aligned and distributed evenly between the guide line points, starting with spacing at the beginning of the guide line
Parameter
Evenly inside points
4. Click OK to align or distribute the instruments according to the selected option.
Editing Instruments and Objects

Changing Instrument Properties
Product: Spotlight
To edit the properties of a lighting instrument: 1. Select one or more lighting instruments. 2. From the Object Info palette, select Edit, or simply double-click a single instrument selection. The Lighting Device dialog box opens. The lighting device parameters are described inLighting Instrument Properties on page 224. Only the parameters which are different are described here.
Editing Instruments and Objects |
229
Parameter
Position
Description
Lists the lighting positions in the file; select one for the lighting instrument, or select the ellipsis (...) to create a new lighting position name Note: If a new position is named, a lighting position of that name must then be created in the file
Focus
Lists the focus points in the file; select one for the lighting instrument, or select the ellipsis (...) to create a new focus point name Note: If a new focus point is named, a focus point of that name must then be created in the file
Legend Instrument Symbol Get Resource Previous/Next Apply to All
Lists the label legends in the file; select one for the lighting instrument Lists the instrument symbols from the current files resources; select a different symbol for the lighting instrument from the resources imported into the file Opens the Get External Resource (Macintosh) or Import External Resource (Windows) dialog box; select an instrument symbol from either the default resources or the current files resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513) When more than one instrument is selected, displays the parameters of the previous or next instrument in the selection When more than one instrument is selected, and the parameters of the first instrument in the selection are displayed, applies only the parameters that have been modified to all the instruments in the selection
230
3. Click the Light Information tab.
Parameter
Get Data from Symbol Get Resource
Description
Obtains the light information from the Light Info record attached to the symbol definition Opens the Get External Resource (Macintosh) or Import External Resource (Windows) dialog box; select a gobo texture symbol from either the default resources or the current files resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 and Inserting Gobo Projections on page 269) Controls the intensity of the light inside the lighting device; drag the slider to the right to increase the light intensity
Brightness(%)
4. Click OK to apply the changes to the selection. The properties of one or more selected instruments or objects can also be edited from the Shape tab of the Object Info palette (see Lighting Position Properties on page 212). A selected instrument or a selection of instruments can be cut, copied, and pasted with the Edit menu commands.See Editing 2D Objects on page 229 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on the basic editing commands.
231
Replacing Instruments
Product: Spotlight
An individual instrument can be replaced by another type of instrument by choosing the new active symbol in the Resource Browser, and then selecting Replace with Active Symbol in the Object Info palette. However, this process would be tedious for multiple instruments. By using the Replace Instrument command, all the instruments of a particular type can easily be replaced with another type of instrument. Alternatively, a selection of instruments can be replaced with another type of instrument.
Replacing All Instruments of One Type

Product: Spotlight
To replace all the instruments of one type: 1. Select Modify > Replace Instrument. The Replace Instruments dialog box opens.
This option is unavailable when no instruments are selected
2. Click Replace All, and then specify the instrument type to be replaced by selecting it from the list. 3. In the Symbol Folders list, select the location of the replacement instrument type. Select the specific instrument type from the Symbols list. 4. Click OK. All instruments of the type specified are replaced with the selected instrument type.
Replacing Selected Instruments

Product: Spotlight
To replace selected instruments: 1. Select the instruments to be replaced. 2. Select Modify > Replace Instrument. The Replace Instruments dialog box opens.
232
3. Click Replace selected instruments. 4. Specify the location of the replacement instrument type in the Symbol Folders list. Select the specific instrument type from the Symbols list. 5. Click OK. The selected instruments are replaced with the specified instrument type.
Numbering Instruments Manually

Product: Spotlight
Instruments do not have to be numbered according to the lighting positions auto-numbering feature. They can be manually numbered.
Numbering Individual Instruments

Product: Spotlight
To number selected instruments manually: 1. Select the lighting position object. 2. Disable auto-numbering by deselecting Auto Number in Object Info palette. 3. Select the instrument(s) to be numbered. 4. Select Modify > Number Instruments. The Number Instruments dialog box opens.
233
Parameter
Direction Numbering Multi-circuit Numbering
Description
The numbering direction is relative to the page; click the desired numbering direction Specifies the Starting Number and Increment value; if desired, a Prefix and/or Suffix can be attached to the number Select the numbering format for multi-circuit instrument numbering; these items are identical to the selections made when specifying auto-numbering for multi-circuit instruments (see Instrument Auto-numbering on page 226)
As an example, a Starting Number of 2, Increment of 2, and Suffix of A numbers the instruments as follows: 2A, 4A, 6A, and so on.
Numbering Instruments Manually by Selection

Product: Spotlight
To number instruments manually in the order they are selected: 1. Select Modify > Number Instruments. 2. In the Number Instruments dialog box, select Manual (the Manual direction is selected automatically if no instruments were selected). 3. Click OK, and select the instruments to be numbered one by one. To stop numbering instruments, click in an empty area of the drawing.
Changing the Instrument Label Legend

Product: Spotlight
As instruments are placed on the light plot, the active label legend is assigned to them by default. However, the legend can be changed for a selection of instruments. To change the instrument label legend: 1. Select one or more instruments. 2. Click on the Modify > Assign Legend to Insts command. The Assign Legend to Insts dialog box opens.
234
3. Select the new label legend for the instruments. 4. Click OK; the new label legend is applied to the selection. The label legend can also be changed for an individual instrument by selecting the instrument, and then changing the legend name in the Use Legend field of the Object Info palette. Use the Find and Modify command to quickly generate a custom selection of specific instruments and apply the new legend to the selected instruments (see Find and Modify on page 234).
Refreshing Instrument and Light Position Data

Product: Spotlight
The Modify > Refresh Instruments command updates light position information and instrument labels to reflect any changes that have been made. This ensures that all current data is displayed; it is a good idea to select this command before printing the light plot. Two-fers do not get updated with the instrument information when the Refresh Instruments command is selected.
Find and Modify

Product: Spotlight
Custom selection criteria can be defined to quickly and easily search for instruments, lighting positions, and accessories and to perform an action upon the search results. To find and modify objects: 1. Select Modify > Find and Modify. The Find and Modify dialog box opens.
235
2. Select the type of object to be searched and specify the change(s) to occur to the items found.
Parameter
Find All
Description
Select the type of object to be searched, and then specify the criteria for the search. For example, find all instruments with a circuit number of 66. The list of values is filtered as the criteria are defined. A specific parameter value can be changed to a new value by clicking Change, selecting the parameter, and entering the new value. Instruments on a particular circuit can be changed to another circuit, for example. Click Replace to change the found items to the item specified in the list. For example, find all instruments with a particular purpose, and change them to be of the same instrument type. The label legend for found instruments can be changed by clicking Assign and selecting the new label legend The renumber operation changes the numbering values for the specified item and location. Enter the starting number value for the change. For example, change the numbering for all PAR instruments on Electric #2 to begin with 12. One parameter from the searched item can be copied to another parameter by selecting the parameters from the lists in the Copy operation. For example, copy the circuit number to the dimmer number or the dimmer number to the channel number. Change the class of the found items by clicking Change the Class to The found item(s) can simply be selected by clicking Just Select Them Deselect the items found by the custom search by clicking the Just Deselect Them option
Change the __ field to __
Replace them with this symbol Assign this Label Legend Renumber the __ field from __ starting at__ Copy the __ field to the __ field
Change the class to __ Just Select Them Just Deselect Them
236

Description
Delete the items found by the custom search by clicking the Delete Them option Displays an item count of the objects meeting current criteria at the bottom of the Find and Modify dialog box
Parameter
Delete Them Item Count
3. Once the find and modify criteria have been defined and action(s) specified, click OK. The selected change(s) will occur to the items located by the search.
Using Circuit Tools

Inserting Multi-circuit Instruments
Product: Spotlight
Lighting instruments can be inserted as multi-circuit instruments that act as a group while retaining their individual parameters and labels. As an example, a six-foot striplight consisting of Cyc lamps of different colors can be inserted as a single multi-circuit instrument that can be easily positioned. However, each light in the multi-circuit instrument retains its own information, which is displayed in its label legend. When generating paperwork, each cell of the instrument is listed individually. The Inst Insertion tool inserts multi-circuit instruments. The Modify > Convert > Convert to MultiCircuit command is no longer required when inserting multi-circuit instruments, although it is still available. To insert a multi-circuit instrument: 1. Create a multi-circuit symbol out of instrument symbols (left, center, and right components), or locate a multi-circuit symbol in the Resource Browser. See Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Multi-circuit symbol
The multi-circuit symbol must consist only of other symbols to be properly inserted as a multi-circuit instrument. Otherwise, the Inst Insertion tool treats it as a single circuit instrument. 2. Click the Inst Insertion tool from the Spotlight tool set. 3. Select Make Active from the Resources menu to make the multi-circuit symbol the active symbol definition. Alternatively, double-click on the symbol to activate it. 4. Click once to insert the active multi-circuit instrument symbol definition, and then again to determine the multi-circuit instrument rotation. By default, the active Label Legend is applied to each part of the multi-circuit instrument.
Using Circuit Tools |
237
The instruments retain their individual information but move as a single unit
If one of the multi-circuit components is not aligned properly, temporarily change its Device Type to Accessory in the Object Info palette. Adjust it in relation to the other instruments by dragging it, and then change its Device Type back to Light. The Modify > Convert > Convert to MultiCircuit command can add a selected instrument to the multi-circuit instrument. To undo a conversion to a multi-circuit instrument, select the multi-circuit instrument and then the Convert to MultiCircuit command.
Ganging Instruments
Product: Spotlight
Two-fers gang two or more instruments together on one circuit, dimmer, or channel. The value in the ganging field should match. If it does not, the value from the first selected instrument is used. To gang two or more instruments: 1. Click the Ganging tool from the Spotlight tool set. 2. Click on the first, and then the second, instrument to be ganged together. If more than two instruments are to be ganged together, continue clicking on each instrument in succession.
1. Click on 1st instrument
3. Click to set offset 2. Click on 2nd instrument
3. Click to set the offset distance of the two-fer label. If the field values of the instruments do not match, confirm that this is acceptable in the Notice dialog box which opens. 4. Click OK. The instruments are ganged together with one or more Two-Fer objects.
238
The properties of a two-fer are displayed, and can be edited, in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Update Insts
Description
Select to update the ganged instruments. Changes to one instrument are updated for the other ganged instrument. Also updates two-fer counts in the position summary inventory report. Select the corner style for the two-fer object (Square, Arc, or Bzier) Indicate whether to gang by Channel, Dimmer, or Circuit (name and number) Enter the value for the two-fer label. (For example, if ganging by channel number, enter a channel number of 80.) This new value updates the former value for dimmer, circuit, or channel in the instrument record. Select to display the two-fer label Select to place the label in a container, and then specify the container name The container name must exactly match the container symbol names located in the Containers folder of the Resource Browser. Use this option to override the container specified in the Label Legend.
Corner Style Gang By Field Value
Show Label Use Container Container Name
Focusing Instruments
To focus a lighting instrument on a particular area or object, a focus point needs to be defined.
Creating a Focus Point Object

Product: Spotlight
An object defined as a focus point specifies where instruments should be directed. If the focus point is moved, any instruments that are aimed at it will update their focus position based on the focus point information. Like lighting positions and instruments, focus points should be inserted on their own design layer, to facilitate selection, viewing, and printing. Alternatively, it is acceptable to insert the focus points on the same design layer as the scenic elements. Focus points can also be inserted into their own classes. To insert a focus point object: 1. Click the Focus Point tool from the Spotlight tool set. 2. Click on the plot to insert the focus point object.
Focusing Instruments |
239
3. The Place Focus Point dialog box opens. Enter the name of the focus point, the focus height above the stage floor, and then click OK.
The focus point name is required later to specify the focus point for the lighting instruments. The name of a focus point can be changed on the Data tab of the Object Info palette, and can be updated in the drawing file by selecting Reset on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette. Place focus points in their own class so they can be easily hidden for a 3D rendering. Alternatively, set a focus points fill and pen attributes to None to hide a focus point.
Assigning a Focus Point to a Lighting Instrument

Product: Spotlight
One or more instruments can be focused on a focus point. The instrument focus point is used to draw light beam representations (see Drawing Light Beam Representations on page 240), calculate photometric values (see Obtaining Photometric Data on page 240) and for rendering gobo projections (see Gobo Projection Requirements on page 272). The focus point can also used to create Magic Sheets that show the instruments focused on a particular area (see Magic Sheets on page 261). In addition, the focus point can be used as one of the criteria for finding instruments with the Find and Modify command (see Find and Modify on page 234). To focus the lighting instrument(s) on a focus point: 1. Select the instrument(s). 2. Select Modify > Focus Instruments. In the Focus Instruments dialog box, specify the name of the focus point, or select Next Click to create a new focus point with the next mouse click (you will be prompted for the name of the focus point object).
240

To change the focus point of a single instrument, enter the name of the new focus point in the Focus field of the Object Info palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 224).
Drawing Light Beam Representations

Product: Spotlight
Once the focus point of instruments has been specified, light beam representations can be drawn. To turn on the light beam for one or more instruments: 1. Select the instrument(s). An instrument must have a focus point in order to draw a light beam representation (see Assigning a Focus Point to a Lighting Instrument on page 239). 2. Select Draw Beam in the Instrument Object Info palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 224).
An accurate wireframe representation of the light beams spread and location on the stage is drawn. The light beam of instruments used for general wash lighting can also be drawn; however, a focus point is still required in order to draw the light beam representation. VectorWorks Spotlight instruments cannot generate a rendered light beam. This is accomplished with gobo projectors only. An error message is drawn if the vertical angle is out of range, making the light beam incalculable.
Obtaining Photometric Data

Product: Spotlight
Spotlight can determine and display the surface illumination values of the stage at a specific location (Photometer object) or along a grid (Photometric Grid object). For photometric values to be measured, the lighting instrument(s) must have a designated focus point.
Inserting a Photometric Grid

Product: Spotlight
To insert a photometric grid: 1. Ensure that each lighting instrument contributing to the illumination is focused.
Obtaining Photometric Data |
241
The light beams do not have to be drawn for calculations to be made. 2. Click the PhotoGrid tool from the Spotlight tool set. 3. Click on the plot to insert the photometric grid. The grid is a rectangular object, and can be inserted in Center-line Placement mode or Edge Placement mode.
Placement Mode
Center-line
Description
Click once, and then again, to define the width through the center of the grid. Click again to specify the width of half the grid. Click once, and then again, to define the length along the edge of the grid. Click again to specify the grid width.
Edge
The photometric grid calculates and displays the illumination values at its elevation point. The values are displayed in either foot candles (Imperial) or lux (Metric), depending on the units selected in File > Document Settings > Units. If Use Threshold Settings is selected, colors indicate the illumination range according to the Threshold values set in the Object Info palette.
Color
Gray Green Tan Blue
Description
Illumination value of zero Illumination value between zero and Lower Threshold Illumination value between Lower and Upper Threshold Illumination value above Upper Threshold
The photometric grid range colors can be changed. See Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors on page 499.
242

Tan Green Gray
Blue
Lower Threshold = 300 FC Upper Threshold = 700 FC
4. To evaluate the illumination values at different heights, change the elevation of the photometric grid in the Object Info palette.
Photometric Grid Properties

Product: Spotlight
The photometric grid properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Z Show Elevation Show Zero Calculate using only visible beams Use Threshold Settings Lower Threshold
Description
Sets the elevation value of the grid; illumination values vary depending on the elevation Select to display the grid elevation along with the photometric values Select to display elevation values of zero Select to determine the photometric values based on only instruments with Draw Beam selected; this reduces calculation time Select to display the grid with colors that correspond to the specified threshold ranges Specify the illumination value at the lower end of the range; values below this level are displayed in green, and values between the lower and upper threshold are displayed in tan Specify the illumination value at the upper end of the range; values above this level are displayed in blue Specifies the spacing of photometric values in the X direction Specifies the spacing of photometric values in the Y direction Specifies the length of the grid in the X direction Specifies the length of the grid in the Y direction Refreshes the grid display after changes have been made to the lighting conditions
Upper Threshold Grid Spacing X Grid Spacing Y Grid Width X Grid Width Y Reset
Obtaining Photometric Data |
243
Inserting a Photometer
Product: Spotlight
To insert a photometer: 1. Ensure that each lighting instrument contributing to the illumination is focused.
The light beams do not have to be drawn for calculations to be made. 2. Click the Photometer tool from the Spotlight tool set. 3. Click on the plot to insert the photometer. Click again to set the photometer rotation. The photometer calculates and displays the illumination values at its elevation point. The values are displayed in either foot candles (Imperial) or lux (Metric), depending on the units selected in File > Document Settings > Units. See Inserting a Photometric Grid on page 240 for information on indicating threshold limits with a color.
Photometer
4. To evaluate the illumination values at different heights, change the elevation of the photometer in the Object Info palette.
Photometer Properties
Product: Spotlight
The photometer properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.
244

Description
Sets the elevation value of the photometer; illumination values vary depending on the elevation Select to display the objects elevation along with the photometric value Select to display an elevation value of zero Select to determine the photometric value based on only instruments with Draw Beam selected; this reduces calculation time Select to display the object in a color that corresponds to the specified threshold ranges Specify the illumination value at the lower end of the range; values below this level are displayed in green, and values between the lower and upper threshold are displayed in tan Specify the illumination value at the upper end of the range; values above this level are displayed in blue Refreshes the photometer display after changes have been made to the lighting conditions
Parameter
Z Show Elevation Show Zero Calculate using only visible beams Use Threshold Settings Lower Threshold
Upper Threshold Reset
Adding Accessories and Objects

Product: Spotlight
11
Once the lighting positions, instruments, and focus points have been created, the basic light plot exists. Next, lighting accessories and stage objects can be added.
Adding Accessories
Product: Spotlight
Accessories can be placed on the light plot in two ways. In the Resource Browser, either select one of the accessory symbols from the existing symbol libraries or one of the symbols you have created in this file or a Favorites file. Insert the symbol with the Accessory Insertion tool to place the accessory object on the light plot. This method is described in Inserting Accessories on page 245. Symbols that have already been placed on the plot can be converted into accessories. This method is described in Creating an Accessory on page 246. The accessory symbols from the libraries included with Spotlight include all the required attribute information and have the correct accessory type assigned (Accessory or Static Accessory). When creating or using your own symbols with Spotlight, see Accessory Specifications on page 498. Lighting instrument accessories, such as color frames, barn doors, and top hats, are placed on the same design layer as the instruments, in the Accessories class. Accessories such as color frames, barn doors, and top hats have a Device Type of Static Accessory. Accessories that require a control channel, such as color scrollers, have a Device Type of Accessory. An instrument can have multiple accessories in the same location (most accessories are placed at the front of an instrument). It can also have several accessories in different locations. Once an accessory has been associated with an instrument, the instrument controls the accessory.
Inserting Accessories
Product: Spotlight
Existing accessory symbols are inserted with the Accessory Insertion tool. These can be symbols that you have created, located in a Favorites file or the current file, or they can be one of the symbols imported from the libraries included with Spotlight ([VectorWorks]\Libraries); see Object Libraries on page 507. For more information on importing symbols, see Importing a Symbol Folder on page 150 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To insert an accessory: 1. Click the Accessory Insertion tool from the Spotlight tool set. 2. Select the accessory symbol from the Resource Browser and choose Make Active from the Resources menu to make it the active symbol definition. Alternatively, double-click on the symbol to activate it. 3. Click once to insert the active accessory symbol definition, and then again to determine the accessory rotation. The cursor changes to a bulls eye. Click on the instrument which will be associated with the accessory.
246
| Chapter 11: Adding Accessories and Objects
Because the accessory is controlled by the associated instrument, the items move together. However, an accessory can be positioned on its own by selecting it and dragging. If the accessory symbol is inserted without first clicking on the Accessory Insertion tool, the symbol will be inserted by the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. However, the accessory functionality will not be present. If correctly inserted, the Object Info palette displays Lighting Device (with a Device Type of Accessory or Static Accessory) for the selected accessory. Once the Accessory Insertion tool has been selected, it remains selected by default so that accessories can be repeatedly inserted. To place non-instrument symbols after placing accessories, switch to the 2D Symbol Insertion tool. 4. A different type of accessory can be placed by changing the active symbol definition and continuing to use the Accessory Insertion tool.
Creating an Accessory
Product: Spotlight
It is not necessary to use only the pre-defined symbols. Create an accessory out of a currently selected symbolonce the symbol is converted to an accessory, the accessory functionality is present. See Accessory Specifications on page 498 for restrictions on using symbols for accessories. To create an accessory: 1. First, draw the accessory, and then convert the object to a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol. For information on symbols, see Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Select the symbol(s). Symbols can have a separate 2D and 3D representation. The accessory object automatically uses the appropriate portion of the symbol. At a minimum, the symbol must have at least a 2D component, though it may not display correctly in all the views. Correct this by editing the symbol definition and adding a 3D component. 3. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Accessory. The selected symbol is converted into an accessory. The accessory properties can be changed through the Object Info palette; some of the accessory information may need to be entered. Accessories such as color frames, barn doors, and top hats should have a Device Type of Static Accessory. Accessories that require a control channel, such as color scrollers, should have a Device Type of Accessory. An accessory inserted by this method is not associated with an instrument. Use the Accessory Insertion tool to associate an accessory with an instrument.
Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot |
247
4. Once the accessory has been converted, it is saved as a symbol in the file. Select it as an active symbol definition and use the Accessory Insertion tool to insert it again if required.
Accessory Properties
Product: Spotlight
The accessory Object Info palette is nearly identical to the instrument palette format, because it requires many of the same parameters. The Device Type is Static Accessory or Accessory instead of Light. Entering a parameter in the accessory Object Info palette will not change the associated instrument parameters. For more information on the fields in the Object Info palette, see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 224.
Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot

Product: Spotlight
Stage objects, such as trusses, curtains, and other scenic objects are used in VectorWorks Spotlight to aid in developing the lighting design. A 3D stage object can be used as a focus point for lighting instruments by naming it as the focus point in the instrument Object Info palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 224). To facilitate viewing and printing the light plot, place the stage objects in their own design layer, apart from lighting positions, instruments and the theater ground plan, and in their own classes.
Placing Trusses
Product: Spotlight
Lighting instruments are not always placed on lighting positions. Some types of shows require the addition (or the exclusive use of) trusses. VectorWorks Spotlight supports nearly any configuration of trusses and towers. To use a truss as a lighting position, place the truss symbol on the plot, and then convert it to a lighting position by selecting Modify > Convert > Convert to Light Position (see Creating a Lighting Position on page 211).
Inserting a Straight Truss

Product: Spotlight
Straight truss parameters are illustrated by the following diagram.
Truss length Connection interval Chord Height Lacing Incomplete connection interval (red) Width
Straight truss
Ladder bar Left view straight truss
Straight folding truss
Ladder bar spacing
248

To add a straight truss to the light plot:
1. Click the Straight Truss tool from the Spotlight tool set. 2. Click in the drawing area where the truss will be located and draw a line to indicate the length of the truss.
Click 2 Click 1
Trusses are 2D/3D hybrid objects. Complex trusses can increase the time required to render the model in 3D.
Straight Truss Properties

Product: Spotlight
The straight truss properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Length Profile Connection Connection Interval Folding Pre Rigged Height/Width Chord Profile Chord Width Ladder Bar Spacing Ladder Bar Profile Top/Side Ladder Bar Diameter Lacing Profile Top/Side Lacing Diameter Hanging Angle Rotation Show 3D Detail Highlight
Description
Specifies the length of the truss in drawing units Select the truss profile from the list Select the type of connection from the list Indicates the distance for dividing the truss into component sections Select to indicate a folding truss Select whether to include a light bar Shows height and width values for the truss Select round or square chord tubing Shows the diameter of round chords or the width of square chords Specifies the interval of the ladder bars Select round or square ladder bar tubing Indicates the diameter of the top and side ladder bar tubing; enter 0 to draw no ladder bar Select round or square lacing tubing Indicates the diameter of the top and side lacing tubing. Enter 0 to draw no lacing. Indicates the angle of the truss between the stage or floor and the hanging point Specifies the rotation about the truss axis Select to render the truss with greater 3D detail Displays odd sized truss divisions in red
Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | Parameter

Message
249
Description
Provides information about the truss placement and indicates successful placement
A connection interval shorter than the defined interval length is displayed in red when Highlight is selected.
Inserting a Curved Truss

Product: Spotlight
Curved truss parameters are illustrated by the following diagram.
Chord Ladder spacing arc
Segment arc
Lacing Ladder bar
Curved Truss
To add a curved truss: 1. Click the Curved Truss tool from the Spotlight tool set. 2. Click to define the truss insertion point. Click again to set the rotation of the curved truss. Trusses are 2D/3D hybrid objects. Complex trusses can increase the time required to render the model in 3D.
Curved Truss Properties

Product: Spotlight
The curved truss properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Radius Total Arc Segment Arc Connection Profile Height/Width Chord Profile Chord Width
Description
Specifies the radius of the truss measured from the truss center line Indicates the total angle covered by the truss in degrees Specifies the interval in degrees for dividing the truss into component sections Select the type of connection from the list Select the truss profile from the list Shows height and width values for the truss Select round or square chord tubing Specifies the diameter of round chords or the width of square chords
250

Parameter
Ladder Spacing Arc Ladder Profile Top/Side Ladder Bar Diameter Lacing Profile Top/Side Lacing Diameter Show 3D Detail Highlight Message Draw 3D only
Description
Specifies the interval of the ladder bars in degrees Select round or square ladder bar tubing Specifies the diameter of the top and side ladder bar tubing. Enter 0 to draw no ladder bar. Select round or square lacing tubing Specifies the diameter of the top and side lacing tubing. Enter 0 to draw no lacing. Select to render the truss with greater 3D detail Displays odd sized truss divisions in red Provides information about the truss placement and indicates successful placement Select to display only the 3D component of the truss
If the final segment of a truss is shorter than the defined interval length, it is displayed in red when Highlight is selected.
Rotating a Curved Truss

Product: Spotlight
A curved truss can be rotated with the Rotate tool. To rotate a curved truss: 1. Select the truss. In the Object Info palette, select Draw 3D Only. 2. Click the Rotate tool from the Basic palette. 3. Click to set a fulcrum line; click to end. Move the cursor to rotate the truss, and then click to set the rotation.
Truss Configuration Requirements

Product: Spotlight
A great deal of flexibility is incorporated in the Spotlight truss object. However, in order to create a valid truss, the wide variety of configurations leads to certain restrictions in the application of truss properties.
Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | Truss Requirements

The width and height of the truss must be greater than three times the chord width The truss hanging angle must be between -90o and +90o A triangular truss must form a valid triangle The chord diameter must be greater than zero A pre-rigged truss cannot have lacing A pre-rigged truss cannot be folding Only box trusses can be pre-rigged A folding truss cannot have top lacing Folding is not allowed on a stacking truss Top lacing is not allowed on a stacking truss The top brace diameter must be less than or equal to the chord width The side brace diameter must be less than or equal to the chord width The connection interval must be greater than the ladder bar spacing Ladder bar spacing must be greater than three times the top brace size If the section is too small, lacing may not be drawn If a truss is drawn that does not meet these requirements, an alert message is generated.
251
Inserting Curtains
Product: Spotlight
The Curtain object is a 2D/3D hybrid representation of a stage curtain. To place a curtain on the light plot:
o
1. Click the Curtain Object tool from the Spotlight tool set. 2. Click on the drawing and drag to indicate the length of the curtain. Click again to finish the curtain.
252
Curtain Properties
Product: Spotlight
Curtain Length Pleat Depth Curtain in Plan View
Curtain in Plan View with Center Line Pleat Spacing
Open Width Track Ghost Opening
The Curtain Length is based on the length of the line specified. Set the curtain fullness and height, and indicate whether a center line or track should be drawn in Plan view. The curtain parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Curtain Length Draw Options Track Width Pleat Spacing Pleat Depth Curtain Height Open From Open Width Ghost Opening
Description
Specifies the length of the curtain Select whether to draw a 2D center line or show the curtain track Specifies the width of the curtain track (when Show Track is selected) Indicates the distance between pleats Indicates the width of the curtain pleats Specifies the height of the curtain from Z-value up Specifies an end or center opening Indicates the distance, if any, that the curtain is open When selected for open curtains, the open section of the curtain appears dimmed
To create borders or teasers, specify a Z-height for the curtain and decrease its Curtain Height value. The curtain can be rendered and textured (RenderWorks required) to obtain the best visual effect. For more information on adding textures, see Textures and Shaders on page 597 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot |
253
Curtains are 2D/3D hybrid objects. Several curtains can increase the time required to render the model in 3D. To render complex curtains, it may be necessary to use the Custom RenderWorks option, with Detail set to High.
254
Paperwork and Schedules

Product: Spotlight
12
Generating accurate and complete paperwork allows the electricians hanging the show to transform the light plot into the components required to create the lighting design on stage. VectorWorks Spotlight eliminates the arduous job of manually creating the instrument keys, schedules, inventory reports, magic sheets, and other paperwork.
Creating a Key to Instrumentation

Product: Spotlight
Statistics on the instruments and accessories used in the light plot help with show organization. The key to instrumentation can show the number of each kind of instrument in use, display an account of the accessories, and record the labels used to show instrument parameters. In addition, the key can compare its information to the current inventory so that the designer can determine how many instruments remain in the inventory, or whether more instruments have been specified than are currently present in the inventory. If the key is to display inventory items, create the inventory report first (see Inventory Reports on page 259). To create a key to instrumentation: 1. Select the Tools > Reports > Key to Instrumentation command. 2. Select one or more items to include in the key from the Key to Instrumentation dialog box.
Parameter
Instruments Accessories Inventory and Counts Active Label Legend
Description of Key Generated

Lists the instruments used in the light plot Lists the accessories used in the light plot Shows the instruments and accessories used in the plot and an inventory of remaining instruments and accessories Shows the layout of labels from the active label legend; if the layout from the current active legend is not desired for the key, select a different active label legend before choosing the Key to Instrumentation command
3. When the items to be included in the key have been selected, click OK.
256
| Chapter 12: Paperwork and Schedules
4. Select the location of the key to instrumentation by clicking on the plot where the top left corner of the key is to be placed. The key to instrumentation is a grouped object. If desired, the group can be edited and the elements of the key repositioned as desired. The color of the key can be changed through the Attributes palette. The key to instrumentation does not reflect changes made to the light plot after the key is generated. If changes are made, such as instruments added or deleted, select the Key to Instrumentation command to regenerate the key. The existing key is replaced by a new key in the same location.
Generating Paperwork
Product: Spotlight
The information to be included in the various schedules and reports, as well as the format of the reports, is specified in the Generate Paperwork dialog box. To set up the schedule and report information: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Generate Paperwork. The Generate Paperwork dialog box opens.
Generating Paperwork |
257
2. Select the desired Schedules and Reports. Each schedule and report selected must be set up by clicking on its Setup button. The setup procedure is described in the following sections. 3. Configure the rest of the paperwork setup by entering the Header Configuration, Show Information and the Page Properties (see Header Configuration on page 262). Click OK to generate the desired paperwork with the specified settings.
Schedule Setup
Product: Spotlight
The information to be included in the various schedules, as well as the format of the schedules, is specified in the Schedule Formatting dialog box. To set up the schedule contents and formatting: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Generate Paperwork. The Generate Paperwork dialog box opens. 2. Click the Setup button under the Schedules list. The Schedule Formatting dialog box opens.
258
Each schedule in the Schedule list is formatted in the same way. The formatting must be specified for each schedule by first selecting the schedule from the list and then specifying the format. When selecting Available fields and Column Order, press and hold the Shift key to select multiple, contiguous items or press and hold the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) to select non-contiguous items.
Parameter/Button
Printed Name Available Fields Schedule Columns Move > Move < Move Up/Move Down
Description
Suggests a title for the top of the report of the selected schedule. Change the title, if desired, by typing in a new title for that schedule. Displays the items that can be included in the schedule Displays, in order, the columns that have been selected to appear in the schedule Adds a selected available item to the list of schedule columns Removes a column from the Schedule Columns list The most recently added item displays at the bottom of the Schedule Columns list, indicating that it is the last column in the report; to change the column order, select a column and click on the Move Up and Move Down buttons until it is in the desired order For each column in the Schedule Columns list, select Wide, Medium, or Narrow from the Width list. These selections represent the relative widths of the columns in relation to the other columns. Since the schedule is automatically fit to the page, specifying the actual widths is unnecessary. The actual width of the column is dependent upon the number of columns as well as the final printed schedule size.
Column Format
Generating Paperwork | Parameter/Button

Page Formatting
259
Description
Specifies the formatting of the Column Headers and report Body text; select the Font, Style, and Size for each. Click the Change button to open the Format Text dialog box for editing text parameters (see Formatting Text on page 167 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide).
3. After specifying the column information, order, and width, as well as the page formatting for each type of schedule to be generated, click OK to return to the Generate Paperwork dialog box. The schedule formatting is used when the paperwork is generated. The Schedule formatting settings are saved in the files Schedule Formats worksheet. The worksheet, and all the formatting, can be imported into another file through the Resource Browser.
Inventory Reports
Product: Spotlight
To create an inventory report of items currently placed in the light plot and items available, set up an Inventory Report. To set up an inventory report: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Generate Paperwork, and then select Inventory in the Generate Paperwork dialog box. To create an inventory report that will separate instrument information according to lighting position, select Break Down By Position.
2. Click the Setup button next to Inventory. The Inventory Report dialog box opens.
3. The Inventory Items are listed on the left. These items are based on symbol definitions used in the VectorWorks Spotlight file. If an item that needs to be inventoried is not in the list, click Add Item. The Add Item dialog box opens.
260
4. Browse through the symbol folders of the current file (listed at the top of the Add Item dialog box) and select the desired folder. The symbols that are contained in the folder are listed at the bottom of the Add Item dialog box. Select the item to be added to the inventory list, and click OK. The selected symbol is added to the Inventory Items list in the Inventory Report dialog box.
This symbol was added to the inventory
5. Click on each item in the list, and enter its Number in Inventory value. The number of units used in the light plot, as well as the number available for use, are displayed. Use the Resource Browser to copy the inventory information from another file by importing the Inventory report worksheet into the current files resources (see Importing Worksheets from Another VectorWorks file on page 552 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). 6. Click OK to close the Inventory Report dialog box and return to the Generate Paperwork dialog box.
Deleting Inventory Items

Product: Spotlight
Items can be deleted from the inventory list. To delete an item from the inventory: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Generate Paperwork, and then select Inventory and click Setup. The Inventory Report dialog box opens.
Generating Paperwork |
2. Select the inventory item to delete, and then click Delete Item. 3. Click OK. The item is removed from the inventory report.
261
This action does not remove the item from the drawing. If the lighting device is still present in the file when the Setup button is clicked, the item returns to the inventory list. However, the number of items in inventory must be re-entered.
Magic Sheets
Product: Spotlight
Magic sheets are graphical representations of instruments on the plot; they can be broken down either by focus point or color. Magic sheets are invaluable for cueing a show. They are simple to set up and generate in VectorWorks Spotlight. To create a magic sheet: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Generate Paperwork, and then select Magic Sheets in the Generate Paperwork dialog box.
2. Click the Setup button next to Magic Sheets. The Magic Sheet Setup dialog box opens. Specify the magic sheet setup parameters.
Action
Generates the magic sheets with lighting summarized by color Generates the magic sheets with lighting summarized by focus area
Description
Click Color; each instrument of a particular color is shown in one view. The general Theatre Style needs to be selected from the list to be used as a reference for the color summaries Click Area. All instrumentation that has a specified focus point will be included in the report. If desired, the magic sheet color number value can be displayed in an approximation of its gel color. Select Show Color Name in color.
The Theatre Styles are editable symbols. Custom styles can be added into the files Theater Types folder using the Resource Browser. 3. Click OK to close the Magic Sheet Setup dialog box and return to the Generate Paperwork dialog box.
262
Color Cut List

Product: Spotlight
A color cut list shows all the colors required by the show, and calculates the number of each cut size required per color. To create a color cut list: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Generate Paperwork and then select Color Cut List in the Generate Paperwork dialog box. 2. If desired, select Break Down By Position to further break the color cut list down by lighting position.
Header Configuration
Product: Spotlight
In the Generate Paperwork dialog box, select the position of the header information specified in Show Information. For the Left, Center, and Right header positions, select the information to be displayed from the list (Designer, Show Name, and/or Date). If no header information is desired for the location, select None.
Show Information
Product: Spotlight
In the Generate Paperwork dialog box, enter the name of the lighting Designer and the Show Name, if desired. Type the date of the show or event. To use todays date, click Date.
Page Properties
Product: Spotlight
In the Generate Paperwork dialog box, enter the Page Height and Page Width values in the default file units. These values specify the print area (page width with printer margins). The width of the schedule columns is affected by this value.
Reviewing Generated Paperwork |
263
If desired, a different unit can be used by specifying the value and the unit. For example, even if the default file units are centimeters, specify eight inches for the Page Properties by entering 8". Click OK to generate the selected schedules and reports in the format specified.
Reviewing Generated Paperwork

Product: Spotlight
Once the paperwork has been formatted and generated, it can be checked and printed.
Generated Magic Sheets

Product: Spotlight
If Magic Sheets were generated, a new design layer is added to the file. Depending on the type of Magic Sheet generated, the new design layer is called Magic Sheet-Area or Magic Sheet-Color. The magic sheets are placed on this design layer, and formatted to the specified page size (select View > Zoom > Fit to Window if the Magic Sheet items cannot be seen). If the light plot parameters are changed, the magic sheets must be regenerated to reflect the updates.
Paperwork Worksheets
Product: Spotlight
The specified reports and schedules, once generated, display in the Resource Browser under the Worksheets heading of the current file. For more information on worksheets, see Worksheets on page 531 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The following points should be remembered when working with generated paperwork: Edits to this type of worksheet do not update the light plot parameters. If the light plot parameters are edited, this type of report or schedule must be regenerated to reflect the updates. An editable worksheet can also be created; see Creating an Editable Worksheet on page 264.
264
Creating an Editable Worksheet

Product: Spotlight
VectorWorks Spotlight can create an editable worksheet of sorted user-selected instrument and accessory parameters. The worksheet can be used to update the light plot.
Creating an Editable Worksheet

Product: Spotlight
To create an editable worksheet: 1. Select the instruments and accessories to add to the worksheet. If no selection has been made, the worksheet includes all instruments and accessories present in the file. 2. Select Tools > Reports > Create Editable Worksheet. The Create Editable Worksheet dialog box opens.
Parameter
Available Fields Move > Move < Schedule Columns
Description
Lists parameters available for the worksheet Moves a selected parameter to the Schedule Columns list Removes a selected item from the Schedule Columns list, returning it to the Available Fields list Displays, in order, the parameters to include in the worksheet. A parameter can be moved from the Available Fields list to a specific location in the current Schedule Columns list. Select the parameter to move, and then select the existing parameter in the Schedule list that should display directly before it. Click Move > to add the parameter. Sorts the items in the Schedule Columns list; the default is the first item in the list Changes the order of a selected item in the Schedule Columns list
Sort By Move Down/Up
Creating an Editable Worksheet |
265
When selecting Available Fields and Schedule Columns parameters, press and hold the Shift key to select multiple, contiguous items or press and hold the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) to select non-contiguous items. 3. When the columns are in the desired order and the sort field has been chosen, click OK. The editable worksheet is created, and opens automatically. The worksheet is added to the Resource Browser, and is also accessible from the Window > Worksheets menu. Review and edit the worksheet as described in Reviewing Generated Paperwork on page 263.
Updating the Light Plot

Product: Spotlight
After changes have been made to the instrument or accessory fields from the editable worksheet, the light plot can be updated with these changes. To update the light plot: 1. If the editable worksheet is open, click the close (X) button at the top right of the worksheet to close it. 2. Select Tools > Reports > Create Editable Worksheet. If Spotlight detects an editable worksheet already present in the file, the Action Choice dialog box opens.
Select to update the light plot based on worksheet changes
3. Select the first option and click OK. The instruments and accessories are updated; the editable worksheet is removed from the file.
Updating the Worksheet

Product: Spotlight
If the instrumentation has changed since the editable worksheet was generated, VectorWorks Spotlight can replace the existing worksheet with an updated one. To update the editable worksheet: 1. If the editable worksheet is open, click the close (X) button at the top right of the worksheet to close it. 2. Select Tools > Reports > Create Editable Worksheet. If Spotlight detects an editable worksheet already present in the file, the Action Choice dialog box opens.
266
Select to replace the existing worksheet with a current worksheet
3. Select the second option and click OK. The existing worksheet is deleted, and the Create Editable Worksheet dialog box opens displaying the previously selected options. Create a new worksheet as described in Creating an Editable Worksheet on page 264. Any changes made to an existing worksheet are deleted by this action. This is a convenient way to delete incorrect changes to the editable worksheet before applying them accidentally to the instrumentation.
Creating Hanging Cards

Product: Spotlight
Lighting position hanging cards can be created in Spotlight. To create hanging cards: 1. Set the design layer visibility by selecting Window > Navigation and clicking the Design Layers tab. Set only the design layers with the desired lighting positions and instruments to visible. 2. Similarly, set class visibility by clicking the Classes tab and setting only the desired classes to visible. 3. Select View > Create Viewport. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. For more information on viewports, see Presenting Drawings with Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Creating Hanging Cards |
267
4. Select Project 2D Objects, with Top/Plan view and Wireframe rendering. Click OK. 5. If a sheet layer does not exist, you are prompted to create one. 6. The viewport is created and the sheet layer displays.
7. Select Modify > Edit Viewport. The Edit Viewport dialog box opens. Select Crop.
268
8. Click OK. In crop viewport mode, draw a 2D shape to crop the desired lighting position.
To hide the cropping shape, set its line thickness to zero in the Attributes palette. Click Exit Viewport at the top right of the drawing window to crop the viewport. 9. The cropped viewport displays on the sheet layer.
10. Several viewports can be created on the same sheet layer to display all the desired hanging cards. Changes to the design layer(s) are automatically reflected in the viewport.
Visualizing the Lighting Design

Product: Spotlight
13
VectorWorks Spotlight contains gobo projection and scene visualization features which assist in previewing the lighting design. The lighting levels for a particular scene can be saved and later recalled, and a QuickTime movie of the scenes can simulate scene transitions. These features cannot be used to accurately render all the lighting instruments on the stage for every scene.
Inserting Gobo Projections

Product: Spotlight
A pattern, texture, or color can be placed on a lighting instrument and projected onto the stage. This special light source and instrument combination is a gobo projection. Lighting instruments with gobo projections cast a light beam that can be rendered by RenderWorks. You can then preview the effect of the gobo projection texture(s) on the stage. RenderWorks must be installed to render gobo projections. For more information on rendering, see Rendering with VectorWorks on page 400 and Rendering with RenderWorks on page 637 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Gobo Texture Libraries

Product: Spotlight
VectorWorks Spotlight includes thousands of commercial gobo textures from Rosco, Apollo, Lee, and GAM. Through the Resource Browser, import the texture into the current file from one of the files located in the Libraries\Textures-Gobo folder. To use the texture in a gobo projection, specify its name in the Object Info palette (see Creating Gobo Textures on page 270). When Spotlight is installed, gobo textures are also provided as default resources (default resources are automatically imported into the file when selected while changing instrument properties, and display in the Resource Browser; see Changing Instrument Properties on page 228, and VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513.)
Inserting a Gobo Projector

Product: Spotlight
A gobo projector is a lighting instrument with a light source and gobo projector specified. 1. Insert a lighting instrument as described in Inserting Instruments on page 221. 2. In the Object Info palette of the selected instrument, click Edit. The Lighting Device dialog box opens. This provides a convenient way of specifying parameters (see Editing Instruments and Objects on page 228), although the parameters can also be entered directly in the Object Info palette. 3. On the Instrument Properties tab, specify a focus point for the instrument. 4. On the Light Information tab, select Light On to add a spot light to the instrument. 5. For Gobo 1, enter the name of the gobo projection texture (if it has been imported into the file as a resource), or click Get Resource to select a gobo texture from the default resources. Specify the Gobo 1 Rotation angle, if any. 6. If there is a second gobo texture, specify its parameters in Gobo 2.
270
| Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design
7. Click OK. To preview the effect of a color projection on the stage, indicate the Color name in the Object Info palette of a selected instrument, without specifying a gobo texture. Render the gobo projection to project the light on the focus point with the specified color. The colors can be selected from the color libraries installed with Spotlight. The following manufacturer color numbers are valid: Lee, Rosco, and GAM; the color code must be entered in a Manufacturer color value format (for example, R 101). If the color value cannot be found, the color defaults to white.
Creating Gobo Textures

Product: Spotlight
In addition to the gobo images available in the pre-defined commercial gobo projection libraries, any square image can be converted into a gobo projection texture. QuickTime and RenderWorks must be installed in order to create gobo textures. Most image-based textures are automatically compressed when imported into VectorWorks. Imported JPEG files retain the original JPEG data; all other image files are compressed using lossless PNG format. To create a gobo texture: 1. Select Modify > Convert > Create Gobo Texture. The Create Gobo Texture dialog box opens.
Parameter
Enter a name for this texture Edit Texture
Description
Specifies the gobo texture name Edits the gobo texture transparency settings at creation. Once an image has been selected (as described in the following steps), the Edit Texture dialog box opens for editing texture transparency settings.
For more information on editing textures, see Editing Textures and Shaders on page 611 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Click OK. If a gobo texture is already present in the file, the Choose Image dialog box opens.
Inserting Gobo Projections |
271
Parameter
Import an Image File Reuse an Image from a Texture Resource
Description
Imports a new image. Click OK and proceed to Step 3. Reuses a previously imported texture resource; select the desired texture resource. Click OK and proceed to Step 4.
3. Select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog box. Click Open.
4. If Edit Texture was selected in Step 1, the Edit Texture dialog box opens. Select the desired options and click OK. Click OK again to close the Create Gobo Texture dialog box. The texture resource is created and is listed in the Resource Browser. 5. Associate a defined texture with an instrument by entering the texture name in the Gobo 1 or Gobo 2 field of a selected instruments Object Info palette, and specify the Gobo Rotation, if any. A texture can be saved in the default resources file, located in Libraries\Defaults\Lighting Instruments Gobos\Gobo Textures.mcd. Import the texture into the default file, or save a new default file within the folder.
Editing Gobo Texture Transparency Settings

Product: Spotlight
A gobo texture is a transparent image resource listed in the Resource Browser. The transparency settings can be edited after the gobo image has been specified, or at creation. To edit a created gobo textures transparency: 1. Select the resource in the Resource Browser.
272
2. Select Edit from the Resources menu to open the Edit Texture dialog box. The Image Transparency settings can be edited. For more information on editing textures, see Editing Textures and Shaders on page 611 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. The texture Size must be 2 inches.
Click to edit Transparency settings
Size must be 2 inches
Showing Gobo Projections

Product: Spotlight
The gobo textures and color of a selected light instrument can be projected in a rendered simulation. This rendered image allows you to preview the effect of the gobo texture.
Gobo Projection Requirements

Product: Spotlight
To be able to project a gobo texture, the lighting instrument must: Have one or two gobo textures specified Be aimed at an existing focus area specified in the Focus field of the Object Info palette Have Light On selected in the Object Info palette The following VectorWorks requirements must be met: The design layer containing the instrument with gobo texture must also contain 3D geometry (any 3D object that is capable of accepting a RenderWorks light) to project the texture RenderWorks must be installed Certain custom RenderWorks settings must be in effect To select the custom settings, select View > Rendering > Custom RenderWorks Options. For more information on Custom RenderWorks settings, see Custom RenderWorks Options on page 647 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Showing Gobo Projections |

In the Custom Render Settings dialog box, ensure that the following settings have been made. Select the level of geometry Detail; a detailed rendering increases file size and rendering time, but is more realistic.
273
Projecting a Gobo Texture

Product: Spotlight
To project a gobo texture: 1. Make all the settings and meet all the requirements described in the previous sections (see Inserting a Gobo Projector on page 269, and Gobo Projection Requirements on page 272). 2. Select View > Rendering > Custom RenderWorks.
Artistic RenderWorks can also be used to render gobo projections. The gobo projector cannot render the following Artistic RenderWorks styles: Ink Print, Lines and Shadows, Soft Lines, Overlapping Lines, Tapered Lines, and Color Wash.
274
Managing Scenes
Product: Spotlight
The levels, colors, positions, and focusing of all the VectorWorks Spotlight instrument objects can be saved as a lighting scene. The scenes can then be used to create QuickTime movies of the scene transitions. QuickTime must be installed to create scene transitions.
Saving Scenes
Product: Spotlight
To save a scene: 1. After the lighting properties for all the instruments have been set correctly, select Model > Manage Scenes. The Manage Scenes dialog box opens.
2. In the Scenes list, the list of saved scenes is displayed. The scenes are sorted by the order in which they are entered. To save the current settings as a scene, click Save. The Save dialog box opens.
3. Enter a Scene Name and Scene Number. Also, specify the Up Time and Down Time for the scene, in seconds. The Up Time is the time allotted for the lights to increase in intensity, and the Down Time is the time allotted for the lights to decrease in intensity. 4. Click Done to save the scene. It is added to the Scenes list.
Editing Scenes
Product: Spotlight
To edit a scene: 1. Select the scene from the list in the Manage Scenes dialog box and click Edit.
Animating Scenes |
275
2. Make the desired change to the Scene Name or Number, or the Up/Down Time, then click Done to save the change. Confirm the changes.
Removing Scenes
Product: Spotlight
To remove a scene: 1. Select the scene from the list in the Manage Scenes dialog box and click Remove. 2. Confirm that you wish to remove the scene, then click Yes. The scene is removed from the Scenes list.
Restoring Scene Lighting Parameters

Product: Spotlight
To restore lighting parameters from a scene: 1. Select the scene from the list in the Manage Scenes dialog box and click Go!. 2. Confirm that the parameters are to be restored. The current light parameters are replaced by those from the scene. All current levels, colors, positions, and focus points for all the instruments will be replaced. Any information that has not been saved will be lost.
Animating Scenes
Product: Spotlight
A QuickTime movie of scene settings can be created to preview the cue transition between the scenes. The contents of the active window, exactly as they display, are used to create the movie. Therefore, the images must be rendered before animating the scenes to accurately preview the lighting effect. QuickTime should have been installed during the VectorWorks Spotlight installation. If not, it can be installed from the VectorWorks CD. To animate the scenes: 1. Set the rendering option parameters described in Gobo Projection Requirements on page 272. 2. Save the scenes as described in Managing Scenes on page 274. 3. Select Model > Animate Scenes. 4. In the Choose Path dialog box, select a location and file name for the movie. Click Save to open the Scene Animation dialog box.
276
5. Enter the parameters for the Start and End Scenes. Select the scene name from the list; its parameters display underneath. 6. If desired, the scene can be edited by clicking the Edit Scene button. Change the Scene Name, Scene Number, Up Time and Down Time, and then click OK to confirm the changes. The Up Time and Down Time used to animate the scenes is taken from the End Scene. 7. To create the animation, enter the scene Hold For time in seconds for both the starting and ending scenes. 8. Edit the QuickTime movie settings by clicking the QuickTime Settings button. The Compression Settings dialog box opens. Enter the Compression settings for the movie file. For the video compressor, Motion JPEG A may provide the best results. See Animating Drawings with QuickTime on page 569 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide, as well as Apples QuickTime web site, for more information on QuickTime.
QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. Consult QuickTime documentation before changing Compression Settings. 9. Click OK to exit the QuickTime settings. 10. When the scene animation settings are complete, click OK. The progress is displayed on the screen as the QuickTime movie is created in the specified location, based on the settings that were entered. 11. To see the movie, locate the .mov file and double-click to play it in the QuickTime Movie Player.
Drafting and Design Aids

14
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a variety of tools and utilities to assist you during the drafting and design process.
Creating 3D Objects from 2D Objects

The Create 3D Object from 2D command places a 3D version of a 2D object in a drawing. The 3D object is created with the same parameters as the 2D object. The command applies to the following 2D objects with 3D counterparts. Ball bearing Bearing Lock Nut Clevis pin (Inch, Metric, DIN) Compression spring - 1 and 2 Cotter pin (Inch) Die spring Extension spring - Front, End Eye bolt Hole - drilled Hole - tapped (Inch, Metric) Key Knurled thumb nut (Inch, DIN) Needle bearing Nut (Inch, Metric, DIN) Pillow block bearing Plain washer (Inch, Metric, DIN) Retaining washer (DIN) Rivet - large (Inch) Rivet (DIN) Roller bearing Roller chain - linear Roller chain - offset link Set screw (Inch, Metric, DIN) Shaft segment - straight Shoulder screw (Inch, Metric, Sprocket * DIN) Spur gear * Swing bolt Swing eye bolt Taper pin (Inch, DIN) Tapered roller bearing T-bolt Threaded shaft Thrust bearing Thumb screw (Inch) Torsion spring - Front, End Tubular rivet (DIN) U-bolt Wing Nut (DIN) Wing Nut Type A, B, C, D (Inch) Woodruff Key Worm Worm gear * * The spur gear, worm gear, and sprocket convert to a 3D object and 3D hub object. This command creates the 3D equivalent of a selected 2D object. If a 2D object with no 3D equivalent is selected, a beep sounds, and the command is not executed. To create a 3D object from a 2D object: 1. Select the 2D object. Several 2D objects can be selected at one time. 2. Select Machine Design > Create 3D Object from 2D. The 3D object is created with the same parameters as the 2D object. Acorn nut (Inch) Bevel gears Conical compression spring Dowel pin (Inch) Flanged bearing - 2 and 4 hole J-Bolt (Inch, Metric) Lock washer (Inch, Metric, DIN) Parallel pin (DIN) Retaining ring (Inch, DIN) Rivet - small (Inch) Roller chain - circular Screw and nut (Inch, Metric, DIN) Shaft segment - tapered
278
| Chapter 14: Drafting and Design Aids
2D Conical Compression Spring
3D Conical Compression Spring
Creating Multiple Views Using Viewports

The Create Multiple Views command generates 2D drawings from a 3D model and creates up to seven viewports configured with several orthographic views and one isometric view of the model. If the command is run while on a sheet layer, the viewports are added to that sheet layer. If the command is run while on a design layer, the viewports are added to an automatically created sheet layer. To create multiple views: 1. Select Machine Design > Create Multiple Views. The Create Multiple Views dialog box opens. Specify the desired settings.
2. Specify the desired viewport scale, views, and angle projection method, and then click OK.
Parameter
Viewport Scale Method
Description
Select the viewport scale relative to the page
Creating Multiple Views Using Viewports | Parameter

First Angle Projection
279
Description
Create views using the first angle projection method; by default, the front, top, and left views are selected when the drawing units are metric
Bottom
Right
Front
Left
Back
Top Isometric
Third Angle Projection
Create views using the third angle projection method; by default, the front, top, and right views are selected when the drawing units are imperial
Isometric
Top
Left
Front
Right
Back
Bottom
Views Front, Top, Right, Left, Bottom, Back, Isometric Select the view(s) to create in the drawing
Viewports are created at the designated layer scale, using the current layer and class visibility and print area settings, with the rendered style set to dashed hidden line rendering (see Machine Design Drawing Setup on page 20). Viewports are aligned horizontally and vertically, separated by a fixed distance, and centered on the sheet layer. 3. Optionally, configure the viewports layer and class settings (Active, Show, or Gray Others only), annotate the viewport, or modify the rendering style or other viewport parameters.
280

For more information, see Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for Viewports and Saved Views on page 93 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide, Creating Viewport Annotations on page 589 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide, and Viewport Properties on page 582 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Spring Calculator
The Spring Calculator command solves for spring rates and unit stresses based on compression spring parameters. To calculate a spring rate: 1. Select Machine Design > Spring Calculator. The Spring Calculator dialog box opens.
2. Edit the compression spring parameters. To add to the list of available parameter values, see Adding User-defined Information to Commands on page 502.
Parameter
Units Method Dimensions Outside Diameter
Description
Sets the spring dimension units to Inches, cm, or mm Select the method; as data is entered, the other dimensions are automatically calculated The fields available depend upon the Method and the Type of Ends selected Enter the outside diameter
Belt Length Calculator | Parameter

Mean Diameter Wire Diameter Solid Height No. of Active Coils Type of Ends Properties Material Mod. of Elasticity
281
Description
Enter the mean diameter Enter the wire diameter Enter the solid height Enter the number of active coils Select Closed and Ground, Open and Ground, Closed, or Open to set the type of ends on the spring The properties of the spring can be selected from the list or manually entered Select the material to be used for the spring or select <Other> to set the Modulus of Elasticity manually Automatically entered based on the material selected; displayed in pounds per square inch, newtons per square centimeter, or newtons per square millimeter, depending on selected units. If <Other> was selected, enter the Modulus of Elasticity manually. Automatically calculated based on the spring parameters; displayed in the selected units Automatically calculated based on the spring parameters; displayed in the selected units Select to draw a 2D spring according to the above parameters; if both checkboxes are selected, the 2D and 3D springs are automatically aligned in the drawing Select to draw a 3D spring according to the above parameters; if both checkboxes are selected, the 2D and 3D springs are automatically aligned in the drawing
Spring Rate Unit Stress Place 2D spring on drawing Place 3D spring on drawing
3. Click Close to exit the calculator.
Belt Length Calculator

The Belt Length calculator solves for either belt length or center distance between two pulleys. To calculate belt length or center distance: 1. Select Machine Design > Belt Length Calculator. The Belt Length Calculator dialog box opens.
282
Parameter
Find D1 D2 Center Distance Belt Length Place data on drawing
Description
Select whether to calculate the Belt Length or the Center Distance between pulleys Enter the first pitch diameter Enter the second pitch diameter If calculating the belt length, enter the Center Distance If calculating the center distance, enter the Belt Length Select to insert the calculated data on the drawing
2. Enter the known values, and then click Solve. The belt length or center distance value displays. If the center distance value is unknown, leave the field blank, and then click Solve. The minimum distance is displayed. Click Solve again to solve for the belt length based on the minimum center distance. 3. Click Close to exit the calculator.
Chain Length Calculator

The Chain Length calculator solves for either the length of a chain or center distance between two sprockets.
Chain Length Calculator |

To calculate chain length or center distance: 1. Select Machine Design > Chain Length Calculator. The Chain Length Calculator dialog box opens.
283
Parameter
Chain and Sprocket Data Find Std.Chain No. (Pitch) N1 N2 Center Distance or Chain Length Chain Length or Center Distance
Description
Select whether to calculate the Chain Length or the Center Distance between sprockets Select the pitch of the chain Enter the number of teeth of sprocket #1 Enter the number of teeth of sprocket #2 If calculating the chain length, enter the Center Distance; if calculating the center distance, enter the Chain Length Depending on the Find selected, the chain length or center distance calculation is displayed
284

Description
Inserts the continuous chain onto the drawing, based on the specified and calculated values
Parameter Placement Options

Place chain on drawing
Place sprockets on drawing
Inserts the two sprockets onto the drawing based on the specified and calculated value
Sprocket #1 (N1)
Sprocket #2 (N2)
Group the objects
Select to group the objects when inserted onto the drawing; if deselected, the objects are ungrouped when inserted onto the drawing and are editable in the Object Info palette When selected, inserts the calculated data onto the drawing
Place data on drawing
The Chain Length value can be entered based on the number of pitches multiplied by the pitch value. 2. Enter the known values, and then click Solve. The chain length or center distance value displays. If the center distance value is unknown, leave the field blank, and then click Solve. The minimum distance is displayed. Click Solve again to solve for the chain length based on the minimum center distance. 3. Select the desired placement options. 4. Click OK. 5. If placement options were selected, the cursor changes to a bulls eye. Click in the drawing to insert the chain and/or sprockets. If Place data on the drawing was selected, click again to insert the calculated data. 6. Click OK to close the calculator.
Control Values for Keys

The Control Values for Keys calculator solves for the key depths of a given shaft and the key size. To calculate the control values: 1. Select Machine Design > Control Values for Keys. The Depth Control Values for Keys dialog box opens.
Control Values for Keys |

2. Select Recommended Key Size to use the recommended key size according to the ASME or ISO standard; otherwise, select Custom Key Size to enter custom key sizes.
285
Parameter
Nom. Shaft Diameter (D) Recommended Key Size Square Rectangular Key Width (W)/Height (H) Custom Key Size Key Width (W) Key Height (H)
Description
Enter the size of the shaft Select to use the recommended key size according to the ASME or ISO standard Select to use the recommended square key Select to use the recommended rectangular key Displays the dimensions of the recommended key Select to use custom key sizes Enter the width of the key Enter the height of the key
286

Description
Displays the dimension from the bottom of the shaft to the bottom of the key Displays the dimension from the bottom of the shaft to the top of the key Select to insert the calculated data on the drawing
Parameter
Solution Depth to Bottom of Key (S) Depth to Top of Key (T) Place data on drawing 3. Click Solve.
The key depth values for the given shaft diameter and key size are displayed. 4. Click Close to exit the calculator.
Shaft Analysis
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a utility to analyze the results of a twisting moment being applied to a round solid or hollow shaft. To perform the analysis: 1. Select Machine Design > Shaft Analysis. The Shaft Analysis dialog box opens.
2. Enter the shaft properties and the known value in the Solutions section. To add to the list of available units, see Adding User-defined Information to Commands on page 502.
Centroid | Parameter
Shaft Analysis Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Polar Moment of Inertia Length Shear Modulus Solutions Twisting Moment Maximum Shear Stress Angle of Twist 3. Click Solve. The unknown values in the Solutions section are solved based on the information given. 4. Click Close to exit the shaft analysis calculator.
287
Description
Enter the shaft properties; the analysis results are based on the properties provided Enter the outside diameter of the shaft; select the desired units from the menu Enter the inside diameter of the shaft; enter zero for a solid shaft Automatically calculated from the outside and inside diameters Enter the length of the shaft Enter the value of the shear modulus; select the desired units from the menu Select and enter the known value Enter the twisting moment; select the desired units from the menu Enter the maximum shear stress; the units are set by the Shear Modulus value Enter the angle of twist in degrees
Centroid
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a utility to calculate the centroid, or center of gravity, of a 2D shape. The utility shows the location of the centroid and can place a locus at that point. For more information, see Engineering Properties on page 259 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To place a centroid locus point on an object: 1. Select the object. 2. Select Machine Design > Centroid. The Centroid dialog box opens.
3. The location of the centroid is displayed. Select Place locus at centroid to place a locus marker at the centroid of the object. 4. Click OK.
288

If the object is moved, the locus point does not remain centroidal unless the object and locus point are grouped and then moved.
Conversion Factors
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a conversion factor utility that provides the conversion factor between units. To perform a conversion factor calculation: 1. Select Machine Design > Conversion Factors. The Conversion Factors dialog box opens.
2. In the Multiply field, enter the number of units to convert. Select the original unit of measure from the Multiply list. 3. Select the target unit of measure from the To Obtain list. The conversion results display in the To Obtain field and the conversion factor displays in the By field. 4. Click OK to exit the utility.
Solution of Triangles
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a utility to solve for unknown values of a triangle. To solve for the unknown values of a triangle: 1. Select Machine Design > Solution of Triangles. The Solution of Triangles dialog box opens. 2. Select the format of the known values, and then enter them in the fields below. 3. Click Solve. The calculated values display in the Solution fields.
3D Properties |
289
4. Click Close to exit the utility.
3D Properties
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a utility to calculate the center of mass, radii of gyration, mass properties based on density or specific gravity, surface area, and volume of a 3D object, such as a sweep, extrude, or solid. To display the 3D properties of an applicable object: 1. Select the 3D object. 2. Select Machine Design > 3D Properties. The 3D Properties dialog box displays the object surface area, volume, radii of gyration, and center of mass.
290
Parameter
Units Places locus at centroid Place properties on drawing Write properties to a file
Description
Select the unit for displaying values Select to place a locus point at the 3D center of the object Select to place a grouped text block containing the 3D property values on the drawing at the next mouse click Select to create a text file containing the 3D property values
3. Click Calculate Mass Properties. The Mass Properties dialog box displays the weight, mass, and mass moments of inertia of the object. 4. Specify the system of units to use when calculating the mass properties. The mass properties calculations display.
Simple Beam |
291
Parameter
Input System of Units Property to Use Value
Description
Select the units to use for the calculation Select whether to display properties based on the density or specific gravity Enter the material density or gravity value
5. Click OK to return to the 3D properties dialog box.
Simple Beam
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a design template containing the components needed to analyze a simple beam with one or two supports. The Simple Beam command creates a diagram which shows reactions, stresses and deflection of a simple beam. This information is also available in two worksheets included in the template.
Simple Beam Template File

To open the simple beam template: 1. Select File > New. The Create Document dialog box opens. 2. Select Use document template, and choose the Simple Beam.sta template. 3. Click OK. The new file opens with a blank simple beam diagram.
292
Simple Beam Properties

To analyze a simple beam and create the diagrams: 1. Select Machine Design > Simple Beam. The Simple Beam dialog box opens.
2. Click Set Beam Properties. The Beam Properties dialog box opens.
3. Specify the beam properties, and then click OK to close the Beam Properties dialog box. The simple beam graphic is automatically updated. To add to the list of available units choices, see Adding User-defined Information to Commands on page 502.
Simple Beam | Parameter

Configuration Beam Length Left Support Distance Distance Between Supports Section Modulus Moment of Inertia Modulus of Elasticity Calculation Interval Deflection Units
293
Description
Select the support configuration Enter the beams length and select the units Enter the distance of the left support from the left side of the beam Enter the distance between the supports Enter the section modulus value and units for the beam Enter the moment of inertia and units for the beam Enter the value of the modulus of elasticity and units for the beam Enter the value at which to calculate and display stresses and other information Set the units for calculating the deflection
4. Click Define Loads on the Simple Beam dialog box. The Add/Remove/Change Loads dialog box opens.
5. Select the Load Units. The Length Units value defaults from the Beam Properties dialog box. The Distributed Load Units and Moment Load Units values default from both the Load Units field and Beam Properties dialog box. 6. Select the checkbox next to Load # 1. Select the load Type from the list. Enter a value for each of the available fields for this load. 7. Enter the necessary values for each additional load, and then click OK. The simple beam graphic is automatically updated.
294
8. In the Simple Beam dialog box, click Calculate Reactions, and then click Calculate Stresses and Deflection. Click OK. Shear, Bending Moment, Slope, and Deflection diagrams are created based on the information provided. The maximum values of vertical shear, bending moment, flexural stress, and deflection are calculated and displayed. Click any of the buttons on the Simple Beam dialog box to enter new drawing parameters. The simple beam diagram is automatically updated for analysis.
Load #2 Load #1
Displayed after clicking Calculate Reactions
Displayed after clicking Calculate Stresses and Deflection
Simple Beam Worksheets

Two worksheets are supplied with the Simple Beam.sta template:
Worksheet
Beam & Load Data
Description
This worksheet contains the information from the Beam Properties and Add/ Remove/Change Loads dialog boxes, as well as the reactions that were calculated when Calculate Reactions was clicked. This information is used to calculate the shear, bending moment, deflection, and stresses, and should not be manually edited. This worksheet contains the calculated values for shear, bending moment, stresses, slope, and deflection at the Calculation Interval specified in the Beam Properties dialog box.
Results
Simple Beam Analysis |
295
The worksheets are accessed by selecting them from the Window > Worksheets menu. They automatically update to show the current calculations each time the Simple Beam command is run.
Simple Beam Analysis

The Simple Beam Analysis command opens a message box displaying the calculated values that correspond to the cursor position. To analyze a simple beam: 1. Create the beam and diagrams as described in Simple Beam on page 291. 2. Select Machine Design > Simple Beam Analysis. A VectorScript message dialog box opens at the bottom of the screen, displaying x (location on the beam), vx (shear), mx (bending moment), sx (shearing stress), and y (deflection) values.
296
The values displayed depend on the location of the cursor along the beam and the Calculation Interval specified in the Beam Properties dialog box. 3. Click on a blank area of the drawing to stop the analysis. Close the VectorScript message dialog box. To lock the values in the VectorScript message dialog box, click on a point along the beam. The values at this point can then be studied or written down for future analysis. Select the Simple Beam Analysis command again to continue checking values along the beam.
Simple Beam Calculator

The Simple Beam Calculator command provides a quick way to analyze a simply-supported beam with a single load. To use the Simple Beam Calculator: 1. Select the appropriate command.
Simple Beam Calculator | Product

Architect Landmark Spotlight Machine Design
297
Command
AEC > Framing > Simple Beam Calculator AEC > Simple Beam Calculator AEC > Simple Beam Calculator Machine Design > Simple Beam Calculator
The Simple Beam Calculator dialog box opens. 2. Select the desired configuration, and then enter the values to be calculated.
Parameter
Configuration Input Units L P a w E I s Solution rL
Description
Select the simple beam configuration to analyze
Select Imperial or Metric (SI) as the displayed unit value Enter the length of the beam Enter the value of a concentrated load or loads Enter the distance as represented by a Enter the value per unit length of a distributed load Enter the modulus of elasticity of the beam Enter the moment of inertia of the beam Enter the section modulus of the beam
Displays the reaction at the left support
298

Parameter
rR mL mR vMax mMax sMax yMax at x
Description
Displays the reaction at the right support Displays the bending moment at the left support Displays the bending moment at the right support Displays the maximum vertical shear Displays the maximum bending moment Displays the maximum shear stress Displays the maximum deflection Displays the point from the left end of the beam at which the maximum deflection occurs
Certain input fields may appear dimmed depending on the configuration selected. 3. Click Solve. The results are displayed in Solution. 4. Click Close to exit the Simple Beam Calculator dialog box.
Cam Design
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a cam design tool that can be animated and generates cam data worksheets and diagrams.
Cam Template
To use the cam design tool, open a new file and select the Cam.sta template. To open the cam template: 1. Select File > New. The Create Document dialog box opens. 2. Select Use document template, and choose the Cam.sta template. 3. Click OK. The new file opens, with a cam inserted by default. The file contains Cam and Diagrams layers.
Cam Design |
299
The recommended procedure to include a cam in a VectorWorks drawing is to copy and paste it into the drawing, and convert it to a group by selecting it and selecting Modify > Convert > Convert to Group.
Cam Properties
The cam object is a point object located in the Cam.sta template. Cam properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Follower Offset
Offset Circle
Prime Circle
Follower Diameter
Parameter
Prime Circle Radius Cam Type Outside Dia. Cam Drawing Incr. (Deg.) Cam Speed (rpm)
Description
Specify the prime circle radius Select plate or groove Enabled if Groove is selected in Cam Type. Enter the outside diameter for groove cam types. Enter the cam drawing increment, in degrees; this parameter affects how the cam is drawn. The larger the value, the less smoothly the cam is drawn. Specify the cam rotation in revolutions per minute (rpm); this value is used to calculate the velocity and acceleration of the cam follower
300

Description
Select one of the follower types
Parameter
Follower Type
Radial Translating
Offset Translating
Pivot
Offset Pivot
Follower Dia. Follower Offset
Enter the follower diameter Enabled if Offset Translating Roller or Offset Pivot Roller is selected in Follower Type. Indicate the distance between the center of the cam and the follower center for the offset follower types. Enabled if Pivot Roller is selected in Follower Type. Specify the x and y distance from the cam center to the pivot arm for pivot roller follower types.
Pivot X
Pivot X/Y (from cam center)
Pivot Y
Draw Followers Follower Incr. (Deg.)
Select to display the followers Determine at what angles to display followers by entering the follower increment in degrees (to show only the actual follower, enter 360). If a segment of the cam ends on an angle that does not correspond to the follower increment, the additional follower is also displayed.
Cam Design | Parameter

Draw Prime and Offset Circles
301
Description
Select to display both the prime and offset circles
Prime circle Offset circle (offset follower types only)
Draw Follower Path
Select to display the follower path
Follower path
Draw Radii
Select to draw a radius from each follower to the center mark
Follower radius
Draw Center Mark
Select to draw a center mark
Center mark
Write Data to File Data Incr. (Deg.)
Select to write the current cam data and results to a text file; by default, the file name is Cam Data.txt, and it is located in the application folder Specify the increment at which the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of the cam follower are calculated
302

Description
Click to specify the profile of each cam segment; for more information, see Defining the Cam Profile on page 302 Click to animate the cam; for more information, see Animating Cam Movement on page 302 Click to position the cam back to zero degrees; for more information, see Resetting the Cam to Zero Degrees on page 303
Parameter
Define Cam Profile Animate Reset Cam to 0
Defining the Cam Profile

Specify the profile of each cam segment in the Define Cam Profile dialog box. To define the cam profile: 1. Select the cam, and click Define Cam Profile on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette. The Enter Value dialog box opens. 2. Enter the number of cam segments and click OK. The Define Cam Profile dialog box opens for specifying the parameters for each segment. Click OK to update cam diagram.
Parameter
Type of Motion End Angle Displacement
Description
Select the type of motion for each segment Specify the end angle for the segment Specify the displacement at the end point of the segment
Animating Cam Movement

The effect of parameter changes to the cam design can be evaluated by animating the cam.
Cam Design |
To animate the cam: 1. Select the cam, and in the Object Info palette, click Animate. The Rotate Cam dialog box opens.
303
2. Adjust the relative speed by moving the slider along the Speed bar. 3. Click Rotate. The cam rotates at the relative speed specified and the follower moves accordingly. Since the animation is for illustrative purposes only, the Cam Speed parameter does not affect the animation. However, the animation is affected by the selected speed in the Rotate Cam dialog box; the larger the increment, the faster the cam appears to rotate. In addition, the computer processor speed also affects the apparent animation speed. 4. To stop the cam rotation, press any key or click anywhere on the screen.
Resetting the Cam to Zero Degrees

Once the cam rotation stops, the position of the cam remains where it was when it was stopped. To reset the cam to zero degrees (original position), click Reset Cam to 0 on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette.
Cam Data Worksheets

Two worksheets are defined in the Cam.sta template: Cam Data lists cam data, such as rotation angle, follower displacement, velocity, and acceleration Cam Properties lists the cam parameters from the Object Info palette The worksheets are accessed by selecting them from the Window > Worksheets menu. The Cam Properties worksheet updates when the Define Cam Profile dialog box is exited (see Defining the Cam Profile on page 302). The Cam Data worksheet updates when the cam properties are changed. To prevent slower performance, when changing cam properties, keep the Cam Data worksheet closed.
Cam Diagrams
Diagrams of the cam follower displacement, velocity and acceleration are created automatically from the current cam properties.
304
The diagrams exist on the Diagrams layer. To display or update the diagrams: 1. Select Machine Design > Draw Cam Diagrams. 2. The cam diagrams are displayed. To return to the cam, select Cam from the Views menu.
Geneva Mechanism
VectorWorks Machine Design includes a Geneva mechanism device that produces intermittent rotational motion of the driven part (index plate) while the driver rotates at a constant speed.
Geneva Mechanism Template

The Geneva mechanism is available in the Geneva Mechanism.sta template file. To open the Geneva mechanism template: 1. Select File > New. The Create Document dialog box opens. 2. Select Use document template, and choose the Geneva Mechanism.sta template. 3. Click OK. The new file opens with a Geneva mechanism inserted by default. The recommended procedure to include a Geneva mechanism in a VectorWorks drawing is to copy and paste it into the drawing and convert it to a group by selecting it and selecting Modify > Convert > Convert to Group.
Geneva Mechanism |
305
Geneva Mechanism Properties

The Geneva mechanisms properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Number of Points Center Distance Follower Dia. Cam Clearance Cam Dia. Driver Dia. Index Plate Dia. (Ref.) Follower Dist. (Ref.) Cam Cutout Radius (Ref.) Lighting Holes Number Diameter Center Distance Show Center Marks Show Center Lines
Description
Enter the number of points on the index plate Enter the distance between the center of the index plate and the driver Enter the follower diameter Enter the cam clearance Enter the cam diameter Enter the driver diameter Displays the diameter of the index plate Displays the follower distance Displays the cam cutout radius Select to place lighting holes on the driver Enter the number of lighting holes Enter the diameter of the lighting holes Enter the distance between the center of the lighting holes about the driver Select to place center mark symbols on the index plate and cam/driver Select to draw the index plate and cam/driver with center lines
306
Animating Geneva Mechanism Movement

The effect of parameter changes to the Geneva mechanism design can be evaluated by animating the Geneva mechanism. To animate the Geneva mechanism: 1. Select the Geneva mechanism, and in the Object Info palette, click Animate. The Rotate Geneva Mechanism dialog box opens.
2. Adjust the relative speed by moving the slider along the Speed bar. 3. Click Rotate. The Geneva mechanism rotates at the relative speed specified. 4. To stop the Geneva mechanism rotation, press any key or click anywhere on the screen.
Resetting the Geneva Mechanism to Zero Degrees

Once the mechanism rotation stops, the position of the mechanism remains where it was when it was stopped. To reset the mechanism to zero degrees (original position), click Reset Mechanism to 0 on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette.
Drawing Notation
Error/Revision Management Using Redlines
15
The Redline tool and redline commands help control errors and revisions by providing the ability to annotate drawings with redlines and sketches, and to keep track of redline objects and any changes, corrections, and revisions that occur in a drawing. The Redline tool and redline commands are compatible with redlines drawn in previous versions and will correctly handle both types of redlines.
Redline Tool
Use the Redline tool to create Redline objects, which are graphical time-stamped change requests on the drawing. Five modes are available.
Rectangle Oval Freehand Polygon
Preferences
Regular Polygon
To redline an object or area: 1. Click the Redline tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select the desired drawing mode from the Mode bar. 2. Click Redline Preferences from the Mode bar to specify the Redline tool parameters for this session. For information on drawing freehand, ovals, polygons, and rectangles, see Creating 2D Objects on page 163 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
308
| Chapter 15: Drawing Notation

Description
Creates a redline object using an oval, rectangle, polygon, or freehand drawing
Parameter
Redline Mode
Example of oval redline mode
Redline Style
Select the style to apply to the redline object Cloud - applies a cloud style Radius - applies corner smoothing with a solid line style Radius Dashed - applies corner smoothing with a dashed line style Simple - applies a simple solid line with no smoothing Simple Dashed - applies a simple dashed line with no smoothing
Example of simple dashed redline style
Authorized by Assigned to
Specifies the default name or initials of the person who authorized the change; this name is used for the redlines created in this file Specifies the default name or initials of the person who has been assigned the task; this name is used for the redlines created in this file
3. Click OK. Draw the redline around the area to be revised or corrected. Based on the selected creation method, the appropriate VectorWorks tool creates the redline. This allows the use of SmartCursor cues, object snapping, and boomerang mode when drawing redlines. Draw redlines on the design layer where the error occurred or where the desired revision is to be performed.
1st click
2nd click Rectangle mode depicted
4. The Place Redline dialog box opens. Enter the redline information and authorization.
Error/Revision Management Using Redlines |
309
Parameter
Redline Notation Authorized By Assigned To Attach the current selection as a sketch
Description
Enter text describing the redline condition (and/or specifying the recommended action) Specifies the name or initials of the person who authorized the change; this originates from the Redline preferences and is retained with the file Specifies the name or initials of the person who has been assigned the task; this originates from the Redline Preferences dialog box and is retained with the file Attaches any current selected item(s) to the redline as a symbol to provide more information about the redline (see Attaching a Sketch to a Redline on page 309 for more information)
5. Click OK. The Redline object is drawn as specified, surrounding the drawing condition to be corrected. The date of the redline is automatically provided. Position redline text by clicking on the tag control point and dragging the tag to the desired location.
Rectangle mode with control point depicted
Attaching a Sketch to a Redline

One or more selected objects can be attached to a redline object to illustrate the redline comments. The object to be attached as a sketch must be selected before drawing the redline; this process converts the selected object to a sketch symbol and places it in a Redline Sketches symbol folder saved with the file.
310

To attach a selected object as a redline sketch:
1. Select the object to be converted to a sketch. 2. Click the Redline tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and draw the redline as described in Redline Tool on page 307. The Place Redline dialog box opens.
3. Select Attach the current selection as a sketch and click OK. 4. The selection is converted to a symbol that is attached to and moves with the redline object. The sketch can be hidden by deselecting Show Sketch in the Object Info palette.
Redline Parameters
The parameters of one or more selected redline objects can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Redline Style Tag Alignment
Description
Select a redline style from the list (see Redline Tool on page 307 for a description of the styles) Specifies the alignment of the redline tag: Auto: Justifies the text away from the center of the redline object Left: Places the text to the left of the tag control point and right-justifies the text Right: Places the text to the right of the tag control point and left-justifies the text
Tag control point
Left alignment
Right alignment
Error/Revision Management Using Redlines | Parameter

Picked Up
311
Description
Selecting Picked Up indicates that the redline has been resolved or picked up. The redline color changes to yellow and the pick-up date is automatically assigned. Deselect to indicate that a previously resolved redline has been restored. Select to display the Authorized By information on the redline Displays the initials or name of the person authorizing the change; can be edited Select to display the Assigned To information on the redline Displays the initials or name of the person assigned to correct the condition; can be edited Select to display the sketch attached to the redline (if any) Displays the redline creation date Displays the redline pick-up date Redline comment information is displayed and can be changed Controls the length of the line separating the redline comments from the redline information, and changes the redline comment text wrapping
Show Authorizer Authorized By Show Assignee Assigned To Show Sketch Creation Date Pick Up Date Notation Tag Length
Show or Hide Redlines

Over the course of a project, most drawings receive a large number of redlines, which, if left visible, would clutter the drawing. Select Text > Redlines > Show or Hide Redlines to toggle redline visibility. All Redline objects are drawn in the Redlines class. If redlines are hidden when a new redline is drawn, the Redlines class visibility is automatically turned on and all the redlines become visible. Use the Show or Hide Redlines command to hide them again.
Pick up Redline
Once the change or correction indicated by the redline has been resolved, the redline needs to be picked up or changed to a closed state. To pick up a redline: 1. Select the redline object or objects. 2. Select Text > Redlines > Pick Up Redline. This sets the status of all selected redline objects to closed. The redline color changes from red to yellow, and the pick-up date is set.
312
Red
Yellow
Redlines can be picked up by selecting one or more redline objects and selecting Picked Up in the Object Info palette.
Restore Redline
A selected closed redline object can be restored to an open status. A redline object may need to be restored when a revision has not been performed satisfactorily. To change the state of a closed redline back to open: 1. Select the redline object or objects. 2. Select Text > Redlines > Restore Redline. The selected redlines are returned to an open status and the redline color changes back to red. The original redline creation date is displayed. Redlines can also be restored by selecting one or more redline objects and deselecting Picked Up in the Object Info palette.
Redline Status Worksheet

The redline worksheet lists the status of all redlines in the current file. The Open Redlines section lists all redlines that require resolution; the Closed Redlines section shows all resolved redlines. For each redline item, the design layer location, date, and redline comment displays. To create or open the redline status worksheet: 1. Select Text > Redlines > Create Redline Status WS. 2. The Redlines Status Report worksheet is created and opens automatically. It is added to the Window > Worksheets menu and is listed in the Resource Browser.
Creating Drawing Borders |
313
Redlines, both open and closed, are listed in the report even if they are hidden in the current view of the file.
Creating Drawing Borders

Drawing borders are pre-formatted borders for project viewports or views; they can be added to a file in various ways.
Product
Architect and Landmark (using drawing standards) Architect and Landmark (not using drawing standards) Spotlight Machine Design
Drawing Border Creation Method

Document Setup or Create Standard Viewports command Drawing Border tool from Dims/ Notes tool set Drawing Border tool from Dims/ Notes tool set Drawing Setup command Drawing Border tool from Dims/ Notes tool set
Reference
The Setup Commands on page 2
Adding a Drawing Border on page 427 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Adding a Drawing Border on page 427 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Machine Design Drawing Setup on page 20 Adding a Drawing Border on page 427 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide
The VectorWorks Design Series products use the Drawing Border tool that is part of VectorWorks Fundamentals, but with expanded capabilities. Additional default resources and parameters are available only in the Design Series products. Various types of drawing borders can be created, including ConDoc, GSA, AEC, ASME, and ISO formats and their associated title blocks, revision blocks, tolerance blocks, projection blocks, and issue and revision data. When creating custom title blocks, special considerations apply for the title block to associate with the Issue Manager. See Adding a Drawing Border on page 427 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Drawing Border Properties

Whether placed by a drawing setup command or by the Drawing Border tool, drawing border properties are displayed in the Object Info palette, where they can be edited. Most of the drawing border properties are documented in Adding a Drawing Border on page 427 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the parameters which apply to VectorWorks Design Series products are described here.
314

Description
Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, for selecting a title block symbol to insert (see Adding a Title Block on page 431 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). ASME title blocks are required to insert a tolerance or projection block.
Parameter
Title Block
Additional default title blocks are available with the Designer Series products; for US Arch title blocks, information is linked to the Issue Manager. Use Tolerance Block For ASME drawing borders, adds a tolerance specifications block to the title block. The tolerance block creates a legend containing the drawing tolerances, including both angular and linear accuracy.
To edit the title block, see Editing a Tolerance Block on page 314. Note: Tolerance block details are text objects, and do not affect the actual dimensional tolerances. Use Projection Block Edit Title Block For ASME title blocks, adds a projection block area to the title block; specify the First Angle or Third Angle projection Opens the Edit Title Block dialog box, for specifying the title block information. Depending on the selected title block, different fields and tabs are available. ASME title blocks include a tolerance tab, for editing the tolerance block information. US Arch title blocks include Project and Sheet tabs; information is entered from the Issue Manager but can be edited manually. Any title block that contains a Project tab can have the same Project tab information applied to all title blocks in the file by selecting Apply these values to all title blocks. Opens the Edit Issue Data dialog box, for specifying issue data on US Arch title blocks; see Editing Issue Data on page 315
Edit Issue Data
Editing a Tolerance Block

When an ASME title block is added to a drawing border, an area for tolerance specifications data is included. The tolerance data is specified in a separate dialog box. To edit the tolerance block data: 1. Select the drawing border from the drawing area. 2. In the Object Info palette, click Edit Title Block.

The Edit Title Block dialog box opens. Click the Tolerance tab.
315
Specify the angular accuracy
Enter the implied dimensional accuracy
3. Enter the angular and dimensional tolerances to be displayed in the tolerance block. Only the angular accuracy, two place, and three place parameters apply to the ASME tolerance block. The remaining tolerances might apply to a custom title block. 4. Click OK. The tolerance block is updated with the new information.
Editing Issue Data

When a US Arch title block is added to a drawing border, an area for issue data is included. The issue notes are specified in a separate dialog box. To add or edit issue data: 1. From the Object Info palette of a selected drawing border with a revision block, click Edit Issue Data. 2. The Edit Issue Data dialog box opens.
316
Parameter
Issue list Add Edit Remove Use Show the
Description
Lists the current issues displayed in the title block Opens the Add New Issue dialog box, for adding an issue note Opens the Edit Existing Issue dialog box, for editing the currently selected issue note Deletes the currently selected issue note Select Letters or Numbers for the Issue# format Specifies how many issues to display in the title block, from recent to oldest
3. Click Add to create an issue entry. The Add New Issue dialog box opens. Specify the issue note.
4. Click OK to return to the Edit Issue Data dialog box. Existing issue notes can also be edited or deleted. 5. Click OK. The issue data is updated.
317
Creating a Custom Title Block in the Design Series

Creating a custom title block in the Design Series products requires additional steps, if the custom title block is to be used with the Issue Manager (see The Issue Manager on page 385), or contain issue fields or revision fields. For information on creating a custom title block, see Creating a Custom Title Block on page 431 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the procedures which apply to VectorWorks Design Series products are described here. When creating the record format to attach to the custom title block, fields linked to the Issue Manager require special prefixes or suffixes. If creating issue or revision fields, special text strings are added to the title block design.
Title Block Area

Issue Manager
Prefix Required
If creating a US Arch-style title block with issue data linked to the Issue Manager: Project fields (which contain the same value in all drawing set title blocks) must be prefaced with P_ (example: P_Project Title) Sheet fields (which contain different values in different drawing set title blocks) must be prefaced with S_ (example: S_Sheet Scale) Multi-line text fields (which contain multiple lines of text) must be appended with a # (pound sign) (example: P_Drawing Title#)
Issue Data
To add issue fields, such as issue number, date, note, and/or approvals to a drawing border which can be populated by the Issue Manager and edited manually, create special text fields with text strings to represent the issue fields and place these fields in the title block. The issue history is a property of the drawing border, not the title block, so a title block is not required to enter issue data. Issue note :iNote Issue number :iNo Issue date :iDate Issue approval :iAppr
The text fields can have any justification, and should have word wrap on. The vertical alignment must be set to Top for the issue text to flow down, and to Bottom for the issue text to flow up. To enter or edit issue text, click Edit Issue Data from the Object Info palette of a selected drawing border (see Editing Issue Data on page 315), or use the Issue Manager.
318

Title Block Area
Revision Data
Prefix Required
To add revision fields, such as revision number, date, zone, and/or approvals to a drawing border, create special text fields with text strings to represent the revisions and place these fields in the title block. The revision history is a property of the drawing border, not the title block, so a title block is not required to enter revision data. Revision note :rNote Revision number :rNo Revision date :rDate Revision zone :rZone Revision approval :rAppr
The text fields can have any justification, and should have word wrap on. The vertical alignment must be set to Top for the revision text to flow down, and to Bottom for the revision text to flow up. To add revision text to a drawing border, select Use Revision Block from the Object Info palette of a selected drawing border. To enter or edit the revision text, click Edit Revision Data (see Editing Revision Block Data on page 435 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Construction Documents
Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect includes powerful tools for developing construction documents. For the typical architectural project, this involves detailing, annotating, and dimensioning. A library of flexible detailing objects is provided for drawing well-delineated detail graphics, creating detail sheets, and blocking out detail views. In addition, VectorWorks Architect provides a simple method for dimensioning exterior walls and creating a drawing list index. Special considerations apply when using workgroup referencing with Architect.
Detail Drawings
To effectively create detail drawings with VectorWorks Architect, using the Create Standard Viewports command is recommended to automatically create the necessary detail sheet layers. Details can be effectively presented and annotated when using VectorWorks viewport feature. For a complete description of viewports, see Presenting Drawings with Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. When using viewports: The Create Standard Viewports command can automatically create the necessary detail sheet layer. Because viewports can be easily copied and pasted, duplicate the floorplan viewports, and then copy them to the detail sheet layer. They can be rescaled and cropped to create plan detail drawings. When annotating a viewport, keep in mind that annotations refer to any 2D element, including detail objects.
Construction Documents |
319
Using Detail Objects

Once the sheet layers and geometric basis for a detail have been defined, use the included detail objects from the 00_Detailing.mcd library and the Detailing tool set to refine the detail drawing. Using detail objects can significantly reduce the amount of time necessary to make an accurate representation of an object. Architect detail objects can be used in conjunction with other VectorWorks objects, like groups, symbols, and primitives like rectangles and polylines. The following illustration shows several examples of each, used in conjunction to create a fully-developed detail form.
Detail cut wood object
Polyline for emphasis of cut plane
Rectangle with pattern fill Created with the Break Line tool
Symbol made from imported DWG file Detail cut wood objects Batt insulation object
VectorWorks Architect and Landmark also include two tools to facilitate the creation of linear materials (such as plywood, gypsum board, and stucco) and repetitive building elements (like shingles and siding) which are common in detail drawings.
Creating Linear Material Details

The Linear Material tool draws a standard representation of sheet building materials along a path. Create linear material details either by using the Linear Material tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To draw linear material details: 1. Click the Linear Material tool from the Detailing tool set. 2. If desired, set the linear material attributes in the Attributes palette (fill style, pen style, and line style). The linear material attributes can also be specified after creation. 3. Click to begin drawing the linear material detail polyline. Click the mouse at the start point to complete a closed polyline, or double-click the mouse to create an open polyline. For more information on polylines, see Polyline Tool on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. The linear material parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
320

Description
Sets the distance of the object baseline from the drawn path Select the kind of linear material to draw; available parameters depend on the type of linear material selected Creates two polyline edges; the space between the edges can be specified with a fill color from the Attributes palette
Parameter
Offset Type Board (generic)
Gyp. Bd. (detail)
Creates a board object with an additional offset line and fills the space with a stipple pattern
Plaster/Stucco
Draws an irregular top line for the object
Plaster/Stucco (detail)
Draws an irregular top line for the object, and fills the space with a stipple pattern
Plywood/OSB
Creates a board object with evenly spaced parallel lines
Plywood/OSB (detail)
Creates a plywood object with additional diagonal slashes
Built-up Roof
Draws a filled band over a coarse, oval-shaped stipple pattern
Corrugated Deck
Draws a zig-zag deck pattern
Construction Documents | Parameter

Corrugated Deck w/fill
321
Description
Creates a corrugated deck and fills the depth of the deck
Corrugated Deck w/fill (detail)
Creates a corrugated deck, fills the depth of the deck, and adds a stipple pattern
Thickness Pitch Corrugation Depth Closure Density Polyline parameters
Specifies the thickness of the linear material For corrugated deck details, determines the corrugation spacing For corrugated deck details, determines the corrugation height Specifies which sections of the linear material object should have a closed end (does not apply to Built-up Roof details) For details with stipple patterns, sets the stipple density Edits the linear detail path polyline
Linear material details with stipple patterns may require a significant amount of time to draw. Create a plug-in symbol from a linear material object (see Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide) with Convert to Plug-in selected. Activate the symbol in the Resource Browser to draw the linear material detail with the saved symbol parameters.
Creating Repetitive Unit Details

The Repetitive Unit tool draws world-scale symbols along a path, creating repetitive elements such as masonry units, shingles, and siding. Create repetitive unit details either by using the Repetitive Unit tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To draw repetitive unit details: 1. Click the Repetitive Unit tool from the Detailing tool set. 2. Click Preferences from the Mode bar to select the detail symbol. The detail symbol can also be specified after creation. 3. Click to begin drawing the detail polyline. Click the mouse at the start point to complete a closed polyline, or double-click the mouse to create an open polyline. For more information on polylines, see Polyline Tool on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. Click Choose Symbol from the Object Info palette to select the unit to repeat.
322
Pitch
Pitch point (the point that determines the symbol insertion point and rotation) is always placed on the baseline at the Offset distance
Each unit is always drawn in its entirety; the last unit is not clipped, even if it exceeds the path drawn. The repetitive unit offset path is drawn in the objects assigned line style (the path always has a fill style of None). The repetitive unit parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Offset Use Symbol Pitch Use Vertical Pitch
Description
Sets the distance of the object baseline from the drawn path; the symbol is rotated so that its first point (its pitch point) is always placed on the baseline at the offset distance Sets the pitch according to the symbol definition; deselect to scale the pitch manually Rotates the symbol 90 degrees counter-clockwise and sets the pitch vertically; this is useful for symbols that are to be stacked vertically rather than arrayed vertically, as they can be drawn in a more natural way Sets the distance from the start of one unit to the start of the next unit Allows a different pitch to be specified for the first unit Specifies the pitch for the first unit Flips the unit symbol vertically Flips the unit symbol horizontally Opens the Choose Symbol dialog box. Select the unit Category, and then select the unit symbol from either the default resources or the current files resources (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513); the selected symbol is imported into the file and appears in the Resource Browser. Edits the repetitive unit detail path polyline
Pitch First Pitch Differs First Pitch Flip Vertically Flip Horizontally Choose Symbol
Polyline Parameters
Create a plug-in symbol from a repetitive unit object (see Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide) with Convert to Plug-in selected. Activate the symbol in the Resource Browser to draw the repetitive unit with the saved symbol parameters.
Creating an Interior Elevation

Product: Architect
An interior elevation can be created by a variety of methods.
323
Create a section viewport of the interior with a finite depth range (see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400). Create a viewport with hidden line rendering and annotate the elements with the polygon boundary modes of the 2D Polygon tool. See Creating Boundary Polygons in a Hidden Line Rendered Viewport on page 200 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Create a group with the Convert Copy to Lines command as described below. (A group created from the Convert Copy to Lines command can quickly provide a basis for interior elevations.) See Convert Copy to Lines on page 365 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. To create an interior elevation: 1. From the floor plan, select the wall for creating the elevation. If it has millwork or fixtures attached to or adjacent to it, ensure that they are selected. Fixtures inserted in (attached to) the wall are automatically selected. 2. Select the view from which to create the elevation. For example, to view the wall from the right side of the plan, select View > Standard Views > Right. 3. Select Modify > Convert > Convert Copy to Lines and choose Hidden Line Rendering.
4. Select View > Rendering > Hidden Line. Architect creates a hidden line group of the selection and selects it. Select Edit > Cut. 5. Select the detail sheet layer from the Layers menu and select Edit > Paste. Move the newly created interior elevation to the desired location on the detail sheet layer and add graphics, notes, and dimensions as required.
Dimensioning Exterior Walls

Product: Architect
The exterior of a building is dimensioned with the Dimension Exterior Walls command. The following features in a file are dimensioned: overall dimensions of building all exterior wall changes all windows and doors in the exterior walls To generate exterior wall dimensions: 1. Set the file dimension preferences by selecting File > Document Settings > Document Preferences and clicking the Dimensions tab. 2. Select File > Document Settings > Units to set the display precision of the dimensions. 3. Select AEC > Dimension Exterior Walls. The Dimension Exterior Walls dialog box opens.
324
Parameter
Source Layer Text Rotation Text location Above Dim Line Offsets from Building Small Dimensions
Description
Specifies the location of the walls to be dimensioned Controls the orientation of the dimension text Specify the text location and offset for text forced outside the witness line Select to place text above the dimension line Specifies the distance of the dimensions from the building, walls, doors and windows Specifies the limit for drawing small dimensions, which can help detect inaccuracies in the drawing; dimensions less than the value specified will be considered small. Select Draw in red to detect problems such as minute misalignments in layout; to overlook any inaccuracies, select Do not draw.
4. Click OK. The exterior wall dimension lines are drawn based on the preferences specified.
Drawing List Indexing

Product: Architect
The Create Drawing List command compiles the current drawing border information for use as a drawing list index or worksheet. To create a Drawing List Index: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Drawing List. The Create Drawing List dialog box opens.
325
Parameter
US Arch Title Block Entries Drawing No. Add Remove New Move Up/Move Dn Format
Description
Lists the current US Arch title blocks Displays the contents of the current title block selection Moves a selected item from the US Arch Title Block Entries list to the Proposed Drawing list Removes a selected item from the Proposed Drawing list and displays it in the US Arch Title Block Entries list Click to open the New List Entry dialog box and add the drawing and title block information to the Proposed Drawing list. Moves the selected title up or down in the Proposed Drawing list Click to open the Drawing List Index Preferences dialog box and specify whether to create the drawing index as a title block or worksheet; also specify formatting criteria Lists the proposed drawing borders to include in the Drawing Index Displays the contents of the current selection for editing
Proposed Drawing List Drawing No./Title
2. Move the desired title block entries to the proposed drawing list to create the drawing list, and format the list. 3. Click OK. 4. If the drawing list index is formatted as a title block, click to select the top left and bottom right corners of the drawing list area; the text wraps to fit within this width. If the drawing list index is formatted as a worksheet, click to add the worksheet to the file. The drawing list index worksheet is also be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules\Architectural Reports.mcd file that is included with Architect. Drag the Drawing List worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with information from the objects in the current drawing.
326
Using Notation Objects

The notation objects add information to a VectorWorks Architect or Landmark drawing with pre-formatted objects that maintain a constant size regardless of the drawing scale. To insert a section-elevation marker, see Section Lines and Section-elevation Markers on page 405. The North Arrow, Drawing Label, Reference Marker, Revision Marker, and Elevation Benchmark notation objects are inserted on the drawing in a similar manner. To place a notation object: 1. Ensure that the appropriate layer is active. 2. Click the desired notation object from the Dims/Notes tool set. 3. Click on the drawing at the desired location. Click to set the length and/or rotation of the object. If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK. 4. Click again to place the object on the drawing, using the default document attributes.
1st click 2nd click
North Arrow
The North Arrow tool, located on the Dims/Notes tool set, indicates the drawing orientation; several different styles can be selected. The deviation from true magnetic north can be displayed on some of the configurations.
Parameter
2D Scale Factor Config
Description
Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker Select the arrow style from the list
Config 1
Config 2
Config 3
Config 4
Config 5
Config 6
Config 7
Config 8
Config 9
Using Notation Objects | Parameter

Arrow Graphics Show MN Declination Declin Deg Offset
327
Description
Select an arrow style from the list; arrow styles include filled and unfilled versions Select to add the deviation from true magnetic north for some styles Specifies the degree of offset from true north
Drawing Label
The Drawing Label tool, information for the drawing. located on the Dims/Notes tool set, is a point object that provides descriptive
By default, a label object includes a title, the scale of the drawing, and an automatically assigned item number. The number of the sheet containing the drawing can also be included in the label. VectorWorks defaults many of these values, depending on where the label was created: on a design layer, or in a viewport annotation, for example.
Parameter
Rot Dwg Title
Description
Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the label (0.00 is horizontal) Specifies the title text that displays above the labels horizontal line; defaults to the file name (on a design layer), to the sheet layer name (on a sheet layer), or to the viewport name (in a viewport), but it can be edited Identifies this drawing on the current sheet. This value displays in the top half of the label bubble, unless Number Style is set to None. If the label is in a viewport or sheet layer, VectorWorks automatically numbers items and updates this field; if the label is on a design layer, enter an item identifier manually. Identifies the sheet containing the drawing. This value displays in the bottom half of the label bubble, if Number Style is set to Drawing and Sheet. On a design or sheet layer that has a drawing border object, VectorWorks automatically obtains this value from the borders Part Number field; if there is no border, enter a sheet identifier manually. Specifies which drawing identifier numbers (from the Item and Sheet fields) display in the label
Item
Sheet
Number Style
None (Bubble Style=None)
Drawing only
Drawing and sheet
328

Description
Specifies which scale information displays beneath the labels horizontal line
Parameter
Scale Display Style
None
Numbers only
Scale label
Custom
Custom Scale Use Architectural Scale Bubble Style
If Scale Display Style is set to Custom, enter information to display in the scale area Select this option to use the US Architect scale style (as in 1/4 = 1- 0); deselect the option to use the Engineering style (as in 1:48) Select the style of the label bubble graphic, which can contain item and sheet numbers identifying the drawing
None
Round rect
Circle
Rectangle
Draw Full-width Bubble Title / Scale / Item# / Sheet# Text Size 2D Scale Factor Printed Length Flip
Select this option to extend the bubble graphic to the full length of the label; not available if Bubble Style is set to None Select the font sizes for the various elements of the drawing label Specifies the labels bubble size; enter a larger value to increase the size (the number must be greater than zero) Specifies the length of the drawing label on the printed page Select this option to move the bubble (including the item and sheet identifiers) to the right side of the label:
Default label
Flipped label

Rule Offset
329
Description
Specifies the vertical offset between the labels bubble and horizontal line on the printed page (0 is centered); enter a negative number to move the line, title, and scale below the center line of the bubble Specifies the distance between the labels horizontal line and the text above and below it on the printed page. If Number Style is set to Drawing and Sheet, the text blocks are automatically aligned, so this setting has no effect.
Text Margin
Reference Marker
The Reference Marker tool, located on the Dims/Notes tool set, displays the drawing item and sheet information of the referenced drawing. Select from a variety of configurations.
Parameter
2D Scale Factor Type/Config
Description
Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker Select one of the types and configurations from the list
Elevation Config 1 Config 2 Config 3
Detail Config 1 Config 2 Config 3
Section
Config 1
Config 2
Config 3
Item/Sheet Separator Arrow Angle Arrow Fill
Specifies the marker information For some configurations, indicates the separator between marker information items For some configurations, specifies the angle of the marker arrow Select a filled or unfilled arrow style from the list
330
Revision Marker
The Revision Marker tool, located on the Dims/Notes tool set, displays the drawing revision number.
Parameter
2D Scale Factor Revision Number
Description
Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker Specifies the revision number
Elevation Benchmark
The linear object Elevation Benchmark tool, elevation drawings. located on the Dims/Notes tool set, represents different levels in
1st click 2nd click
Select from two different elevation benchmark configurations.
Parameter
Title/Elevation Marker Orientation Marker Graphics Style
Description
Specifies the benchmark title and elevation value Select the marker orientation (left or right) Select a marker style from the list; styles include filled and unfilled versions Select the marker style
Floor level ISO style US style
Auto-Set Relative to Ref Elev Use Control Point Reference Elevation
Select to specify a reference elevation, and enter the Reference Elevation value When selected, displays a control point on the drawing and allows the elevation value to be adjusted using that control point The reference elevation value is relative to the ground plane

2D Scale Factor Marker Size Extension Length
331
Description
Specifies the elevation benchmark size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger object For ISO style, specifies the marker size; increase the size value to obtain a larger marker Specifies the length of the object line
Dimensioning the Slope of Surfaces

The Slope Dimension tool creates a rise over run indicator that displays the slope (rise/run) of any angle on any surface in the drawing.
To create a slope indicator: 1. Click the Slope Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click to mark the beginning of the slope. Click again to mark the end of the slope. If this is the first time the tool is used in this session, the Slope Dimension Properties dialog box opens. Specify the preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK. The preferences can be changed later in the Object Info palette. 3. The rise / run indicator is drawn.
2nd click
1st click
Use the control point at the elbow of the slope indicator to move it; change the appearance of the rise / run indicator by editing its parameters in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Draw Roof Surface Scale Factor Base Line Length Control Points
Description
Draws the defining line as a dashed line Determines the size of the indicator Specifies a numerical denominator to indicate the run portion of the rise/run ratio Specifies the slope line length Normally, do not edit; position the indicator graphically instead
332
Inserting a Scale Bar

A scale bar can be placed on the drawing to define the scale of the drawing objects.
To add a scale bar to the drawing: 1. Ensure that the appropriate design layer is active. 2. Click the Scale Bar tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 3. Click on the drawing to insert the scale bar. 4. Click again to determine the rotation of the scale bar and to place it on the drawing. 5. Position the scale bar as desired. The scale bar properties can be edited later by selecting the scale bar and changing the properties in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Printed Height Minor Length # of Min Divs Major Length # of Major Divs Style Adjust Units Decimal Points
Description
Specify the printed height of the scale bar Specify the minor length Specify the number of minor divisions (the first division is split into minor divisions; the remainder of the scale bar is in major divisions) Specify the major length Specify the number of major divisions Select the scale bar style: Zigzag, Box, Line, Checker, or Flip Select to switch between units specified for the drawing file (File > Document Settings > Units); for example, switch between feet and inches Select to display units with up to four decimal places
Using Notation Bubbles

Creating Grid Bubbles
Grid bubble objects are dimensioned grid lines with bubble markers. This type of drawing notation can help locate columns and other primary building features on construction documents.
Using Notation Bubbles |
333
Drawing a Grid Bubble Object

To draw a grid bubble object: 1. Click the Grid Bubble tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Place a line of grid bubbles by drawing an open polygon with the tool. The first click starts the grid line; the second click determines the angle of the grid line and sets a marker at that location. Each remaining click sets a grid marker. 3. Double-click to end the grid line. The first time the object is inserted in this session, the Preferences dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette.
Grid Bubble Properties

The grid bubble parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Starting Mark Prefix Dim Text Size Item Text Size Show Dimensions Flip Rotate Text Draw First Grid Bubbles Both Ends
Description
Indicates the starting number or letter for grid labeling; labels are automatically incremented Specifies a prefix, if any, to apply to the grid labels Specifies the point size of the dimension text Specifies the point size of the bubble label text Select to display the dimensions on the grid Select to flip the bubble labels to the other side of the dimension string Select to rotate the bubble label text with the grid Select to display the first bubble grid; deselect to hide it (useful when creating nested grids) Select to draw bubble labels at both ends of the grid line
Line Style
Select the grid line style
334

Description
Scales the size of the bubbles Specifies the offset distance of the bubbles from the dimension string Indicates the grid length Edits the bubble grid line; while editing the bubble grid line in this way is possible, it may be preferable to use the 2D Reshape tool instead. See Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Parameter
Size Factor Bubble Offset Grid Length Polyline parameters
By combining several bubble grids and adjusting labeling properties, hierarchical (nested) grids can be created.
Creating Detail Bubbles

A detail bubble assigns a detail number to the parts of an assembly drawing.
The information associated with the detail bubble can be used to create both parts lists and bill of materials lists.
Adding Detail Bubbles

To add a detail bubble: 1. Click the Detail Bubble tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click on the drawing to place the bubble portion of the object. Click again to place the marker.
Using Notation Bubbles |
335
If no Part Info record exists, one is created automatically the first time a detail bubble is placed in the drawing.
2nd click
1st click
The detail bubble number automatically increments as the bubbles are placed. Change the auto-incrementing number by editing the Item Number field in the Object Info palette. When detail bubble placement resumes, the last number entered becomes the starting number.
Detail Bubble Record Format

The Part Info record format stores the information for the detail bubble. This record format can be edited to add new fields or to delete existing fields. To edit the record format, right-click on the record format in the Resource Browser and select Edit. For more information on record formats, see Record Formats on page 150 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. If new fields are created, the existing Bill of Materials and Parts List worksheets need to be modified to reflect the changes. Alternatively, create new worksheets to accommodate the new fields. For more information on using worksheets, see Using Worksheets on page 534 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Editing Detail Bubbles

Product: Machine Design Detail Bubble Properties
Edit the detail bubble properties in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Min. Bubble Size Shape
Description
Enter the minimum bubble size Select one of the bubble shapes
Round
Triangle
Square
Diamond
Hexagon
Item Number Marker Style
Specify the number to display in the detail bubble; the item number is used for bill of materials and parts list worksheets Select a marker style
None
Solid
Empty
Open
Dot
Circle
Slash
Cross
Size/Angle
Specify the marker Size and Angle
336

Description
Click to edit the bubble detail; for more information, see Editing Detail Bubble Record Information on page 336
Parameter
Change Bubble Info
Editing Detail Bubble Record Information Product: Machine Design

To edit the record information associated with a detail bubble: 1. Select the bubble, and then click Change Bubble Info on the Object Info palette. The Edit Detail Bubble dialog box opens.
2. Enter the information associated with the detail bubble. The information can be used to complete the parts list and bill of materials worksheets. 3. Click OK to return to the Object Info palette. If the Item # was changed, the change is automatically made to the Object Info palette and the object.
Revision Bubbles
The revision bubble notation object, located in the Dims/Notes tool set, displays a revision number for an object or drawing. The revision bubble automatically resizes depending on the text size, but does not become smaller than the minimum bubble size set.
To place a revision bubble: 1. Click the Revision Bubble tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click in the drawing to place the bubble. Click again to set the bubble rotation. The revision bubble properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Creating a Bill of Materials | Parameter

Min. Bubble Size Shape
337
Description
Enter the minimum bubble size Select one of the revision bubble shapes
Round
Triangle
Square
Diamond
Hexagon
Revision Number
Enter the revision bubble number
Creating a Bill of Materials

The information associated with the detail bubbles can be included in a worksheet which automatically generates a bill of materials list.
To create a bill of materials: 1. Once the detail bubble record information has been completed, select Tools > Reports > Create Bill of Materials. 2. With the bulls-eye cursor, click in the drawing to place the worksheet. Alternatively, access the Bill of Materials worksheet object with the Resource Browser from [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Drawing Border - Title Blocks\ASME Title Blocks.mcd and double-click the Bill of Materials worksheet object in the Resource Browser to place the worksheet graphic object. 3. Double-click on the worksheet, or select Window > Worksheets > Bill of Materials, to open the worksheet. From the worksheet menu, select Recalculate. The record information from the detail bubbles automatically fills the worksheet, and all calculations are performed. For more information on worksheets, see Using Worksheets on page 534 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. Close the worksheet. The worksheet graphic object on the drawing reflects the changes. 5. Reopen the worksheet and select Recalculate from the worksheet menu to update the worksheet when any changes are made to the record information.
338
Creating a Parts List

The information associated with the detail bubbles can be included in a worksheet which automatically generates a parts list.
To create a parts list: 1. Once the detail bubble record information has been completed, select Tools > Reports > Create Parts List. 2. With the bulls-eye cursor, click in the drawing to place a Parts List worksheet. Alternatively, select the appropriate parts list worksheet object with the Resource Browser from [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Drawing Border - Title Blocks\ASME Title Blocks.mcd. Double-click the appropriate parts list worksheet object in the Resource Browser to place the worksheet graphic object. The Parts List-1 worksheet object is formatted to fit the ASME title blocks for ASME A, B, and C and ISO A2, A3, A4, and A5 drawing sizes. The Parts List-2 worksheet object is formatted to fit the ASME title blocks for ASME D, E, and F, and ISO A0 and A1 drawing sizes. 3. Double-click on the worksheet, or select Window > Worksheets > Parts List to open the worksheet. From the worksheet menu, select Recalculate. The record information from the detail bubbles automatically fills the worksheet, and all calculations are performed. For more information on worksheets, see Using Worksheets on page 534 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. Close the worksheet. The worksheet graphic object on the drawing reflects the changes. 5. Reopen the worksheet and select Recalculate from the worksheet menu to update the worksheet when any changes are made to the record information.
Dimensioning and Tolerancing

VectorWorks Machine Design provides the tools required for dimensioning a drawing according to ISO and ANSI/ ASME geometric dimensioning and tolerancing standards.
Dimensioning and Tolerancing |
339
The Feature Control Frame, Datum Feature Symbol, and Datum Target Symbol are inserted into the Dimension class by default; control the appearance of these markers globally by editing the parameters of this class. The text characteristics (font size and style) can be controlled with the Text menu. For more information on editing class attributes and formatting text, see Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide and Formatting Text on page 167 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Feature Control Frame

A geometric tolerancing feature control frame consists of a geometric characteristic symbol, up to two tolerance areas, and up to three datum reference areas.
Geometric Characteristic (w/Composite box) Projected Tolerance Zone Tolerance Tolerance Area #2 Material Condition Marker (Solid Arrow)
Statistical Tolerance Diameter symbol Max. Projected Height
Primary Datum Reference Control points Secondary and Tertiary Datum Reference
To insert a feature control frame: 1. Click the Feature Control Frame tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click on the drawing to insert the feature control frame. Click again to set the rotation of the object. If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Click OK.
340
3. Set the feature control frame parameters in the Object Info palette. If the leader is not immediately visible, drag it from the frame using the leader control points.
Parameter
Geometric Characteristic
Description
Select the geometric characteristic symbol, if any
Angularity
Circularity
Concentricity
Cylindricity
Flatness
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
Position
ProfileLine
ProfileSurface
Simple Runout Total Runout
Straightness
Symmetry
Composite Box
Select to increase the size of the geometric characteristic box; this is used when placing a second feature control frame
Tolerance Area #1/#2 Tolerance Show Diameter Symbol
Select to include Tolerance Area #1 and/or Tolerance Area #2 Enter the tolerance value Select to display a diameter symbol along with the tolerance value
Material Condition
Choose the material condition, if any
Free State
LMC (Least Material Condition)
MMC (Maximum Material Condition)
Tangent Plane
Statistical Tolerance
Select to display a statistical tolerance symbol
Projected Tolerance Zone Zone Height
Select to display a projected tolerance zone symbol Enter the maximum projected tolerance zone height when a projected tolerance zone symbol is displayed
Dimensioning and Tolerancing | Parameter

Place the PTZ symbol outside the FCF
341
Description
Select to place the projected tolerance zone symbol outside and to the bottom of the feature control frame
Primary/Secondary/ Tertiary Datum Reference Reference Material Condition
Select to include the primary, secondary, and/or tertiary datum reference
Enter the desired reference letter Select a material condition, if any
LMC (Least Material Condition)
MMC (Maximum Material Condition)
Leader Position Marker Style
Select left or right Select a marker style
None
Solid
Empty
Open
Dot
Circle
Slash
Cross
Size/Angle
Specify the marker size and angle
Datum Feature Symbol

A datum feature symbol consists of a marker, leader, and datum reference letter.
Leader Marker (Solid Triangle)
Datum Reference letter
Control Points
To insert a datum feature symbol: 1. Click the Datum Feature Symbol tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click on the drawing to insert the datum feature symbol. Click again to set the rotation of the object. If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Click OK. 3. Set the leader and marker position by dragging the symbol control points with the mouse. Specify the remaining datum feature parameters in the Object Info palette.
342

Description
Enter the datum reference letter (corresponds to the Feature Control Frame reference letter) Select the marker style
Parameter
Datum Reference Marker Style
Solid Empty Triangle Triangle
None
Solid
Empty
Open
Dot
Circle
Slash
Cross
Size/Angle
Specify the marker size and angle
Datum Target Symbol

A datum target symbol consists of a marker, leader, and target with datum target letter and target area size.
Leader Target Area Size Datum Target Control Points Marker (Solid Arrow)
To insert a datum target symbol: 1. Click the Datum Target Symbol tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click on the drawing to insert the datum target symbol. Click again to set the rotation of the object. If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Click OK. 3. Set the leader and marker position by dragging the symbol control points with the mouse. Specify the remaining datum target parameters in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Datum Target Target Area Size Show Diameter Symbol
Description
Specify the datum target letter/number combination Enter the size of the target area Select to display the diameter symbol with the target area size
Dimensioning and Tolerancing | Parameter

Place target size outside of symbol
343
Description
When necessary, the target size can be displayed outside the symbol; specify right or left Placement
Marker Style
Select a marker style
None
Solid
Empty
Open
Dot
Circle
Slash
Cross
Size/Angle
Specify the marker Size and Angle
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing Note

The Geom Dim and Tol Note tool is used to insert a notation symbol and text specifying the dimension of round, square, counterbore, and/or countersink holes, and unit ratio for conical and/or flat tapers. Alternatively, a depth symbol and associated text can be inserted. To insert a geometric dimensioning and tolerancing note: 1. Click the Geom Dim and Tol Note tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click in the drawing to insert the note. Click again to set the rotation of the object. 3. Specify the geometric dimensioning and tolerancing note parameters in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Precision Note Type
Description
Select the decimal place rounding value for the hole size and depth Select the style of the note marker
Round Hole (and Depth)
Square Hole (and Depth)
Counterbore (and Depth)
Countersink
Conical Taper
Flat Taper
Depth
Hole Size/Taper
Enter the diameter for round, square, counterbore, and countersink holes; enter the unit ratio for conical and flat tapers
344

Description
Sets whether the hole size/taper has a single, double, limited, or no tolerance
Parameter
Tolerance
None
Single
Double
Limit (1)
Limit (2)
Top/Bottom Depth/Angle Tolerance
Enter the value that is added to or subtracted from the base dimension to determine the upper/ lower limit of the dimension Enter the depth for round, square, and counterbore holes (if the depth is zero or less, it is not displayed); enter the angle for countersink holes Sets whether the depth/angle has a single, double, limited, or no tolerance
None
Single
Double
Limit (1)
Limit (2)
Top/Bottom Leader Trailer Leader Line Position
Enter the value that is added to or subtracted from the base dimension to determine the upper/ lower limit of the dimension Enter text to display before the dimension Enter text to display after the dimension Select to place the dimension leader line to the right or left side of the object
4. If desired, create and set a leader line using the 2D Selection tool. Click the symbol control point. Crosshairs display to indicate the leader endpoint position. Click at the desired endpoint location; the leader line is drawn with the marker style, size, angle, and the shoulder length specified in the object preferences.
Second click First click
Managing Project Information

Records and Schedules
Product: Architect
16
Some architectural elements (doors and spaces, for example) have pre-defined data that is automatically attached to them as they are created. Pre-formatted schedules are available for reporting this data, as well as data from other Architect and Landmark elements. Typically, custom data records and schedules are created and edited with the Resource Browser. The Record and Schedule Management suite provides an alternate method for managing data in architectural documents. For information about using the Resource Browser to create and edit record formats and schedules (worksheets), see Record Formats on page 150 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide and Creating Worksheets on page 531 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Record formats and schedules created in this way cannot be used with VectorWorks Architects Record and Schedule management suite, however. The records and schedules suite includes the following commands: VA Records and Schedules: Establishes default formats for records that can be attached to objects, and for schedules that can be generated from those records VA Create Record: Adds selected record formats to the current file VA Create Schedule: Adds selected schedules to the current file By default, records and schedules created with VA Records and Schedules are added to the VA Defaults project preference set, and new files use that VA Defaults set. If additional sets of records and schedules are needed, create a new set of preferences and select that set before setting up a new drawing file. See Working with Project Preference Sets on page 360 for more information.
Defining Records and Schedules

Product: Architect
Use the VA Records and Schedules command to create and modify a set of record format and schedule definitions that can be used in any file. After defining record formats and schedules, make them available in the current file using the VA Create Record and VA Create Schedule commands.
Editing Record Definitions

Product: Architect
To edit a record definition: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules. The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.
346
| Chapter 16: Managing Project Information
Parameter
Records Add Remove Edit Schedules Add Remove Edit 2. Select the record to edit.
Description
Lists currently defined record formats Adds a new record to the current preference set Deletes the selected record Opens the selected record for editing Lists currently defined schedule formats Adds a new schedule to the current preference set Deletes the selected schedule Opens the selected schedule for editing
3. Click Edit in the Records section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. The Record Formats dialog box opens.
Records and Schedules |
347
Parameter
Record Fields Add Remove Edit
Description
Lists the current fields of the selected record Creates a new record field Deletes the selected record field (cannot be undone) Opens the selected record field for editing
4. Click Add to add a new record field or click Edit to edit the selected field. The Edit Field dialog box opens. Add or edit the field information.
Parameter
Name Default Type
Description
Specifies the name of the selected record field Enter a default value for the field, if desired Specifies the type of field: Integer, Boolean, Number, or Text
5. Click OK to close the Edit Field dialog box. 6. In the Record Formats dialog box, continue to modify, add, or remove record items. 7. Click OK to close the Record Formats dialog box, and then click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.
348

Once a record definition has been updated, instances of the new record format cannot co-exist in the same file with instances of the old record format. If an object is inserted into a drawing with a record format that differs from the current record of the same name, a dialog box opens requesting which format to retain. Records in the un-retained format will be purged, and their information will be lost. For this reason, it is recommended that any changes be made to record formats prior to beginning a project.
Adding Record Definitions

Product: Architect
To add a record definition: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules. The Records and Schedules dialog box opens. 2. Click Add in the Records section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. The Enter String dialog box opens. Enter the name of the new record. 3. Click OK. The Record Formats dialog box opens, listing the default fields of the new record; only the Add button is enabled.
4. Click Add to add a new field to the current record definition. Enter a Name and Default value for the field. Select the field Type from the list. 5. Click OK to close the Edit Field dialog box. The new field displays on the Record Formats dialog box. If more fields are needed, repeat steps 4 and 5. 6. Click OK. The new record and its fields are added to the record definition list. 7. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.
Removing Record Definitions

Product: Architect
To remove a record definition: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules. The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.

2. Select the record to remove.
349
3. Click Remove in the Records section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. This operation cannot be undone; click Yes to confirm that the record should be removed. The record definition is removed from the record list. 4. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.
Editing Schedule Definitions

Product: Architect
The Schedule definitions detail the column heading text, width, and border attributes for each record field being reported. To edit a schedule definition: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules. The Records and Schedules dialog box opens. 2. Select the schedule to edit. 3. Click Edit in the Schedules section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. The Edit Schedule Format dialog box opens. Specify the schedule appearance by selecting the column order and formatting.
Parameter
Schedule Information Available Record Fields Schedule Columns Add >
Description
Select the record to format, defining the data to be reported in the schedule Select the record field(s) to include in the schedule Displays the fields that will be included in the schedule Moves the selected available record field into the Schedule Columns list
350

Description
Deletes a selected field from the Schedule Columns list Moves the selected field up in the Schedule Columns list order Moves the selected field down in the Schedule Columns list order Enter a title for the selected Schedule Column item, if desired. The title displays in row 2 of the column corresponding to the field. Enter a sub-heading for the selected Schedule Column item if desired. The title displays in row 3 of the column corresponding to the field. Enter a sub-heading for the selected Schedule Column item, if desired. The title displays in row 4 of the column corresponding to the field. Specifies the width, in characters, for the selected Schedule Column item Specifies the column border display for the selected Schedule Column Opens the Schedule Format Options dialog box
Parameter
< Remove Move Up Move Dn Heading Sub-Heading 1 Sub-Heading 2 Width (chars) Borders Options
4. Click Options to edit the schedule font style and size. The Schedule Format Options dialog box opens. Click the appropriate Change button to open the Format Text dialog box and modify the font type and size for the heading, sub-headings, and body of schedule items.
Records and Schedules | Parameter

Heading Sub-Heading 1 and 2 Body
351
Description
Specifies the font type and size for the schedule headings; click Change to edit the font format Select to create sub-headings in the first or second column; click Change to edit the font format Specifies the font type and size for the schedule item body text; click Change to edit the font format
5. Click OK to close the Schedule Format Options dialog box, and then click OK to close the Edit Schedule Format dialog box. 6. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.
Adding Schedule Definitions

Product: Architect
To add a schedule definition: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules. The Records and Schedules dialog box opens. 2. Click Add in the Schedules section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. The Enter String dialog box opens. 3. Enter the name for the new schedule. 4. Click OK. The Edit Schedule Format dialog box opens. For details on the Edit Schedule Format dialog box parameters, see Editing Schedule Definitions on page 349. 5. Select the record that defines the data to be reported in the new schedule, and then add the desired fields to use for the schedule. 6. Select a schedule column, and then enter the column formatting information. If desired, click Options and set the font formatting for the column, and then click OK. 7. Click OK to save the new schedule. The new schedule definition is added. 8. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.
Removing Schedule Definitions

Product: Architect
To remove a schedule definition: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules. The Records and Schedules dialog box opens. 2. Select the schedule definition to remove. 3. Click Remove in the Schedules section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. This operation cannot be undone; click Yes to confirm that the schedule should be removed.
352

The schedule definition is removed from the schedule list.
4. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.
Creating Records
Product: Architect
The VA Create Record command adds record formats created with the VA Records and Schedules command to the current file. Once the records are added, they can be attached to items in the drawing using the ID Label tool. They can also be attached by selecting an object and then selecting the checkbox next to the record format in the Data tab of the Object Info palette. To create a record: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Create Record. The Create Record dialog box opens, listing the available records that can be added to the file.
2. Select the record to add to the file. 3. Click OK to add the specified record to the file.
Creating Schedules
Product: Architect
The VA Create Schedule command generates worksheets for the current file. Any schedule definitions that were created with the VA Records and Schedules command display in the list, as well as several pre-formatted schedules provided as default resources with VectorWorks Architect. Pre-formatted schedules include: Equipment Schedule Door Schedule Roof Face Area Wall Style Report Diffuser Report Drawing List Room Finish Schedule Window Schedule Door Hardware Legend Plumbing Schedule Wall Area
To generate a schedule: 1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Create Schedule. The Create Schedule dialog box opens, listing the schedules that can be added to the file.
353
2. Select the desired schedule to be created. Enter a new Schedule Title if desired. Select Place worksheet on drawing to place the worksheet on the drawing for printing. 3. Click OK. Each schedule has a record format associated with it. If there is a difference between the record definition currently in the file and the record definition in the current preference set, a notice displays with the option to continue or fix the record. If the selected schedule already exists in the file, a warning dialog box opens. Select whether to replace or rename the new schedule (some schedules also have a recalculate option), and click OK.
4. Click on the drawing area where the top left corner of the schedule is to be located. The worksheet opens, displaying the schedule information. If the option to place the worksheet on drawing was selected, the worksheet is included on the drawing. If the on drawing worksheet is accidentally deleted, select the worksheet name from the Resource Browser and select Worksheet On Drawing from the Resources menu.
354
Creating a Room Finish Legend

Product: Architect
There can be dozens of room finishes assigned within a project file. To obtain a detailed report of all room finish data, first generate a room finish schedule as described in Creating Schedules on page 352. Then generate a detailed legend showing a full description of the finishes using the Create Rm Finish Legend command. This command can only be used after room finishes have been assigned to space objects. To generate a room finish legend: 1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Rm Finish Legend. The Create Room Finish Legend dialog box opens.
Parameter
Create legend as text block Label Indent Note Indent Section Spacing Note Spacing Bold Section Titles Create legend as worksheet Worksheet Name Place worksheet in document Add row between sections Bold section titles
Description
Adds the legend to the drawing as a text block Sets the offset from the location title to the item title Sets the offset from the location title to the item description Sets the text spacing between each section Sets the text spacing between each item description Displays the location titles in bold face text Adds the legend to the drawing as a worksheet Sets the name of the worksheet Places the worksheet on the drawing at the next mouse click Adds a worksheet row between each location section Displays the location titles in bold face text
2. Select whether the legend should be displayed as a text block or as a worksheet. See Creating Text Blocks on page 165 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide and Creating Worksheets on page 531 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
ID Label Tool | Display Method

Text block
355
Description
Define the area for the legend to occupy. Click to set the top left corner of the text block, and then click to set the bottom right of the text block. The text legend is generated within the defined rectangle. The worksheet is created with the legend information. If the Place worksheet in document option is selected, click on the drawing to set the top left corner of the worksheet.
Worksheet
3. Click OK.
ID Label Tool
The ID Label tool labels drawing objects with an identifier so they can be properly referenced on an associated schedule. These labels can be applied to specific objects with attached data records, such as doors, windows, equipment, plumbing fixtures, electrical items, and irrigation objects. This tool also provides a convenient way to specify or edit attached record data. The ID labels can be customized using special symbols (see Creating Custom ID Label Symbols on page 475 for more information). For doors and windows, the ID label bubble size is independent of text size. The ID bubble is drawn at the size specified in the ID Label Size field of the Object Info palette, unless the text exceeds the ID bubble size; in this case, the bubble automatically expands to fit the text. To restore the ID bubble to a fixed size, reduce the text size to fit within the ID bubble. To place an ID label: 1. Click the ID Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click to set the location of the ID label.
2nd click 1st click
3. Click on the object to associate with the ID label. The ID/Specification Tool dialog box opens. Set the ID parameters.
356
Parameter
ID Type ID Style
Description
Select the record associated with the ID; this is automatically selected if the object is associated with one of the available records Select the graphical ID style to display Note: If a styled wall is being labeled, this is the only field available; data fields must be added and edited via the Resource Browser, as described in Editing ID Labels and Records for Wall Styles on page 358.
Duplicate Existing ID Create New ID Prefix Label Suffix Select a field to specify Selected field value Options
Click to associate an existing ID to this label; select the ID from the list Click to create a new ID label Assigns alphanumeric information before the numerical label value; adding prefix information is optional Assigns a numerical value to the ID; this number increments automatically if the auto-increment option is chosen in the Set ID Preferences dialog box Assigns alphanumeric information after the label value if the auto-increment option is chosen; adding suffix information is optional Select a record field associated with the object to edit its value Enter or edit a field value and then click Set to confirm the change For windows or doors, opens the ID Settings dialog box; for other objects, opens the Set ID Preferences dialog box
4. Click Options to set specific preferences for this ID.
ID Label Tool |
357
If the object being labeled is a window or door, complete the fields in the ID Settings dialog box as described in the Data tab section of Inserting Windows on page 71 and Inserting Doors on page 81. Select Auto-Increment ID Label in the ID Settings dialog box to automatically increment the numerical ID value each time the label is placed. Continue with step 6. For all other objects, go to step 5. 5. If the object being labeled is something other than a window or door, complete the fields in the Set ID Preferences dialog box.
Parameter
Auto-Increment ID Label Fix current record when matching IDs Write ID fields of records with matchfield Draw Leader from ID to object Rotate ID with Leader Length of leader shoulder Arrow style Marker scale factor
Description
Automatically increments the numerical ID value each time the label is placed; not available for styled walls Automatically overwrites the current record information when applying an existing ID label; not available for styled walls Finds records with matching value in match field and writes ID value to match; not available for styled walls Draws a leader from the ID label to the object Rotates the ID symbol to the angle of the leader line Sets the length of the horizontal segment of the leader line Sets the style of arrow to use with the leader line Sets the size of the leaders arrow; a factor of less than one decreases the size of the arrow while a factor of more than one increases its size
6. Click OK. The ID is drawn.
358

To bypass the ID Label dialog boxes and automatically place an existing ID label repeatedly, hold down the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key while applying additional labels. To easily convert any object into a door or window, place an ID label on the object and select the Window Object or Door Object ID Type in the ID/Specification Tool dialog box. A symbol is automatically created for the object and displays in the Resource Browser, and is available to use as symbol geometry for subsequently placed windows or doors. Select the window or door object and click Settings in the Object Info palette to open the Window or Door Settings dialog box to attach record information to include in the window or door Schedule (see Inserting Windows on page 71 and Inserting Doors on page 81).
Editing Existing ID Labels and Record Information

The ID Label tool can be used to change ID or record information after placing an ID. Labels and records for styled walls are edited differently; see Editing ID Labels and Records for Wall Styles on page 358 for details. To edit an existing ID label or record information: 1. Click the ID Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Double-click on the ID label to edit. If the labeled object is a window or door, complete the fields as described in the Data tab section of Inserting Windows on page 71 and Inserting Doors on page 81. If editing the object through the Object Info palette, an additional parameter, ID Label Size, is available for controlling the size of the ID label bubble. Continue with step 4. For all other objects, go to step 3. 3. If the labeled object is something other than a window or door, edit the fields in the ID/Specification Tool dialog box, as described in ID Label Tool on page 355. 4. Click OK. The edits are applied to the ID label and record attached to the object.
Editing ID Labels and Records for Wall Styles

Product: Architect
Data fields (including an ID label) are specified for each wall style, which means that each wall with a particular style has the same label and record attached to it. Therefore, ID labels and records cannot be edited for individual styled walls with the ID Label tool. (See Using Wall Styles on page 42 for more information about creating, editing, and using wall styles.) To edit ID label or record information for a wall style: 1. Select the wall style from the Resource Browser and click Edit from the Resources menu. 2. In the Edit Wall Style dialog box, click the Data Fields tab.
ID Label Tool |
359
3. Enter a label ID in the Mark field, and enter other data fields as necessary. 4. Click OK to close the Edit Wall Style dialog box, and click OK again to close the Wall Replacement dialog box. From this point forward, walls that are created with this style have the specified data record attached; when an ID label is added to a wall that has this style, the Mark entry displays in the label.
VectorWorks Architect and Landmark ID Symbols

The following ID symbols are provided with VectorWorks Architect and/or VectorWorks Landmark, and require the presence of the indicated record format in the drawing file. The ID Label tool creates the record format if it does not already exist.
360

Architect Partition IDs (require Styled Wall record) Architect and Landmark Equipment IDs (require Equipment record)
Wall ID 1 (ID) Wall ID 2 (ID) - [fixed length line] Wall ID 3 (ID) - [note: NCS style] Wall ID 4 (ID) The leader on these two symbols is part of the symbol and fixed in length
Equipt ID 1 (ID) Equipt ID 2 (ID) - [no leader] Equipt ID 3 (ID) Equipt ID 4 (ID)
Working with Project Preference Sets

Product: Architect
In most cases, the default project preference set (VA Defaults) is the only set needed. If additional sets of records and schedules are needed, create a new set of preferences and select that set before setting up a new drawing file. A project preference set is a grouped configuration of record, schedule, and library information that is used by a drawing file. A project preference set can be customized for particular projects (residential, commercial, etc.) or different types of clients (restaurant, retail store, etc.). Different record and schedule formats can be assigned, as well as information in room finish libraries and door hardware libraries. These custom configurations are saved in external text files. The VA Set Project Prefs command assigns which set of external files to use within the current drawing. The settings files used by these commands, taken together, are called a Project Preference Set. Because the preference sets are stored as external files, they can be shared among many users to comply with office standards. The preference set folders can be copied to the same location for each user, or shared on a network location. Either select the VA Set Project Prefs command to designate the preference set location, or copy the following text file to each computer: [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\VA2_Preference_Set_Paths.txt See Project Preference Sets on page 539 for information on the files contained in the preference set folders.
Selecting a Project Preference Set

Product: Architect
The default preference set is named VA Defaults, and its files are located in [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_Def. To use a different project preference set, select it when setting up the file. The preference set selection is saved with the file. Changes to VA Records and Schedules, the Door Hardware Library, or the Room Finish Library are saved in the currently selected Project Preference Set. When using template files for different types of projects, make a preference set selection before saving the template. To select a Project Preference Set: 1. Select Tools > Options > VA Set Project Prefs.
Working with Project Preference Sets |

The VA Preference Sets dialog box opens. The listed sets are available for use in the file.
361
Parameter
Preference set list Add Remove Edit
Description
Lists project preference sets that are available for use in the file Adds a project preference set to the list; specify the set location and name Deletes the selected project preference set association (the file is not deleted, but cannot be selected for this project) Changes the project preference set name or location
2. Select the project preference set to activate. 3. Click Done. The selection VA Defaults cannot be deleted or edited; it contains the information that is used if no Project Preference Set is designated or if there is an error finding the designated set.
Creating a New Project Preference Set

Product: Architect
While VectorWorks Architect installs six project preference sets, it supports the use of an unlimited number. To add preference sets beyond the default options, manually create additional preference folders and then add the set to the list of defined sets using the VA Set Project Prefs command. The Project Preference set folder must contain the following files for correct operation: Door Hardware Library.txt Equipment Record.txt Equipment Schedule.txt Plumbing Fixt Record.txt Plumbing Schedule.txt Room Finish Library.txt VA2 Records and Schedules.txt VA_Project_Set.txt
If additional records and schedules are defined using the VA Records and Schedules command, their data files are stored in the Project Preference Set folder.
362
Adding a Project Preference Set

Product: Architect
After creating a project preference set, add it to the list of project preference sets available: 1. Select Tools > Options > VA Set Project Prefs. 2. The VA Preference Sets dialog box opens. Click Add. The Add Preference Set dialog box opens.
Parameter
Path Name
Description
Enter or browse for the path to the Project Preference Set folder Specifies a name for this Project Preference Set
3. Click OK to return to the VA Preference Sets dialog box. To use the new project preference set, select it from the list and click Done.
Notes Management
VectorWorks Design Series products provide a full set of features for managing and creating complete and fully-referenced annotation of project files. These features can streamline the annotation process by providing a central location for storing, selecting and placing frequently repeated notes. Notes can be reused across files, either within a project, or across separate projects. A callout is text with a leader line, displaying information about an item in the drawing. A keynote is a callout that references a note contained in a keynote legend. Finally, general notes contain text not associated with a particular item in the drawing. A callout object is included with the VectorWorks Fundamentals program, but its capabilities are extended in the Design Series, allowing it to be used for keynotes in addition to ordinary notes. For more information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 176 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Placing callouts as keynotes also creates a keynote legend object. The keynote legend automatically numbers the notes, and ensures that multiple instances of the same note are assigned the same keynote number. In addition to callouts, a general notes object places and automatically numbers general notes. The callout, keynote legend, and general notes objects can be used with manually-entered text, or in conjunction with external databases which store and retrieve text. When a database is used, text is entered only once into the database, and then pulled from the database for notes in the drawing. After notes have been placed, if changes are made to the database or to the notes, the differences can be reconciled with the Reconcile Notes command.
Notes Management |
363
Notes Management without Databases

Keynotes and general notes can be placed on the drawing by manually entering the notes text; a database is not mandatory.
Placing Keynotes
Keynotes are placed with the extended capabilities of the Callout tool. The keynote legend is automatically created. To place a keynote: 1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette. 2. Click the Preferences Mode bar button. The Callout Preferences dialog box opens. For more information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 176 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. Select Place As Keynote. Specify the keynote prefix and suffix text, if desired. 4. Click OK. 5. Click in the drawing to place the callout object. Enter the keynote text in the Enter the Text of the Note dialog box. 6. The keynote is placed in the drawing; a keynote legend object is also created.
364
7. Continue placing any additional keynotes. Keynotes referencing the same text automatically use the same number; different text causes the keynote to be numbered sequentially and added to the keynote legend.
Editing Keynotes and the Keynote Legend

Both the keynotes and keynote legend can be edited after placement. If only one keynote is to be edited, select it and make the changes in the Object Info palette. If the text of several keynotes is to be edited, select the keynote legend and make the edits from the Object Info palette. Keynote legends are layer-specific; one legend is created per layer. To print several layers at the same time with one correctly numbered legend, the keynotes must be moved so that they are all on the same layer. Double-click a callout or keynote legend to edit it.
Editing Keynotes Product: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Machine Design

To edit individual keynotes: 1. To change the text of a selected keynote, select the callout and click Edit Note in the Object Info palette. 2. Other callout parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette, like an ordinary callout object. For more information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 176 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 3. After placement, a keynote can be converted into an ordinary callout object by deselecting Place As Keynote in the Object Info palette. The keynote is removed from the keynote legend.
Editing the Keynote Legend Product: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Machine Design
To edit the keynote legend: 1. The keynote legend parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Title Indent Width Spacing
Description
Specifies the keynote legend title Adjusts the hanging indent value for the legend body text Sets the keynote legend text width Sets the spacing between each note
Notes Management | Parameter

Edit Notes Format Title Text Format Body Text
365
Description
Opens the Notes Manager:Keynote Legend dialog box, for editing the keynote text, description, or order Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the legend title Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the legend body text
For information on formatting text, see Formatting Text on page 167 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. The keynote legend contains control points for adjusting the hanging indent and text width directly from the drawing.
Body text hanging indent control point
Keynote legend text width control point
3. To change keynote numbering or edit the text of all keynotes at the same time, select the keynote legend object and click Edit Notes in the Object Info palette. The Notes Manager:Keynote Legend dialog box opens.
366

Description
Lists the keynotes (by description) in the keynote legend in numbering order Select a keynote description and click Edit to edit the note text or change the keynote description Changes the order of the keynotes in the keynote legend; move the selected keynote up or down in the list Select a keynote description and edit the text of the note Displays the database-related portion of the dialog box; when working without a database, these controls are not necessary (see Placing Database Callouts on page 370)
Parameter
Description Edit Move Up/Move Down Note Text Show Database Controls
4. The keynotes are listed by a description. The description normally consists of the first 42 (Windows) or 38 (Macintosh) characters of the keynote, but this can be changed by selecting the description and clicking Edit. The Edit Note dialog box opens. To enter a different note description, deselect Use the first 42 characters (Windows) or Use the first 38 characters (Macintosh), and change the Description. The note text can also be edited, if desired.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Note dialog box. 6. Click OK to close the Notes Manager:Keynote Legend dialog box and edit the keynote legend.
Placing General Notes

Notes management includes a General Notes tool, for placing and numbering general notes.
Notes Management |
To place a general notes object: 1. Click the General Notes tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click to place the general notes object in the drawing. The Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box opens.
367
Parameter
Description Add Remove Remove All Edit Move Up/Move Down Note Text
Description
Lists the general notes (by description) in numbering order Opens the Add Note dialog box, for adding a general note and specifying its description Deletes the selected general note Deletes all general notes Select a general note and click Edit to edit the note text or change the general note description Changes the order of the general notes; move the selected general note up or down in the list Select a general note description and edit the text of the note
368

Description
Displays the database-related portion of the dialog box; when working without a database, these controls are not necessary (see Placing Database General Notes on page 377)
Parameter
Show Database Controls
3. To add a new general note, click Add. The Add Note dialog box opens.
4. Enter the new general note text. The general notes are listed by a description. The description normally consists of the first 42 (Windows) or 38 (Macintosh) characters of the general note. To enter a different note description, deselect Use the first 42 characters (Windows) or Use the first 38 characters (Macintosh), and change the Description. 5. Click OK to add the new general note. 6. The note text can be edited, if desired. Select the note description and edit the text in the Note Text area. The note text and its description can be edited by clicking Edit. Delete selected notes by clicking Remove. 7. Order the general notes by clicking Move Up or Move Down. 8. Click OK to place the general notes object.
Notes Management |
369
Editing General Notes

To edit a general notes object: 1. The general note parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Title Indent Width Spacing Edit Notes Format Title Text Format Body Text
Description
Specifies the general notes title Adjusts the hanging indent value for the general notes body text Sets the width of the general notes text Sets the spacing between each note Opens the Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box, for editing the general notes text, description or order (see Placing General Notes on page 366) Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the general notes title Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the general notes body text
For information on formatting text, see Formatting Text on page 167 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. The general notes object contains control points for adjusting the hanging indent and text width directly from the drawing.
Body text hanging indent control point
General notes text width control point
Notes Management with Databases

Instead of manually typing the text for every callout, keynote and general notes object, text that is used repeatedlyby one or many usersacross projects and files can be stored in a tab-delimited text file (referred to as a database). The use of a database for storing notes saves time and prevents errors, and standardizes compliant notes usage across files. There are no limits to the number of databases that can be used for annotating a drawing. The databases can have an unlimited number of notes of any length. After placement, notes can be easily updated if changes are made to a database.
370
Placing Database Callouts

Callouts with database notes are placed with the extended capabilities of the Callout tool. To place a database callout: 1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette. 2. Click the Preferences Mode bar button. The Callout Preferences dialog box opens. For more information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 176 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. Select Get Text from Database; the current database file is displayed as a button. 4. To select a different database, click the database button. The standard Open dialog box allows a different database file to be selected. Select the database file, and click Open. A sample database is located in [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\Common\Data\Notes\Callouts.txt 5. Click OK. 6. Click in the drawing to place the callout object. Once the callout leader is drawn, the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box opens automatically, displaying the information from the selected database. The notes in a selected section are listed by a description. The description normally consists of the first 42 (Windows) or 38 (Macintosh) characters of the note.
Notes Management |
371
Parameter
Active Database New Choose
Description
Displays the currently selected database file Creates a new, blank database Selects a different, existing database. A database from a previous version of VectorWorks can be specified, but it must be converted to the current version format as prompted. Saves the current database with a new name Lists the note sections; the associated notes in a selected section are displayed in Notes in Database Adds a new note section; enter the section name in the Enter String dialog box Deletes the currently selected section and its associated notes Renames the currently selected section; enter the new name in the Enter String dialog box Lists the notes associated with the current database section Opens the Add Note dialog box, for adding a note to the database section
Save As Sections in Database Add Remove Edit Notes in Database Add
372

Description
Deletes the currently selected note(s) Opens the Edit Note dialog box, for editing the selected note or its description Displays the note text of the currently selected note; the note text can be edited Filters the database sections, descriptions, or notes with a search term, to more easily locate a note Sets the automatic save options for the database
Parameter
Remove Edit Note Text Database Filter Prefs
7. To add a note to a selected section, click Add under Notes in Database. The Add Note dialog box opens. Specify the section, description, and note text.
Parameter
Section Description
Description
Select the associated section for the note By default, consists of the first 42 (Windows) or 38 (Macintosh) characters of the note text; deselect Use the first 42 characters (Windows) or Use the first 38 characters (Macintosh), and enter a different note description, if desired Type the new note text If the default description is not desired, deselect and enter a new Description
Note Text Use the first 42 characters (Windows) or Use the first 38 characters (Macintosh)
8. Click OK to add the note to the specified section and return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box.
Notes Management |
9. Change the note description by selecting the description and clicking Edit. The Edit Note dialog box opens. To enter a different note description, deselect Use the first 42 characters (Windows) or Use the first 38 characters (Macintosh), and change the Description. The note text can also be edited, if desired, and the note can be associated with a different section.
373
10. Click OK to edit the note description and return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box. 11. The text of a selected note can be edited in Note Text. 12. To search easily for a note, section, or description, use a filter. Only notes, sections, or descriptions with the specified text are displayed. Select the desired filter from the Database Filter list in the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box. To display all notes, sections, and descriptions, select All Notes. In addition, if no items match a selected filter, all notes are displayed. 13. To edit the database search filters, select Edit List from the Database Filter list. The Edit List:Callout Filters dialog box opens. The filters are listed in order.
374

Description
Lists the search filters in the order they display in the database filter list Adds a search filter to the list; enter the new term in the Enter String dialog box Deletes the currently selected search filter(s) Renames the current search filter; enter the new name in the Enter String dialog box Changes the filter list order; select the search filter and move it up or down in the list
Parameter
Filter list Add Remove Edit Move Up/Move Down
14. Click OK to change the search filters and return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box. 15. Changes and additions to the notes database are saved automatically according to the preferences specified. Click Prefs to set these preferences. The Database Preferences dialog box opens. Set the desired actions that automatically save database changes by selecting the associated checkbox(es). If no automatic saving is specified, you will be prompted frequently about saving the database.
The Locate and Hide Database options are available when editing a General Notes or Keynote Legend with database. 16. Click OK to return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box. 17. Once the desired note has been entered or located, select it and click OK. The selected note is used for the callout text.
Editing a Database Callout

The database callout can be edited after placement.
Notes Management |
To edit a database callout: 1. To change the note text, select the callout and click Edit Note in the Object Info palette.
375
2. The Notes Manager:Callout dialog box opens. Select a different note as described in Placing Database Callouts on page 370, and click OK. 3. Other callout parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette as for an ordinary callout object. For more information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 176 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. After placement, a database callout can be converted into an ordinary callout object by deselecting Get Text from Database in the Object Info palette. The callout text can then be edited by clicking Edit Note in the Object Info palette; the database text is not affected.
Placing Database Keynote Legends

Keynote legends can take advantage of a notes database. To place a database keynote legend: 1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette. 2. Click the Preferences Mode bar button. The Callout Preferences dialog box opens. As described in Placing Keynotes on page 363, select Place As Keynote and click OK. 3. Place the callouts in the drawing area. 4. Select the keynote legend. In the Object Info palette, click Edit Notes. 5. The Notes Manager:Keynote Legend dialog box opens. 6. Click Show Database Controls to access the keynote legend database parameters. The dialog box is divided into two sections, with the database information on the left and the keynote legend information on the right. The buttons in the center of the dialog box move information from the database to the legend and vice-versa.
376
Parameter
Active Database, Sections in Database, Notes in Database, Note Text, Database Filter, and Prefs Notes in the Selected Keynote Legend Object Update > < Update < Add Auto-Locate
Description
Edits the database sections, notes, note text, search filters, and saving preferences as described in Placing Database Callouts on page 370 Edits the keynote legend notes and description as described in Placing Keynotes on page 363 Overwrites the selected keynote legend note with the selected database note Overwrites the selected database note with the selected keynote legend note Adds the selected keynote legend note to the database, placing it in the current database section Automatically locates the database, section, and description of a selected keynote legend note, if the note originated from a database

< Locate Hide Database Controls
377
Description
If the selected keynote legend note originated from a database, locates the notes database, section, and description Hides the database portion of the keynote legend dialog box
7. Click OK to change the keynote legend, replacing the notes with database notes.
Placing Database General Notes

General notes can take advantage of a notes database. To place a database general notes object: 1. Click the General Notes tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click to place the general notes object in the drawing. The Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box opens. 3. Click Show Database Controls to access the general notes database parameters. The dialog box is divided into two sections, with the database information on the left and the general notes information on the right. The buttons in the center of the dialog box move information from the database to the general notes and vice-versa.
378
Parameter
Active Database, Sections in Database, Notes in Database, Note Text, Database Filter, and Prefs Notes in the Selected General Notes Object Add > Update > < Update < Add Auto-Locate < Locate
Description
Edits the database sections, notes, note text, search filters, and saving preferences as described in Placing Database Callouts on page 370
Edits the general notes and description as described in Placing General Notes on page 366 Adds a database note to the general notes Overwrites the selected general note with the selected database note Overwrites the selected database note with the selected general note Adds the selected general note to the database, placing it in the current database section Automatically locates the database, section, and description of a selected general note, if the note originated from a database If the selected general note originated from a database, locates the notes database, section, and description

Hide Database Controls
379
Description
Hides the database portion of the general notes dialog box
4. Click OK to change the general note, replacing the notes with database notes.
Adding Text to a Database

Text objects can be added from the drawing to a selected database. This is convenient for retrieving text from older, converted files for use with the Notes Manager or when adding frequently-used text to a database for easy future insertion as an annotation. To add drawing text to a database: 1. Select Text > Add Text to Database. The Add Text to Database dialog box opens. Specify which text objects to select and indicate in which databases to search for duplicated text.
Parameter
Add Text Meeting These Criteria Selected Text Only Layers/Classes Exclude Text Already in One of These Databases Add Change Remove
Description
Specifies the criteria for selecting text objects to be added to a database Adds only selected text to the database; when deselected, adds text from all text objects in the file Adds only text from the specified layers and/or classes to the database; when deselected, adds text from text objects in all layers or classes in the file Lists the databases in which to search for duplicated text; the text search is case sensitive and the match must be exact. If duplicated text is found, it is not added to the database. Adds a database to the text search database list Allows changes to a selected databases location Removes a database from the text search database list
380
2. Click OK. If any of the text was not found in the text search database(s), the Notes Manager:Add Text to Database dialog box opens.
3. The text to be added is listed on the right. As described in Placing Database Keynote Legends on page 375, the text can be added to the active database in the desired section. Click OK.
Reconciling Database and Drawing Notes

The Reconcile Notes command handles differences between the database and the notes in the drawing. For example, if database callouts have been placed and the database is edited afterwards, differences must be reconciled. To reconcile notes: 1. Select Text > Reconcile Notes. The Reconcile Notes dialog box opens. Select the note objects to reconcile.
Notes Management |
381
Parameter
Callouts with Get Text from Database checked Callouts with Get Text from Database unchecked Callouts that used to get their text from a database Callouts that never got their text from a database General Notes objects Layers / Classes
Description
Selects database callouts Selects ordinary callouts and keynote callouts Selects callouts that were once database callouts and obtained note text from a database Selects callouts that did not obtain note text from a database Selects general notes Select the layers and classes with notes to include for reconciliation
2. Click OK to reconcile the notes. If any of the notes reference databases, the Notes Manager attempts to locate those databases. It searches first in the same folder as the current file; if not found, it searches in the same place relative to the VectorWorks executable. If the databases still cannot be found, the Notes Manager tries to locate them with fully-qualified paths. Place database files from another user in the same folder as the drawing file so that the Notes Manager can easily locate the databases. 3. If a database referenced by notes cannot be located, the Cannot Locate Database(s) dialog box opens. For each database that cannot be located, click Browse to specify the database location.
382
4. Click OK. Next, the Notes Manager searches the database(s) for the notes. 5. If one or more notes cannot be located in the database, the Specify Database Search List dialog box opens.
If there are no additional database files to be specified, click No and proceed to step 8. If the notes could be located in another database, click Yes to specify the database location. 6. The Specify Database Search List dialog box opens. Click Add to specify additional databases where the notes are located. Click Remove to delete a selected database from the list. The number of notes which have been located is displayed.
7. Click OK. 8. If some notes have still not been located, the Notes Manager:Reconcile Notes dialog box opens. The dialog box is divided into two sections, with the database information on the left and the notes to be reconciled on the right. The buttons in the center of the dialog box move information from the database to the general notes and vice-versa. By using the center buttons, reconcile each note manually. As a note is reconciled, it is removed from the list.
Notes Management |
383
Parameter
Active Database, Sections in Database, Notes in Database, Note Text, Database Filter, and Prefs Notes That Need To Be Reconciled Update > < Update < Add Auto-Locate < Locate
Description
Edits the database sections, notes, note text, search filters, and saving preferences as described in Placing Database Callouts on page 370 Displays the description and note text of the notes that have not been reconciled Overwrites the selected note to be reconciled with the selected database note Overwrites the selected database note with the selected note to be reconciled Adds the selected note to be reconciled to the database, placing it in the current database section Automatically tries to locate the database, section, and description of a selected note to be reconciled, if the note originated from a database If the selected note to be reconciled originated from a database, tries to locate the notes database, section, and description
384
9. Click OK. The Reconciliation Results dialog box opens, showing how the notes were reconciled.
Locating Databases on a Network

To use databases efficiently in a multiple-user environment, the database files should be placed on a network. There, they can be accessed concurrently by several users who will then conform to office standards and will not need to retype notes. Windows users should choose databases by browsing from Network Neighborhood (My Network Places) rather than from mapped drive letters. Otherwise, database references are dependent on drive mapping. Database changes made by different users are merged automatically. A conflict could arise if two different users edit the same note in the same database at the same time. If this occurs, the Resolve Note Conflict dialog box opens when closing the Notes Manager dialog box.
On the left, your version of the note displays, and on the right, the other users version displays. Select which version of the note to save by selecting Mine is better or The other note is better. Click OK to resolve the conflict.
Converting Notes from Previous Versions

Databases and notes created in versions of VectorWorks prior to version 11 can be converted for use in the current version. Databases created in previous versions of the Notes Manager are automatically converted to the current version when they are selected by clicking Choose to select a database.
The Issue Manager |

Callouts created in version 9 and above are automatically converted to the current format. They can be used as ordinary callouts, keynotes, or database callouts.
385
Other notes objects, such as Text Notes, Keynotes, and General Notes created by previous Notes Manager versions, as well as VectorWorks text objects, must be converted by command. VectorWorks text objects are converted to general notes. To convert old objects to the current format: 1. Select Text > Convert Old Notes to New. 2. The Convert Old Notes to New dialog box opens. Select the type of old notes to convert.
Parameter
All updatable objects All selected objects Just the following objects Layers/Classes
Description
Converts any note-related items in the drawing Converts any note-related items in the current selection Select the type of objects to be converted (Text Notes, Keynotes, General Notes from version 8.52 to 10, and text objects) Specifies the layers and classes to be searched for objects to convert
3. Click OK to convert the objects to the current version Notes Manager format. 4. The Conversion Results dialog box displays a summary of the objects converted.
The Issue Manager

The Issue Manager accesses and displays information about drawing issue, dates, and history on a sheet-by-sheet basis. It interacts with the drawing border object by allowing the user to control the drawing border title block data and issue information. (Drawing borders can either be placed with the Drawing Border tool in the Dims/Notes tool setsee Creating Drawing Borders on page 313or a drawing border can be created and placed by the Document Setup or Create Standard Viewports commandssee The Setup Commands on page 2.) To use the Issue Manager: 1. Ensure that at least one drawing border with a title block is present in the drawing.
386
2. Select File > Issue Manager. The Issue Manager dialog box opens. The tabs and fields displayed depend on the title block inserted in the drawing border. Custom title blocks may not match the parameters or tabs shown here. The fields and tabs shown assume that an Arch-style title block is inserted. 3. Click the Project Data tab to configure the project information. Leave a blank field to create an empty line in the title block.
Parameter
Project ID Project Title Design Firm Project Manager Designed By Total Sheets File Name
Description
Specifies the company project ID code Indicates the project title, which can include name and address information Describes the name and address of the design firm Provides the project managers name Specifies the name of the lead designer Indicates the total number of sheet layers (or design layers named sheet-) in the project Indicates the VectorWorks file name
The information on the Project tab applies to all drawing borders or title blocks in the set.
The Issue Manager |
387
4. Enter the project information. If the project was created with the Create Standard Viewports command, some of the information has been automatically entered. 5. Click the Sheet Data tab to configure information about individual sheet layers in the set.
Parameter
Sheet Number Sheet Title Sheet Scale Consultant Drawn By Rev/Checked By Submitted By Record Date Include in Current Issue Prev / Next
Description
The information displayed applies to this sheet number The sheet title can contain up to three lines Displays the scale of the major drawing on this sheet Specifies the name and address of any consultants involved with this particular sheet Provides the draftspersons initials Specifies the reviewers initials Specifies the submitters initials Specifies the date of the issue Select to include this sheet in the current issue set Click Prev and Next to switch to each sheet and enter the relevant data
388
6. Complete the information for each sheet in the drawing set to be issued. Toggle among other sheets in the drawing with the Next > and < Prev buttons. If the project was set up with the Create Standard Viewports command, some of the information has been automatically entered. For each sheet, specify sheet-specific information and indicate whether to include the sheet in the issue. 7. Click the Issue Data tab to specify information about the current issue.
Parameter
Record the issue of this Drawing Set Issue Number Issue Date Issue Note Record on checked sheets only Record on all sheets 8. Click OK.
Description
Updates the title block issue data area Specifies the number or letter of the current issue Indicates the date of the current issue Adds any comments or description of the issue Updates only the issue data of sheets that were selected on the Sheet Data tab Updates the issue data for all sheets in the file
Batch Printing |
389
The drawing border title blocks are updated for the selected sheets. If specified, the issue information is included in the title block. Regardless of whether the title block contains fields for the issue data, the data is still written to a record attached to the drawing border, becoming a permanent part of the drawing border. If the title block changes later, the data can be displayed.
Batch Printing
The Batch Print command provides a convenient way of printing a set of sheet layers and/or saved views in a drawing file. To print a batch of sheet layers and/or saved views in the current file: 1. Select File > Batch Print. The Batch Print dialog box opens.
390
Parameter
Sheets and Views in the Document Sheets and Views to Print
Description
Lists the sheet layers and saved views present in the current file
Lists the sheet layers/saved views to be printed; to change the list order, use the cursor to drag and drop the items to move in the # column. Click Color for each item to toggle between color and black and white printing.
Add Add All Remove Remove All Todays Issue Saved Set Save a Set
Adds one or more selected item(s) from the file list to the end of the print list Adds all sheet layers/saved views in the file list to the end of the print list Removes one or more selected item(s) from the print list Removes all sheet layers and saved views from the print list Selects for printing only sheet layers that have been marked as todays issue by the Issue Manager Restores a previously-saved list for printing Saves the current print set as a file that can be restored later
2. Click Print to send the selected sheet layers and/or saved views to the printer. If viewports require updating before printing, the Out of Date Viewports dialog box opens for each sheet layer with out-of-date viewports. Specify whether or not to update all the drawing viewports or all printed viewports.
Batch Printing |
391
3. Click OK. The Printer Setup (Macintosh) or Print (Windows) dialog box opens; specify the print setup to use. Sheet layers use the printer setup and print area specified in the Organization dialog box. For more information on configuring print options, see Printing VectorWorks Files on page 18 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. Click OK to print the set of sheet layers and saved views.
Saving a Print Set

A set of sheet layers and saved views, along with their batch print settings, can be saved as a set and easily restored. To save the print list as a set: 1. In the Batch Print dialog box, click Save a Set. The Name this Print Set dialog box opens.
2. Enter the name of the set, and then click OK. The settings are saved with the file and available for future batch prints. The set name entered must be unique. The maximum number of saved sets is ten.
Restoring a Saved Print Set

To restore a saved print set: 1. In the Batch Print dialog box, click Saved Set. The Recall Saved Print Set dialog box opens.
392
2. Select a saved set. (To delete a saved set, select a set and click Delete.) 3. Click Select. The settings for the selected saved set display in the Batch Print dialog box.
Managing Drawing Graphics

Navigating Within Drawings
17
A variety of drawing enhancements, including drawing views, special fills, and sketch styles can be added to a drawing, both to provide information and improve its appearance.
The Navigation palette provides access to classes, design layers, sheet layers, viewports, and saved views, similar to the Organization dialog box. However, the drawing area is accessible while the Navigation palette is open. To use the Navigation palette: 1. Select Window > Palettes > Navigation. The Navigation palette opens.
ab tab tab st b ayer yers s tab ews ta L i t a r V s se ign et L po ed las Des She View Sav C
Options menu (classes and design layers tabs only) Active class/layer setting (classes, design layers, and sheet layers tabs only)
Navigation/context menu
Visibility settings
Stacking order (design layers tab only) Workgroup-referenced items display in italics
2. Select the appropriate tab: Classes, Design Layers, Sheet Layers, Viewports, or Saved Views. A list of items of that type in the current drawing displays. 3. Change the settings for classes, design layers, sheet layers, viewports, or saved views as needed. Click a class or design layers Visibility column to set the visibility for objects when the class or layer is inactive. Double-click a class, design layer, or sheet layer to activate it. Or, click the column to the left of the items name to activate it. Double-click a saved view to switch the document to that view. Double-click a viewport to switch the active layer to the sheet layer containing the viewport, and to select the viewport (if a viewport is in a class with settings that prevent the viewport from being selected, a message displays to indicate that the active class changed to the viewport class). Select a class or design layer and then select one of the Class Options or Layer Options.
394
| Chapter 17: Managing Drawing Graphics

Change the stacking order of a design layer by clicking the number in its # column and dragging it up or down the list.
See the following sections in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for details: Setting Visibilities on page 91, Setting the Active Class on page 85, Setting the Active Design Layer on page 78, Managing Saved Views on page 88, Creating Classes on page 81, and Changing the Design Layer Stacking Order on page 74. 4. The Navigation menu provides creation and management functions. Select a list item and then select the desired function from the Navigation menu to the right of the Saved Views tab. Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the list item and then select the desired function from the navigation context menu.
Menu Command
Classes tab New Edit Duplicate
Function
Select New to open the Class Options (Macintosh) or New Class (Windows) dialog box. See Creating Classes on page 81 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a class and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Class dialog box. See Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a class and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the same as the original class, with a number added (as in cabinets-2); if the original name ends in a number, the number is incremented by one. Select a class and then select Delete to open the Delete Class(es) dialog box. Specify what to do with the objects currently assigned to the class(es) being deleted (delete them, or reassign them to another selected class). Click OK to return to the Navigation palette. VectorWorks moves all objects in the deleted class(es) to the appropriate class, or deletes them, as specified. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward Delete (Macintosh). Note: The Dimension and None classes cannot be deleted. These are default classes in every drawing.
Delete
Activate
Select a class and then select Activate to make that class active for every design layer, viewport, and saved view without class visibility saved. Shortcut keys for this command are Enter (Windows) and Return (Macintosh). Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Classes tab in Details view; double-clicking the Classes tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for this command Select a class and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to the Classes tab in Visibilities view (showing Viewport and Saved View visibilities for the class) Select Select All to select all classes
Details Visibilities Select All Design Layers tab New Edit
Select New to open the New Design Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on page 71 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a layer and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Design Layers dialog box. See Setting Design Layer Properties on page 72 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Navigating Within Drawings | Menu Command

Duplicate
395
Function
Select a design layer and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the same as the original layer, with a number added (as in floorplan-2); if the original name ends in a number, the number is incremented by one. Select a design layer and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward Delete (Macintosh). Note: When a design layer is removed from the drawing, all objects in that layer are also removed.
Delete
Activate Details
Select a layer and then select Activate to switch to that design layer. Shortcut keys for this command are Enter (Windows) and Return (Macintosh). Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Design Layers tab in Details view; double-clicking the Design Layers tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for this command Select a layer and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to the Design Layers tab in Visibilities view (showing Viewport and Saved View visibilities for the layer) Select Select All to select all design layers
Visibilities Select All Sheet Layers tab New Edit Duplicate
Select New to open the New Sheet Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on page 71 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a sheet layer and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Sheet Layers dialog box. See Setting Sheet Layer Properties on page 80 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a sheet layer and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the same as the original layer, with a number added (as in details-2); if the original name ends in a number, the number is incremented by one. Select a sheet layer and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward Delete (Macintosh). Select a layer and then select Activate to switch to that sheet layer. Shortcut keys for this command are Enter (Windows) and Return (Macintosh). Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Sheet Layers tab in Details view; double-clicking the Sheet Layers tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for this command Select Select All to select all sheet layers
Delete Activate Details Select All Viewports tab New Edit Duplicate
Select New to open the Create Viewport dialog box. See Creating Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a viewport and then select Edit to edit it in the Properties dialog box. See Viewport Properties on page 582 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a viewport and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the same as the original viewport, with a number added (as in details-2); if the original name ends in a number, the number is incremented by one. VectorWorks places the duplicate viewport directly on top of the original, in the original sheet layer.
396

Function
Select a viewport and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward Delete (Macintosh). Select a viewport and then select Activate to switch to that viewports sheet layer and select that viewport (if a viewport is in a class with settings that prevent the viewport from being selected, a message displays to indicate that the active class changed to the viewport class). Shortcut keys for this command are Enter (Windows) and Return (Macintosh). Click Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Viewports tab in Details view; double-clicking the Viewports tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for this command Select a viewport and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to the Viewports tab in Visibilities view (showing Class and Design Layer visibilities for the viewport) Select Select All to select all viewports
Menu Command
Delete Activate
Details Visibilities
Select All Saved Views tab New Edit Duplicate
Select New to open the Save View dialog box. See Creating Saved Views on page 88 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a saved view and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Saved View dialog box. See Editing Saved Views on page 89 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Select a saved view and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the same as the original view, with a number added (as in deckview-2); if the original name ends in a number, the number is incremented by one. Select a saved view and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward Delete (Macintosh). Select a saved view and then select Activate to switch to that view. Shortcut keys for this command are Enter (Windows) and Return (Macintosh). Select a saved view and then select Redefine to open the Redefine Saved Views dialog box. See Redefining Saved Views on page 396. Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Saved Views tab in Details view; double-clicking the Saved Views tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for this command Select a saved view and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to the Saved Views tab in Visibilities view (showing Class and Design Layer visibilities for the saved view). The active class/layer and class/layer options can also be changed here. Select Select All to select all saved views
Delete
Activate Redefine Details Visibilities
Select All
Redefining Saved Views

To change the content of the saved view, use the Redefine Saved View command. This changes the saved view to be whatever the current drawing area view is, including the current layer and class options, inactive layer and class visibility, and active layer and class.
Creating Drawing Views |

To redefine a saved view: 1. From the Navigation palette, select the Saved Views tab. 2. Select the view to be changed from the list. 3. From the menu, select Redefine Saved View.
397
The Redefine Saved View dialog box opens. Specify the view options and layer and class visibility parameters.
Parameter
View Name Restore Options View Page Location
Description
Specify the view name
Select to save the general view parameters (current zoom, pan, projection, 3D orientation, and page origin settings) of the active layer Select to save the design layer page location with the view; if deselected, the current page location setting is used when the view is displayed. The page location of sheet layers cannot be saved. Saves the current layer visibilities; if deselected, uses the visibilities set when the view was created Saves the current class visibilities; if deselected, uses the visibilities set when the view was created
Layer Visibility Class Visibility
4. Click OK to save the current drawing area view with the specified settings.
Creating Drawing Views

Creating Section Views
A section view slices through a model, creating a cross section of the model while leaving the model intact. The section view can display a 2D cross-section view of only the objects that intersect the section line, or, additionally, the 3D geometry that remains on the indicated side of an infinite plane passing through the section line. Using the capabilities of viewports, VectorWorks can create live section views from design layers or viewports on sheet layers. By placing several section viewports on a sheet layer, models can be analyzed and presented effectively. The section views can be updated as the model changes, and their attributes and appearance can be easily changed.
398
Creating a Section Viewport

Section views are placed in special viewports, called section viewports, on sheet layers. A section viewport can be created from either a design layer or a viewport on a sheet layer. To create a section viewport: 1. If creating a section view from an active design layer, set the layer to Top/Plan view by selecting View > Standard Views > Top/Plan. If creating a section view from an existing viewport, select a non-sectioned viewport object. The viewport object must be in Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back view orientation. 2. Select View > Create Section Viewport. 3. Draw the section line to create the cutting plane on the design layer or viewport. Click in the drawing and drag the mouse to begin drawing the section line. Click to mark the end of the section line, and then click to indicate the side of the section line to keep, which is indicated by a black arrow. Double-click to end the section line.
To create a broken section line, click in the drawing and draw the first segment. Indicate the section side to keep. Click and drag to draw additional segments; broken section line segments are always parallel or perpendicular to each other. Double-click to end the broken section line.
4. The Create Section Viewport dialog box opens, set to the parameters of the active design layer or non-sectioned viewport.
399
Because a section viewport is a type of viewport created on a sheet layer, many of the parameters are identical to those required when creating a regular viewport as described in Creating Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the parameters necessary for creating section viewports are described here. The view of a section viewport cannot be changed. In addition, wireframe and sketch rendering modes are not available for section viewports. (Hidden line rendering results can be sketched.)
Parameter
Display Objects Beyond Section Plane Advanced Section Properties
Description
When selected, shows objects beyond the section plane, on the indicated side of the section; deselect to show only the objects that intersect the section line Specifies advanced section viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of the section view; see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400
5. Click OK. A section line object is created in the design layer, or is added to the annotation of the existing non-sectioned viewport. A section viewport is created on the selected sheet layer, and the drawing switches to that sheet layer, displaying the new section viewport.
By default, the cross-section areas (along the plane where the section was cut) are displayed in red. A section viewport created from a design layer can be updated when changes are made to the design layer. However, a section viewport created from a viewport does not maintain a connection to the viewport that created it. It updates when the design layers that are visible in the source viewport change.
400
Advanced Section Viewport Properties

While creating a section viewport, the advanced properties which define its extent and attributes can be specified from the Create Section Viewport dialog box. After creation, the advanced properties can also be edited. To specify the advanced properties of a section viewport: 1. From the Create Section Viewport dialog box, or the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport, click Advanced Section Properties. The Advanced Section Properties dialog box opens. 2. Click the Extent tab to specify either an infinite section view, or the length, depth, and height of a finite section viewport. Finite sections are useful when creating interior elevations; for example, by drawing a section line across a particular room of a building and setting the layer visibility only for the rooms floor, an interior elevation of only that room can be created.
Parameter
Length Range Infinite Limited by Section Line Length Depth Range Infinite
Description
Specifies the length range of the section viewport Cuts the section by an infinite plane Limits the section only to the length defined by the section line Specifies the depth range of the section viewport All objects on the indicated side of the section line are displayed
Creating Drawing Views | Parameter

Finite
401
Description
Displays objects on the indicted side up to a specified depth (the depth can be indicated graphically by dragging a dotted line on the design layer; see Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 409) Specifies the height range of the section viewport Does not limit the section to a Z range Limits the display of the section viewport to a range defined by the Start and End Height Z values
Height Range Infinite Finite
3. Click the Attributes tab to specify the appearance of objects on and beyond the section plane. Objects on the section plane can maintain an individual profile, or can be divided into structural and non-structural groups to display them differently according to class settings.
Parameter Section Plane
Description
Objects on the section plane can be merged into a single profile, maintain individual profiles, or be divided into groups of structural and non-structural elements (useful for displaying cabinets and walls differently, for example) Merges the sectioned objects cross-section profiles into one profile Merges the structural objects cross-section profiles into one group, and the non-structural objects cross section profile into another, allowing them to have a different class setting
Merged Cross Sections Create Structural and Nonstructural Groups
402

Description
Generates a separate cross-section for each sectioned object Each sectioned object is displayed with the attributes of its original object Specifies the line and fill class for the section profiles; by default, the Section Style class is applied to the cross sections. If Create Structural and Nonstructural Groups is selected, the class selected here applies only to structural elements When Create Structural and Nonstructural Groups is selected, specifies the line and fill class for non-structural elements Specifies the fill and line style for objects beyond the section plane (for section viewports that display objects beyond the section plane)
Parameter
Separate Cross Sections Use Attributes of Original Objects Attribute Class / Structural Class Nonstructural Class
Objects Beyond Section Plane

Fill Use Original Use Class Line Style Use Original Use Class
Uses the fill style of the original objects Sets the fill style of the objects by class
Uses the line style of the original objects Sets the line style of the objects by class Changes section viewport display scale settings for lines and dashed lines Enter a number larger than 1.0 to make the line weight of hidden line and dashed hidden line sections thicker. Enter a number below 1.0 to make them thinner. The scale value must be above zero. Enter a number larger than 1.0 to make the line weight of dashed hidden line sections thicker. Enter a number below 1.0 to make them thinner. The scale value must be above zero. When rendering, includes shadows cast by objects that are not included in the section viewport, for a more realistic effect (especially for interior elevations)
Scale Factors
Line Weight Scale
Dashed Line Scale
Cast Shadows of Objects Removed by Section

4. Click OK.
Section Viewport and Section Line Properties

Product: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Machine Design Section Viewport Parameters
The properties of a section viewport can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Object Position Locator
Description
Specifies the point on the section viewports bounding box that is to be positioned by the X and Y values; click on a different location to change the point
X/Y
Specifies the absolute position of the section viewports bounding box along the X axis and Y axis, based on the point specified in the object position locator

Crop Update
403
Description
Indicates whether the selected section viewport has been cropped (see Cropping Viewports on page 586 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide) Click to update the section viewport to reflect any changes which have occurred since the section view was created or last updated (see Section Viewport and Section Line Status on page 404) Specifies which design layers are visible in the section viewport, and allows layer visibility changes Shows or hides objects beyond the section plane Specifies which classes are visible in the section viewport and allows class visibility and attribute changes, including changes to viewport crop and annotation objects Specifies the section viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale or choose Custom and enter the scale value in Custom Scale When a custom scale is selected, enter the scale value Specifies the rendering mode for the section viewport; RenderWorks is required for certain rendering modes. Open GL, Hidden Line, Dashed Hidden Line, Final Shaded Polygon, Artistic RenderWorks, Custom Radiosity, and Custom RenderWorks enable the Render Settings button for specifying rendering parameters Certain rendering modes require parameters to be set; click to specify (see Line Render Options on page 403 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for Hidden Line Render settings, Rendering with VectorWorks on page 400 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for OpenGL and shaded polygon settings, Artistic RenderWorks Options on page 656 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for Artistic RenderWorks settings, Custom RenderWorks Options on page 647 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for Custom RenderWorks settings, and Radiosity on page 649 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on rendering with radiosity) Select a RenderWorks background from either the default resources or the current files resources to use as a background for the section viewport (RenderWorks required); see VectorWorks Fundamentals Default Resources on page 123 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Select the projection type for the section viewport (see Projection on page 375 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide) For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and specify the perspective distance For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance Click to change the ambient light parameters described in Setting Lighting Options on page 389 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. By default, a section viewports ambient light is set according to the ambient light settings of the first visible design layer in the section viewport. If there are no visible layers, then the ambient light is set to on, with a color of white and a brightness of 35% (similar to the default ambient lighting for a design layer).
Layers Display Objects Beyond Section Plane Classes Scale Custom Scale 1: Rendering
Render Settings
RW Background
Projection Perspective Type Perspective Dist Lighting Options
404

Description
Specifies advanced section viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of the section view; see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400 Switches to view the other side of the section line Lists the section lines present in design layers (see Section Line Instances on page 408)
Parameter
Advanced Properties Reverse Section Side Section Line Instances
Section Viewport and Section Line Status

The status of a section viewport based on a design layer is indicated visually.
Status
Normal
Description
A normal, up-to-date section viewport displays with rectangular handles when selected
Out of date
When the objects in a section viewport have changed since the viewport was created or last updated, the viewport becomes out of date. An out-of-date viewport is displayed with a red and white outline.
Empty
A section viewport is displayed as a red X when the referenced design layer contains no objects or the objects are hidden, or when the referenced design layer is set to invisible
Creating Drawing Views | Status

Unlinked
405
Description
An unlinked section line (disconnected from its associated section viewport, possibly because the section line was pasted from a copy, duplicated, or mirrored) displays as a black and yellow line, and Not Linked is displayed in the Object Info palette
Section Lines and Section-elevation Markers

A section line displays the cutting plane of the associated section viewport and shows the orientation of the section view. The properties of a section line can be edited in the Object Info palette, and its attributes, including marker fill color, applied from the Attributes palette. A section line is easily accessed by clicking Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport (see Section Line Instances on page 408). A section line that has been pasted from a copy, duplicated, or mirrored from a section line that was associated with a section viewport becomes an unlinked section line. It displays with black and yellow stripes and the Section Viewport is Not Linked. A section-elevation marker can also be inserted from the Dims/Notes tool set, as a reference line graphic for sections and elevations, or as a cutting plane graphic. When inserted as an object, the section line is not associated with a section viewport and is named a section-elevation marker in the Object Info palette. To insert a section-elevation marker: 1. Select the Section-Elevation Marker tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click to place one end of the section-elevation marker. 3. If inserting a single-segment marker, drag to determine the marker length. If inserting a multi-segment marker, click to define each segment. Because a multi-segment marker is a polyline, the methods of drawing and editing polylines apply (see Creating Polylines on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). 4. Double-click to finish placing the section-elevation marker. The parameters of a section line or section-elevation marker can be edited in the Object Info palette. The objects can also be edited graphically (see Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 409).
Parameter
Section Viewport (Section Line Only) Reverse Section Side (Section Line Only)
Description
Displays the name of the section viewport associated with the section line; a section line that is not associated with a section viewport is labeled Not Linked Reverses the side to display when objects beyond the section plane are visible
406

Description
Navigates to the section viewport associated with the section line
Parameter
Activate Section Viewport (Section Line Only) Configuration
Select the section line configuration Section: draws a section marker at both ends of a straight or broken section line Partial Section: draws a section marker at the beginning of a straight or broken section line Elevation: draws a section marker along a straight section line at a control point, which can be dragged to a new location
Section
Partial Section
Marker control point
Elevation
Text control point
Section Marker Style(s)
Opens the Set Marker Style dialog box, for selecting the section marker type at each end of the section line; markers can be the same (Match Beginning) or different (Differentiate) at each end of the section line. Select from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Fundamentals Default Resources on page 123 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Marker Size Use Gapped Line
Specifies the size of the section marker(s), measured from the markers insertion point to the top of its longest point. Changing the marker size does not affect the text size. Displays the section line with a gapped line
Gap Line Length
Specifies the length of the solid section line at each end of the section line

Text Auto-Rotate
407
Description
Specifies whether the text rotates with the section marker or always displays right-reading
Auto-rotate on
Auto-rotate off
Text Both Ends (Section and Partial Section Only) Text Style Text Rotation Text Separator Text Sheet
Adds text to both ends of the section line
Specifies the display style for the item and sheet name; if Item Sheet or Sheet Item is selected, specify a Text Separator to place between the names Specifies the rotation of the item and/or sheet text For the Item Sheet and Sheet Item text styles, specifies the text separator to place between the names Specifies the scale value for the marker text. Enter a number larger than 100 to make the text larger. Enter a number below 100 to make it smaller. The scale value must be above 1. For section line objects associated with a section viewport, automatically displays the name of the referenced section viewport for the Item name, and the name of the viewports sheet layer for the Sheet Name When Text Auto-Fill is not selected, enter the item name When Text Auto-Fill is not selected, enter the sheet name
Text Auto-Fill
Item Name Sheet Name
Modifying Section Views and Section Lines

Section viewports can be modified, cropped, annotated, and updated, like regular viewports. See Modifying Viewports on page 585 and Updating Viewports on page 592 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. The appearance of a section viewport can be completely customized, from the items it displays to the attributes of those items. Copies of a section viewport on a sheet layer can look completely different. Changes to a section viewports appearance can be made by several methods; after changes are made, update the section viewport by clicking Update in the Object Info palette.
Modification
Change the section view Change the view attributes
Method
Click Advanced Properties from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport, and modify the section view from the Extent tab Click Advanced Properties from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport, and modify the attributes of the view from the Attributes tab
Description
Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400 Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400
408

Method
Click Reverse Section Side from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport The cross section appearance is set by the Section Style class. Edit the class to change the appearance of sectioned items. If the Section Style class is made invisible, the cross sections are not displayed. Click Classes from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport, and override the desired class properties Change the location of the section line with the 2D Selection tool, and update the section viewport Select the unlinked section lines and then select the Create Section Viewport command to create section viewports from the section lines Click Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport, and specify the design layers or viewports where section line instances should display Change the section line with the 2D Selection tool or the 2D Reshape tool, and update the section viewport The depth can be changed graphically or by modifying the Depth Range in the Advanced Properties of the section viewport
Modification
Change the section side Change the cross section appearance for sectioned items Override the class settings from the design layer Change the location of the section line Create section viewports from unlinked section lines Add additional section line instances to design layers or viewports Change the section line length, position, or type Change the depth of a finite section
Description
Section Viewport Parameters on page 402 Setting Class Properties on page 82 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Overriding Viewport Class Properties on page 590 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 409 Creating Section Viewports from Unlinked Section Lines on page 411 Section Line Instances on page 408
Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 409 Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 409, or Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400
Section Line Instances

Section line instances of a section view can be added to or deleted from design layers or viewport annotation. In addition, the Section Line Instances dialog box provides an easy way to navigate from a section viewport to its associated section lines. To edit section line instances or navigate to a section line: 1. Click Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport. The Section Line Instances dialog box opens.
409
Parameter
Viewport Find Instances In Instances list Activate
Description
Displays the section viewport name associated with the section line instances Select whether to list section line instances in design layers or viewports Displays the list of design layers or viewports in the file, with a check mark next to layers or viewports with a section line instance Navigates to the selected section line instance
2. To add a section line instance to a selected design layer or viewport annotation, click in the left column. A check mark indicates that a section line instance exists on that layer or viewport. Click again to remove the instance from the selected layer or viewport. Deleting all section line instances does not delete the section viewport, and new instances can be created at any time. However, deleting a section viewport deletes all section line instances. 3. The section line instances can also be used as a navigation tool to access a particular section line. Select the section line and click Activate to switch to the design layer or viewport; the section line is selected for any modifications. Return from a section line instance to the associated section viewport by clicking Activate Section Viewport from the Object Info palette of a selected section line.
Modifying Section Lines Graphically

In addition to modifying section line parameters as described in Section Lines and Section-elevation Markers on page 405, the section line can be modified by changing its location, length, or shape.
410
To modify a section line: 1. Navigate to the section line by clicking Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette of a selected section viewport. 2. The section line is automatically selected for modification. Move the section line to a new location with the 2D Selection tool Shorten, lengthen, or rotate the line by dragging an end point with the 2D Selection tool Add vertices and change a straight section line to a broken section line with the 2D Reshape tool Reshape the section line with the 2D Reshape tool
Changing the length
Adding vertices
Adjusting the position of vertices
3. A section view with a finite depth has a special control point on a dashed line. Adjust the depth by dragging the control point with the 2D Selection tool.
4. Return to the section viewport by clicking Activate Section Viewport from the Object Info palette. Click Update from the Object Info palette to reflect the section line changes in the section view.
411
Creating Section Viewports from Unlinked Section Lines

An unlinked (orphan) section line is disconnected from its associated section viewport, possibly because the section line was pasted from a copy, duplicated, or mirrored. It displays as a black and yellow line, and Not Linked is displayed in Section Viewport on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette. Section viewports can be created from unlinked section lines located on a design layer, sheet layer, or while in edit annotation mode. To create a section viewport from an unlinked section line: 1. Select the unlinked section lines. If on a sheet layer, include the viewport to be sectioned in the selection set. Each selected section line creates a new section viewport. 2. Select View > Create Section Viewport. The Create Section Viewport dialog box opens (see Creating Section Views on page 397). If multiple unlinked section lines were selected, the parameters specified apply to all section viewports created. 3. Click OK to create a section viewport for each selected section line.
Stacking Layers
Product: Architect
The Stack Layers command provides a one-step way to view multiple design layers with a unified 3D coordinate system. 3D objects in the active layer can be added and edited, and even snapped to objects in other layers as necessary. Use this command to get a quick look at the entire model, or to align objects across layers, without having to create a viewport or use layer links. In a stacked view, VectorWorks aligns all visible design layers in the drawing file with the active layer, and displays them using the active layers scale and render mode. The active layer is on the ground plane; other layers are above or below depending on their Layer Z relationship to the active layer. 2D objects are hidden unless the drawing is in Top/ Plan view, and most 2D tools are not available in a non-Top/Plan view in stacked layers mode. The active layers layer options setting determines whether other layers can be rendered and snapped to. For rendering, select Show Others or Gray Others. For both rendering and snapping, select Show/Snap Others or Gray/ Snap Others. (Since only objects in the active layer can be selected, Show/Snap/Modify Others is not available.) To stack layers: 1. Select View > Stack Layers. 2. To return to an unstacked layer view, select View > Stack Layers again. (A check mark next to the Stack Layers command indicates that the feature is activated.)
412
Unstacked, the active layer is in a rotated view; other inactive layers are in Top and Left Isometric views
The Stack Layers command aligns all visible layers to the active layers rotated view
With the layer options set to Gray Others and OpenGL rendering, a transparent effect can be created for the grayed layers
With the layer options set to Show Others, all visible layers can be stacked and rendered
Creating a Model View

The Model View tool, similar to the Layer Link command, creates objects that are a 3D view of selected design layers and places them onto a single design layer. Unlike the Layer Link command, multiple representational model views can be easily created on one design layer, each in its own view. To create a model view: 1. Create a new design layer or switch to the design layer that should contain the model view. 2. Click the Model View tool from the Visualization tool set. 3. Click on the design layer to indicate the approximate center of the model view. The Create 3D Model View dialog box opens. Specify the layers to include and set the view for the current layer.
413
Parameter
Layer list
Description
Lists the design layers which can be added to or deleted from a model view; the active layer, sheet layers, and layers containing model views or linked objects cannot be selected, and are therefore not listed. Select the design layer(s) to add to the model view and deselect design layers which should not be included in the model view. A selected layer displays with a check mark.
Choose All Layers Rotate to
Selects all listed design layers for addition to the model view Select the 3D view the model is automatically rotated to when placed on the drawing. Choosing a view sets the current design layer to Top/Plan view. Choose None for the model to use the current 3D view of the layer.
4. Click OK to create the model view. If the Model View tool is used on a sheet layer, the Create Viewport command is run. See Creating Viewports on page 578 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
414
Editing an Existing Model View

To edit an existing model view: 1. Click on an existing model view with the Model View tool. The Create 3D Model View dialog box opens. 2. Select design layers to add to or to remove from the current model view. 3. Change the view rotation, as desired. 4. Click OK to update the model view.
Displaying 3D Objects
Extraneous 3D detail can slow redraw, making some files hard to manage. Control the amount of 3D detail shown in a drawing file with the Show or Hide 3D command. To control the amount of 3D detail displayed: 1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide 3D. The Show or Hide 3D dialog box opens. Select the desired level of detail for display.
Parameter
2D Only 3D Solids
Description
Hides 3D elements for most objects Displays 3D elements for most objects
2. Select Operate on Selected Items Only to apply the changes only to the currently selected items. When deselected, the 3D detail setting applies to all objects in the file. 3. Click OK to apply the level of 3D detail to the drawing or selection. For plants, the visibility can be selected on an individual basis with Draw 3D on the Object Info palette.
Adding Fills to Drawings

Drawings can be enhanced with the addition of special fill objects created with the Stipple tool and the Tile command.
Adding Fills to Drawings |
415
Creating Stipple Objects

The Stipple tool creates a random pattern (different shapes, sizes, and, optionally, colors) within a defined boundary, which resembles a hand-drawn shaded effect. Stipple objects can also be created by drawing a polyline and then running the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). To create a stipple object: 1. Click the Stipple tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. 2. Click Preferences from the Mode bar to specify or change any default Stipple tool parameters. The Define Stipple Pattern dialog box opens. Up to two different shapes can be specified to define the stipple pattern.
416

Description
Click on the appropriate tab to define two different shapes, sizes, aspect ratios, and shape percentages Select the stipple fill shape. For the polygon shape, specify the number of sides.
Parameter
Shape 1/Shape 2 Shape type
Line
Rectangle
Oval
Triangle
Polygon (with five sides)
Minimum/Maximum Size Max Aspect Ratio Mix Percent
Enter the minimum/maximum size of the stipple pattern Enter the maximum aspect ratio of the stipple shapes (enter 1 to display square aspects) Enter the fill shape mixture percentage. The percentage defines the contribution of each shape to the stipple pattern, up to 100% (e.g. enter 60% for shape one and shape two automatically displays 40%). If shape one is assigned 100%, then shape two cannot be defined.
Stipple Density Low/High Color Stipple Shapes Color Range/to Fade Stipple from Edge Adjust the density of the stipple fill shapes by dragging the slider along the Stipple Density bar Randomly fills the stipple shapes with colors in the specified color range Click the color boxes to select the desired color ranges Creates a stipple that fades in from the edge of the stippled shape
Fade from edge
No fade
Width of Stipple
Enter the width of the faded area in page dimensions
Adding Fills to Drawings | Parameter

Void Stipple Center
417
Description
Leaves the center of the stipple unshaded
Edge Treatment
Determines how the stipple shapes are drawn at the edge of the stippled area
Overlap
Omit
Clip
Randomly Rotate Shapes Use World Dimension Units
Select to randomly rotate the stipple shapes. De-select to speed drawing when using fill shapes that do not require rotation, such as ovals with an aspect ratio of 1. Select to use real-world dimensions; otherwise, the entries are made in page dimensions (the size the elements display when printed)
Both the Color Stipple Shapes and Fade Stipple from Edge options are processor-intensive actions and can significantly increase stipple regeneration time. 3. Click OK. 4. Click on the appropriate mode in the Mode bar to select the boundary creation method of the stipple object. For more information on the Polyline tool modes, see Creating Polylines on page 190 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 5. Click to set the stipple objects start point. 6. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until the stipple object is complete.
418
Editing the Stipple Object Settings

The parameters can be edited for selected stipple objects through the Stipple Settings button on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette (the parameters are described in Creating Stipple Objects on page 415). To modify default stipple settings, click the Preferences button on the Mode bar.
Reshaping the Stipple Object

Double-click a stipple object to activate the 2D Reshape tool. Select the object handles to reshape the stipple object boundary. For more information, see Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Saving the Stipple Object Settings Product: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Machine Design
Once the stipple object is set to the desired appearance, the settings can be saved for future use or importing into other files, by saving the stipple object. When inserted from the Resource Browser, all the stipple object settings are preset. To save the selected stipple object: 1. Select a stipple object. 2. In the Object Info palette, click Save Stipple. The Enter String dialog box opens. 3. Enter a unique name. 4. Click OK. The stipple object is saved in the Stipples symbol folder in the Resource Browser. 5. To use a saved stipple pattern, double-click it in the Resource Browser and begin drawing in Polyline mode. For more information, see Inserting Symbols in 2D on page 140 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Tiling
The Tile command provides a quick way to fill a polygon or rectangle with a pattern created from numerous copies of an arrayed 2D symbol. If part of a symbol instance falls outside of the polygon or rectangle, it is truncated.
Drawing Enhancements |
419
Symbols created for tiling can contain only the following types of objects: lines, rectangles, polylines, circles, arcs, and polygons. To fill a polygon or rectangle with tiled symbols: 1. Select the polygon or rectangle. 2. Select Modify > Tile. The Tile dialog box opens.
See Session Preferences on page 29 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on undoing an operation. 3. Select the desired symbol for tiling from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. Select Clear Undo History to speed the tiling operation; however, this clears the files undo history. VectorWorks does not distinguish between appropriate and inappropriate symbols. For example, if a bathtub symbol is selected to tile an area designated for concrete, it will be used. 4. Click OK. A group of tiled symbols is created inside the selected object. While the pattern is being created, a VectorScript message displays the percentage complete; if desired, press any key to cancel the action.
Drawing Enhancements
A variety of tools and commands included with the Design Series products can be used to enhance the drawing with special objects during the design process and hand-drawn effects for final presentation.
Sketch Rendering
The VectorWorks Design Series products include a sketch rendering mode that applies a hand-drawn or sketch effect to 2D and 3D objects in any projection. RenderWorks is not required. The vector-based sketch effects are saved as
420
editable resources, and are applied directly to the objects in a drawing. The sketch effects can also be applied to hatches and viewports, and can be used in hidden line rendering. Unlike Artistic RenderWorks, sketch rendering can be applied to 2D objects, and individual objects can have specific sketch styles. Sketch effects cannot be applied to worksheets, text, loci, or lights.
Setting the Default Sketch Style

To quickly apply a sketch style to all objects in the current design or sheet layer, specify a default sketch style. Specifying the sketch style in a design layer applies the default to all layers in the file (design and sheet). For sheet layers, applying a default sketch style applies only to objects placed on the sheet layer, overriding the document default sketch style; viewports also have individual sketch style settings (see Applying Sketch Styles to Viewports on page 426). The following sketch styles are pre-defined, and can be selected as a default sketch style. These styles are resources listed in the Resource Browser. Custom sketch styles that have been added to the file also display in the Resource Browser and can be selected as a default sketch style (see Creating Custom Sketch Styles on page 424). Sketch resources do not display in the Resource Browser until a sketch-related option is selected for the first time.
Default Sketch Style

No Sketch
Description
Does not apply a sketch style; useful for overriding an applied sketch style (see Overriding Layer Sketch Styles on page 424)
Careful
Uses many small wobble points and minor variations from the actual endpoints
Certain
Uses many small wobble points and specifies more overstrike
Drawing Enhancements | Default Sketch Style

Quick
421
Description
Uses few wobble points, with more distance between them
Rough
Uses many wobble points
Tentative
Uses many small wobble points and a high amount of understrike
To specify the default sketch style: 1. Select View > Rendering > Sketch Options. The Sketch Options dialog box opens. 2. Select the default sketch style from the list.
Design layer
Sheet layer
422

Description
Specifies the sketch style to apply when the Sketch command is selected
Parameter
Document Default Sketch Style or Sheet Layer Default Sketch Style Edit Preview
Opens the Sketch Style Editor dialog box, for changing the selected sketch style parameters (see Editing Sketch Styles on page 422) Temporarily applies the current sketch style to objects in the current layer
The files default sketch styles can be edited and renamed. To revert to the original default sketch styles, delete the sketch styles from the current file, and then import the sketch resources from a new, blank file. 3. Click OK to set the default sketch style.
Applying the Default Sketch Style

To apply the default sketch style to the current design or sheet layer: Select View > Rendering > Sketch.
Rough sketch style depicted
Editing Sketch Styles

Sketch styles can be edited and renamed. The changes are saved as resources in the file. Sketch resources do not display in the Resource Browser until a sketch-related option is selected the first time. To edit a sketch style: 1. Select View > Rendering > Sketch Options. The Sketch Options dialog box opens. 2. Select the sketch style to edit from the sketch style list. 3. Click Edit. 4. The Sketch Style Editor dialog box opens. The sketch edge and end point settings can be edited, and the style can be renamed. The preview graphic provides help with editing.
423
Parameter
Name Edge Settings Wobble Stroke
Description
Changes the default sketch style name, if desired
Controls how much the sketched lines are offset from the true lines of an object; drag the slider to the right to increase the wobble Controls the length of the sketch drawing strokes; a short stroke distance increases the number of wobble points. Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of wobble points. Controls the amount of wobble and stroke variation
Randomness End Point Settings Overstrike Understrike Randomness 5. Click Save.
Extends sketched lines past their endpoints; drag the slider to the right to increase the overstrike Shortens sketched lines before their endpoints; drag the slider to the right to increase the understrike Controls the amount of overstrike and understrike variation
424

Alternatively, sketch styles can be edited by selecting the style in the Resource Browser and selecting Edit from the context menu. Sketch styles can also be deleted with the Resource Browser. For more information on the Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Creating Custom Sketch Styles

VectorWorks includes several pre-defined sketch styles, but custom sketch styles can also be created with the Resource Browser. To create a custom sketch style: 1. In the Resource Browser, select New Resource from the Resources menu. The New Resource menu opens. For more information on the Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 124 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Select Sketch Style. The Sketch Style Editor dialog box opens. Specify the sketch style settings as described in Editing Sketch Styles on page 422.
3. Click Save to create the sketch style. The new style is listed in the Resource Browser and is available in sketch style lists.
Overriding Layer Sketch Styles

Each object can have its own sketch style, overriding the sketch style applied to the current layer. Apply the No Sketch style to objects that should never be sketched.
To apply a sketch style to an object: 1. Select the object or objects. Groups and symbols cannot have a sketch style applied directly; edit the group or symbol first.
425
2. On the Render tab of the Object Info palette, the Sketch list displays the current document default sketch style. Select the desired sketch style for the object(s). Alternatively, select the desired sketch style resource from the Resource Browser and click Apply from the resource context menu, or drag the sketch style from the Resource Browser to the object. 3. The selected objects sketch style overrides the default sketch style.
Window muntins are selected
The No Sketch style is applied only to the muntins
Objects which override the default design layer sketch style also override the default sketch style on a sheet layer.
Applying Sketch Styles to Hatches

There are several ways to create a unique look for drawing objects. In addition to the current layers default sketch style and the object sketch style, each hatch can have a unique sketch style. To specify a hatch sketch style: 1. Select Modify > Hatch. The Select Hatch dialog box opens. For more information on hatches, see Defining Hatches on page 211 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 2. Select the desired hatch to edit or click New to create a new hatch. The Edit Hatch dialog box opens.
426
3. The document default sketch style is displayed in the Sketch Style list. Select the desired sketch style instead, or select No Sketch to never apply a sketch style to the hatch. When the document default sketch style is applied, the hatch sketch style changes when the document default sketch style changes. 4. Click OK to exit the hatch editor.
Applying Sketch Styles to Viewports

Sheet layers can have a document default sketch style applied, which changes the appearance of objects on the sheet layer, but does not sketch the viewports on the sheet layer. Each viewport can have its own sketch style, making it easy to present designs with different sketched looks. To apply a sketch style to a viewport: 1. Select the viewport. 2. On the Shape tab of the Object Info palette, select Sketch from the Rendering list. Click Render Settings to select the viewport default sketch style. If creating a viewport, select Sketch from the Rendering list in the Create Viewport dialog box, and then click Render Settings to select the viewport default sketch style. The Sketch Render Settings dialog box opens. Select a sketch style for the viewport.
427
Parameter
Viewport Default Sketch Style Edit Preview
Description
Specifies the sketch style to apply to the viewport Opens the Sketch Style Editor dialog box, for changing the selected sketch style parameters (see Editing Sketch Styles on page 422) Temporarily applies the current sketch style to the viewport (disabled when accessed through the Create Viewport dialog box)
3. Click OK. The selected viewport sketch style overrides the document default sketch style for any objects within the viewport, including the crop object, referenced design layers, and any annotations. A sketch style cannot be directly applied to a viewport from the Render tab of the Object Info palette or by dragging the sketch style from the Resource Browser.
Sketching with Hidden Line Rendering

The default document sketch style can be applied to hidden line, dashed hidden line, and final shaded polygon rendering modes. To apply a sketch style to hidden line rendering: 1. Select the default document sketch style as described in Setting the Default Sketch Style on page 420. 2. Select View > Rendering > Line Render Options. The Line Render Options dialog box opens.
428

Select Sketch Hidden Line Results, and select the sketch style from the list. Click Edit to edit the sketch style parameters. Then click OK to apply the sketch style to hidden line rendering.
3. To sketch a viewports hidden line rendering, select the viewport, and then choose a hidden line rendering mode from the Rendering list in the Object Info palette. Click Render Settings to access the associated hidden line render settings dialog box. The Hidden Line Render Setting dialog box opens.
4. Select Sketch Hidden Line Results, and select the sketch style from the list. Preview or edit the sketch style if desired. 5. The hidden line, dashed hidden line, or final shaded polygon rendering displays with the selected sketch style.
Creating Chain Extrude Objects

Product: Architect, Landmark, and Spotlight
The Chain Extrude tool automatically creates extruded objects with both continuous and repetitive elements. Architectural features such as an awning contain a continuous element (the awning) and intermittently repetitive elements (the supports). By specifying the polygon or polylines to be extruded, and then indicating the path of the extrusion, the object(s) are automatically extruded along the path.
Cornice created with chain extrude Awning created with chain extrude
429
Creating the Profile Objects

The profile objects determine the shape of the chain extrude object. The profile objects can consist of up to three polygons/polylines or up to two polygons/polylines and one locus. For Architect and Landmark users, profile objects are contained in the [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Objects-Imperial\10_Wall Accessories.mcd file. To create the profile objects: 1. Create the continuous shape first. The Chain Extrude tool considers the first, or back, polygon/polyline to be the continuous shape, and extrudes it along the path polygon. 2. Create the second shape; the front object is considered to be the repeating or intermittent object. A second shape is not required.
Repeating shape Continuous shape
First shape
Second shape
The reference location of the chain extrude relative to the path is the upper right or lower right corner of the shapes bounding box. This location can be changed by including a locus in the profile group. The locus becomes the reference point for the path polygon in the profile group. This is useful if the bounding box of the repeating shape extends beyond the bounding box of the continuous shape. 3. Apply fill colors to the profile objects through the Attributes palette. The colors are applied to the continuous and repeating shapes in 3D.
Creating the Chain Extrude Object

Once the continuous and, if any, repeating shapes have been defined, specify the path for the chain extrude with the Chain Extrude tool. To create the chain extrude object: 1. In Top/Plan view, select the continuous and, if any, repeating shapes. 2. Click the Chain Extrude tool from the Building Shell tool set. 3. Draw the chain extrude path polyline.
430

1st click
3rd click 4th click
2nd click
Double-click to end
4. The chain extrude object is created based on the path drawn.
In 2D, the chain extrude object is displayed with dashed single lines
Chain Extrude Properties

The chain extrude object parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Draw 3D Flip Center Ribs Corner Ribs Vertical Datum Thickness Spacing
Description
Select to display the chain extrude object in 3D view; deselect to display the object only in 2D view Select to flip the orientation of the chain extrude object (for example, toward the inside of a room for a crown molding, instead of the outside of a building for a cornice) Select to draw the repeating element centered along the edges of the path Select to draw the repeating element at the corners of the path Specifies the reference point for the chain extrude object Specifies the thickness of the repeating elements of the object Indicates the spacing distance between the repeating elements of the object
Drawing Enhancements | Parameter

Polyline parameters
431
Description
Edits the chain extrude path polyline. See Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The placement of the repeating elements of the chain extrude object depends on the path created by the Chain Extrude tool. In particular, special considerations apply to the miter zones at the corners of the path: No repeating elements perpendicular to the building face will be drawn in miter zones The miter zones are excluded from the length calculations of the sides (for spacing calculations, for example) Repeating elements at corners, if drawn, bisect the angle of the corner and are elongated accordingly
Miter zone Repeating element at corner is elongated as necessary
The chain extrude path can be reshaped with the 2D Reshape tool to add, subtract, and change vertices. The continuous and repetitive elements are automatically adjusted to fit the new shape. More sophisticated editing operations can be performed on the path by selecting Modify > Edit Group, and then selecting Path.
Creating a Seating Layout

Product: Architect and Spotlight
The Create Seating Layout command creates a seating layout object from one or more selected polygons, rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, arcs/circles, or polylines. Seats fill the object(s) in a user-defined arrangement with a look-to location defined by a control point. Seating layout objects can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 434). Along with the seating layout, a Seating Count schedule is also created. To create a seating layout object: 1. Create the shape defining the boundary of the seating area. Objects with one or more holes can be selected; seats will not be placed where a hole exists. 2. With the object(s) selected, select AEC > Create Seating Layout. Multiple shapes can be selected at one time (to create several seating sections, for example). The Create Seating Layout dialog box opens.
432
Parameter
Create a new seat symbol called Use an Existing Symbol Symbol Folders Symbols
Description
Creates a new seat symbol; provide the symbol name Selects an existing seat symbol; specify the symbol from the list Specifies the location of seat symbols Provides a graphical list of available seat symbols
3. A default seat symbol can be created to represent the seats; select Create a new seat symbol called and provide a symbol name. Alternatively, select an appropriate seat symbol from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513. See Accessing Existing Resources on page 128 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on importing symbols into the Resource Browser. 4. When prompted, click on the focus point for the seats. All seats will face this point.
For concentric seat layouts, the distance of the seat focus point from the object determines the radius of the concentric layout. Click close to the object for a smaller radius. The seating layout object and a Seating Count schedule are created.
433
The Seating Count schedule displays the number of seats required for each seating layout section, as well as the total number of seats needed for all sections.
Editing the Seating Layout

Product: Architect and Spotlight
Seating layout parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Seat Spacing Row Spacing Section Name Concentric
Description
Specifies the distance between seats Specifies the distance between rows of seats Assigns a section name for use in the Seating Count schedule Select to draw a concentric seating arrangement
Linear
Concentric
Focal Pt X/Y Offset 1st Row Draw Boundary Line Draw Layout Lines Only Base Z Height Rise per Row Seat Count Symbol Name
Indicates the coordinates of the seating look-to point Specifies an offset distance for the first row of seats Select to display the object used as the basis for the seating layout; deselect to hide the object and show the seats only Select to display the seat locations without showing the actual seat symbols Specifies the initial elevation of the first row of seats Specifies the elevation increase for each row of seats (seating layout slope) Displays the number of seats used in the layout Displays the seating symbol name used to create the seating layout
434

Description
Opens the Choose a Symbol dialog box. Select the desired seat symbol from either the default resources or the current files resources, and then click OK; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 Edits the seating layout path polyline. For information on editing object vertices, see Reshaping Objects on page 233 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Parameter
Select Symbol
Polyline Parameters
The seating layout can be reshaped with the 2D Reshape tool to add, subtract, and change vertices. The seats are automatically adjusted to fit the new shape. More sophisticated editing operations, such as adding, clipping, intersecting and combining into surfaces can be performed on the seating layout by selecting Modify > Edit Group, and then selecting Path. If the seat orientation requires adjustment, the seat control point can be moved to readjust the seat focus point. The control point is referenced relative to the center of the seating layout. If two imaginary axis lines were placed over the seating layout as shown in the diagram, placing the control point in line with the center of the axes would orient the seats directly toward the control point.
Seat focus control point
A seating layout can also be created by clicking the Seating Layout tool on the Furn/Fixtures tool set. Draw a polygon with the tool and complete the parameters which are identical to those described in Editing the Seating Layout on page 433.
Creating Objects from Polylines

The Objects from Polyline command uses an existing polyline or shape as the path for creating a variety of objects, as listed in the following table.
Object
ceiling grids guardrails handrails hardscape objects landscape walls linear material details
Product
Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Landmark Landmark Architect, Landmark
Drawing Enhancements | Object

massing models piping runs plants property lines repetitive unit details revision clouds roadways roadways (NURBS) seating layouts site modifiers spaces stipple objects walls window walls
435
Product
Architect, Landmark Architect Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark, Spotlight Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Spotlight Architect, Landmark Architect Architect, Landmark, Spotlight Architect, Landmark, Spotlight Architect
In addition to these standard objects, the Objects from Polyline command supports custom path objects (custom path plug-in objects with a .vso extension). For details, see Creating Custom Path Objects on page 488. Walls created with the Objects from Polyline command use the current settings made active by the Wall tool (Architect only). The Create Walls from Polygon command is no longer available from a Design Series workspace because the Objects from Polyline command can be used for creating walls, which contains more functionality than the Create Walls from Polygon command. The Create Walls from Polygon command is still available in the VectorWorks Standard workspace and can be added to a Design Series workspace if desired. To create an object from a polyline: 1. Draw a polyline or select an existing polyline, rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, polygon, or arc representing the path for creating the object. 2. With the item selected, select Modify > Convert > Objects from Polyline. The Create Objects from Polyline dialog box opens. 3. Select the type of object and the creation parameters.
436

Description
Select the type of object to create based on the polyline path; the parameters available vary based on the object type selected For guardrails, handrails, landscape walls, roadways, walls, and window walls, select whether to offset the object to the left, right, or centered on the polyline; select Custom to enter a custom offset distance For guardrails, handrails, landscape walls, roadways, walls, and window walls, specify the custom offset distance from the polyline, if any Select to display the Object Properties dialog box for the specified object type prior to creating the object; this field is not applicable for plant objects because the default place plant settings are used Select to delete the polyline path after drawing the object Select to automatically maintain continuous spacing between uprights from one object to the next based on the Upright Spacing value for guardrails or handrails; or mullions from one object to the next based on the Mullion Spacing value for window walls
Parameter
Object Type Offset
Custom Offset Show Properties Dialog
Delete Source Poly Continuous Spacing (Architect and Landmark only)
4. Click OK. If Show Properties Dialog was selected, the object properties dialog box for the specified object type opens. Enter the appropriate parameters, and then click OK. If creating guardrails or handrails and Continuous Spacing was selected in the Create Objects from Polyline dialog box, enter the distance between the first upright and the start of the polyline in the 1st Upright Spacing field of the object properties dialog box. If Continuous Spacing was not selected, this value is applied to the first upright at the beginning of each segment of the polyline. Also enter the spacing to maintain between uprights in the Upright Spacing field of the object properties dialog box. If creating window walls and Continuous Spacing was selected in the Create Objects from Polylines dialog box, enter the distance between the first mullion and the start of the polyline in the 1st Mullion Spacing field of the object properties dialog box. If Continuous Spacing was not selected, this value is applied to the first mullion at the beginning of each segment of the polyline. Also enter the spacing to maintain between mullions in the Mullion Spacing field of the object properties dialog box. The object is created from the polyline and its parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Rotated and rendered for clarity
437
Creating a Human Figure

A 3D human figure object can be inserted for a realistic addition to the drawing. Constructed of NURBS surfaces for a high-quality model, the object contains a wide variety of parameters for full control over the figure type, position, and appearance.
The 00_Entourage_Figures.mcd object library also contains pre-configured human figure objects in a variety of poses and figure types. Several figures can increase the time required to render the model in 3D.
Inserting the Figure and Setting Parameters

To insert and configure a human figure: 1. Click the Human Figure tool from the Visualization tool set. 2. Click to place the human figure in the drawing. 3. The human figure parameters can be modified from the Object Info palette.
Parameter
Height Body Type Figure Type Posture
Description
Specifies the figure height, in the current unit Select the figure body type (Slight/Petite, Average, or Large) Select the type of human figure (Man, Woman, Boy, or Girl) Select the figure position; Custom is displayed when the figure posture has been adjusted in the Figure Custom Position dialog box (see Specifying a Custom Figure Position on page 439) For the Standing (shaking hands) posture, specifies the height of the hands, in the current unit Select the clothing for the top of the figure Select the clothing for the bottom of the figure Note: A dress overrides the selected top attire
Hand Height Attire (Top) Attire (Bottom)
Footwear
Select the figures footwear, or select None if the figure is barefoot
438

Parameter
Hair Jacket Stockings Tie Set Attributes Custom Position
Description
Select the figures hairstyle Places a jacket on the figure Places stockings on the figure Places a tie on the figure Click to set the figure attributes more specifically (see Setting Figure Attributes on page 438) Click to set a custom figure position (see Specifying a Custom Figure Position on page 439)
Setting Figure Attributes

Figure attributes can be set precisely to control the figure appearance. To set figure attributes: 1. Select the desired figure. 2. In the Object Info palette, make the initial selections for the figure. 3. Click Set Attributes from the Object Info palette. The Human Figure Attributes dialog box opens, with the figure set to the current Object Info palette parameters. Select each desired model part and then set its attributes.
Parameter
Preview Rotate Left/Right
Description
Displays a preview of the figure in the specified posture, with a sample of the selected texture and attributes Rotates the figure preview 90 degrees to the left or right

Render Automatically Render
439
Description
Select a rendering mode for the preview figure. If Automatically Render is not selected, click Render after each attribute change to view a rendered preview. Renders the preview figure automatically, according to the selected mode, after an attribute change (depending on the selected rendering mode and the inclusion of attributes such as textures, this can take some time) Select each figure attribute to configure, and then set its parameters Select a class to apply to the attribute from the list of classes in the file, or select Container to apply the objects class to the selected attribute Note: The class must have Use at Creation selected for the graphic attributes.
Model parts Class
Fill Style
Select Class to use the class fill style for the selected attribute, choose None to apply no fill, or choose Solid to apply a solid color and then click on the color list to select the fill color Sets the texture parameters for the selected attribute (RenderWorks required) from either the default resources or the current files resources; see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513 Select the texture to apply from either the default resources or the textures in the current file, or select Class to apply the class texture; select None to apply no texture Select the texture map type For sphere and cylinder maps, sets the texture radius; the default radius is the same as the 3D object radius. Increasing this value reduces the size of the texture on the object. Repeats the texture in a horizontal and/or vertical direction
Texture
Texture Map Type Radius Repeat Horizontally/ Vertically Scale Factor Horizontal/Vertical Offset Rotation
Determines the texture size when projected onto the object; either enter a scale value or use the slider to change the scale Sets the start location of the texture horizontally and vertically Sets the angle of texture rotation; either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360 degrees or use the slider to change the rotation angle
For more information on texture parameters and mapping, see Applying and Mapping Textures on page 623 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 4. Click OK to apply the attributes to the figure.
Specifying a Custom Figure Position

If the Posture selection is not sufficient to position the figure exactly as desired, a custom figure pose can individually position the figures head, body, arms, and legs. Use the Rotate tool to set the overall position of the figure. To specify a custom figure pose: 1. Select the desired figure.
440
2. In the Object Info palette, make the initial parameter selections for the figure. 3. Click Custom Position from the Object Info palette. The Figure Custom Position dialog box opens, with the figure set to the current Object Info palette parameters. Select the body part tab to change, and then set the part parameters by dragging the slider for the desired settings.
Parameter
Preview Rotate Left/Right Render Automatically Render Revert Head Angle Tilt Turn Body Hip Bend Waist Bend Waist Tilt Waist Twist Arms
Description
Displays a preview of the figure with the specified figure pose Rotates the figure preview 90 degrees to the left or right Select a rendering mode for the preview figure. If Automatically Render is not selected, click Render after each position change to view a rendered preview. Renders the preview figure automatically, according to the selected mode, after a position change (depending on the selected rendering mode and the inclusion of attributes such as textures, this can take some time) Returns the figure to its original position Specifies the head parameters Indicates where the head is positioned along a vertical axis (looking up or down) Specifies how much the head tilts to the left or right Sets the amount that the head turns to the left or right Specifies the body trunk parameters Sets the bend of the lower torso and legs Indicates the bend of the upper torso Indicates how much the upper torso tilts to the left or right Specifies how much the upper torso twists to the left or right Specifies the arm parameters

Arm Selector Arm Rotation Arm Twist Arm Angle Elbow Bend Wrist Twist Hand Twist Legs Leg Selector Leg Rotation Leg Twist Leg Angle Knee Bend Foot Rotation Foot Flex
441
Description
For each parameter, select the arm for the position change, or select Both Arms to mirror the position change to both sides of the body Specifies the arm position at the front or back of the body Specifies the arm position as it twists along the arm axis Sets the up and down position of the arm Specifies the amount that the elbow is bent Sets the angle of the wrist Sets the flex of the hand Specifies the leg and foot parameters For each parameter, select the leg for the position change, or select Both Legs to mirror the position change to both sides of the body Specifies the leg position at the front or back of the body Specifies the leg position as it twists along the leg axis Sets the up and down position of the leg Specifies the amount that the knee is bent Indicates the angle of the foot Sets the flex of the foot
4. Click OK to apply the custom position to the figure.
442
Importing and Exporting Files

18
VectorWorks has the ability to import and export to a variety of file formats. The file formats supported in the VectorWorks Fundamentals package are described in Importing and Exporting Files on page 485 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. In addition, depending on the installed product(s), VectorWorks can import and export files in the following formats. PDF (Portable Document Format, from Adobe Systems Incorporated, creates files viewable with Acrobat Reader or other PDF viewers) SketchUp (3D model creation, viewing, modification, and presentation software from Google, Inc.). VectorWorks can import .skp files that are version 4.0 and higher. 3ds max (3D animation, modeling, and rendering software from Autodesk Media and Entertainment). VectorWorks can import and export .3ds files that are version 3.0 and higher. KML (the markup language used by the Google Earth application) Shapefile (spatial data file type developed by Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc.) DOE-2 (Department of Energy analysis engine, to estimate the energy cost implications of design strategies) ASCII Patch (USITT standard ASCII text patch file (Version 3.0, Ident 3.0)) Lightwright (file exchange from VectorWorks Spotlight to Lightwright 4.0 software) PartSpec (import from Thomas Register PartSpec files saved in DXF/DWG, IGES, or ACIS format)
PDF Import and Export

VectorWorks can import and export Portable Document Format (PDF) files. An imported PDF is useful for displaying company logos, contractor drawings, and other graphics. PDF export creates high-quality files for printing, and takes advantage of PDF layers for creating an interactive representation of a model.
Importing PDF Files

The Import PDF command allows a PDF file to be imported into a VectorWorks file, where each PDF page becomes an independent PDF Page object. To import a PDF file: 1. Select File > Import > Import PDF. 2. Select the PDF file to be imported, and click Open. A one-page PDF file imports immediately. If the PDF file consists of more than one page, the Import PDF dialog box opens. Select the range of pages to import, or click All Pages to import each page of the PDF as a separate item in VectorWorks.
444
| Chapter 18: Importing and Exporting Files
3. Click Import. Each PDF file page becomes a PDF Page object in VectorWorks. The PDF page object can be resized, moved, rotated with the Modify > Rotate > Rotate command or the Rotate tool, scaled with the Modify > Scale Objects command, printed, and exported.
Exporting PDF Files

VectorWorks drawing files can be exported to PDF for use as an interactive representation of a model, or for final quality printing purposes. Export settings are designed for maximum usability and the smallest possible file size. VectorWorks pages become PDF pages when exported. Fonts are always embedded in the PDF, for portability. Layer transfer modes other than Paint become transparency in the PDF. VectorWorks can export the currently visible design layer(s) or sheet layer, or create a batch export list of saved views and sheet layers. VectorWorks layers and classes can be exported as PDF layers, to create an interactive model representation (PDF layers require PDF rev. 1.5 minimum). As an alternative to the Export PDF command on the Macintosh, when Quartz Imaging is turned on in the Display tab of VectorWorks preferences, a single PDF file can also be sent to PDF with the Export PDF (Quartz Only) command. The parameters are then controlled by the systems PDF writer. See Exporting Files on page 487 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.
Single PDF File Export

The Export PDF command creates a PDF file from the current sheet layer or visible design layer(s). To export the current sheet layer or design layer(s) to PDF: 1. Set the view for the export. The current sheet layer or currently viewed design layer(s) are exported. Set the visibility of layers and classes as desired. All visible and grayed layers are exported; invisible layers and classes are not exported. For viewports on sheet layers, set the layer and class visibility of each viewport. 2. Select File > Export > Export PDF. The Export PDF dialog box opens. Specify the settings for exporting to PDF.
PDF Import and Export |
445
Parameter PDF Conversion

Export Design Layers as PDF Layers Export Classes as PDF Layers Make grayed PDF Layers initially invisible but appear with normal attributes when made visible Resolution
Description
When exporting design layers, creates a PDF layer from each visible design layer When exporting design layers, creates a PDF layer from each visible class When creating PDF layers, grayed layers or classes appear invisible when first opening the resulting PDF When creating PDF layers, grayed layers or classes do not display grayed, but with their assigned attributes once made visible in the PDF Sets the export resolution of pictures, rendered images, and patterns (unless Export patterns at on-screen resolution is selected). A larger value results in higher quality images, but also a larger PDF file. Range: 722500 dpi. Exports the pattern size as viewed on-screen; when deselected, patterns are exported according to the resolution specified in Resolution Reduces the resolution of raster images to the specified value, resulting in a smaller PDF file size
Export patterns at on-screen resolution Downsample higher resolution raster images to
446

Parameter
Use Opacity of
Description
Sets the transparency of layers in the PDF file (replaces Layer Transfer modes in VectorWorks). Not necessary when Quartz Imaging is enabled on the Macintosh. After export, opens the PDF automatically in the systems specified PDF viewer
Open PDF in the default viewer
Export Range
Export the whole printable area as one page All Pages Pages Current View When the printable area consists of more than one page, exports the entire area as a single PDF page Exports all pages, creating a PDF page for each VectorWorks page Exports the specified pages only Exports the current view to a PDF page
3. Click Export to create the PDF file based on the settings. If Open PDF in the default viewer was selected, the PDF viewer opens automatically. If layers or classes were exported as PDF layers and the viewer supports PDF layers, the layers are listed and their visibility can be controlled through the viewer.
Batch PDF File Export

The Export PDF (Batch) command exports a series of saved views and/or sheet layers to PDF. Similar to the Batch Print command, the export list and options can be saved as a set. The list order can be changed, and each item can be printed in either color or black and white. If the Issue Manager is in use, todays issue can be sent to PDF export. To batch export the sheet layers and/or saved views in the current file to PDF: 1. Set up the sheet layers and/or saved views as desired for export. Set the visibility of layers and classes in the viewports/views. All visible and grayed layers are exported; invisible layers and classes are not exported. 2. Select File > Export > Export PDF (Batch). The Batch Export PDF dialog box opens. Sheet layers and views in the current file are listed on the left, and sheets and views to export to PDF are listed on the right.
PDF Import and Export |
447
Parameter
Sheets and Views in the Document Sheets and Views to Export
Description
Lists the sheet layers and saved views present in the current file
Lists the sheet layers/saved views to be exported to PDF; to change the list order, use the cursor to drag and drop the items to move in the # column. Click Color for each item to toggle between color and black and white export.
Add Add All Remove Remove All Todays Issue Saved Set Save a Set Export as separate files
Adds one or more selected item(s) from the file list to the end of the export list Adds all sheet layers/saved views in the file list to the end of the export list Removes one or more selected item(s) from the export list Removes all sheet layers and saved views from the export list Selects for export only sheet layers that have been marked as todays issue by the Issue Manager Restores a previously-saved list for export Saves the current export set as a file that can be restored later Exports each sheet layer/saved view as a separate PDF file; when deselected, they are combined into a single PDF file
3. Click Export. The Export PDF dialog box opens. Specify the PDF export options, as described in Single PDF File Export on page 444. The settings apply to all sheet layers/saved views being exported. 4. Click Export.
448

If viewports require updating before export, the Out of Date Viewports dialog box opens for each sheet layer with out-of-date viewports. Specify whether or not to update all the drawing viewports or all exported viewports.
5. Click OK. The PDF file or files are created based on the settings. If Open PDF in the default viewer was selected, the PDF viewer opens automatically.
Saving a Batch Export Set

A set of sheet layers and saved views, along with their color settings and list order, can be saved as a set and easily restored. To save the export list as a set: 1. In the Batch Export PDF dialog box, click Save a Set. The Name this Print Set dialog box opens.
2. Enter the name of the set, and then click OK. The settings are saved with the file and available for future batch exports. The set name must be unique. The maximum number of saved sets is ten.
Restoring a Saved Batch Export Set

To restore a saved export set: 1. In the Batch Export PDF dialog box, click Saved Set. The Recall Saved Print Set dialog box opens.
Importing a SketchUp File |
449
2. Select a saved set. (To delete a saved set, select a set and click Delete.) 3. Click Select. The saved set displays in the Batch Export PDF dialog box.
Importing a SketchUp File

The Import SketchUp command allows architectural drawings created in SketchUp (versions 4 and above) to be imported into VectorWorks. SketchUp component instances are imported as 3D symbols, and geometry can be designated as walls, roof faces, and floors. After importing, refine the design using VectorWorks editing tools, or replace imported 3D symbols with VectorWorks 3D symbols. Flexible import options allow either automatic conversion of architectural elements based on their orientation, or allow geometry conversion to be mapped to specific SketchUp materials or layers. SketchUp import is intended for architectural geometry. Use the Import DXF/DWG command rather than the Import SketchUp command to import polygonal geometry. Consider the following points when importing from SketchUp to VectorWorks. Hidden SketchUp geometry is placed on the SketchUpHidden layer in VectorWorks and the layer is set to invisible by default. A component which creates an opening is imported as a VectorWorks window or door, if attached to an object imported as a VectorWorks wall. If the component touches the baseline of the wall it is considered to be a door; if it does not touch the baseline of the wall, it is considered to be a window. Groups and components are always imported as plain polygons in a symbol and do not generate any architectural elements such as walls or floors. Walls are unjoined upon import, and may need to be rejoined in VectorWorks. To import a SketchUp file: 1. Select File > Import > Import SketchUp. The Import Settings dialog box opens, for specifying mapping parameters to use during import. Set the default thickness of imported geometry using the parameters on the Default Styles tab.
450
Parameter
Wall Thickness Floor Thickness Roof Face Thickness
Description
Enter the thickness to assign to wall geometry during import; this value must be greater than zero Enter the thickness to assign to floors during import Enter the thickness to assign to roof faces during import
2. Click the Geometry Mapping tab to specify the type of VectorWorks geometry to create for each imported SketchUp element. Specify None when mapping is unnecessary, as for non-architectural SketchUp drawings.
Importing a SketchUp File | Parameter

None Plain Geometry
451
Description
Does not map SketchUp geometry to VectorWorks geometry; all geometry becomes 3D polygons in VectorWorks Maps SketchUp geometry to VectorWorks geometry based on the geometric orientation; VectorWorks converts vertical faces to walls, horizontal faces to floors, and non-horizontal or non-vertical geometry to roof faces Maps SketchUp geometry to VectorWorks geometry based on the material assigned to the geometry Maps SketchUp geometry to VectorWorks geometry based on the geometry layer; geometry from imported layers is retained on the correct layers after import
Material Layer
3. If no mapping or the plain geometry method is selected, click OK to select the file and begin the import (skip to Step 9). 4. If material or layer geometry mapping is selected, the Geometry Mapping tab displays mapping import criteria. The mapping options are identical for both material and layers, except for the column heading indicating the type of element being mapped.
5. Click Import from to open the Import SketchUp Model dialog box. Select the SketchUp file from which to derive the mapping criteria for the material or layer list, and click Open. The list of available materials or layers displays in the Import Settings dialog box.
452
6. For each material or layer, specify how to convert to the VectorWorks equivalent. (For example, convert all geometry with a shingle material to a roof face, or all geometry on a roof layer to roof faces.) Double-click a material or layer from the list to open the Select Geometry dialog box. 7. In the Select Geometry dialog box, select whether to import the material or layer as geometry based on its orientation (this is the same as if the plain geometry method was selected in the top portion of the dialog box), a floor, roof face, or wall. Alternatively, select Ignore to leave the item in the list, but not import elements of that particular material or residing on that layer. Click OK to close the Select Geometry dialog box and update the mapping list. The mapping list is saved after import, so that several files with the same mapping criteria can be imported sequentially. To remove a material or layer from the list prior to importing, select it and click Remove. To clear all items from the list, click Remove All. Selecting Remove All is a quick way to clear the list prior to specifying new mapping criteria. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all desired materials or layers are mapped to a geometry type. 9. Click OK; the Import SketchUp Model dialog box opens. Select the file to import, and click Open. 10. SketchUp geometry and components are imported as specified, and are automatically selected. The Resource Browser is populated with the converted 3D symbols. Items are imported at a 1:1 scale. It may be helpful to click Fit to Objects on the View bar to zoom to fit the objects in the drawing. It may also be helpful to adjust the layer scale at this time.
Importing and Exporting 3ds Format

VectorWorks Designer can both import from and export to the .3ds file format used by Autodesk Media and Entertainments 3ds max software.
Importing a 3ds File

When importing a 3ds file, specify how the drawing components will be represented in VectorWorks.
Importing and Exporting 3ds Format |

To import a 3ds file and select conversion options: 1. Select File > Import > Import 3DS (3D only), and then select the 3ds file to import. 2. The Import 3DS Options dialog box opens; the options available depend on the contents of the file being imported. Specify the file import options.
453
Parameter
Import Materials Import Textured Materials
Description
Converts each material definition in the 3ds file to a RenderWorks texture in the Resource Browser (disabled if RenderWorks is not installed) If Import Materials is selected, select this option to import each texture from the 3ds file as a RenderWorks texture in the Resource Browser. The RenderWorks texture can then be edited (using the Edit Texture dialog box). Imports each mesh object defined in the 3ds file as either a mesh object or a group of 3D polygons Converts 3ds mesh objects to VectorWorks mesh objects Converts each 3ds mesh object to a group of triangles in VectorWorks If Import Textured Materials and Import as Groups of 3D Polygons are both selected, select this option to apply the imported textures to the appropriate portions of the 3D polygons during conversion Opens the Import 3DS Scale dialog box, for specifying a scale to apply to all imported objects; see Scaling 3ds Objects on page 456 Imports light objects from the 3ds file
Import Mesh Objects Import as VectorWorks Mesh Object Import as Groups of 3D Polygons Use Texture Materials to Texture Scale Import Light Objects
454

Description
Select this option to import spot lights from the 3ds file as VectorWorks spot lights Select this option to import omni lights from the 3ds file as VectorWorks point lights Imports camera objects from the 3ds file Imports only the active camera from the 3ds file, and sets the current view to the camera view Imports all camera objects from the 3ds file, and creates a saved view in VectorWorks for each
Parameter
Import Spot Light Import Omni Light Import Camera Objects Import Active Camera Only Create Saved Views for Each Camera
3. Click OK to import the file with the selected options. The Object Info palette displays the image information. The original file remains unchanged.
Exporting in 3ds Format

Different portions of the drawing can be selected for export to a 3ds file. To export a 3ds file: 1. To export a few specific objects, select them first. 2. Select File > Export > Export 3DS (3D only). 3. The Export 3DS Options dialog box opens; the options available on the lower part of the dialog box depend on which group of items were selected for export.
Importing and Exporting 3ds Format | Parameter

Export Selected Objects Only Export All Objects in Current Layer Export Quality (Number of Polygons)
455
Description
Creates a 3ds file that contains only the 3D objects that are currently selected in VectorWorks Creates a 3ds file that can include all 3D objects in the current layer in VectorWorks. Exclude or include specific types of objects using the dialog checkboxes; for example, export walls but not 3D symbols. Controls the conversion quality of 3D objects that have rounded sides. Move the slider bar left to convert rounded objects using fewer large polygons (thus lower quality). Move the bar right to create rounded objects of higher quality. Note: Exporting more polygons slows down the export and increases the size of the output file.
Export Objects Export 3D Locuses Export Walls Export 3D Symbols Export Plug-in Objects Export Lights
Exports all kinds of VectorWorks 3D objects except walls, 3D loci, symbols, lights, and plug-in objects Exports each 3D locus as a one-vertex 3ds mesh Exports walls Exports each 3D symbol as a group of 3D meshes Exports each plug-in object as a group of 3D meshes Exports VectorWorks light objects as 3ds light objects. VectorWorks point lights are exported as 3ds omni lights, and VectorWorks directional and spot lights are exported as 3ds spot lights. If the current view was set with one of VectorWorks Perspective commands (Narrow, Normal, Wide, or a custom perspective), this option exports the view as a 3ds camera object Opens the Export 3DS Scale dialog box, for specifying a scale to apply to all exported objects; see Scaling 3ds Objects on page 456 Exports colors that are attached to the exported objects as 3ds materials; this includes colors both from the Attributes palette and from RenderWorks textures If Export Materials is selected, this option exports each RenderWorks texture to a texture image file (disabled if RenderWorks is not installed). Select the export file format from the list. VectorWorks automatically names exported image files with sequential numbers starting at zero. For example, a VectorWorks drawing with two textures would export two image files named Textr0.jpg and Textr1.jpg. Note: When exporting multiple drawings with textures, be sure to save them to different foldersotherwise, VectorWorks will overwrite existing exported textures with new textures.
Export Current View as Camera Scale Export Materials Export Textures as
4. Select the types of objects to export, and then click OK. 5. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save. VectorWorks exports to a new file, leaving the original file intact.
456
Scaling 3ds Objects

The scale of 3ds objects can be changed during both import and export. The scaling is applied to all imported/exported objects. To scale 3ds objects during import or export: 1. From the import or export dialog box, click Scale. 2. The Import/Export 3DS Scale dialog box opens. Choose whether to scale the object(s) by dimension or by scale factor.
Parameter
(3DS) Model Width/Height/Depth
Description
Displays the original dimensions of the object(s) selected for import or export; if there are multiple objects, the scaling center is the center of the selection bounding box Allows entry of custom dimensions for imported or exported objects in the Desired (3DS) Width, Desired (3DS) Height, and Desired (3DS) Depth fields. Select Maintain Proportions to have VectorWorks automatically adjust the proportions when a custom width, height, or depth is entered. Allows entry of a scaling factor to be applied to imported or exported objects. Either select a Scale from the list, or select Custom from the top of the list and enter a Custom Scale value. When the scaling factor is changed, the Dimension values also change to show the exact size of the selection bounding box for the given scale.
Dimension
Factor
3. Click OK to save the scaling information.
Exporting in KML Format |
457
Exporting in KML Format

The Export KML command exports VectorWorks 3D drawing components to KML, the markup language used by the Google Earth application. The resulting file can then be opened in Google Earth, in order to provide a visualization of how a building fits into its intended environment, for example. KML models can also be uploaded and shared via Googles 3D Warehouse. To export a KML file: 1. Select File > Export > Export KML (3D only). 2. The KML Export Options dialog box opens.
Parameter
Mapping
Description
VectorWorks maps a 2D reference point on the object to specific Google Earth coordinates during export. If the file is georeferenced, the following mapping fields are filled in automatically and disabled. To specify the reference point manually, select Set Reference Point to Next Mouse Click. Or, to specify X and Y coordinates for the reference point, select Set Reference Point to and enter the appropriate values.
Set Reference Point to Next Mouse Click/Set Reference Point to
458

Description
Enter the latitude where the model will be positioned in Google Earth, using DMS notation (for example, 39d 12m 34s N) Enter the longitude where the model will be positioned in Google Earth, using DMS notation (for example, 76d 51m 44s W) Enter the angle between the drawings Y axis and true north in DMS notation; positive angles proceed clockwise Enter the difference between the VectorWorks ground plane and the Google Earth ground plane Select the specific object types to be exported; leaving out unnecessary objects can reduce the KML files size Select the layers to export 3D objects from. In Google Earth, VectorWorks layers are listed in the Places panel on the left side of the application window, and their visibilities can be controlled individually.
Parameter
Latitude Longitude Page North Z Height Offset Objects To Export Layer(s) to export from
3. Select the export parameters, and then click OK. 4. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save. VectorWorks creates an export file, leaving the original file intact.
Importing a Shapefile
Product: Landmark
VectorWorks Landmark can import files in shapefile (.shp) format. Each geometric feature stored in the shapefile is converted to a VectorWorks object. In turn, each of these objects has a corresponding data record, which is converted from the shapefiles database file. To import a shapefile and select conversion options: 1. Select File > Import > Import Shapefile, and then select the shapefile to import. 2. VectorWorks determines the appropriate units for the imported objects from the projection (.prj) file, if one is available. If no projection file is found, VectorWorks uses feet (if the current documents units setting is Imperial) or meters (if the units setting is metric). A message displays indicating what units will be used. 3. The Shapefile Import Preferences dialog box opens; the options available depend on the contents of the file being imported. Specify the file import options.
Exporting in Shapefile Format |
459
Parameter
Select Projection
Description
If the shapefile being imported is georeferenced (in degree coordinates) and the current VectorWorks units setting is not degrees, select a projection method: UTM can be used for any shapefile; select Lambert Conic only for shapefiles being used in the continental United States; select Current Projection to use XY coordinates. Otherwise, this parameter is disabled and XY coordinates are used automatically. The scale in the file being imported displays automatically; to change it, click Scale to open the Layer Scale dialog box and select a scale
Model Space Scale Import to new Layer
Select this option to import themes from the shapefile to a new design layer named after the shapefile; if additional shapefiles are imported, they will be placed on their own layers Select this option to import themes from the shapefile to a new class named after the shapefile, on a new design layer called Shapefile Import Layer; if additional shapefiles are imported, they will be placed on the same layer, with their own class names
Class
4. Click OK to import the file with the selected options. The Object Info palette displays the imported shapefile information. The original file remains unchanged.
Exporting in Shapefile Format

Product: Landmark
The Export Shapefile command exports VectorWorks Landmark drawing components to the shapefile format. Each shapefile (.shp) exported is accompanied by an index file (.shx) and a database file (.dbf) with the same name. The following objects cannot be exported: text, dimensions, worksheets, bitmaps, lights, layer links, walls, round walls, and 3D objects (including 3D loci, extrudes, 3D polygons, sweeps, meshes, roofs, floors, columns, and NURBS curves). Other objects are exported as follows:
460
Lines, rectangles, ellipses, arcs, polygons, rounded rectangles, polylines, and path plug-in objects are exported as shapefile polylines. Symbols, loci, and point plug-in objects are exported as shapefile points. Shapefiles can contain only one shape type. If multiple shape types are being exported, they will go into separate files. Groups that contain exportable object types are ungrouped when exported. If the VectorWorks file contains projection data from a shapefile, the export process removes the projection and exports the file with the original georeference data. To export a shapefile: 1. Select File > Export > Export Shapefile. 2. The Export Shapefile dialog box opens.
Parameter
Export Objects With Record Sort Classes Into Different Files
Description
Select a data record to be exported; all objects that have a data record of this type attached are exported Select this option to create a different shapefile for each class exported
3. Select the export parameters, and then click OK. 4. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save. VectorWorks creates a set of export files, leaving the original file intact. 5. The Shapefile Export Summary dialog box displays a summary of the export procedure.
Exporting for DOE-2 Requirements |
461
6. Click Details to view a log file in a separate window. The logs summary section lists the number of exported and non-exported objects, and the number of files created. The logs details section lists each file created and the number of objects in each file. It also lists the non-exportable objects and their types (such as Wall, Light, Text). 7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Exporting for DOE-2 Requirements

Product: Architect
With rising energy costs and stricter regulations on energy usage in commercial buildings, it is becoming increasingly important to be able to estimate the energy cost implications of design strategies, especially during the schematic design phase. Energy usage programs develop these estimates. VectorWorks Architect can export the building geometry to a file in the format read by the DOE energy analysis engine. To create a DOE-2 export file: 1. The initial building space planning should be complete, with layers for all the building levels and spaces on those layers. Exterior walls are also required; create these automatically with the Create Walls from Spaces command, or manually. Windows and doors should also be inserted into the walls where appropriate. 2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Export DOE-2. The Export DOE-2 dialog box opens.
Parameter
File Name Confirm Layer Heights Up/Down
Description
Enter the path and file name for the DOE-2 file, or click Browse to specify the location and file name Displays the floor elevation and ceiling heights as specified in the Layers Setup dialog box; these values can be edited Scroll up and down through the list of layers (available when there are more than five layers)
3. Click OK to create the DOE-2 text file. Send the file to your DOE consultant for analysis.
462

The relationship between VectorWorks entities and their corresponding BDL language entities is shown in the following table.
VectorWorks
Distance from layer Z to next highest layer Z Layer delta-Z Description field in wall record Wall record R-value Window vs. door record
DOE
Floor height Space height Construction type Construction type U-Factor Window vs. door
Generating an INP File from a DXF File

Product: Architect
If .INP files need to be generated from DXF files for analysis with the DOE-2 engine, several steps are required to properly import and format the file in VectorWorks Architect prior to exporting it.
X-REFs and Layers

Product: Architect
AutoCAD building plans are often broken up into several files, which are then cross-referenced (x-ref) to a master file. Prior to importing into VectorWorks Architect, all of these files must be pulled into the master file. Essentially, all of the information about a building must be present in one file for the export to recognize the relationships among adjacent building levels and spaces on each of those floors. See DXF/DWG File Import on page 505 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. VectorWorks classes are roughly equivalent to AutoCAD layers. When importing the DXF file, the layers should be imported as VectorWorks classes. VectorWorks allows the specification of the base elevation (Z value) of layers; therefore, VectorWorks layers are typically used to separate the different building levels in the drawing. Once these layers have been established with the appropriate Z values, it is much easier to draw on the layers without having to specify base heights of each object. The Export DOE-2 command uses the layer Z values to determine the Z value of each floor in the INP file. After importing a DXF file, first create a layer for every building level, and then assign a Z value to that layer. In addition, assign a delta Z value. In a normal VectorWorks Architect drawing, the delta Z controls the default height (at object creation time) of all walls on that layer. The Export DOE-2 command uses the delta Z as the space-height. To create a layer for a building level, select Tools > Organization. On the Design Layers tab, create and set properties for the building level layer. See Creating Layers on page 71 and Setting Design Layer Properties on page 72 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Defining Spaces
Product: Architect
Once the layers have been defined, define the spaces. Polygons may already exist for all the spaces; if so, convert the polygons to spaces with the Create Spaces from Polys command (see Creating Spaces from Polylines on page 32).
Spotlight Export and Import |
463
Walls
Product: Architect
VectorWorks has a dedicated object type for walls. A VectorWorks wall is a complex object type which is a combination of lines, arcs (in the case of rounded walls), polygons/polylines, and fill patterns. VectorWorks Architect adds more functionality to wall objects by attaching a record with a description field. The Export DOE-2 command checks for wall objects along the perimeter of the spaces in the drawing. If walls are found, it checks for a wall record. If this is found, the description field is exported as the construction type for that segment. If no wall record is present, the command exports the walls class name as the construction type. If it does not find a wall object on any particular space vertex, a default construction type for the wall on that vertex is assigned. The default construction types are Default Exterior Wall construction and Default Interior Wall construction. If the walls in the original DWG file were drawn with multi-lines, importing the multi-lines as VectorWorks walls is recommended. If the original draftsperson did not use multi-lines, then the walls must be manually drawn. The walls must be on the same layer as their respective space objects. In other words, first floor walls must be on the same layer as the space objects for the first floor.
Windows and Doors

Product: Architect
The Export DOE-2 command determines the difference between windows and doors on the basis of the attached record. If the symbol has a door record attached, the symbol is exported as a door. If it has a window record attached to it, or no record at all, it is exported as a window. To export windows and doors, walls are required. Inserting windows and doors into VectorWorks walls is much easier than creating them mathematically within the DOE-2 interface. VectorWorks walls normally contain the windows and doors, essentially as nested objects. The associativity of windows and doors with their parent walls allows the Export DOE-2 command to recognize which windows/doors are associated with which walls, and export them to the appropriate place in the INP file. Ensure that when inserting the windows and doors into the walls, they create a wall break. Otherwise, they are not considered associated with the wall. AutoCAD blocks can be used, which convert to VectorWorks symbols during the DXF import. The length of the window/door, parallel to the wall, is exported as the width. For windows, the elevation of the lowest part of the window is exported as the Y value.
Spotlight Export and Import

VectorWorks Spotlight provides the ability to import and export lighting design data. Spotlight is compatible with Lightwright 4, and includes extra functionality to facilitate data transfer to and from Lightwright.
Exporting Instrument Data

Product: Spotlight
VectorWorks Spotlight instrument data (including accessory, power, and position information) can be exported to an external file. The resulting file can then be opened by a spreadsheet or database program, and is compatible with Lightwright 4. All instrument and accessory data from the current light plot are exported. Individual instruments cannot be selected for export. To export instrument data: 1. Select File > Export > Export Instrument Data.
464

The Export Instrument Data dialog box opens.
Parameter
Instrument Fields
Description
Selects the instrument data to be exported. Double-click (Macintosh) or click (Windows) an item to select it; a plus sign (+) next to the field indicates that it will be exported. To deselect a field, double-click it. Selects all instrument data fields for export Selects only the instrument data fields supported by Lightwright. All Lightwright-compatible fields will be exported; these fields are displayed with a plus sign. Verify the selections to ensure that these are the fields desired for export. Restores the last saved or loaded set of instrument data fields Deselects all instrument data fields Saves the current set of selections; enter a name for the selection set file Loads a selection set file Retains headers for the field information during export; this option is recommended, as it helps to organize the data in the database or spreadsheet program Exports all static accessories attached to an instrument as a list separated by a + sign, to the Accessories field associated with the instrument
All Lightwright
User None Save Load Export field names as first record Export in Lightwright 4 format
The Unique ID field (UID) is not in the list, but is automatically exported. This field is required to re-import data. See Importing Lightwright Data into Spotlight on page 470 for more information on the UID field and Lightwright. 2. Click Export and enter a file name and export location for the file.

3. Click Save and the selected instrument data is exported to the file in tab-delimited format. Import the file as tab-delimited into the other program.
465
Exporting Patch Information

Product: Spotlight
The Export ASCII Patch command exports the dimmer and channel information from the drawing to a USITT standard ASCII text patch file (Version 3.0, Ident 3.0). To export dimmer and channel information to a patch file: 1. Select File > Export > Export ASCII Patch. 2. Select whether to clear existing console patch information when importing the patch data into the lighting console. Click Yes to delete all existing patch data in the console before importing the new patch. Click No to preserve the current console patch data; the new patch information may overwrite existing data. 3. The Export ASCII Patch File dialog box opens. Specify the location and file name of the patch text file. Fixtures with multiple channels are patched sequentially. For example, setting the Channel to 6, the Dimmer to 20, and the Num Channel to 4 generates the following patch information:
Channel
6 7 8 9
Dimmer
20 21 22 23
Importing Instrument Data

Product: Spotlight
Instrument data from an external file can be imported into VectorWorks Spotlight. Import settings can be saved. To import instrument data: 1. Select File > Import > Import Instrument Data. The Instrument Data Import dialog box opens.
466
2. Click Browse to search for the file to be imported. The imported file must consist of tab-delimited text, with the instrument information in the rows and the field information in the columns. 3. Once the file has been selected, choose the Unique ID Field from the list of available fields. This field will be used as the key field to match imported data to the data in the plot. Normally, select UID (Unique ID) or EID (External ID). When re-importing a Lightwright file back into Spotlight, import by External ID. See Importing Lightwright Data into Spotlight on page 470 for more information. 4. After the Unique ID Field has been selected, the list of incoming data fields is displayed in the Incoming Data list on the left, and all available instrument fields are shown in the Record Fields list on the right. 5. To map the incoming data to an instrument field, select a data item from the Incoming Data list, and then select the destination record field on the right. Click Link to link the fields. The linked field moves to the Record Fields list. (To unlink two linked fields, select the field from the Record Fields list and then click Unlink.) 6. Continue mapping fields individually until the desired links have been made. To save time, click AutoLink; this automatically matches fields based on the similarity of their names. Verify that the links were made as intended. 7. To import the data without saving the links, click Import. Saving the mapping information allows you to skip the process of mapping individual fields when importing similar external files. Once the fields have been mapped appropriately, save the mapping links by clicking Save. Specify the name of the links file, which can then be restored with the Load button. 8. During import, Spotlight attempts to match all incoming data to an appropriate instrument. However, if items exist which cannot be matched, these display as orphan instruments at the bottom left of the drawing, outside the page boundary. The first row of the imported file should contain the field labels. However, if the file to import contains instrument data in the first row, select Import First Record.

To load saved mapping files: 1. Click Browse and select the file to be imported.
467
2. Click on the Load button, and select either a pre-defined mapping file or a saved mapping file. Click Import to open the mapping file and automatically map the fields based on the saved links.
Data Transfer Between Spotlight and Lightwright

Product: Spotlight
This section details the transfer of instrument data between Spotlight and Lightwright 4. Once lighting instruments and parameters have been specified in Spotlight, their information can be sent to Lightwright to perform paperwork processing. When the paperwork in Lightwright is complete, the data can be imported back into Spotlight to update the Spotlight light plot. Spotlight includes Lightwright automated action files, which, when selected at installation, are located in the Extras folder. These files have the correct settings required for exchanging data with Spotlight, and need to be placed into Lightwrights Automated Actions folder. Consult the Lightwright documentation for information on using these files.
Exporting Spotlight Data to Lightwright

Product: Spotlight
To export Spotlight instrument data to Lightwright: 1. When the Spotlight file contains instrument data that is ready to export, select File > Export > Export Instrument Data. The Export Instrument Data dialog box opens. 2. Select the appropriate Lightwright items for export by clicking the Lightwright button. (See Exporting Instrument Data on page 463 for more information.) Select Export field names as first record. If exporting to version 4 of Lightwright, select Export in Lightwright 4 format.
3. Click Export to export the lighting instrument information as a tab-delimited file. Specify the location for the exported file, and click Save.
468
Importing Spotlight Data into Lightwright

Product: Spotlight
The data exported from Spotlight now needs to be imported into Lightwright. 1. Prior to import, select Setup > Vocabulary in Lightwright. The Show Setup dialog box opens.
2. Ensure that the Separate accessories from instrument types with field contains a + sign. To import Spotlight data into Lightwright: 1. In Lightwright, select File > Import Data. Specify the location of the file that was just created, and click Open. 2. The Importing dialog box opens. Click Suggest Matches.
Ensure that UID is matched to External ID
469
Lightwright attempts to match the imported data fields to Lightwright fields. Verify that the information has been matched correctly. 3. Select Do not import first record and Ignore fields with only. Enter a - (dash) so that Spotlight fields with a - are ignored. 4. Click OK to begin the import. Lightwright reports the number of instruments that were imported; this may differ from the number of instruments exported from Spotlight due to Static Accessories. 5. Select whether to save the import action in Lightwright. Saving the action speeds up the import process from Spotlight, because the matching selections and other options will not need to be specified again. Provide a name for the automated action, which can be selected later from File > Automated Actions.
6. The instrument information is now available for editing in Lightwright.
7. Save the Lightwright file.
470
Exporting Lightwright Data Back into Spotlight

Product: Spotlight
Once the lighting instrument data has been edited in Lightwright, export the data back into Spotlight to update the light plot. If lighting instruments have been deleted in Lightwright, they will not automatically be deleted in Spotlight. A warning message opens if this is the case, and the affected instruments are automatically selected for further action. To export the Lightwright file back to Spotlight: 1. In Lightwright, select File > Export > Data. The Export Options dialog box opens.
2. Select the fields for export; selected fields display a check mark. Ensure that the External ID and Accessory fields are selected for export, and that Tab Separated is selected as the Export File Type. In addition, select Export field labels as first record, Strip Channel Parentheses, For lights with attributes and Fill blank fields with. For the blank fields, enter a - (dash), so that a - is inserted in any blank fields. Click OK. 3. Select a file name and location for the exported file. 4. The option to save the export action for future automation is presented. 5. Click Yes to save the action.
Importing Lightwright Data into Spotlight

Product: Spotlight
The edited Lightwright data is imported into Spotlight to update the lighting instrument information.
Importing PartSpec Files |

To import Lightwright data into Spotlight: 1. In Spotlight, select File > Import > Import Instrument Data. The Instrument Data Import dialog box opens.
471
2. With the Browse button, specify the file exported from Lightwright. If the file to import has External ID or UID as a field name, it will automatically be selected as the UID. Do not select Import First Record. Click AutoLink to correctly match important fields. If not all fields are automatically mapped, map the incoming data to an instrument field as described in Importing Instrument Data on page 465. Accessories should be mapped to Accessories, and Instrument Type Symbol to Symbol Name. 3. Click Import. The Lightwright data is imported into Spotlight, automatically updating the instrument data in the light plot If the instruments are not updated, verify that the External ID field was exported, and the Export Field Labels as First Record option was selected in Lightwright. If the data needs to be sent back to Lightwright after this initial export, select the Merge command in Lightwright rather than Import. Lightwright uses the Lightwright ID number to match the data to existing instruments rather than creating new instruments.
Importing PartSpec Files

The Import PartSpec command imports Thomas Register PartSpec files saved in either DWG/DXF (2D objects) or IGES or ACIS (3D objects) format. It places all parts in a single class on the active design layer and deletes any extraneous layers. The Import PartSpec command does not differentiate between a file created in the Thomas Register and other programs.
472
To import PartSpec files: 1. Select File > Import > Import PartSpec. A message indicates that the undo cache will be cleared, and that this action cannot be undone; click OK to proceed. The Import Thomas Register PartSpec dialog box opens.
Parameter
Import 2D Part (DWG/ DXF) Import as symbol named Import as group Attach part information to the group or symbol Put objects into class Import 3D Part ACIS IGES
Description
Select to import a 2D part from a DWG or DXF file Select to import the part as a symbol; enter the name of the symbol in the symbol name field Select to import the part as a group Select to attach the manufacturers part information to the symbol or group. The information is attached through the Part Information record format which is created if not already existing in the file. Select the class to apply to all objects being imported Select to import a 3D part Select to import the part from an ACIS file Select to import the part from an IGES file
2. Select the desired import options and click OK.
Importing PartSpec Files | Import

2D part from either a DWG or DXF file
473
Description
In the Import DXF/DWG Files dialog box, select the file to import, and then click Open. The DXF DWG Import Options dialog box opens. (See DXF/DWG File Import on page 505 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.) Note: The only setting that may need to be edited in the DXF DWG Import Options dialog is Units Setting In File under the Primary Settings tab. This setting refers to the units in the PartSpec DXF or DWG file, not the units of the current VectorWorks file. Do not edit the Import DXF Layers As Classes field under the Graphics Attributes tab or the Group Record Fields under the Objects tab. Changing these options will prevent objects from importing correctly. Depending on the imported part, the Map Colors to Line Weights dialog box and/or the Font Mapping dialog box may open. Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The part is imported into the file based on the specified settings.
3D part from an ACIS or IGES file
If this is an IGES file, the Import IGES File dialog box opens. Select the file to import, and then click Open. If this is an ACIS file, the Import SAT File dialog box opens. Select the file to import, and then click Open. The part is imported into the current class and design layer, and is available for editing and/or converting into a symbol.
474
Advanced Topics
This appendix contains advanced procedures for customizing items in a drawing file.
Creating Custom ID Label Symbols

Understanding ID Labels
VectorWorks Architect and Landmark ID labels are created as plug-in objects that draw an ID symbol and an optional leader line. The symbols can automatically be kept horizontal, or can be rotated to the leader line angle. It is possible to create ID symbols based on custom markers. ID symbols have certain requirements that must be met.
ID Symbol Requirements
The ID Label tool (see ID Label Tool on page 355) detects the presence of any existing record information for the object being labeled in the drawing; if the tool cannot detect record information, you are prompted to select the appropriate record from a list. The ID symbols defined to work with that record type display for selection. The ID Label tool determines whether the ID symbol requested in the dialog box is present in the drawing. If not, it copies it in from the ID_Symbols.mcd file, and scales it to the current drawing layer scale. Once an appropriate scaled symbol is created, it is used without further reference to external documents. ID symbols must meet the following requirements: They are stored in the library file [VectorWorks]\Plug-ins\Common\Data\ ID_Symbols.mcd; They are created at a 1:1 scale, using certain graphic primitives; They use linked text to display ID and attribute information; and, They have a TagSchema record attached.
The TagSchema Record

The TagSchema record determines the behavior of the ID symbol text. This record is present in the ID_Symbols.mcd file.
476
| Appendix A: Advanced Topics
Data record format ID symbol is linked to; must match record name exactly Current settings for these fields in the file, as set by the ID Label tool Up to seven definitions of linked text fields (can be combinations of data record fields); see Defining ID Symbol Custom Fields for more details Advanced feature option settings for this symbol type; fields hold current defaults for these ID settings and may be modified by the ID Label tool in the ID/Specification Tool dialog box
Graphics options for drawing ID symbol
Up to seven fields linked to text within ID symbol
The AutoIncrement, FixCurrRecord, WriteMatchIDs, DrawLeader, and KeepHoriz fields are Boolean (true/false) values; ShoulderLength and MkrScaleFactor are numerical values. All other fields are text values.
ID Symbol Leader Options

Four TagSchema record fields determine whether the ID symbol is drawn with a leader, and, if so, determine the leaders appearance.
Parameter
DrawLeader
Description
If DrawLeader is false, no leader is drawn with the ID Leader object; otherwise, a leader is drawn between the ID symbol and the object to which the ID is referring. This field sets the default for the draw leader parameter in the ID Leader object, which can be changed later.
DrawLeader True
DrawLeader False
Creating Custom ID Label Symbols | Parameter

KeepHoriz
477
Description
If KeepHoriz is false, the ID symbol is drawn rotated to the leader angle; otherwise, the symbol is rotated horizontally, with a small shoulder line segment which is controlled using the value in the ShoulderLength field. These fields set the defaults for the KeepHoriz value and the ShoulderLength value of the ID Leader object, respectively. IDs with no leader should normally set KeepHoriz to true.
KeepHoriz True
KeepHoriz False
ArrowStyle
This field, along with MkrScaleFactor, controls the appearance of the marker at the end of the leader (if any)
0 - None 1 - Thin Solid Arrow 2 - Wide Solid Arrow 3 - Thin Hollow Arrow 4 - Wide Hollow Arrow 5 - Dot 6 - Circle 7 - Cross 8 - Slash 9 - Lasso
MkrScaleFactor
This field, along with ArrowStyle, controls the appearance of the marker at the end of the leader (if any); this setting is a multiplier on a marker size of approximately 1/4. For example, a MkrScaleFactor setting of 0.5 results in a marker of 1/8 standard size.
ID Symbol Record Writing Options

There are three ID record writing options controlled by four fields in the TagSchema record:
Parameter
AutoIncrement FixCurrRecord
Description
The value in this field controls the default setting for whether the ID number is automatically incremented between placements The value in this field controls whether the contents of the current record are rewritten to match earlier IDs with the same ID entry
478

Description
The value in this field controls the writing of matching ID fields to records with identical contents in the MatchField text field Provides a record field for writing the ID for matching
Parameter
WriteMatchIDs MatchField
Defining ID Symbol Custom Fields

The ID symbol can have up to seven fields containing virtually any text, combined with the contents of the data record the ID uses. For example, the ID Label tool reads the contents of the Fld1Spec field and writes the results to the Fld1Text field. The Spec field follows the format FieldName& string constant where the field names are fields in the data record named in the TagType field; the & indicates a concatenation, and the string constants are surrounded by double quotes. For example, a field in the data record is called Count. This is a number field representing the total number of something. You want the first field in the ID to read: TOTAL: 12 when Count is 12. Enter the following formula in the Tag1Spec field: TOTAL: &Count. There are no spaces between the ampersand and the field name, or between the string constant (in quotes) and the ampersand. You can concatenate any number of fields and constants. For example, you could add the word Item(s) to the tag field definition by using the following formula: TOTAL: &Count& Item(s). There are a variety of pre-defined fields in the ID symbols that come with VectorWorks Architect and Landmark. Use these as a guideline in understanding this special formula language. This same formula convention is also used to define HVAC object tags.
Error Messages in ID Fields

If the ID Label tool cannot find the data record specified in the TagType field of the TagSchema record, the error message #RECORDNAME?# displays when the ID is placed. If any of the fields in the formula are misnamed, the message #FIELDNAME?# displays in the affected ID field. Verify the spelling of record and field names and ensure the data record is defined as described in The Data Record on page 478.
The Data Record

Product: Architect
The data record named in the TagType field of the ID symbol should be part of the standard records created using the VA Records and Schedules command and should be present in the current Preference Set. This enables the ID Label tool to create the record automatically if it is not defined at the time the ID Label tool is used. The TagType Styled Wall is reserved for use when an ID is placed on a styled wall.
Creating Custom ID Symbols

Keeping in mind the information described in Understanding ID Labels on page 475, it is possible to create a custom ID symbol to be used by the ID Label tool. An ID symbol can consist of any 2D object supported in VectorWorks except circles, arcs, grouped objects, or other symbols. These guidelines are necessary for the scaling algorithm currently used by the ID Label tool, to scale the
Creating Custom ID Label Symbols |
479
symbol to the correct scale for the file. To achieve the look of an arc in the symbol, use an arc-smoothed vertex of a polyline; use an ellipse instead of a circle. To create a custom ID symbol: 1. Open the ID Symbols.mcd file, located in the [VectorWorks]\Plug-ins\Common\Data folder. The TagSchema record, as well as the ID symbols currently used by the ID Label tool, are present in this file. 2. At a 1:1 scale, draw the object representing the ID symbol. 3. Select Modify > Create Symbol to create a symbol from the object (see Creating New Symbols on page 136 for more information on creating symbols). 4. Select the new symbol in the Resource Browser and select Edit from the Resources menu. The Edit Symbol dialog box opens. 5. Select the 2D Component and click Edit to open the Edit Symbol window. 6. Deselect all items by clicking in an empty area. On the Data tab of the Object Info palette, *SYMBOL DEFAULTS* is displayed. 7. Attach the Tag Schema record by selecting it from the Data tab. 8. An X displays in the checkbox. 9. Select the TagType field and replace the field name with the exact name of your custom record. 10. Create and format text to be used to display the ID symbol text. For more information, see Linking Text to Record Formats on page 156. 11. With the text selected, select Tools > Records > Link Text to Record. The Choose Field dialog box opens.
12. In the Tag Schema record format, select the Label field and click OK. 13. The symbol text is linked to display the contents of the Label record field. To check the text link, enter text in the Label field on the Data tab of the Object Info palette. Data entered now would be overwritten later, in any case, by the ID Label tool.
480
14. Click Exit Symbol at the top right corner of the window to return to the drawing. 15. In the Pally script palette, double-click the Output ID Prefs script to run it. 16. Save the ID_Symbols.mcd file. 17. In the drawing file where the custom ID symbol is to be used by the ID Label tool, ensure that a record format exists which exactly matches the record name entered previously in the TagType field. 18. Select the ID Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set. The ID/Specification Tool dialog box opens.
Notes Manager Database Format |
481
19. The custom record is one of the selections for ID Type. Select it to use the associated custom ID symbol.
Notes Manager Database Format

Notes Manager, in version 11 and later, can use a database from an outside source, provided that it has been formatted appropriately. Data files must be in one of two formats: a version 11 or later format, or the format used by Notes Manager in versions of VectorWorks previous to version 11. The format used by previous versions may be somewhat simpler to use, and is automatically converted to the current format by the Notes Manager.
Formatting by Previous Version

The database format must adhere to the following requirements to be recognized as a database from versions of Notes Manager prior to 11. The first line must contain only a numeric value The rest of the file must contain notes with the following data separated by tabs: a numeric value a dash the section name the description the note text
Additional tabs or carriage returns are not allowed within each field There can be no blank lines before the end of the file This format is illustrated by the following example.
482
Formatting by Current Version

The database format must adhere to the following requirements to be recognized as a database from version 11 and later Notes Manager. The first line must contain the word NotesManager11DataFile The second line must contain the database ID (unique for all databases used) The rest of the file must contain notes with the following data separated by tabs: a note ID (unique for all notes in the file) the section name the description the note text
After the notes, an optional section can identify which description was last selected in each section Additional tabs or carriage returns are not allowed within each field There can be no blank lines before the end of the file The database and note IDs are in the format of ID_#, where # represents any numeric value with not more than 14 digits and no decimal point. Notes Manager does not change these IDs after creation, but when new notes are added, it uses IDs similar to those shown in the following example.
Migrating from Previous Versions

Migrating Architect Window and Door Objects
The Update Plug-in Objects command converts all window and door plug-in objects in the current file from the formats used in VectorWorks 8.x and the format used in VectorWorks Architect 9.x to the Version 10.x and later format. This command works across all file layers, whether the windows and doors are freestanding, in round or straight walls, in a placed symbol, or in a symbol definition. Saving a copy of the file prior to running the command is recommended, as the command cannot be undone. The conversions are as follows: Simple Window and Simple Window 2 to Window Complex Window and Complex Window 2 to Window Simple Door, Simple Door 2, French Door, French Door 2, Overhead Door, Overhead Door 2, Sliding Glass Door, Sliding Glass Door 2 to Door Wall Opening to Window in Cased Opening configuration
Migrating from Previous Versions |

Drawing Borders to Universal Drawing Border To update window and door plug-in objects: 1. Open a file containing legacy objects. 2. Select Tools > Utilities > Update Plug-in Objects. A Notice dialog box opens.
483
All older version window and door plug-in objects will be converted into the new format. This procedure cannot be undone. 3. Click Yes to continue or No if the command was selected accidentally. All applicable parameter values and attached records of the older version windows and doors are transferred. There are no visible changes to the document, but the new window and door objects provide increased plug-in object functionality which includes: improved wall breaks in masonry and veneer walls better line weight control in Plan view improved hidden line renderings in 3D view (by using the 3D Solids option of the Show or Hide 3D command)
Migrating Site Models from Previous Versions

The DTM process has been significantly improved for version 12, and files containing DTM symbols from previous versions can be easily converted. When updating a site model from a previous version, you are prompted to convert to the new DTM. If the file contains more than one site model symbol, an alert dialog box prompts for the selection of one of the symbols to be converted to the primary DTM object. The remaining symbols become snapshots of the primary DTM. DTM classes which were necessary for previous versions remain in the file, although they are no longer used.
Migrating Machine Design Objects

When migrating plug-in objects from older versions of VectorWorks Machine Design (previously called VectorWorks Mechanical), some Object Info palette parameters display when they should be hidden. Select the Reset All Plug-ins command to update the Object Info palette parameter display. To reset plug-in objects: 1. Open an older VectorWorks Mechanical drawing containing plug-in objects. 2. Select Tools > Utilities > Reset All Plug-Ins. The Reset All Plug-ins dialog box opens. 3. Click Yes to reset plug-in objects. A VectorScript message displays the update status. When complete, the Object Info palette displays only the pertinent parameters.
484
Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols

Product: Architect
VectorWorks Architect includes many pre-defined electrical and communication objects in its object library files. However, there is no need to be restricted to these objects; creating custom panel and circuiting symbols is also possible.
Creating Custom Panels

Product: Architect
Electrical, communication, and disconnect panel symbols can be created specifically to fulfill a custom requirement. To create a panel symbol: 1. Draw the object to represent the panel. 2. Convert the object into a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol. Provide a name for the panel. See Creating New Resources on page 127 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. The panel symbol requires both a panel and circuiting record. If the file does not contain panel and circuiting records, create the records according to the following formats. Panel Record
Field
Name Type Phase Volts Amps # of Spaces Panel Header Line 1 Panel Header Line 2
Type
Text Text Integer Text Integer Integer Text Text
Contents
Must be unique Must be Electrical, Communication, or Disconnect 1 117 100 20 Text placed on Panel Schedule Text placed on Panel Schedule
Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols |

Circuiting Record
485
Field
Name Circuit # Wire Size Trip Conduit Size V.A./Watts Remarks Phase/Pole Voltage Circuit Type UID ID
Type
Text Integer Text Integer Text Integer Text Integer Text Integer Text Text
Contents
None 0 0 0 1/2 0 Panel 2 0 1 for electrical device, 2 for communication device 0 0
4. Select the symbol from the Resource Browser, and then click Edit from the Resources menu. The Edit Symbol dialog box opens. 5. Click 2D Component, and then click Edit. 6. In the Edit Symbol window, deselect all symbol components. 7. Attach the panel record to the symbol by selecting it from the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Enter the panel information by selecting a parameter and entering its information in the lower field; the circuiting tools will use this information.
Select the parameter and enter the information in this field
486

Description
The Name field changes for each symbol later, when it is placed on the drawing Specifies Electrical, Communication, or Disconnect Enter specific information about the panel Text specified here is placed on the panel schedule
Parameter
Name Type Other Panel Parameters Panel Header Line 1/2
8. Attach the circuiting record to the symbol and enter the circuiting information by selecting a parameter and entering its information in the lower field; the circuiting tools will use this information.
Parameters
Name Circuit # Other Circuit Parameters Circuit Type UID
Description
Leave this field blank Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter Enter specific information about the circuit Set to 1 for an electrical symbol, and to 2 for a communication symbol Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter
9. Click Exit Symbol at the top right of the drawing window.
Creating Custom Circuit Symbols

Product: Architect
Electrical and communication circuit symbols can be created specifically to fulfill a custom requirement.
Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols |

To create a circuit symbol: 1. Draw the object to represent the circuitable symbol.
487
2. Convert the object into a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol. Provide a name for the circuitable item. See Creating New Resources on page 127 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. If the file does not contain a circuiting record, create the record according to the following format.
Field
Name Circuit # Wire Size Trip Conduit Size V.A./Watts Remarks Phase/Pole Voltage Circuit Type UID ID
Type
Text Integer Text Integer Text Integer Text Integer Text Integer Text Text
Contents
None 0 0 0 1/2 0 Panel 2 0 1 for electrical device, 2 for communication device 0 0
4. Select the symbol from the Resource Browser, and then click Edit from the Resources menu. The Edit Symbol dialog box opens. 5. Click 2D Component, and then click Edit. 6. In the Edit Symbol window, deselect all symbol components. 7. Attach the circuiting record to the symbol by selecting it from the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Fill out the circuiting information by selecting a parameter and entering its information in the lower field; this information is displayed and edited by the circuiting tools.
488
Parameters
Name Circuit # Other Circuit Parameters Circuit Type UID
Description
Leave this field blank Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter Enter specific information about the circuit Set to 1 for an electrical symbol, and to 2 for a communication symbol Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter
8. If the symbol requires more than one circuit, create and attach a second identical record named Circuiting Record-1. 9. Click the Exit Symbol button located at the top right of the drawing window.
Creating Custom Path Objects

The Objects from Polyline command supports custom path objects (custom path plug-in objects with a .vso extension). For information on creating custom path objects, see VectorScript Objects on page 111 in the VectorScript Language Guide. To add a custom path object to the Objects from Polyline command: 1. Place the custom path object file in the VectorWorks\Plug-Ins folder. 2. Select Tools > Scripts > VectorScript Plug-in Editor. The VectorScript Plug-in Editor dialog box opens.
Creating Custom Path Objects |
489
3. In the list of VectorScript plug-in objects, select Objects from Polyline. Press the letter O key to quickly access Objects from Polyline in the list. 4. Click Strings. The String Categories dialog box opens.
5. Select Resource ID 6000, User Defined Path Object, and click Edit. The Edit Strings dialog box opens.
490
6. Select ID 6001, and click Edit. The Edit String dialog box opens. 7. Enter the number of custom path objects that will be added, and click OK. (If adding one path object, enter 1.) 8. In the Edit Strings dialog box, click Add.
9. Enter the name of the path object that should be used in the command list, and then the actual name of the plug-in object file (without the .vso extension), separated by a colon. 10. Click OK to return to the Edit Strings dialog box. The custom path object ID and string are listed.
Plant Symbol Specifications |
491
11. Repeat steps 8-10 for each custom path plug-in object to add. 12. Click OK twice, and then Done, to exit the VectorScript Plug-in Editor. 13. The custom path object is included in the list of path objects created by the Objects from Polyline command.
Plant Symbol Specifications

Product: Landmark
In VectorWorks Landmark, custom symbols can be created and used in addition to the default resources and object libraries provided at installation. When VectorWorks Landmark is installed, pre-designated plant resources are located in [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Plants. Separate folders contain the 2D and 3D plant symbols. 2D or 3D symbols saved in these folders and defined as plants in the Plant Symbols.mcd file become available for selection in the Set Default Plant Tool dialog box. Certain restrictions apply when creating custom plant symbols. Symbols representing plants should meet the following requirements: 2D plant symbols should be 2D only, and 3D plant symbols should be 3D only. Only the relevant portion of the symbol will be used; the remainder is ignored. It is best to leave 2D elements ungrouped.
492
3D plant symbols must be composed entirely of ungrouped 3D polygons. Convert symbols that contain other elements (extrusions, for example) to 3D polygons with the Modify > Convert > Convert to 3D Polys command. The stacking order of the 2D symbol elements affects the way attributes are applied. Plant outlines (on the Attributes tab when defining plants) and plant fills (when Fill Background Only is selected on the Render tab) are applied to the first filled element (oval, circle, rectangle, polyline, or polygon) at the bottom of the stacking order. Classes assigned to the 2D and 3D plant symbol elements are applied by the plant object. Select Use Textures at Creation in the Edit Class dialog box for creating 3D plant symbol with textures (RenderWorks required). Nested symbol elements are not copied into a plant object from a symbol. To use a VectorWorks plant catalog file from version 11 in VectorWorks 12 or later, open the file to convert it to the current version. In the Resource Browser, use the Move command to move the plants from the System Folder/~Plants folder to the root of the file, so that they are no longer nested in symbol folders. Save the file. Plant images by xFrog are available as resources in the Libraries folder and can be used as the 2D portion of a custom plant symbol. To create custom plant symbols: 1. The 2D and 3D symbols are created separately, but in the same manner. If creating the 2D portion of the symbol, open the [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Plants - 2D Symbols\2DPlantSymbols.mcd file. If creating the 3D portion of the symbol, open the [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Plants - 3D Symbols\3DPlantSymbols.mcd file. These files contain the 2D and 3D symbols, respectively, that can be selected when creating or editing a plant definition. A new, separate file can also be created, if desired. 2. Draw the 2D or 3D elements in the appropriate file and create a symbol.
Save the symbol at the root directory of the Resource Browser, and not in a folder. The root directory should contain only 2D plant symbols for files saved in the 2D Plant Symbols folder, or 3D plant symbols for files saved in the 3D plant symbols folder. See Creating New Symbols on page 136 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information. 3. Save and close the 2DPlantSymbols or 3DPlantSymbols file. If a new file was created, save it in the appropriate folder. 4. Open the [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Plants\Plant Symbols.mcd file, or create a new file in this folder. 5. Click the Place Plant tool from the Site Planning tool set, and select Settings from the mode bar. 6. The Set Default Plant Tool Options dialog box opens. Select a plant definition that is similar to the plant symbol to be created, and click New Plant. 7. The New Plant Definition dialog box opens. Provide an ID and Name for the new plant. On the Definition tab, select the new 2D (and, if it exists, 3D) symbol.
Plant Symbol Specifications |
493
8. Click OK to save the new plant. The new plant symbol must be saved at the root directory of the Resource Browser. Only plant objects should be saved in this file; if other symbols are saved, they will appear as selectable symbols when creating plant definitions, but will not have associated plant data. 9. Save the Plant Symbols.mcd file, or if a new file was created, save it in the [VectorWorks]\Libraries\Defaults\Plants folder. Close the file. 10. The new custom plant symbol is now available when creating plant definitions with the Place Plant tool.
494
Assigning Plant Record Information

Product: Landmark
Plant record information can be assigned to one or more non-standard selected objects, symbols, or groups in the drawing. Objects with plant records are automatically included in the plant list; therefore, this method can be used to add non-plant object items to the plant list. In a new file, first select the Place Plant tool in order to create the plant record. To assign the plant record to a selection: 1. Select one or more drawing objects. 2. Attach the plant record to the selection(s) by clicking the Data tab in the Object Info palette and selecting the Plant Record checkbox. 3. Edit the plant record fields as desired.
If attaching a plant record to a symbol, a different method is required. See Linking Text to Record Formats on page 156 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Plant ID Codes
The meaning of commonly-used plant ID code categories is provided.
Plant ID Code
A-# CTD CTG ETD ETG
Meaning
Annual # Conifer Tree Display Conifer Tree Generic Evergreen Tree Display Evergreen Tree Generic
Instrument and Accessory Specifications | Plant ID Code

G-# OT-M OTD OTF OTG OTM OTP P-1 P-9 P1 P4 SD-# SD# SDM SG# SG SN# STG STL STM STP STS
495
Meaning
Grasses # Ornamental Tree Massed Ornamental Tree Display Ornamental Tree Flowering Ornamental Tree Generic Ornamental Tree Multi-Stem Ornamental Tree Patio Perennials Palms Shrub Display # Shrub Deciduous # Shrub Display Massed Shrub Evergreen # Shrub Generic Shrub Needle # Shade Tree Generic Shade Tree Large Shade Tree Massed Shade Tree Patio Shade Tree Street
Instrument and Accessory Specifications

Product: Spotlight
In VectorWorks Spotlight, custom symbols can be created and used in addition to the pre-defined standard symbol sets. Create an instrument, accessory, or lighting position out of a currently selected symbol by converting it with the commands in the Modify > Convert menu. Certain restrictions apply when creating lighting and accessory symbols. In addition, the colors used for indicating photometric threshold values can be customized.
Lighting Instrument Specifications

Product: Spotlight
Restrictions apply when creating a symbol to be converted to a lighting instrument.
496
Symbol Characteristics
Product: Spotlight
Symbols should be hybrid (2D/3D) so that they display properly in both 2D and 3D views. At a minimum, the symbol must contain a 2D representation. All instruments should be drawn with the front of the instrument (the end which emits light) oriented towards the top of the drawing.
2D Characteristics Product: Spotlight

Create the 2D view of the symbol using as few polygons and lines as possible. If possible, use a single polyline rather than individual line segments. The symbol below was created from these few constituent parts:
The line weight of the symbol is also a consideration; the instruments need to stand out when printed. The outer perimeter of the symbol should have a line weight of at least 1/2 point (7 mils). Interior details should use a lighter line weight. The 2D representation should have a solid fill so that it obscures information under the symbol. The size of the instrument should be accurate based on the real instrument it represents. While drawing the instrument, keep the level of detail as minimal as possible. The goal is to be able to distinguish instruments from one another, not to create a detailed plan view of each instrument. For instruments with multiple configurations, it is acceptable to use simple graphical differences to distinguish among the models. For example, use the following variations to separate the different versions of a symbol:
Altman
6x9
6 x 12
6 x 16
6 x 22
3D Characteristics Product: Spotlight

An easy way to generate a reasonable 3D instrument model is to sweep the 2D portion of the symbol. The segment angle of the sweep should be between 20 and 40o. See Sweeping Objects on page 281 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.
360o sweep
Instrument and Accessory Specifications |
497
Keep the 3D symbol simple. It should be solid. The model should be accurately sized, but without minute details like handles, grommets, fins, louvers, cords, and knobs. These items can add significantly to the rendering time required, and are not necessary to distinguish among instruments.
Insertion Point
Product: Spotlight
Align the 2D and 3D views so that the hanging points of both versions line up. The insertion point of the 2D/3D hybrid symbol in Top/Plan view should represent the hanging location of the instrument. The 3D insertion point should be the hanging point (center of the clamp).
Attaching the Light Info Record

Product: Spotlight
Attach the Light Info Record to the symbol, with field names that match the names of the fields in the instrument object. Not all the fields are required, but the desired fields for the instrument object to read should be included. Filling the instrument type field with the manufacturers name and model name for the particular instrument is recommended. To attach the light info record: 1. In the Resource Browser, import the Light Info Record from one of the instrument library files. Locate the Light Info Record and select Import from the Resources menu to bring the record into the current file. 2. Select the new symbol, and select Modify > Edit Symbol. 3. In the Edit Symbol window, click on an empty location so that nothing is selected. 4. Click on the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Attach the Light Info Record to the symbol defaults by selecting the checkbox. Then edit the record by selecting the record item and typing the information in the edit box.
Select record item
Enter item information
The Candlepower, Beam Angle, and Field Angle parameters affect the photometric grid and photometer object calculations. The Beam Angle and Field Angle parameters affect the Draw Beam feature.
498

Normally, do not include text labels with the instrument, as these are handled by the instrument object. An exception can be made to distinguish different models or lamps of an instrument. For example, create three versions of a single PAR64 symbol by adding MFL, WFL, and NSP text blocks. Symbols should be named with the model name of the lighting instrument.
5. Selecting Light On in the Object Info palette of a lighting instrument includes a spot light as part of the lighting instrument. While editing the symbol, the spot light can be added, and accurate lighting information specified with the parameters in Use Emitter. See Adding Light Sources on page 392 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on adding a spot light and setting accurate lighting parameters. 6. Click Exit Symbol at the upper right corner of the window to return to the drawing.
Multi-circuit Instrument Specifications

Product: Spotlight
Multi-circuit instruments represent a special case of the instrument object. The symbol drawn should represent a single element of the multi-circuit instrument. An instrument that is at the end of the multi-circuit strip should look different from the instruments that are in the center. Place the number of symbols required to create the multi-circuit instrument. For example, place four symbols (two ends and two middle) to create a four-circuit cyc unit.
1. Convert symbols to instruments
2. Convert instruments to multi-circ instrument
Accessory Specifications
Product: Spotlight
The accessory symbol should be a 2D/3D hybrid object. At a minimum, the symbol must contain a 2D representation. Keep the accessory representation as simple as possible to reduce rendering time. The Object Info palette for accessories and lighting instruments looks identical, but the Device Type differs (Light, Accessory, or Static Accessory). Accessories should have a record attached for storing the default accessory values. The record should not contain fields that vary from instance to instance of an accessory. For example, do not add a Color Scroller channel field value unless that channel is used by all the color scrollers in the file. The attached record should consist of the following fields:
Field
Instrument type Accessory type Wattage Weight Other
Description
Accessory name; this can be a specific manufacturers model name or number, or a generic name for the accessory, such as 6 Top Hat Generic accessory category; in some cases, this can be similar, or identical to the instrument type (example accessory types include Top Hat, Barn Door, Color Scroller, Gobo Rotator, and Color Frame) Amount of power consumed by the accessory Accessory weight Add fields as desired; these fields are read into the Lighting Device object if the field name in the accessory record matches the field name of the Lighting Device object
Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors |
499
Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors

Product: Spotlight
Both the photometer and photometric grid use colors that correspond to the specified threshold ranges (see Obtaining Photometric Data on page 240). These colors can be changed if desired. To edit the photometric threshold color values: 1. Select Tools > Scripts > VectorScript Plug-in Editor. 2. The VectorScript Plug-in Editor opens. Select either PhotoGrid or Photometer.
3. Click Strings. The String Categories dialog box opens.
4. Select Resource ID 4000: Threshold Color Indices. Click Edit. 5. The Edit Strings dialog box opens. Select one of the indices and click Edit to specify a new color value for the threshold index.
500
ID
4000 4001 4002 4003
Corresponding Threshold Index

Zero level Levels below the Lower Threshold value Levels between the Lower and Upper Threshold values Levels above the Upper Threshold value
For more information on the color selector values, see Appendix E - Miscellaneous Selectors, in the VectorScript Function Reference Guide. The VectorScript Function Reference is a comprehensive command reference available online. It is located in: VWHelp/VectorScript Reference/VSFunctionReference.html 6. When the desired threshold index color selector values have been edited, click OK to return to the VectorScript Plug-in Editor dialog box. Click Done.
Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects

Product: Spotlight and Machine Design
User-defined sizes can be created for eye bolts, J-bolts, swing bolts, swing eye bolts, T-bolts, U-bolts, Hole - Tapped (Inch) and Hole - Tapped (Metric). Use the following procedures to add or remove sizes for use with these plug-in objects. Sizes are then assigned through the Object Info dialog box for the applicable object. To add or remove plug-in object sizes: 1. Select Tools > Scripts > VectorScript Plug-in Editor. The VectorScript Plug-in Editor dialog box opens.
Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects |
501
2. Select the plug-in object to be edited and click Parameters. The Parameters dialog box opens.
3. Select the Size parameter and click Edit. The Edit Parameter dialog box opens.
502
4. Click Choices. The Edit Choices dialog box opens. 5. To remove a size, highlight it and press the Delete or Backspace key. To add a new size, insert the cursor in the desired location in the list of sizes. Enter the new parameters. To edit a size, simply type over the existing parameters. Use the following guidelines to add or edit a size:
Size
Inch Metric
Description
Enter the size as a fraction or decimal. Enter a dash as a separator (with optional spaces before and after). Enter the threads per inch. Example: 1/2 - 20 Enter either an upper or lowercase m. Enter the nominal size in millimeters. Enter either an upper or lowercase x as a separator (with optional spaces before and after). Enter the thread pitch. Example: M8 x 1.25
Do not leave blank lines in the list of sizes. Also, if sizes are added to a 2D plug-in object that has a 3D counterpart, the same sizes must be added to the 3D plug-in object in order for the Create 3D Object from 2D command to work properly. 6. Click OK to accept the changes, and then click Done to exit the VectorScript Plug-in Editor dialog box.
Adding User-defined Information to Commands

Certain commands permit adding to the list of available values for certain parameters (for example, the Material list for the Spring Calculator or the Units list for the Simple Beam command).
Parameters Allowing Addition of User-defined Values in the GetUserData.vss File Group

1
Plug-in Object
Spring Calculator Shaft Analysis
Parameter
Units (inches, mm and cm only) Outside Diameter
Dialog Box
Adding User-defined Information to Commands |

Simple Beam Simple Beam 2 Simple Beam Beam Length Deflection Units These items are the singular form of the names in Group 1 and are used when writing the values to a worksheet and a text block on the drawing Load Units These items are the singular form of the names in Group 3 and are used when writing the values to a worksheet and a text block on the drawing Section Modulus Units Moment of Inertia Units Shear Modulus Units Modulus of Elasticity Units Material Twisting Moment Units Simple Beam: Set Beam Properties Simple Beam: Set Beam Properties Not applicable
503
3 4
Simple Beam Simple Beam
Simple Beam: Add/Remove/ Change Loads Not applicable
5 6 7
Simple Beam Simple Beam Shaft Analysis Simple Beam
Simple Beam: Set Beam Properties Simple Beam: Set Beam Properties Shaft Analysis Simple Beam: Set Beam Properties Spring Calculator Shaft Analysis
8 9
Adding User-defined Spring Calculator Materials

The following example shows how to add to the list of materials available to the Spring Calculator. To add to the list of Spring Calculator materials: 1. Make a backup copy of the GetUserData.vss file, located in Plug-ins\VW_Mech\Includes. Keep the backup copy in case there is a need to restore the GetUserData.vss file to its original state. 2. Open the GetUserData.vss file in any word processor and locate group 8 in the getUserString function. 3. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Material to the end of the list (in this example, Beryllium Copper). Enclose the name in single quotes and put a semi-colon at the end of the line. The new line should read: 16: getUserString := Beryllium Copper;
504
4. Locate group 8 in the getUserData function. 5. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Mod. of Elasticity value (in this example, pounds per square inch). The sequential number added here must correspond to the number added in the getUserString function. Put a semi-colon at the end of the line; do not use single quotes or commas in the value. The new line should read: 16: getUserData := 7000000; 6. Change the value of item 0 to the new group number, which indicates the number of available values (in this example, 16).
7. Save the file. The next time the Spring Calculator is run, the new item is available in the Material list, and when selected, the new value is available in the Mod. of Elasticity field. When executed, the Spring Calculator automatically recalculates the value to the user-specified units. (For beryllium copper, the value is 7,000,000 lb/ in2.) If the Spring Calculator was used during the current session, VectorWorks needs to be restarted for the changes to take place.
Adding User-defined Simple Beam Units

The following example shows how to add to the list of available units for the Simple Beam command.
Adding User-defined Information to Commands |

To add to the list of units for the Simple Beam command:
505
1. Make a backup copy of the GetUserData.vss file located in Plug-ins\VW_Mech\Includes. Keep the backup copy in case there is a need to restore the GetUserData.vss file to its original state. 2. Open the GetUserData.vss file in any word processor and locate group 1 in the getUserString function. 3. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Units to the end of the list (in this example, Yards). Enclose the name in single quotes and put a semi-colon at the end of the line. The new line should read: 6: getUserString := Yards; 4. Locate group 2 in the getUserString function. 5. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Units to the end of the list. (In this example, type yard in the singular form; this value is used in certain output for the Simple Beam command and must have an entry corresponding to the same item in group 1). Enclose the name in single quotes and put a semi-colon at the end of the line. The new line should read: 6: getUserString := Yard;
6. Locate group 1 in the getUserData function. 7. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Units to the end of the list (in this example, units per inch of a yard: 1/36). The sequential number added here must correspond to the number added in the getUserString function. Put a semi-colon at the end of the line; do not enclose the name in single quotes. The new line should read: 6: getUserData := 1/36; 8. Change the value of item 0 to the new group number, which indicates the number of available values (in this example, 6).
506
9. Save the file. The next time the Simple Beam command is used, the new item is available in the Beam Properties dialog box. This change also affects the Shaft properties of the Shaft Analysis command. These values are also used by the Spring Calculator Units, but only items 1, 3, and 4 are applicable, so the new units (Yards) will not show up in this field.
Resources
VectorWorks includes many resources designed to facilitate project setup and use.
Object Libraries
Extensive object libraries are included with VectorWorks Architect, Landmark, Machine Design, and Spotlight. A subset of these resources are also available by default at the point of use (see VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources on page 513). See Accessing Existing Resources on page 128 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on inserting resources. The following table lists all object libraries and the product(s) to which they belong, using these product abbreviations: A = Architect, L = Landmark, M = Machine Design, S = Spotlight, D = Designer.
Object Library Hatches

Hatches_Paving Patterns.mcd Hatches_Plant.mcd
L
X X
M S
D
X X
Object Sampler
3rd Party Promotional www.caddetails.com X X X X X
Objects - Imperial
00_Arch_Elements.mcd 00_Detail_LG_Metal Framing.mcd 00_Entourage_Figures.mcd 00_Entourage_Vehicles.mcd 02_Sitework_Game Fields.mcd 02_Sitework_Irrigation Drip Emitters.mcd 02_Sitework_Irrigation Heads.mcd 02_Sitework_Irrigation Pipe.mcd 02_Sitework_Lighting.mcd 02_Sitework_Parking and Road.mcd 02_Sitework_Site Furnishings.mcd 02_Sitework_Trees.mcd 03_Concrete_Foundation.mcd 06_Millwork_Cabinets.mcd 08_Doors_Hinged.mcd X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
508
| Appendix B: Resources
Object Library
08_Doors_Overhead.mcd 08_Doors_Patio.mcd 08_Marvin Doors.mcd 08_Marvin Windows-Clad.mcd 08_Marvin Windows-Integrity.mcd 08_Marvin Windows-Wood.mcd 08_Storefronts & Win Walls.mcd 08_Window_Custom.mcd 10_Fireplaces.mcd 10_Fixtures.mcd 10_Handrails.mcd 10_Wall Accessories.mcd 11_Residential_Appliances.mcd 11_Restaurant_Equipment.mcd 12_Furniture_Desks.mcd 12_Furniture_Knoll.mcd 12_Furniture_Misc.mcd 12_Furniture_Systems.mcd 13_Fire_Suppression.mcd 14_Elevators & Escalators.mcd 14_Ramps.mcd 14_Stairs.mcd 15_HVAC_Diffusers.mcd 15_HVAC_Ductwork.mcd 15_HVAC_Equipment.mcd 15_Plumbing_Fittings.mcd 15_Plumbing_Fixtures.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Baths.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Bidets.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Faucets.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Lavatory Sinks.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Showers.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Sinks.mcd
A
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
M S
D
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Object Libraries | Object Library

15_Plumbing_Kohler-Toilets.mcd 15_Plumbing_Kohler-Whirlpools.mcd 15_Plumbing_Piping.mcd 16_Electrical_Accurate_Lamps.mcd 16_Electrical_Lighting.mcd 16_Electrical_Panels.mcd 16_Power Devices.mcd 16_Telecomm Devices.mcd
509
A
X X X X X X X X
M S
D
X X X X X X X X
Objects - Metric
02_Detail_LG_Metal Framing.mcd 16_Concrete_Foundation.mcd 24_Stairs.mcd 31_Storefronts & Win Walls.mcd 31.4_Window_Custom.mcd 31.4_Window_Jeld-Wen.mcd 31.4_Window_Standard.mcd 31.5_Doors_Hinged.mcd 31.5_Doors_Overhead.mcd 31.5_Doors_Sliding.mcd 34_Handrails.mcd 62_Electrical Panels.mcd 62_Power Devices.mcd 66_Lifts & Escalators.mcd 72.3_Furniture_Knoll.mcd 72_Furniture_Misc.mcd 72.3_Furniture_Systems.mcd 73_Kitchen Furniture.mcd 73.4_Residential_Appliances.mcd 74_Sanitary_Fittings.mcd 77_Wall Accessories.mcd 90.4_Sitework_Game Fields.mcd 90.4_Sitework_Parking and Road.mcd 90.4_Sitework_Trees.mcd X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
510
Object Library
90.6_Sitework_Lighting.mcd 90.7_Sitework_Site Furnishings.mcd 98_Entourage_Figures.mcd 98_Entourage_Vehicles.mcd U3_Ramps.mcd
A
X X X X X
M S
D
X X
X X X
X X X
Objects-Spotlight-Imperial
Accessories Imp.mcd Altman Imp.mcd ARRI Imp.mcd Chroma Q Imp.mcd City Theatrical Imp.mcd Clay Paky Imp.mcd Coemar Imp.mcd ESP Symbols I(3D Only).mcd ETC Imp.mcd Hardware Imp.mcd High End Imp.mcd Lighting Positions Imp.mcd LSD-Icon Imp.mcd Lycian Imp.mcd Martin Imp.mcd Mole-Richardson Imp.mcd Morpheus Imp.mcd NSI Colortran Imp.mcd Powerline Imp.mcd Robert Juliat Imp.mcd Scenic Elements.mcd Selecon Imp.mcd Steel Shapes Imp.mcd Strand Imp.mcd Strong Imp.mcd USITT 1990 Imp.mcd Varilite Imp.mcd X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Object Libraries | Object Library

Wybron Imp.mcd Xenotech Imp.mcd
511
M S
X X
D
X X
Objects-Spotlight-Metric
Accessories Metric.mcd Altman Metric.mcd ARRI Metric.mcd Chroma Q Metric.mcd City Theatrical Metric.mcd Clay Paky Metric.mcd Coemar Metric.mcd ESP Symbols M(3D Only).mcd ETC Metric.mcd Hardware Metric.mcd High End Metric.mcd Lighting Positions Metr.mcd LSD-Icon Metric.mcd Lycian Metric.mcd Martin Metric.mcd Mole-Richardson Metric.mcd Morpheus Metric.mcd NSI Colortran Metric.mcd Powerline Metric.mcd Robert Juliat Metric.mcd Scenic Elements.mcd Selecon Metric.mcd Steel Shapes Metric.mcd Strand Metric.mcd Strong Metric.mcd USITT 1990 Metric.mcd Varilite Metric.mcd Wybron Metric.mcd Xenotech Metric.mcd X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
512
Object Library Objects-xFrog
An asterisk (*) designates 3D image prop symbols; all others are 2D image symbols. Conifers front.mcd Conifers top.mcd Deciduous front.mcd Deciduous top.mcd IP Conifers A-Ch.mcd* IP Conifers Ci-La.mcd* IP Conifers La-Pi.mcd* IP Conifers Pi-Pi.mcd* IP Conifers Pi-S.mcd* IP Conifers T-Z.mcd* IP Deciduous A-Ac.mcd* IP Deciduous Ac-Ac.mcd* IP Deciduous Ac-Ae.mcd* IP Deciduous Af-Az.mcd* IP Deciduous Ba-Bz.mcd* IP Deciduous C-Ce.mcd* IP Deciduous Cf-E.mcd* IP Deciduous F-Gi.mcd* IP Deciduous Gi-I.mcd* IP Deciduous J-Li.mcd* IP Deciduous Li-Ma.mcd* IP Deciduous Ma-Pl.mcd* IP Deciduous Pl-Po.mcd* IP Deciduous Pq-Pr.mcd* IP Deciduous Pr-Pr.mcd* IP Deciduous Pr-Px.mcd* IP Deciduous Py-Qu.mcd* IP Deciduous Qu-R.mcd* IP Deciduous Sa-Sy.mcd* IP Deciduous Ta-Ti.mcd* IP Deciduous Ti-Z.mcd* X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
M S
VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources | Object Library

IP Others 1.mcd* IP Shrubs A-Pr.mcd* IP Shrubs Pr-Z.mcd* Others front.mcd Others top.mcd Shrubs front.mcd Shrubs top.mcd
513
L
X X X X X X X
M S
D
X X X X X X X
Textures-Gobo
Various gobo texture files X X
Wall Styles
Wall Styles Imperial.mcd Wall Styles Metric.mcd X X X X
VectorWorks Design Series Default Resources

A variety of default resources are available in VectorWorks Fundamentals and additional industry-specific resources are available in the VectorWorks Design Series. See VectorWorks Fundamentals Default Resources on page 123 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. Default resources are a subset of all available resources (see Object Libraries on page 507) and represent some of the more commonly-used resources. Default resources are available at the point of use throughout the drawing process, and are listed beneath the current files resources. This provides immediate access to resources needed while drawing, without having to first add them to the current file through the Resource Browser. The following table lists VectorWorks Design Series default resources and the product(s) to which they belong, using these product abbreviations: A = Architect, L = Landmark, M = Machine Design, S = Spotlight, D = Designer.
Default Resource
Architectural worksheets Door custom leaves Door hardware Gobo textures Hardscape hatches Human figure textures HVAC worksheets Irrigation worksheets Lighting instrument symbols Plant hatches
Location
Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules Libraries\Defaults\Door - Custom Leaves Libraries\Defaults\Door - Hardware Libraries\Defaults\Lighting Instrument - Gobos Libraries\Defaults\Hardscape - Hatches Libraries\Defaults\Human Figure - Textures Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules Libraries\Defaults\Lighting Instrument - Symbols Libraries\Defaults\Plants - Hatches
A
X X X
L
X X
M S
D
X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
514
Default Resource
Plant and plant mass symbols Plant lists Plant symbol 2D components Plant symbol 3D components Repetitive unit symbols Seating layout seat symbols Section markers Stairs Tile symbols Title blocks (ASME, custom, and standard) Toilet stall fixture symbols Wall styles Window shutters
Location
Libraries\Defaults\Plants Libraries\Defaults\Reports~Schedules Libraries\Defaults\Plants - 2D Symbols Libraries\Defaults\Plants - 3D Symbols Libraries\Defaults\Repetitive Unit Libraries\Defaults\Seating Layout - Symbols Libraries\Defaults\Section - Markers Libraries\Defaults\Stairs Libraries\Defaults\Tile - Symbols Libraries\Defaults\Drawing Border - Title Blocks Libraries\Defaults\Toilet Stall - Fixtures Libraries\Defaults\Walls Libraries\Defaults\Window - Custom Shutters
L
X X X X
M S
D
X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
Reserved Names
Product: Landmark
There are a number of words that are reserved for specific use within VectorWorks Landmark. These words should not be used to name objects or symbols. 2D Contours to 3D Polys DTM Mod Record Elev Analysis ID Label LineLength None Polyline ID Raise/Lower Record Saved Sheets Site-DTM-Modifier Stake # Station Worksheet Symbol List Sym VW_Land-Invisible BADSHEET678 Data Fit To Objects Irrigation Head Mod-Guidelines Place Plant Project Plant List Roadway (Curved) Setup Record Site-Improvement-Spec Stake Object Survey Data Symbol to Group Vegetation line Cut N Fill DTM Drawing Border Guides Landscape-Plant Mod-Site-Civil Plant Record Project Symlst Roadway (Straight) Sheet-Common Slope Analysis Stake Record Symbol List VL Task Manager ZVI Analysis
Keyboard Shortcuts |
515
Keyboard Shortcuts
The following shortcut keys are available in the Machine Design workspace.
Command
Simple Beam Analysis Simple Beam Spring Calculator Shaft Analysis Create Multiple Views Create 3D Object from 2D 3D Properties Import PartSpec
Macintosh
Command+Shift+Y Command+Shift+B Command+Shift+Q Command+Shift+U Command+Shift+M Command+Shift+L Command+Shift+3 Command+Shift+I
Windows
Ctrl+Shift+Y Ctrl+Shift+B Ctrl+Shift+Q Ctrl+Shift+U Ctrl+Shift+M Ctrl+Shift+L Ctrl+Shift+3 Ctrl+Shift+I
Menus and Tool Sets

VectorWorks Architect Workspace
Product: Architect
When a VectorWorks Design Series product is launched by double-clicking the application in Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh), the Default.sta template file opens with predefined settings which vary slightly between products. If only one Design Series product is installed, the default template file for that product is loaded. If multiple Design Series products are installed, the VectorWorks Architect Default.sta file is loaded. See Opening a New File on page 17 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on opening a different template. The Architect default template opens with the following predefined settings: File > Document Settings > Units are set to feet and inches on the General Display tab Grid lines are not visible Design layer scale is 1:48 Printer setup is set to landscape orientation A default wall style is selected (Int-2x4-Framing only) to 96 H The default Project Preference Set (Prefs_Def) is selected
Architect shares many of the same menus as VectorWorks while adding several menus and commands. The following table shows menu commands that are in the Architect workspace (Tools > Architect > Workspace) but not in the standard VectorWorks workspace:
516
Submenus and Commands Specific to the Architect Workspace File menu

Document Settings Document Setup Model Setup Create Standard Viewports Standard Naming Import Import 3DS (3D only) Import PDF Import SketchUp Export Export 3DS (3D only) Export KML Export PDF Export PDF (Batch) Issue Manager Batch Print
AEC menu
Fit Walls to Roof Space Planning Model to Floorplan Import Adjacency Matrix Create Spaces from Polys Create Spaces from Walls Create Walls from Spaces Export DOE-2 Dimension Exterior Walls Terrain Create Site Model Filter 3D Polygons Validate 3D Data Site Model Section Send to Surface Survey Input Import Survey File 2D Polys to 3D Contours Grid Method Entry Create Seating Layout Framing Simple Beam Calculator Create Joists from Poly Wall Framer Roof Framer Electrical Conduit Sizing Calc Conductor Sizing Calc Create Piping Runs
Tools menu
Task Manager Class and Layer Mapping Reports Create Panel Schedule Create Panel Riser Diag VA Records and Schedules VA Create Record VA Create Schedule Create Drawing List Create Rm Finish Legend Utilities Set Default Symbol Class Options VA Set Project Prefs Workspaces Architect
View menu
Rendering Sketch Sketch Options Stack Layers Create Section Viewport Show Show or Hide 3D
Text menu
Convert Old Notes to New Add Text to Database Reconcile Notes Redlines Show or Hide Redlines Pick up Redline Restore Redline Create Redline Status WS
Modify menu
Tile Convert Objects from Polyline
Window menu
Palettes Navigation
Model menu
Create Solar Animation
Menus and Tool Sets |
517
Architect-specific Tool Sets

Product: Architect
The Architect workspace contains the standard VectorWorks tool palettes and tool sets, including 2D and 3D tools. In addition, there are tool sets and tools unique to Architect. The Hole Pattern tool is documented only in the VectorWorks help system, in the Design Series volume. This tool is indicated with an asterisk ( * ) in the following table.
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Architect Workspace MEP tool set
Ceiling Grid tool Circuiting tool Comm Device Edit Circuiting tool HVAC Damper HVAC Diffuser HVAC Elbow Duct HVAC Flex Duct HVAC Outlet HVAC Splitter HVAC Straight Duct HVAC Transition HVAC Vertical Duct HVAC Vertical Elbow Incandescent Fixture Piping Piping Connection Piping Run Receptacle Switch
Building Shell tool set

Chain Extrude Column Component Join tool Door Drilled Footing Duplicate Symbol in Wall Escalator Mullion Pilaster Ramp Remove Wall Breaks tool Round Wall tool Simple Elevator Space Stair Wall tool Wall Join tool Window Window Wall (Curved, Straight)
Furn/Fixtures tool set

Base Cabinet Bath-Shower Ceiling Grid tool Clothes Rod Compartment Sink Counter Top Desk Fireplace Grab Bars Handrail (Curved, Straight) Seating Layout Shelving Unit Table and Chairs Toilet Stall Utility Cabinet Wall Cabinet Workstation Counter Workstation Overhead Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal
518
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Architect Workspace Detailing tool set
Bolt and Nut (inch and mm) Detail Cut Wood Framing Member tool *Hole Pattern J-Bolt Joist Linear Material Pipe Fitting Repetitive Unit
Site Planning tool set

Campanile Guardrail (Curved, Straight) Massing Model Parking Spaces Property Line tool Roadway (Curved, NURBS, Straight, Tee) Site Modifiers Stake Object
Dims/Notes tool set

Elevation Benchmark General Notes tool Grid Bubble ID Label tool Redline tool Revision Marker Slope Dimension Stipple
Space Planning tool set

Adjacency Matrix Adjacency Score Space Space Link tool Stacking Diagram
Visualization tool set

Human Figure tool Model View tool
VectorWorks Landmark Workspace

Product: Landmark
When a VectorWorks Design Series product is launched by double-clicking the application in Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh), the Default.sta template file opens with predefined settings which vary slightly between products. If only one Design Series product is installed, the default template file for that product is loaded. If multiple Design Series products are installed, the VectorWorks Architect Default.sta file is loaded. See Opening a New File on page 17 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on opening a different template. The Landmark default template opens with the following predefined settings: File > Document Settings > Units are set to feet and inches on the General Display tab Grid lines are not visible Design layer scale is 1:48 Printer setup is set to landscape orientation
Landmark shares many of the same menus as VectorWorks while adding several menus and commands. The following table shows menu commands that are in the Landmark workspace (Tools > Workspace > Landmark) but not the standard VectorWorks workspace:
Menus and Tool Sets | Submenus and Commands Specific to the Landmark Workspace File menu
Document Settings Document Setup Model Setup Create Standard Viewports Standard Naming Import Import Shapefile Import 3DS (3D only) Import PDF Import SketchUp Export Export Shapefile Export 3DS (3D only) Export KML Export PDF Export PDF (Batch) Issue Manager Batch Print
519
AEC menu
Create Polys from Walls Terrain Create Site Model Filter 3D Polygons Validate 3D Data Create Fence from Pad Site Model Section Send to Surface Zone of Visual Influence Survey Input Import Survey File 2D Polys to 3D Contours 3D Polys to 3D Loci Grid Method Entry Roads Station on Polyline Align Stakes Vertically Create Road from Stakes Plants Change Plant Grouping Plant Reference Data Plant Line Vegetation Line Simple Beam Calculator
Tools menu
Task Manager Class and Layer Mapping Utilities Set Default Symbol Class Workspaces Landmark
Text menu
Window menu
Palettes Navigation
View menu
Rendering Sketch Sketch Options Create Section Viewport Show Show or Hide 3D Show or Hide Plant Styles Show or Hide Site Modifiers Show or Hide Spray Pattern
Modify menu
Model menu
Landmark-specific Tool Sets

Product: Landmark
The Landmark workspace contains the standard VectorWorks tool palettes and tool sets, including 2D and 3D tools. In addition, there are tools unique to Landmark.
520
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Landmark Workspace Site Planning tool set
Campanile Drip Emitter Guardrail (Curved, Straight) Hardscape Irrigation Head Irrigation Line Landscape Wall (Straight, Arc, Bezier) Massing Model Parking Spaces Place Plant Property Line tool Roadway (Curved, NURBS, Straight, Tee) Site Modifiers Stake Object

Chain Extrude Column Component Join tool Door Duplicate Symbol in Wall Ramp Remove Wall Breaks tool Round Wall tool Stair Wall tool Wall Join tool Window

Base Cabinet Desk Handrail (Curved, Straight) Shelving Unit Table and Chairs Utility Cabinet Wall Cabinet Workstation Counter Workstation Overhead Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal
Dims/Notes tool set Detailing tool set

Detail Cut Wood J-Bolt Linear Material Repetitive Unit Elevation Benchmark General Notes tool Grid Bubble ID Label tool Redline tool Revision Marker Slope Dimension Stipple

VectorWorks Spotlight Workspace

Product: Spotlight
When a VectorWorks Design Series product is launched by double-clicking the application in Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh), the Default.sta template file opens with predefined settings which vary slightly between products. If only one Design Series product is installed, the default template file for that product is loaded. If multiple Design Series products are installed, the VectorWorks Architect Default.sta file is loaded. See Opening a New File on page 17 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on opening a different template. The Spotlight default template opens with the following predefined settings: File > Document Settings > Units are set to feet and inches on the General Display tab Grid lines are not visible Design layer scale is 1:48 Printer setup is set to landscape orientation
521
Spotlight shares many of the same menus as VectorWorks while adding several menus and commands. The following table shows menu commands that are in the Spotlight workspace (Tools > Workspace > Spotlight) but not the standard VectorWorks workspace:
Submenus and Commands Specific to the Spotlight Workspace File menu

Import Import Instrument Data Import 3DS (3D only) Import PDF Import SketchUp Export Export ASCII Patch Export Instrument Data Export 3DS (3D only) Export KML Export PDF Export PDF (Batch) Batch Print
Modify menu
Find and Modify Number Instruments Focus Instruments Assign Legend to Insts Replace Instrument Refresh Instruments Convert Convert to Instrument Convert to Accessory Convert to MultiCircuit Convert to Light Position Objects from Polyline Create Gobo Texture
Tools menu
Label Legend Manager Reports Generate Paperwork Key to Instrumentation Create Editable WS Options Toggle Auto Numbering Workspaces Spotlight
Text menu
Convert Old Notes to New Add Text to Database Reconcile Notes
Model menu
Manage Scenes Animate Scenes
View menu
Rendering Sketch Sketch Options Create Section Viewport
Redlines Show or Hide Redlines Pick up Redline Restore Redline Create Redline Status WS
AEC menu
Create Seating Layout Simple Beam Calculator
Window menu
Palettes Navigation
Spotlight-specific Tool Sets

Product: Spotlight
The Spotlight workspace contains the standard VectorWorks tool palettes and tool sets, including 2D and 3D tools. In addition, there are tool sets and tools unique to Spotlight. Tools in the Detailing and Hardware tool sets are documented only in the VectorWorks help system, in the Design Series volume. These tools are indicated with an asterisk ( * ) in the following table.
522
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Spotlight Workspace Spotlight tool set
Accessory Insertion tool Align and Distribute Items Curtain Object Curved Truss Focus Point tool Ganging tool Inst Insertion tool Light Position Obj Photo Grid Photometer Straight Truss

Campanile Chain Extrude Column Door Duplicate Symbol in Wall Parking Spaces Ramp Remove Wall Breaks tool Round Wall tool Stair Wall tool Wall Join tool
Hardware tool set

*Ball Bearing *Cap Screw (Inch, Metric) *Compression Spring 1 *Extension Spring - Front *Flanged Bearing - 2 Hole, 4 Hole *Hex Bolt (Inch, Metric) *J-Bolt *Lock Washer (Inch, Metric) *Machine Screw (Inch, Metric) *Nut (Inch, Metric) *Pillow Block *Plain Washer (Inch, Metric) *Roller Chain - Circular, Linear, Offset Link *Sprocket *Spur Gear *U-Bolt

Base Cabinet Desk Seating Layout Shelving Unit Table and Chairs Utility Cabinet Wall Cabinet Workstation Counter Workstation Overhead Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal
Window
Detailing tool set

*Hole - Drilled (2D, 3D) *Hole - Tapped (Inch, Metric)
Dims/Notes tool set

General Notes tool Redline tool Stipple

Human Figure tool
VectorWorks Machine Design Workspace

When a VectorWorks Design Series product is launched by double-clicking the application in Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh), the Default.sta template file opens with predefined settings which vary slightly between products. If only one Design Series product is installed, the default template file for that product is loaded. If multiple Design Series products are installed, the VectorWorks Architect Default.sta file is loaded. See Opening a New File on page 17 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on opening a different template. The Machine Design default template opens with the following predefined settings: File > Document Settings > Units are set to inches on the General Display tab

Decimal rounding is set to three decimal places Design layer scale is 1:1
523
Machine Design shares many of the same menus as VectorWorks while adding several menus and commands. The following table shows menu commands that are in the Machine Design workspace (Tools > Workspace > Machine Design) but not the standard VectorWorks workspace:
Submenus and Commands Specific to the Machine Design Workspace File menu
Document Settings Drawing Setup Import Import PartSpec Import 3DS (3D only) Import PDF Import SketchUp Export Export 3DS (3D only) Export KML Export PDF Export PDF (Batch) Batch Print
Machine Design menu

Create Multiple Views Spring Calculator Shaft Analysis Simple Beam Calculator Draw Cam Diagrams Simple Beam Simple Beam Analysis Conversion Factors Solution of Triangles Belt Length Calculator Chain Length Calculator Control Values for Keys Centroid 3D Properties Create 3D Object from 2D
Tools menu
Reports Create Bill of Materials Create Parts List Utilities Reset All Plug-Ins Workspaces Machine Design
Text menu
View menu
Rendering Sketch Sketch Options Create Section Viewport
Window menu
Palettes Navigation
Machine Design-specific Tool Sets

The Machine Design workspace contains the standard VectorWorks tool palettes and tool sets, including 2D and 3D tools. In addition, there are tool sets and tools unique to Machine Design. Many Machine Design tools are documented only in the VectorWorks help system, in the Design Series volume. These tools are indicated with an asterisk ( * ) in the following table.
524
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Machine Design Workspace Hardware Inch/Metric tool set
*Acorn Nut (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Clevis Pin (Inch, Metric) - 2D, 3D *Cotter Pin (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Dowel Pin (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Eye Bolt - 2D, 3D *Fastener tool (ASME Inch, ASME Metric) - places Lock Washer, Nut, Plain Washer, Screw and Nut, Set Screw, Shoulder Screw - 2D, 3D *J-Bolt - 2D, 3D *Knurled Thumb Nut (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Retaining Ring (ASME) - 2D, 3D *Rivet - Small, Large (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Swing Bolt - 2D, 3D *Swing Eye Bolt - 2D, 3D *T-Bolt - 2D, 3D *Taper Pin (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Thumb Screw (Inch) - 2D, 3D *U-Bolt - 2D, 3D *Wing Nut - Type A, B, C, D (Inch) 2D, 3D
Hardware ISO/DIN tool set

*Clevis Pin (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Fastener tool (ASME Inch, ASME Metric) - places Lock Washer, Nut, Plain Washer, Screw and Nut, Set Screw, Shoulder Screw - 2D, 3D *Hex Cap Nut (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Knurled Thumb Nut (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Parallel Pin (DIN) *Retaining Ring (DIN) *Retaining Washer (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Rivet (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Taper Pin (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Tubular Rivet (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Wing Nut (DIN) - 2D, 3D
Springs tool set

*Belleville Spring - 2D, 3D *Compression Spring 1, 2 - 2D, 3D *Conical Compression Spring 2D, 3D *Die Spring - 2D, 3D *Extension Spring - Front, End 2D *Extension Spring - 3D *Torsion Spring - Front, End - 2D *Torsion Spring - 3D
Machine Components tool set

*Bevel Gears (2D, 3D) *Hub - 3D *Key - 2D, 3D
Bearings tool set

*Ball Bearing - 2D, 3D *Bearing Lock Nut - 2D, 3D *Flanged Bearing - 2 Hole, 4 Hole 2D, 3D *Needle Bearing - 2D, 3D *Pillow Block - 2D, 3D
*Roller Chain - Circular, Linear, Offset Link - 2D, 3D *Shaft Segment - Straight, Tapered - 2D, 3D *Sprocket - 2D, 3D *Spur Gear - 2D, 3D *Threaded Shaft -2D, 3D *Woodruff Key - 2D, 3D *Worm - 2D, 3D *Worm Gear - 2D, 3D
Welding Symbols tool set

*Leader Line *Surface Texture Symbol *Welding Sym-Fillet, Flange, Groove, Misc, Slot-Plug (AWS, ISO)
*Roller Bearing - 2D, 3D *Tapered Roller Bearing - 2D, 3D *Thrust Bearing - 2D, 3D
Menus and Tool Sets | Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Machine Design Workspace Furn/Fixtures tool set
Base Cabinet Desk Shelving Unit Table and Chairs Utility Cabinet Wall Cabinet Workstation Counter Workstation Overhead Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal
525

Campanile Column Door Duplicate Symbol in Wall Parking Spaces Ramp Remove Wall Breaks tool Round Wall tool Stair Wall tool Wall Join tool
Dims/Notes tool set

*Center Line Marker Datum Feature Symbol Datum Target Symbol Detail Bubble Feature Control Frame General Notes tool Geom Dim and Tol Note *Material Note Redline tool Revision Bubble *Section Note Stipple
Detailing tool set

*Hole - Drilled (2D, 3D) *Hole - Tapped (Inch, Metric) *Hole Pattern *Keyway *Screw Threads *Shaft Break 2
Window

Human Figure tool
VectorWorks Designer
The VectorWorks Designer product is comprised of the combined feature set of Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Machine Design. Therefore, it is not necessary to document each individual feature as belonging to Designer. The Designer workspace contains a major subset of the entire combined feature set; the remaining items can be added to the workspace using the Workspace Editor (see Using the Workspace Editor on page 681 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide). VectorWorks Designer shares many of the same menus as VectorWorks while adding several menus and commands. The following table shows menu commands that are in the Designer workspace but not the standard VectorWorks workspace:
526
Submenus and Commands Specific to the Designer Workspace File menu

Document Settings Document Setup Model Setup Create Standard Viewports Standard Naming Import Import Shapefile Import 3DS (3D only) Import PDF Import Sketchup Export Export Shapefile Export 3DS (3D only) Export KML Export PDF Export PDF (Batch) Issue Manager Batch Print
Model menu
AEC menu (continued)

Framing Simple Beam Calculator Create Joists from Poly Wall Framer Roof Framer Electrical Conduit Sizing Calc Conductor Sizing Calc Create Piping Runs
AEC menu
Fit Walls to Roof Space Planning Model to Floorplan Import Adjacency Matrix Create Spaces from Polys Create Spaces from Walls Create Walls from Spaces Export DOE-2 Dimension Exterior Walls Terrain Create Site Model Filter 3D Polygons Validate 3D Data Create Fence from Pad Site Model Section Send to Surface Zone of Visual Influence Survey Input Import Survey File 2D Polys to 3D Contours 3d Polys to 3D Loci Grid Method Entry Roads Station on Polyline Align Stakes Vertically Create Road from Stakes Plants Change Plant Grouping Plant Reference Data Plant Line Vegetation Line Create Seating Layout
Tools menu
Task Manager Class and Layer Mapping Reports Create Panel Schedule Create Panel Riser Diag VA Records and Schedules VA Create Record VA Create Schedule Create Drawing List Create Rm Finish Legend Create Bill of Materials Create Parts List Utilities Set Default Symbol Class Options VA Set Project Prefs Workspaces Architect Designer Landmark Machine Design Spotlight
View menu
Rendering Sketch Sketch Options Create Section Viewport Show Show or Hide 3D Show or Hide Plant Styles Show or Hide Site Modifiers Show or Hide Spray Pattern
Modify menu
Menus and Tool Sets | Submenus and Commands Specific to the Designer Workspace Machine Design menu
Create Multiple Views Spring Calculator Shaft Analysis Draw Cam Diagrams Simple Beam Simple Beam Analysis Conversion Factors Solution of Triangles Belt Length Calculator Chain Length Calculator Control Values for Keys Centroid 3D Properties Create 3D Object from 2D
527
Text menu
Window menu
Palettes Navigation
Designer-specific Tool Sets

The Designer workspace contains the standard VectorWorks tool palettes and tool sets, including 2D and 3D tools. In addition, there are tool sets and tools unique to Designer. Many Designer tools are documented only in the VectorWorks help system, in the Design Series volume. These tools are indicated with an asterisk ( * ) in the following table.
528
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Designer Workspace Site Planning tool set
Campanile Drip Emitter Guardrail (Curved, Straight) Hardscape Irrigation Head Irrigation Line Landscape Wall (Straight, Arc, Bezier) Massing Model Parking Spaces Place Plant Property Line tool Roadway (Curved, NURBS, Straight, Tee) Site Modifiers Stake Object
Space Planning tool set

Adjacency Matrix Adjacency Score Space Space Link tool Stacking Diagram

Base Cabinet Bath-Shower Ceiling Grid tool Clothes Rod Compartment Sink Counter Top

Chain Extrude Column Component Join tool Door Drilled Footing Duplicate Symbol in Wall Escalator Mullion Pilaster Ramp Remove Wall Breaks tool Round Wall tool Simple Elevator Space Stair Wall tool Wall Join tool Window Window Wall (Curved, Straight)
Desk Fireplace Grab Bars Handrail (Curved, Straight) Seating Layout Shelving Unit Table and Chairs Toilet Stall Utility Cabinet Wall Cabinet Workstation Counter Workstation Overhead Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal
Hardware ISO/DIN tool set

*Clevis Pin (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Fastener tool (ASME Inch, ASME Metric) - places Lock Washer, Nut, Plain Washer, Screw and Nut, Set Screw, Shoulder Screw - 2D, 3D *Hex Cap Nut (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Knurled Thumb Nut (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Parallel Pin (DIN *Retaining Ring (DIN) *Retaining Washer (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Rivet (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Taper Pin (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Tubular Rivet (DIN) - 2D, 3D *Wing Nut (DIN) - 2D, 3D
Dims/Notes tool set

*Center Line Marker Elevation Benchmark General Notes tool Grid Bubble ID Label tool

*Material Note Redline tool Revision Marker *Section Note Slope Dimension Stipple
Menus and Tool Sets | Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Designer Workspace Detailing tool set
Bolt and Nut (inch and mm) Curtain Curved Truss Detail Cut Wood Framing Member tool *Hole - Drilled (2D, 3D) *Hole Pattern *Hole - Tapped (Inch, Metric) J-Bolt Joist *Keyway Linear Material Pipe Fitting Repetitive Unit *Screw Threads *Shaft Break Straight Truss
529
MEP tool set

Ceiling Grid tool Circuiting tool Comm Device Edit Circuiting tool HVAC Damper HVAC Diffuser HVAC Elbow Duct HVAC Flex Duct HVAC Outlet HVAC Splitter HVAC Straight Duct HVAC Transition HVAC Vertical Duct HVAC Vertical Elbow Incandescent Fixture Piping Piping Connection Piping Run
Hardware Inch/Metric tool set

*Acorn Nut (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Clevis Pin (Inch, Metric) - 2D, 3D *Cotter Pin (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Dowel Pin (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Eye Bolt - 2D, 3D *Fastener tool (ASME Inch, ASME Metric) - places Lock Washer, Nut, Plain Washer, Screw and Nut, Set Screw, Shoulder Screw - 2D, 3D *J-Bolt - 2D, 3D *Knurled Thumb Nut (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Retaining Ring (ASME) - 2D, 3D *Rivet - Small, Large (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Swing Bolt - 2D, 3D *Swing Eye Bolt - 2D, 3D *T-Bolt - 2D, 3D *Taper Pin (Inch) - 2D, 3D *Thumb Screw (Inch) - 2D, 3D *U-Bolt - 2D, 3D *Wing Nut - Type A, B, C, D (Inch) - 2D, 3D
Machine Components tool set

*Bevel Gears (2D, 3D) *Hub - 3D *Key - 2D, 3D *Roller Chain - Circular, Linear, Offset Link - 2D, 3D *Shaft Segment - Straight, Tapered 2D, 3D *Sprocket - 2D, 3D *Spur Gear - 2D, 3D *Threaded Shaft -2D, 3D *Woodruff Key - 2D, 3D *Worm - 2D, 3D *Worm Gear - 2D, 3D
Receptacle Switch
Bearings tool set

*Ball Bearing - 2D, 3D *Bearing Lock Nut - 2D, 3D *Flanged Bearing - 2 Hole, 4 Hole 2D, 3D *Needle Bearing - 2D, 3D *Pillow Block - 2D, 3D *Roller Bearing - 2D, 3D *Tapered Roller Bearing - 2D, 3D *Thrust Bearing - 2D, 3D
Springs tool set

*Belleville Spring - 2D, 3D *Compression Spring 1, 2 - 2D, 3D *Conical Compression Spring 2D, 3D *Die Spring - 2D, 3D *Extension Spring - Front, End 2D *Extension Spring - 3D *Torsion Spring - Front, End - 2D *Torsion Spring - 3D
530
Tool Sets and Tools Specific to the Designer Workspace Welding Symbols tool set
*Leader Line *Surface Texture Symbol *Welding Sym-Fillet, Flange, Groove, Misc, Slot-Plug (AWS, ISO)
Standards
Layer, Class, and Viewport Standards
VectorWorks includes many standards designed to facilitate project setup and use, including standards, preference sets, and auto-classing objects.
VectorWorks Architect and Landmark standards are centered around the concept of viewports on sheet layers. A project file contains a number of viewports; each viewport consists of a particular combination of visible layers and classes. This section provides information about the viewport, layer, and class standards in VectorWorks Architect and Landmark. Modifying these standards is not recommended, as it requires a large effort to manage and coordinate standards information.
Using the Layermap Worksheet

The creation of layers, classes, and viewports or views by the Setup commands (Model Setup, Create Standard Viewports, and Standard Naming) is controlled through the use of the worksheet LayerMap.G, in the VA Setup Data-Imperial.mcd or VA Setup Data-Metric.mcd file ([VectorWorks]\Plug-ins\Common\Data). This worksheet contains the predefined class, layer, attribute, and visibility information needed to generate a completely ready-to-use project file at any scale or level of complexity. The LayerMap.G worksheet applies to viewports on sheet layers created with the Create Standard Viewports command, or views created with the Create Corresponding View for Each Viewport option in the Create Standard Viewports dialog box. The settings in the LayerMap.G worksheet are automatically applied when a new file is opened and one of the Setup commands is selected. If the LayerMap.G worksheet contained in the VA Setup Data-Imperial.mcd or VA Setup Data-Metric.mcd file is edited, all sheets created on that machine will use the new standards. However, a copy of the LayerMap.G worksheet can be included in a file (by importing it) and edited there. These custom settings will supersede any automated settings for that file only. This is a convenient way of sharing standards between offices and users, without modifying the default standards on an individual machine. If a VectorWorks file contains a LayerMap.G worksheet, when either the Create Standard Viewports or Model Setup commands are selected, the Import LayerMap.G dialog box opens. Specify which worksheet to use.
532
| Appendix C: Standards
Description
Uses the LayerMap.G worksheet present in the file rather than the standard worksheet Uses the standard LayerMap.G worksheet (from the VA Setup Data.mcd file) rather than the imported (custom) worksheet Deletes the imported LayerMap.G worksheet from the file; this is recommended when using the standard worksheet
Parameter
Use the existing LayerMap.G Import and use the standard LayerMap.G Delete the LayerMap.G worksheet when finished
The Layermap Worksheet

The Layermap worksheet, located in the VA Setup Data-Imperial.mcd or VA Setup Data-Metric.mcd file, begins with a listing of project types in the first six rows (before the LayerMap.G row). These project types are used by the legacy command Create Standard Views, and are not used by the current setup commands. As such, they are no longer supported. Following the legacy project types are the names of the viewports or views used by the current setup commands. Below the name is the viewport/view type, which controls under which drawing type the viewport/view appears in the Create Standard Viewports dialog box. After the project types section is the layers section. This section of the Layermap worksheet controls the initialization and setup of layers in a specific viewport/view. Based on the information in this section, the Create Standard Viewports command generates a complete array of layers with the proper settings to correctly display a viewport or view.
Viewport/view names (the full name can be viewed in the formula bar)
Layers section
Layer visibility settings
The final section in the Layermap worksheet is the classes section. This section controls class setup and initialization for each viewport/view. As with the layer section, the Setup commands use the information to generate a full class setup configuration for each viewport/view in a project file.
Layer, Class, and Viewport Standards |
533
Class visibility settings
Class attribute settings
Viewport/View Types
Viewport/view types are found directly under the viewport/view names in the Layermap worksheet. The identifier directly beneath the viewport/view name indicates its drawing type. Viewport/view types control how the viewport/ view is generated, and are used by the Create Standard Viewports command to properly configure the project document. The viewport/view type identifier may take on one of the following values:
Identifier
1 L M N S
Drawing Type
Project plan view/viewport (one viewport/view only) Auxiliary viewport/view (create a user-specified number of viewports/views) Floor plan viewport/view (create one viewport/view for each floor in the project) Notation viewport/view (create a user-specified number of viewports/views) Site plan viewport/view (create one viewport/view)
The cover sheet is a notation viewport/view
534
Standard Layer Visibility in Viewports/Views

In the layers section of Layermap worksheet, layer names are listed down the left side of the worksheet in the first column. This listing represents the available layers that can be included in a viewport/view. Layer names that are used when generating multiple layers (e.g., for the floor viewports/views of a multi-floor building) are indicated by a pound sign (#) suffix. The visibility status of a specific layer is indicated by an alphabetic identifier located in the worksheet cell which cross-references the layer and the viewport/view in which it will be a component. The identifier can take on one of the following values:
Identifier
A V G I <no value>
Meaning
Active layer Visible Grayed Invisible Not created for viewport/view; set to invisible if existing
The Mod-Site-Arch layer is the active layer in the Site Plan (General) viewport/view
Design Layer Types in the Standards

The Layermap worksheet contains a specialized set of identifiers which control how model design layers are configured for a project file. These identifiers, which are located on the extreme right of the Layermap worksheet opposite the model layers, are used by the Setup commands to correctly configure a set of model layers for the project file. Model layer type identifiers can take on one of the following values:
Identifier
C F R S
Meaning
Layer w/ ceiling referenced information (one per floor) Foundation layer (one per project) Roof layer (one per project) Slab layer (one per floor)
Auto-classing Objects | Identifier

W <no value>
535
Meaning
Layer w/ floor referenced information (one per floor) Supplemental model layer
The Mod-Floor-# layers will be referenced to finish floor level
Class Visibility in the Standards

In the class section of the Layermap worksheet, class names available for inclusion in the viewports/views are listed down the left side of the worksheet in the first column. The visibility of a specific class is indicated by an alphabetic identifier, which is located in the worksheet cell which cross-references the layer and the viewport/view. The identifier can take on one of the following values:
Identifier
V G I <no value>
Meaning
Visible Grayed Invisible Not created for viewport/view; set to invisible if existing
An explanation of the specific uses of and applications for classes, including AIA layer name equivalents, is provided in PDF format (VA Sheet-Layer-Class stds.pdf) included with Architect and available in [VectorWorks]\Extras. Default class attributes, such as line style and pen color, are no longer controlled from the Layermap worksheet.
Auto-classing Objects
Certain plug-in objects and symbols have specific default classes, which coordinate with the Layermap worksheet class name standards. The plug-in objects listed here are automatically classed when inserted into a file set up to use auto-classing (when Enable Auto-classing is selected in the Standard Naming dialog box); they are set to default class when inserted if the file has not been set up.
536
Default Class
Millwork-Main Plumbing-Fixtures Structural-Columns DataComm-Devices Plumbing-Fixtures Site-DTM-Modifier Millwork-Main Furniture-Main Sills Door-Main Ceiling-Main Door-Spec Structural-Footings Irrigation-SprayPat Vert Trans-Main Fixtures-Main Fixtures-Main Site-Improvements Site-Improvements Fixtures-Main Fixtures-Main Landscape-Spec HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Diffusers HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment HVAC-Duct/Equipment
Object
Base Cabinet Bath-Shower Column Comm Device Compartment Sink Control Fence Counter Top Desk Door (2D) - threshold, sidelight sashes and glazing, swing, and leaf Door (2D) - other components Door in Wall Door ID Drilled Footing Drip Emitter Escalator Fireplace Grab Bars Guardrail (Curved) Guardrail (Straight) Handrail (Curved) Handrail (Straight) Hardscape (tag) HVAC Damper HVAC Diffuser HVAC Elbow Duct HVAC Flex Duct HVAC Outlet HVAC Splitter HVAC Straight Duct HVAC Transition HVAC Vertical Duct HVAC Vertical Elbow
Product
Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect Landmark Architect Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Landmark Architect Architect Architect Architect Architect Architect Architect Architect Architect Architect
Auto-classing Objects | Object

Irrigation Head Joist Mullion North Arrow Pad Parking Spaces Pilaster Plant (tag) Rafter Ramp Receptacle Reference Marker Revision Marker Roadway (Bezier) Roadway (Curved) Roadway (Straight) Roadway (Tee) Shelving Unit Simple Elevator Stair Switch Table and Chairs Texture Beds Toilet Stall Utility Cabinet Wall Cabinet Window (2D) - sills, sashes, and glazing Window (2D) - other components Window in Wall Window ID WindowWall (Curved) WindowWall (Straight) Workstation Counter
537
Default Class
Irrigation-SprayPat Structural-Framing Wall-Ext-Glazed Notes-Sheet Site-DTM-Modifier Site-Paving-Marking Structural-Columns Landscape-Spec Structural-Framing Vert Trans-Main Electrical-Devices Notes-Sheet Notes-Sheet Site-Paving Site-Paving Site-Paving Site-Paving Furniture-Main Vert Trans-Main Vert Trans-Main Electrical-Devices Furniture-Main Site-DTM-Modifier Fixtures-Main Millwork-Main Millwork-Main Sills Window-Main Ceiling-Main Window-Spec Wall-Ext-Glazed Wall-Ext-Glazed Furniture-Main
Product
Landmark Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect Landmark Architect Architect, Landmark Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Architect Architect, Landmark Landmark Architect Architect Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark Architect Architect Architect
538
Default Class
Furniture-Main Furniture-Main Furniture-Main
Object
Workstation Overhead Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal
Product
Architect Architect Architect
Class Standards
The Machine Design_Classes.sta file, located in the Standards folder, contains a number of pre-defined class standards. To use the pre-defined classes in a drawing: 1. Select Tools > Organization. The Organization dialog box opens. Click the Classes tab.
2. Click New. The New Class dialog box displays.
Project Preference Sets |
539
3. Click Create New Classes from Standard and choose Machine Design_Classes.sta from the list. 4. Select the desired classes and click OK. 5. Click OK in the Class Options dialog box to return to the drawing. Click Classes on the Data Display bar to list the classes that are available for use in the drawing.
Project Preference Sets

Product: Architect
The following table lists the files contained in a preference set folder, and the menu commands/tools/objects which use those preference files. A description of the information stored in each preference file is also provided.
Preference File
Door Hardware Library.txt Equipment Record.txt
Used By
Door tool, Door Hardware Library VA Create Record
Information Stored
Door hardware set name and record values Format and default values of record
540
Used By
VA Create Schedule, VA Records and Schedules VA Create Schedule VA Create Schedule, VA Records and Schedules Space tool, Room Finish Library VA Records and Schedules Utility file for VA to ensure that the folder has not been moved
Preference File
Equipment Schedule.txt Plumbing Fixt Record.txt Plumbing Schedule.txt Room Finish Library.txt VA2 Records and Schedules.txt VA_Project_Set.txt
Information Stored
Format of schedule Format and default values of record Format of schedule Room finish names and descriptions Format of records and schedules, and default values of records
Taken together, these files constitute a preference set; they must all be present in the folder of the current preference set. VectorWorks Architect ships with six predefined preference sets.
Name
VA Defaults Prefs_01 Prefs_02 Prefs_03 Prefs_04 Prefs_05
Location
[VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_Def [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_01 [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_02 [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_03 [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_04 [VectorWorks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_05
Making no changes to the preferences in the Defaults folder is strongly recommended. System administrators should make this folder read-only (Windows) or locked (Macintosh) to prevent users from making changes. The remaining preference set folders (01 05) can be customized. Unused folders can be removed, leaving only the one that will be used; new folders can be created. To create a new folder, simply copy one of the existing folders to a new location. Select Tools > Options > VA Set Project Prefs to specify the location of the new folder. The folder location is not restricted. In a workgroup environment, locating the folder on the network makes the same project preference set available to everyone.
United Kingdom Standards

Product: Architect
United Kingdom drawing standards are available for use with the existing Setup commands. In a new or existing drawing, select metric drawing units. Select File > Document Settings > Standard Naming, and select either the AEC(UK) or AEC(UK) Active Standard. To change the default standard to the United Kingdom standard when creating new classes, layers, and/or views, open [VectorWorks]\Plugs-Ins\Common\Data\VA Setup Data-Metric.mcd. From the Resource Browser, edit the Setup
United Kingdom Standards |
541
Record_10 worksheet. In cells B2 to B4, change 1-VWArch to 4-AEC(UK). Save and close the file. The new standards are now available by default whenever one of the Setup commands is run.
542
Drawing Techniques
This section provides examples of using VectorWorks Design Series products to accomplish specific tasks.
Importing Manual Sketches

Scanning and importing sketches, and then tracing them, is a useful technique that can serve as a bridge between manual drawing and CAD. To be useful, sketches for tracing should be drawn to scale and scanned at a relatively high resolution (300 dpi or above). To import sketches to be traced: 1. After scanning the sketch, save the file in one of VectorWorks image import formats (GIF, JPG, TIF, BMP). 2. Determine the scale of the original sketch. 3. In the Design Series product, open the file where the sketch will be imported. 4. Select Tools > Organization. The Organization dialog box opens. Click the Design Layers tab. 5. Select or create a layer for importing the sketch. Set the layer to the scale of the sketch. Make this layer the active layer. See Creating Layers on page 71 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide and Setting Design Layer Properties on page 72 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 6. Select File > Import > Import Image File to import the sketch. See Importing Files on page 485 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 7. Set the layer back to the desired drawing scale. 8. Move the image to locate it properly. The image can be rotated; however, the best results are obtained when the image is scanned as straight as possible. Consider locking the image once it is in the desired orientation. Any manual reshaping or scaling of the image distorts its scale. The following image shows a scanned sketch used as the basis for a guidelines layout. Draw guidelines in the Guides class. Prior to printing, turn this class off with the Modify > Guides > Hide Guides command. See Guides on page 44 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
544
| Appendix D: Drawing Techniques
Special Wall Joins

Product: Architect
VectorWorks has standard tools for joining walls so that they display correctly in both plan and three-dimensional views; however, certain wall joining conditions require some extra manipulation. Two examples of these special wall joins are shown in the diagram sequences that follow. See Joining Walls on page 460 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Veneer Join Outside Corner

Product: Architect
Drag veneer wall past intersecting wall
Join intersecting wall to veneer wall
Trim veneer wall at outside face of intersecting wall
Cap veneer wall
VectorWorks Machine Design |
545
Veneer Join Inside Corner

Product: Architect
Drag frame wall past veneer wall
Join veneer wall to frame wall
Trim frame wall at frame face of veneer wall
Cap frame wall
Draw small line to cap veneer
VectorWorks Machine Design

This section provides examples of using the Spring Calculator and Simple Beam commands to accomplish specific tasks.
Spring Calculator
The spring calculator can determine spring rates and unit stresses of round wire helical coil compression springs with known parameters. It can also be used to design a spring knowing the working values. This example is based on the following compression spring with closed and ground ends of music wire.
To calculate spring rate and unit stress: 1. Determine the required spring rate based on the deflection at a load divided by the difference in the working length and the free length. For this example, the desired spring rate equals 28.8 lb/in (36 lb/1.25 in = 28.8 lb/in). 2. Select Machine Design > Spring Calculator.
546

The Spring Calculator dialog box opens.
3. As shown in the above dialog box, select 1 - Outside Dia., Wire Dia., Solid Height from the Method list. After entering the known values, calculate a spring rate close to the desired value by trying several standard wire diameter values. Adjust the material in the Material list to fit the wire diameter used. Here, a wire diameter of .090 gives a spring rate of 26.1 lb/in. 4. In the Method list, select 2 - Mean Dia., Wire Dia., No. of Active Coils.
547
5. As shown in this dialog box, vary the wire diameter and number of active coils to get a spring rate close to the required spring rate. A wire diameter of .095 and 11 active coils gives a spring rate of 28.9 lb/in, but the solid height is 1.235, which is too high. A wire diameter of .090 and 9 active coils, however, gives a spring rate of 28.4 lb/in, and a solid height of .990, which is within acceptable limits. 6. Finally, check the stresses applied to the spring to verify that they are within acceptable limits. With a unit stress of 2522 (lb/sq in)/lb, multiply by 36 to obtain 90,792 lb/sq in. With a solid height of .990, the stress will be: (2.500-0.900)in x 28.4 lb/in x 2522 (lb/sq in)/lb = 114,600 lb/sq in 7. This value is below the safe working stress of 117,000 lb/sq in for this material and wire size.
Simple Beam
This example shows how VectorWorks Machine Design Simple Beam commands can be used to find the stresses on the horizontal elements of a certain machine part.
548

4 x 4 X .5 Steel Tubing
Data: Length = 48 Distance between supports = 36 Distributed load = 600lb/in Concentrated load = 2000lb Tubing = 4 x 4 x 1/2 Steel Section Modulus = 6.12in^3 Moment of Inertia = 12.26in^4 Modulus of Elasticity = 29E+6lbsq in
To calculate the stresses: 1. Select File > New. The Create Document dialog box opens. 2. Select Use document template, and choose the Simple Beam.sta template. 3. Click OK. 4. Select Machine Design > Simple Beam. The Simple Beam dialog box opens.
5. Click Set Beam Properties. The Beam Properties dialog box opens. 6. Specify the beam properties. In this example, enter the following values:
549
Configuration: Fixed - Pivot Length: 48 Units: Inches Distance Between Supports: 36 Section Modulus: 6.12 in^3 Moment of Inertia: 12.26 in^4 Modulus of Elasticity: 29E+6 lb/sq in Calculation Interval: 0.5 Deflection Units: Inches
To obtain the section modulus and moment of inertia of the tubing, select a tubing shape from the Resource Browser and place an instance of it on the drawing. Convert the tubing to a group and then use the Engineering Properties command to obtain the properties. For more information on the Engineering Properties command, see Engineering Properties on page 259 in the VectorWorks Fundamentals Users Guide. 7. Click OK to close the Beam Properties dialog box. 8. Click Define Loads on the Simple Beam dialog box. The Add/Remove/Change Loads dialog box opens. 9. Specify the load properties. In this example, use the following values:
Load Units: Pounds Load #1 Type: Uniformly Distributed Distance from Left End: 0 Load Value 1: 600 Width: 36 Load #2 Type: Concentrated Load Distance from the Left End: 48 Load Value 1: 2000
10. Click OK close the Add/Remove/Change Loads dialog box.
550
11. In the Simple Beam dialog box, click Calculate Reactions, and then click Calculate Stresses and Deflection, and then click OK. A simple beam diagram is created based on the information provided. See Simple Beam on page 291 for more information on what is depicted in the diagram.
Index
Numerics
2D Polys to 3D Contours command 126 3D detail, showing or hiding 414 3D loci creating 127 from 3D polygons 128 3D object, from 2D 277 3D Polys to 3D Loci command 128 3D Properties command 289 Awning, creating 428
B
Barn doors (lighting accessories) 245 Base Cabinet tool 102 Basement, adding to model setup 6 Batch Print command 389 Batter slope 144 Beams creating 58 See Simple beams Belt Length Calculator command 281 Bill of materials, creating 337 Bubble diagram, creating 38 Bubble notation objects detail bubbles 334 grid bubbles 332 revision bubbles 336 Building model 147
A
Accessories, lighting converting symbols into 246 finding and modifying 234 inserting 245 properties of 247 specifications for 498 static 245 Accessories, roof 52 Accessory Insertion tool 245 Active label legend 214 Add Text to Database command 379 Adjacency matrices changing the order of spaces 38 creating from existing spaces 37 creating worksheets for 35 importing from a spreadsheet 36 properties of 38 Adjacency Matrix tool 37 Adjacency Score tool 39 Align and Distribute Items tool 226 Align Stakes Vertically command 151 Angle, rise over run 331 Animate Scenes command 275 Animations solar 173 Architect default file settings 515 list of menus and commands 515 list of tools 517 new features vii Assign Legend to Insts command 233 Auto-classing objects 15, 535 Autolinking imported instrument data fields 466
C
Cabinets base 102 utility 104 wall 106 Calculator belt length 281 chain length 282 compression springs rate 280 conductor and conduit sizing 117 simple beam 296 sizing 117 spring 280 Callout tool 363, 370 Cam properties 299 Cam Design command 298 Cams animating movement of 302 creating diagrams 303 defining the profile 302 properties of 299 resetting to original position 303 template file 298 worksheets for 303
552
| Index
Conductor Sizing Calc command 117 Conduit Sizing Calc command 119 Container custom 216 label legend 216 two-fer 238 Control fence 143 automatic, sloping 144 batter slope 144 landscape wall 158 road 152 Control Values for Keys command 284 Conventions used in this guide x Conversion Factors command 288 Convert Old Notes to New command 385 Convert to Accessory command 246 Convert to Instrument command 223 Convert to Light Position command 211 Convert to MultiCircuit command 236 Counting Spotlight objects 236 Create 3D Object from 2D command 277 Create Bill of Materials command 337 Create Drawing List command 324 Create Editable Worksheet command 264 Create Fence from Pad command 144 Create Gobo Texture command 270 Create Joists from Poly command 64 Create Multiple Views command 278 Create Panel Riser Diag command 123 Create Panel Schedule command 121 Create Parts List command 338 Create Piping Runs command 120 Create Redline Status WS command 312 Create Rm Finish Legend command 354 Create Road from Stakes command 152 Create Seating Layout command 431 Create Section Viewport command 398 Create Site Model command 131 Create Solar Animation command 174 Create Spaces from Polys command 32 Create Spaces from Walls command 31 Create Standard Viewports command 7 Create Walls from Polygon command 435
Cats, attracting 182 Ceiling Grid tool 69 Center of mass, calculating 289 Centroid command 287 Chain Extrude tool 429 Chain Length Calculator command 283 Change Plant Grouping command 198 Circuiting tool 113 Circuits adding 115 customize symbol 486 editing 115 Class and Layer Mapping command 16 Class standards 538 Classes attributes 12 auto-classing 15, 535 automatically created 14, 209 changing 235 label legends 214 mapping 16 merging 17 standard naming 11 style 107 visibility 535 Color custom photometric threshold 499 cut list 262 frames (lighting accessory) 245 label legends 218 magic sheets 261 photometric grid 241 Column formatting 258 Communication circuits 113 customize symbols 484 objects 112 Component capped join mode 49 hiding 50 L join mode 48 T join mode 48 Component Join tool 47 Compression spring calculator See Spring calculator Compression, settings 276
Index |
Create Walls from Spaces command 29 Curtain Object tool 251 Curve label 150 Curved Truss tool 249 Custom RenderWorks command 273 Custom RenderWorks Options command 272 Customize circuit symbol 486 doors 92 electrical and communication symbols 484 ID label fields 478 ID symbol 478 path plug-in objects 488 photometric threshold colors 499 plant database display 192 plug-in sizes 500 project preference sets 360 sash 80 shaft analysis 502 simple beam 503 spring calculator 503 windows 92 Cut and fill calculations 138 Cutting plane 405 repetitive unit 321 Device type 225 Dimension class 339 Dimension Exterior Walls command 323 Dimensioning, geometric 338 Dimensions, wall 323 Display, 3D 414 Document Setup command 2 Door tool 81 Doors 81 converting an object into 358 creating symbols 92 DOE-2 export 463 hardware legend 352 hardware sets 90 ID labels for 89, 355 inserting 81 properties 81 schedule 90 Drainage analysis 133 Draw beam 226, 240 Draw Cam Diagrams command 304 Drawing border 313 at setup 3 custom, in Design Series 317 design series 313 drawing list 324 editing issue data 315 editing tolerance block 314 inserting with drawing setup 21 properties 313 Drawing Label tool 327 Drawing list index 324 Drawing Setup command 20 Drip Emitter tool 204 DTM See Site model DXF file 16, 462
553
D
Datum elevation 132 Datum Feature Symbol tool 341 Datum Target Symbol tool 342 Default Resources 513 Deleting door hardware set 90 inventory items 260 label legend 214 plant database entry 193 scene 275 Spotlight objects 236 Deselecting Spotlight objects 235 Designer list of menus and commands 525 list of tools 527 new features vii Detail Bubble tool 334 Detail drawings 318 Detail objects 319 linear material 319
E
Edit Circuiting tool 115 Editable worksheet 264 updating 265 Electrical circuits 113
554
| Index
Focus area, and magic sheets 261 Focus Instruments command 239 Focus point 226 creating 238 hiding 239 stage object as 247 Focus Point tool 238 Format schedule 122 Framing 56 floor 64 roof 56 wall 66 worksheets 67 Framing Member tool 57
customize symbols 484 ID labels for 355 objects 112 Elevation interior 322, 400 marker 111 of point 178 stake 151 Elevation Benchmark tool 330 Equipment. ID labels for 355 Error, ID labels 478 Export 3DS command 454 Export ASCII Patch command 465 Export DOE-2 command 461 Export Instrument Data command 463 Export KML command 457 Export PDF (Batch) command 446 Export PDF command 444 Export Shapefile command 460 Exporting 3ds format 454, 456 dimmer and channel 465 KML format 457 loading settings 464 PDF file 444 saving settings 464 shapefile format 459 to Lightwright 467 External ID field 466
G
Ganging tool 237 General notes adding 368 adding to database 372 editing 368 editing database 373 editing without database 369 placing with database 377 placing without database 366 search filter 373 General Notes tool 367, 377 Generate Paperwork command 256 Geneva Mechanism command 304 Geneva mechanisms animating movement of 306 properties of 305 resetting to original position 306 template file 304 Geom Dim and Tol Note 343 Geometric characteristic 340 Gobo projector definition 269 inserting 269 introduction 269 properties 270 requirements 272 showing 272 Gobo textures creating 270 editing 271
F
Feature Control Frame tool 339 Fence control 143 create from pad 144 Figure, inserting 437 Fill, adding 414 Filter 3D Polygons command 130 Find and Modify command 234 Fit Walls to Roof command 51 Floorplans, creating from models 32 Floors creating automatically (Model Setup command) 4 framing 64 Flow arrows 133
Index |
libraries 269 projection 273 Grading area 145 Grid Bubble tool 333 Grid Method Entry command 128 Grid, source data 128 Importing 3ds format 452, 456 adjacency matrix 35 DXF 16, 462 from Lightwright 470 inventory report 260 label legends 219 loading mapping 466 manual sketches 543 PartSpec files 471 PDF file 443 saving mapping 466 schedule format 259 shapefile format 458 SketchUp format 449 Inst Insertion tool 221 Instrumentation, key to 255 Interior elevation 322 Inventory 255 adding items 259 deleting items 260 importing from file 260 reports 259 Irrigation adding 204 object libraries 204 plan 207 spray pattern 207 Irrigation Head tool 205 Irrigation Line tool 206 Issue data, editing 315 Issue Manager command 386
555
H
Hanging cards 266 Hardscape settings, saving 165 Hardscape tool 160 Hardware, door 90 Hatch, sketch style 425 Header, paperwork 262 Help, online xi Hiding plant polygon 188, 197 Hip and valley rafters, creating 62 Home run marker 115 Hull 133 Human Figure tool 437 HVAC objects 111 reports 112
I
ID Label tool 207, 355 ID labels applying 355 define fields 478 editing 358 for doors 89 for wall styles 358 for windows 79 leader options 476 overview 475 symbols 359 Illumination, measuring 240 Import 3DS command 453 Import Adjacency Matrix command 36 Import Instrument Data command 465 Import PartSpec command 471 Import PDF command 443 Import Shapefile command 458 Import Survey File command 125
J
Joists 64
K
Key to Instrumentation command 255 Keyboard shortcuts 515 Keynote legend editing without database 364 placing with database 375 placing without database 363 Keynotes editing without database 364 placing without database 363
556
| Index
visibility 534 Legend, door hardware 352 Light beams drawing representation of 240 from gobo projections 269 Light info record 497 Light plot basics 209 structure 209 updating 265 Light Position Obj tool 211 Light settings restoring 275 saving 274 Lighting Instruments creating 222 Lighting instruments 2D characteristics 496 3D characteristics 496 aligning and distributing 227 assign focus point 239 auto-numbering 213, 226 changing labels 233 converting symbols into 495 converting symbols into accessories for 246 editing properties 228 exporting data 464 finding and modifying 234 focusing 238 ganging 237 importing data 465 insert as plug-in object 223 inserting 221 inserting accessories 245 label legends 214 layers and classes 221 light beam 240 multi-circuit 236 numbering 235 numbering manually 232 properties 224, 228 refreshing data 234 replacing 231 replacing with active symbol 226 specifications for 495 two-fer 237 Lighting positions auto-numbering 213
L
Label drawing 327 Label Legend Manager command 214 Label legends 214 assigning new 235 classes 214 color of labels 218 container 216 creating 215 deleting 214 editing 216 editing layout 217 format 217 importing 219 inserting instruments 222 modifying for instruments 233 non-rotating labels 216 refreshing labels 226 renaming 217 repositioning labels 218 right-reading labels 215 setting as active 214 stacking order 218 Landmark default file settings 518 list of menus and commands 518 list of tools 519 new features vii Landscape wall 157 properties, arc 158 properties, Bezier 159 properties, straight 157 resolution 160 Landscape Wall Arc tool 158 Landscape Wall Bezier tool 159 Landscape Wall tool 157 Layers creating automatically (Model Setup command) 4 creating model views of 412 design 1 magic sheets 263 mapping 16 merging 17 model 2 sheet 1 site model 2 stacking 411 standard naming 11
Index |
creating 211 finding and modifying 234 hanging cards 266 inserting 211 properties 212 refreshing data 234 summary label 213 using trusses as 247 z-value 212 Lighting scene 274 Lightwright 463, 466, 467 exporting to Spotlight 470 importing from Spotlight 468 Linear Material tool 319 Live sections 397 Locus at centroid 287 road 149 show/hide 166 Modify Spotlight objects 234 Multi-circuit aligning 237 instrument insertion 236 instrument specifications 498 numbering 213, 233 undo conversion 237
557
N
Names, reserved 514 Naming standards 10 Navigation palette 393 New features of Design Series vii North Arrow tool 326 Notes manager 362 add text to database 379 converting from previous versions 384 database format 481 editing database callout 374 general notes with database 377 general notes without database 366 keynote legend without database 363 keynotes without database 363 networked database 384 overview 362 placing database callouts 370 placing database keynote legend 375 reconciling notes 380 saving preferences 374 with database 369 without database 363 Number Instruments command 232 Numbering automatically 213, 226 inserting instruments 222 lighting positions 213 manually 232 multi-circuit instruments 213, 233 style 213
M
Machine Design default file settings 522 list of menus and commands 522 list of tools 523 new features vii Machine Design class standards 538 Magic sheets 261 color 261 focus area 261 generating 263 layer 263 Manage Scenes command 274 Map, as source data 128 Mapping classes and layers 16 naming standards 10 Massing Model tool 147 Migrating from previous versions 482 Model Setup command 4 Model to Floorplan command 32 Model View tool 412 Modifiers, site model 141 control fence 143 grader 145 hardscape 160 landscape wall 157 massing model 147 pad 141
O
Object libraries 16, 507 irrigation 204 plant list 203
558
| Index
properties 243 Photometer tool 243 Photometric grid custom threshold colors 499 inserting 240 properties 242 threshold colors 241 Pick up Redline command 311 Piping runs 120 creating 120 properties 120 Place Plant tool 193 Plant copying definition 182 defining 181 editing definition 188 placing 193 workgroup referencing with DTM 188 Plant cluster, hiding polygon 188 Plant Line command 200 Plant Reference Data command 189 Plant reference database adding to 193 displaying 192 editing 193 opening 189 plant database 189 removing entry 193 search 192 Plants adding a plant list worksheet 203 adding textures to symbols 492 assigning record information 494 changing display of plant cluster polygon 197 converting clusters to single plants (Spotlight) 198 converting to a cluster (Spotlight) 199 custom symbols 491 enabling 3D display 198 properties of 196 replacing 197 showing or hiding styles 203 using a catalog from version 11 492 Plates, creating 59 Plug-ins, creating custom 488 Plug-ins, resetting all 483 Plumbing ID labels for 355
Objects auto-classing 15, 535 converting from previous versions 482 counting 236 creating 3D from 2D 277 creating custom path plug-in 488 creating from polyline 434 deleting 236 deselecting 235 fill 414 notation 326 plug-in size 500 plumbing and piping 111 reserved names 514 selecting 235 send to surface 139 Objects from Polyline command 434
P
Page properties 262 Panel create schedule 121 creating 112 customize symbol 484 riser diagrams 123 Paperwork color cut list 262 header 262 inventory report 259 magic sheets 261 page properties 262 reviewing 263 schedules 257 show information 262 Partition ID labels 360 Parts list, creating 338 PartSpec, importing 471 Patch information, exporting 465 PDF batch export 446 export 444 import 443 Person, inserting 437 PhotoGrid tool 241 Photometer custom threshold colors 499 inserting 243
Index |
objects 111 Polygons converting to loci 128 filtering extra vertices 130 source data 126 tiled fill 418 Polylines creating objects from 434 creating spaces 32 road 149 Position summary 213 Preference sets 360, 539 Preferences ID label 356 walls 41 Previous versions, notes management 384 Print area 262 Printing batch 389 label legends 214 refreshing data before 234 saving a print set 391 scale bar 332 sheets and views 389 units 262 Programming studies 34 Project preference set 360, 539 adding to list 362 creating new 361 room finish library 26 selecting 360 Properties base cabinet 102 curtains 252 door 81 drip emitter 204 hardscape object 164 irrigation head 205 irrigation line 206 landscape wall (arc) 158 landscape wall (Bezier) 159 landscape wall (straight) 157 lighting instrument 224 lighting position 212 photometer 243 photometric grid 242 road 153 roadway 155 scale bar 332 section line 405 section views 402 stairs 100 stake 178 stipple object 415 truss (curved) 249 truss (straight) 248 two-fer 238 utility cabinet 104 wall cabinet 106 window 71 Property line creating 167 editing 170 Property Line tool 167 Purlins, creating 60
559
Q
QuickTime 174 QuickTime movie 274, 275 QuickTime settings 276
R
Radii of gyration, calculating 289 Rafters, creating 57 Recalculating bill of materials 337 Recalculating parts list 338 Reconcile Notes command 380 Record accessory 498 adding definitions 348 circuiting 113, 485 creating 352 custom ID symbols 478 editing definitions 345 editing for wall styles 358 editing with ID label tool 355, 358 panel 484 removing definitions 348 TagSchema 475 wall 42 Redline Auditor command 312 Redline tool 307
560
| Index
adding accessories 52 framing 56 Room finish 27 creating and editing 26 legend 354 Room Name Simple tool 24
Redlines 307 attach sketch 309 pick up 311 restore 312 show or hide 311 worksheet 312 Redraw, speeding 130, 160, 414 Reference Marker tool 329 Refresh instruments & light positions 234 labels 226 Refresh Instruments command 226 Rendering gobo projection 272 light beam 240 scenes 275 Rendering time 248, 253, 437 RenderWorks 172, 174, 269 Repetitive Unit tool 321 Replace Instrument command 231 Replacing lighting instruments 231 objects 235 with active symbol 226 Report, inventory 259 Reset All Plug-ins command 483 Resolution, landscape wall 160 Resources default 513 VectorWorks Design Series 513 Restore Redline command 312 Revision Bubble tool 336 Revision management 307 Revision Marker tool 330 Ridges, creating 61 Rise over run 331 Road centerline 149 creating 149 properties 153 sections 152 station points 150 Roadway (NURBS) tool 155 Roof Framer command 56 Roofs
S
Sash, custom 80 Saving export settings 464 import mapping 466 light settings 274 Scale bar tool 332 Scanning 543 Scenes animating 275 editing 274 managing 274 removing 275 restoring 275 saving settings 274 transitions 274 Schedule adding definitions 351 creating 352 door 90 editing definitions 349 format 122 ID label tool 355 panel 121 removing definitions 351 room finish 28 seating count 432 setup 257 window 79 Searching, plant database 192 Seating layout 431 reshaping 433 Section line adding to other layers 408 drawing 398 instances 408 modifying 407 navigating to 408 properties 405 reshaping 409
Index |
unlinked, creating section viewport from 411 Section views advanced properties 400 creating 398 define attributes 401 define extent 400 modifying 407 overview 397 viewport parameters 402 viewport status 404 Section-Elevation Marker tool 405 Selecting Spotlight objects 234 Send to Surface command 139 Set Default Symbol Class command 15 Set Sun Position command 173 Setup commands 2 Shadow analysis 172 Shaft analysis customize 502 properties 286 Shaft Analysis command 286 Sheets display information 329 types 533 Shortcuts 515 Show or Hide 3D command 414 Show or Hide Plant Styles command 203 Show or Hide Redlines command 311 Show or Hide Site Modifiers command 166 Show or Hide Spray Pattern command 207 Simple beam customize 503, 504 example 547 Simple Beam Analysis command 295 Simple Beam Calculator command 296 Simple Beam command 291 Simple beams analyzing 295 calculator for 296 creating diagrams 292 properties of 292 template file 291 worksheets for 294 Site model area 138 color 134 creating 131 creating source data 125 cut and fill 138, 145 drainage 133 elevation analysis 136 elevation of point 178 errors 129, 166 filter 3D polygons 130 graphic properties 134 map as source data 128 modifiers 141 overview 125 properties 138 road 154 sectional view 175 sending objects to surface 139 settings 131 site analysis 136 snapshot 139 texture 138 updating 138 validating source data 129 zone of visual influence 171 Site model modifier control fence 143 grader 146 hardscape 160 massing model 147 pad 141 road 149 texture bed 147 Site Model Section command 175 Site Modifier tool 141, 146 Size of objects 500 Sizing calculators 117 Sketch command 422 Sketch Options command 421 Sketch rendering 419 Sketch style custom 424 default 420 deleting 424 editing 422 hatch 425 hidden line 427 new 424 object 424
561
562
| Index
overview 92 properties 100 Stake creating a road from 152 determining a points elevation with 178 importing from an external file 126 placing along a road polyline 150 properties 179 setting elevation 151 Stake Object tool 178 Standard Naming command 10 Standards 1, 531 custom 12 Setup Assistant 531 Station on Polyline command 150 Station point, placing along a road polyline 150 Stipple settings, saving 418 Stipple tool 415 Straight Truss tool 248 Style classes 107 Sun study 173 Surface area, calculating 289 Symbol convert to instrument 222 datum feature 341 datum target 342 geometric characteristic 340 ID label 359 light info record 497 lighting instrument 495 multi-circuit instrument 498 reserved names 514 Symbols converting into lighting accessories 246
override 424 parameters 422 viewport 426 Sketches, importing 543 Slope Dimension tool 331 Slope, batter 144 Solar animations 173 Solution of Triangles command 288 Source data creating 125 errors 129 importing 125 validating 129 Space Link tool 38 Space planning 23 Space tool 23 Spaces applying attributes 24 creating 23 creating from polylines 32 creating from walls 30 creating walls 29 linking 38 properties 24 room finish schedule 24 Specifications multi-circuit instruments 498 truss 250 Split level house setup 6 Spotlight default file settings 520 list of menus and commands 520 list of tools 521 new features vii Spray pattern, show/hide 208 Spring calculator customizing materials list 503 example of using 545 properties of 280 Spring Calculator command 280 Stack Layers command 411 Stacking Diagram tool 39 Stair tool 93 Stairs editing 100 inserting 93
T
TagSchema record 475 Task Manager command 17 Task Manager, editing database 18 Template cam 298 Geneva mechanism 304 lighting positions 210 Templates simple beam 291 Text, add to database 379
Index |
Texture bed 147 Theater seats 431 style 261 template 210 Thomas Register, importing 471 Tile command 418 Title block 385 Toggle Auto-numbering command 226 Tolerance block 314 editing 314 Tolerancing 338 Top hats (lighting accessories) 245 Transparency, gobo texture 271 Triangle, solution 288 Triangulated Irregular Network 125 Trimmers, creating 61 Trusses configuration requirements for 250 curved 249 rotating curved 250 straight 247 using as lighting positions 247 Two-fers, creating 237 Viewports applying sketch styles to 426 creating detail drawings with 318 creating multiple views with 278 creating standard 7 setting up standard naming for 11 Views align layer 411 creating automatically at setup 10 creating model 412 editing 396 standard naming 11 Visibility site modifiers 166 spray pattern 207 Volume, calculating 289 VWArch standards 531
563
W
Wall Cabinet tool 106 Wall Framer command 66 Wall styles applying 44 creating 43 editing 43 editing ID labels and records 358 replacing 45 Walls converting styled to un-styled 45 creating from spaces 29 creating spaces 30 creating, in Architect 41 DOE-2 export 463 exterior dimensions 323 framing 66 hiding components 50 inserting doors 81 inserting windows 71 joining components 47 landscape 157 moving connected 46 preferences 41 special joins 544 wall styles 41 Window tool 71 Windows 71 converting an object into 358
U
Unique ID field 464, 466 Units, and printing 263 Update Plug-in Objects command 482 User defined info shaft analysis parameters 502 simple beam parameters 503 spring calculator parameters 502 Utility cabinets 104
V
VA Create Record command 352 VA Create Schedule command 352 VA Records and Schedules command 345 VA Set Project Prefs command 360 VA Setup Data file 531 Validate 3D Data command 130 Vegetation Line command 202 Vertex, removing 130
564
| Index
creating custom sash 80 creating symbols 92 DOE-2 Export 463 ID labels for 79, 355 inserting 71 properties 71 schedule 79 Workflow 23 Workgroup referencing, preferences 540 Worksheets adjacency matrix 35 beam and load data 294 beam calculation results 294 bill of materials 337 cam data 303 diffuser report 112 drawing list 324 editable 264 editing standard naming 13 format schedule 349 HVAC 112 importing schedule format 259 irrigation materials schedule 207 layermap 532 parts list 338 plant list 203 redline 312 roof face area 56 schedule 353 seating layout 432 simple beam 294 station 150 wall areas 43 wall framer 67 wall styles 43
Z
Zone of Visual Influence command 171 Z-value, and lighting positions 212

Design Series 12 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Series 12 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Series 12 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1985-2006 Nemetschek N.A., Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. Nemetschek N.A., Inc.

VectorWorks Design Series Users Guide

VectorWorks License Agreement

1.3 License Agreement (Series A)

Registration and Updates

1.5 Educational Site License Agreement (Series C)

1.4 License Agreement (Series B)

5. Student and Educational Sales

6. Warranties and Disclaimer of Warranty

2 Space Planning and Programming........................................................................................................23

3 Creating Architectural Drawings............................................................................................................41

4 Creating Architectural Elements............................................................................................................71

5 Adding MEP Information to the Design...............................................................................................111

7 Modifying the Site Model ......................................................................................................................141

8 Planting and Irrigation Design .............................................................................................................181

9 Lighting Positions and Labels .............................................................................................................209

10 Creating and Editing Instruments......................................................................................................221

11 Adding Accessories and Objects ......................................................................................................245

12 Paperwork and Schedules..................................................................................................................255

13 Visualizing the Lighting Design .........................................................................................................269

14 Drafting and Design Aids ...................................................................................................................277

16 Managing Project Information............................................................................................................345

17 Managing Drawing Graphics..............................................................................................................393

18 Importing and Exporting Files ...........................................................................................................443

A Advanced Topics ..................................................................................................................................475

Architect Architect, Landmark Architect, Landmark

Inserting Windows on page 71 and Inserting Doors on page 81

Solar animation movie location

Creating Solar Animations on page 173

Plant pull-down menu in Mode bar Label Legend Manager improvements

Lighting instrument improvements Ganging tool change Drawing Border improvements

Cast shadows from removed objects in section viewports

Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 400

New Features | Feature

Scaling objects during 3ds import/export

Importing and Exporting 3ds Format on page 452

New Import PDF command

Importing PDF Files on page 443

Export PDF and Export PDF (Batch) command

SketchUp import improvement

Importing a SketchUp File on page 449

Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine Design Architect

New Export KML command

Exporting in KML Format on page 457

Shapefile import improvements

Importing a Shapefile on page 458

New object libraries

New object libraries Renamed object libraries

Spotlight Architect Spotlight, Machine Design

Learning VectorWorks | Convention

VectorWorks Help System

Layers, Classes, and Viewports

Layer and Viewport Characteristics

| Chapter 1: Using Standards

The Setup Commands

The Setup Commands |

Drawing Area Drawing Grids Drawing Border/Title Block

Drawing Border Title Block

| Chapter 1: Using Standards

The Setup Commands |